CEN/TC 250

Date: 2020-04

prEN 1998-1-2:2020
CEN/TC 250

Secretariat: IPQ

Eurocode 8: — Design of structures for earthquake resistance — Part 1-2:

Rules for new buildings

ICS:

Descriptors:

SC8.T2 FINAL DOCUMENT

30th April 2020

STD Version 2.9a

prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Contents
Page

1 SCOPE................................................................................................................................................................ 16
1.1 Scope of EN1998 ........................................................................................................................................... 16
1.2 Scope of EN 1998-1-2 .................................................................................................................................. 16
2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES ......................................................................................................................... 16
2.1 Reference to other Eurocodes ................................................................................................................. 16
2.2 Reference to other Codes and Standards............................................................................................. 17
2.3 Assumptions................................................................................................................................................... 18
3 TERMS, DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS .................................................................................................... 19
3.1 Terms and definitions ................................................................................................................................ 19
3.1.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 19
3.1.2 19
3.1.3 19
3.1.4 19
3.1.5 19
3.1.6 19
3.1.7 19
3.1.8 19
3.1.9 20
3.1.10 20
3.1.11 20
3.1.12 20
3.1.13 20
3.1.14 20
3.1.15 20
3.1.16 20
3.1.17 20
3.1.18 20
3.1.19 21
3.1.20 21
3.1.21 21
3.1.22 21
3.1.23 21
3.1.24 21
3.1.25 21
3.1.26 21
3.1.27 21
3.1.28 21
3.1.29 21
3.1.30 21
3.1.31 22
3.1.32 22
3.2 Symbols and abbreviations ...................................................................................................................... 22
3.2.1 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................ 22
3.2.2 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................................ 42
3.3 S.I. Units ........................................................................................................................................................... 43

2
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

4 BASIS OF DESIGN ........................................................................................................................................... 44

4.1 Building classification ................................................................................................................................. 44
4.2 Seismic actions .............................................................................................................................................. 44
4.3 Compliance criteria...................................................................................................................................... 45
4.4 Characteristics of earthquake resistant buildings ........................................................................... 45
4.4.1 Conceptual design ........................................................................................................................................ 45
4.4.2 Primary and secondary seismic members .......................................................................................... 45
4.4.3 Torsionally flexible buildings .................................................................................................................. 46
4.4.4 Structural regularity.................................................................................................................................... 47
5 MODELLING AND STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS .......................................................................................... 48
5.1 Modelling ......................................................................................................................................................... 48
5.1.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 48
5.1.2 Masses ............................................................................................................................................................... 48
5.1.3 Stiffness ............................................................................................................................................................ 48
5.2 Minimum design eccentricity in buildings .......................................................................................... 49
5.3 Methods of analysis...................................................................................................................................... 50
5.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 50
5.3.2 Behaviour factors ......................................................................................................................................... 50
5.3.3 Lateral forces method of analysis ........................................................................................................... 50
5.3.4 Response spectrum analysis .................................................................................................................... 51
5.3.5 Non-linear static analysis .......................................................................................................................... 51
5.3.6 Response-history analysis ......................................................................................................................... 54
6 VERIFICATION OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS TO LIMIT STATES .................................................. 55
6.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 55
6.2 Verification of Significant Damage (SD) limit state .......................................................................... 55
6.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 55
6.2.2 Equilibrium condition................................................................................................................................. 55
6.2.3 Resistance conditions ................................................................................................................................. 56
6.2.4 Control of second order effects................................................................................................................ 56
6.2.5 Limitation of interstorey drift.................................................................................................................. 57
6.2.6 Capacity design in DC2 ................................................................................................................................ 57
6.2.7 Capacity design in DC3 ................................................................................................................................ 58
6.2.8 Resistance of horizontal diaphragms and bracings ......................................................................... 59
6.2.9 Resistance of foundations.......................................................................................................................... 59
6.2.10 Seismic joint condition ............................................................................................................................... 59
6.2.11 Design of transfer zones to DC2 and DC3 ............................................................................................. 60
6.2.12 Verification of underground basements .............................................................................................. 61
6.3 Verification to other limit states ............................................................................................................. 61
6.3.1 Verification to Near Collapse (NC) limit state .................................................................................... 61
6.3.2 Verification of Damage Limitation (DL) limit state .......................................................................... 61
6.3.3 Verification of Operational (OP) limit state ........................................................................................ 62
7 ANCILLARY ELEMENTS ............................................................................................................................... 63
7.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 63
7.2 Verification at Significant Damage (SD) limit state .......................................................................... 63
7.2.1 Seismic action effects .................................................................................................................................. 63
7.2.2 Performance factors .................................................................................................................................... 64
7.2.3 Behaviour factors of ancillary elements .............................................................................................. 65
7.3 Verification at Near Collapse (NC) limit state..................................................................................... 65
7.4 Masonry infilled frames ............................................................................................................................. 65
7.4.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................................................. 65
7.4.2 Basis of design with interacting infills in DC1, DC2 and DC3 ........................................................ 66

3
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

7.4.3 Interacting infills in DC1, DC2 and DC3 ................................................................................................ 66

7.4.4 Basis of design for non-interacting infills ........................................................................................... 72
7.4.5 Design provisions for non-interacting infills ..................................................................................... 72
7.5 Structures with claddings ......................................................................................................................... 73
7.5.1 Basis of design ............................................................................................................................................... 73
7.5.2 Analysis ............................................................................................................................................................ 73
7.5.3 Cladding panels ............................................................................................................................................. 74
7.6 Partitions......................................................................................................................................................... 75
7.6.1 Basis of design ............................................................................................................................................... 75
7.6.2 Analysis ............................................................................................................................................................ 75
7.6.3 Design provisions for partitions ............................................................................................................. 75
8 BASE ISOLATED BUILDINGS ..................................................................................................................... 76
8.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................................................. 76
8.2 Basis of design ............................................................................................................................................... 76
8.2.1 Compliance criteria ..................................................................................................................................... 76
8.2.2 Control of undesirable movements ....................................................................................................... 76
8.2.3 Control of differential seismic ground motions ................................................................................ 76
8.2.4 Control of displacements relative to surrounding ground and constructions ...................... 77
8.3 Structural analysis ....................................................................................................................................... 77
8.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 77
8.3.2 Fundamental-mode equivalent linear response-spectrum analysis......................................... 77
8.4 Verification of Significant Damage Limit State .................................................................................. 78
9 BUILDINGS WITH ENERGY DISSIPATION SYSTEMS.......................................................................... 79
9.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................................................. 79
9.2 Basis of design ............................................................................................................................................... 79
9.2.1 Compliance criteria ..................................................................................................................................... 79
9.2.2 Main structural system .............................................................................................................................. 79
9.2.3 Energy dissipation system ........................................................................................................................ 79
9.2.4 Control of torsional effects ....................................................................................................................... 80
9.3 Structural analysis ....................................................................................................................................... 80
9.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 80
9.3.2 Non-linear response spectrum analysis .............................................................................................. 80
9.3.3 Energy-balance based analysis ............................................................................................................... 87
9.3.4 Non-linear response history analysis ................................................................................................... 92
9.3.5 Combination of the effects of the components of seismic action ................................................ 92
9.4 Verification to Limit States ....................................................................................................................... 92
9.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 92
9.4.2 Verification to Significant Damage (SD) limit state ......................................................................... 92
9.4.3 Verification to Near Collapse (NC) limit state .................................................................................... 92
9.4.4 Verification to Damage Limitation (DL) limit state ......................................................................... 93
9.4.5 Verification of Operational (OP) limit state ....................................................................................... 93
10 SPECIFIC RULES FOR CONCRETE BUILDINGS ..................................................................................... 94
10.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................................................. 94
10.2 Basis of design and design criteria ........................................................................................................ 94
10.2.1 General rules on design action effects .................................................................................................. 94
10.2.2 Local resistance condition ........................................................................................................................ 94
10.2.3 Local ductility condition ............................................................................................................................ 94
10.2.4 Capacity design rule for moment resisting frames .......................................................................... 95
10.3 Materials requirements ............................................................................................................................. 95
10.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 95
10.3.2 Design for DC1 ............................................................................................................................................... 95

4
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

10.3.3 Design for DC2 and DC3 .............................................................................................................................. 95

10.3.4 Safety verifications....................................................................................................................................... 95
10.4 Structural types, behaviour factors, limits of seismic action and limits of drift .................... 96
10.4.1 Structural types ............................................................................................................................................. 96
10.4.2 Behaviour factor for horizontal seismic actions ............................................................................... 97
10.4.3 Limits of seismic action for design to DC1, DC2 and DC3 ............................................................... 98
10.4.4 Limits of drift.................................................................................................................................................. 98
10.5 Beams ................................................................................................................................................................ 98
10.5.1 Geometrical and other provisions .......................................................................................................... 98
10.5.2 Specific rules for beams supporting discontinued vertical members ....................................... 99
10.5.3 Design action effects .................................................................................................................................... 99
10.5.4 SD limit state verifications and detailing .......................................................................................... 100
10.6 Columns......................................................................................................................................................... 103
10.6.1 Geometrical and other provisions ....................................................................................................... 103
10.6.2 Design action effects ................................................................................................................................. 103
10.6.3 SD limit state verifications and detailing .......................................................................................... 104
10.7 Beam-column joints .................................................................................................................................. 106
10.8 Ductile walls ................................................................................................................................................ 110
10.8.1 Geometrical and other constraints ..................................................................................................... 110
10.8.2 Design action effects ................................................................................................................................. 110
10.8.3 SD limit state verifications and detailing .......................................................................................... 113
10.9 Large walls ................................................................................................................................................... 115
10.9.1 Geometrical provisions ........................................................................................................................... 115
10.9.2 Design action effects ................................................................................................................................. 116
10.9.3 SD limit state verifications and detailing .......................................................................................... 116
10.10 Flat slabs ....................................................................................................................................................... 118
10.10.1 Basis of design .................................................................................................................................... 118
10.10.2 SD limit state verifications and detailing ................................................................................. 118
10.11 Provisions for anchorages and laps .................................................................................................... 122
10.11.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 122
10.11.2 Anchorage of reinforcement in beams ...................................................................................... 122
10.11.3 Laps and mechanical couplers...................................................................................................... 124
10.12 Provisions for concrete diaphragms .................................................................................................. 125
10.12.1 Cast in place diaphragms ................................................................................................................ 125
10.12.2 Precast concrete diaphragms ....................................................................................................... 125
10.13 Prestressed concrete ................................................................................................................................ 125
10.14 Precast concrete......................................................................................................................................... 126
10.14.1 Structural types and behaviour factor q ................................................................................... 126
10.14.2 Rules applicable to all structural types and to DC1, DC2 and DC3 .................................. 127
10.14.3 Precast moment resisting frames................................................................................................ 128
10.14.4 Precast walls ....................................................................................................................................... 130
10.14.5 Precast floors and roof diaphragms. Rules for ductility classes DC1, DC2 and DC3 . 132
10.15 Design and detailing of foundations ................................................................................................... 132
11 SPECIFIC RULES FOR STEEL BUILDINGS ............................................................................................ 133
11.1 Scope .............................................................................................................................................................. 133
11.2 Basis of Design ............................................................................................................................................ 133
11.2.1 Design concepts .......................................................................................................................................... 133
11.2.2 Safety verifications.................................................................................................................................... 133
11.3 Materials ....................................................................................................................................................... 134
11.4 Structural types, behaviour factors and limits of seismic action ............................................. 135
11.4.1 Structural types .......................................................................................................................................... 135
11.4.2 Behaviour factors ...................................................................................................................................... 138

5
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.4.3 Limits of seismic action for design to DC1, DC2 and DC3 ............................................................. 139
11.5 Structural analysis ..................................................................................................................................... 140
11.6 Verification to Limit States ..................................................................................................................... 140
11.6.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 140
11.6.2 Resistance conditions at Significant Damage limit state ............................................................. 140
11.6.3 Limitation of interstorey drift at Significant Damage limit state ............................................. 140
11.7 Design rules for low-dissipative (DC1) structural behaviour for all structural types ...... 141
11.7.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 141
11.7.2 Design rules for low-dissipative structures ..................................................................................... 141
11.8 Design rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) structural behaviour common to all structural
types ................................................................................................................................................................ 141
11.8.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 141
11.8.2 Design criteria for dissipative structures ......................................................................................... 141
11.8.3 Design rules for dissipative elements in compression or bending .......................................... 141
11.8.4 Design rules for dissipative parts of elements in tension ........................................................... 142
11.8.5 Design rules for members ....................................................................................................................... 142
11.8.6 Design rules for connections in dissipative zones ......................................................................... 144
11.8.7 Design rules for column-to-column splices ...................................................................................... 146
11.9 Design rules for moment resisting frames........................................................................................ 146
11.9.1 Design criteria ............................................................................................................................................. 146
11.9.2 Beams ............................................................................................................................................................. 146
11.9.3 Columns ......................................................................................................................................................... 148
11.9.4 Beam to column joints .............................................................................................................................. 149
11.9.5 Column base joints..................................................................................................................................... 151
11.10 Design rules for frames with concentric bracings ......................................................................... 152
11.10.1 Design criteria for DC2 and DC3 ................................................................................................... 152
11.10.2 Analysis ................................................................................................................................................. 153
11.10.3 Diagonal members ............................................................................................................................ 153
11.10.4 Beams and columns .......................................................................................................................... 155
11.10.5 Beam to column connections......................................................................................................... 156
11.10.6 Brace connections.............................................................................................................................. 157
11.10.7 Column base joints ............................................................................................................................ 158
11.11 Design rules for frames with eccentric bracings ............................................................................ 158
11.11.1 Design criteria..................................................................................................................................... 158
11.11.2 Seismic links ........................................................................................................................................ 158
11.11.3 Members and connections not containing seismic links ..................................................... 162
11.11.4 Connections of the seismic links .................................................................................................. 162
11.11.5 Beam to column connections......................................................................................................... 163
11.12 Design rules for frames with buckling restrained bracings ....................................................... 163
11.12.1 Design criteria..................................................................................................................................... 163
11.12.2 Analysis ................................................................................................................................................. 163
11.12.3 Design rules of buckling restrained bracings .......................................................................... 164
11.12.4 Conformity criteria............................................................................................................................ 165
11.12.5 Beams and columns .......................................................................................................................... 165
11.12.6 Beam to column connections......................................................................................................... 166
11.12.7 Brace connections.............................................................................................................................. 166
11.12.8 Column base joints ............................................................................................................................ 167
11.13 Design rules for dual frames - moment resisting frames combined with either concentric,
eccentric or buckling restrained bracings ........................................................................................ 167
11.13.1 Design criteria..................................................................................................................................... 167
11.14 Design rules for lightweight steel systems ....................................................................................... 167
11.14.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 167
11.14.2 Design rules for low-dissipative (DC1) structural behaviour ........................................... 168

6
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.14.3 General rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) structural behaviour. ............................... 169
11.14.4 Specific rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) strap braced walls ..................................... 169
11.14.5 Specific rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) shear walls with steel sheet sheathing169
11.14.6 Specific rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) shear walls with wood sheathing......... 169
11.14.7 Specific rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) shear walls with gypsum sheathing .... 170
11.15 Design rules for inverted pendulum structures ............................................................................. 170
11.16 Design rules for steel structures with concrete cores or concrete walls and for moment
resisting frames combined with infills .............................................................................................. 170
11.16.1 Structures with concrete cores or concrete walls ................................................................. 170
11.16.2 Moment resisting frames combined with infills .................................................................... 170
11.17 Steel diaphragms ....................................................................................................................................... 170
11.18 Transfer zone. Design for DC2 and DC3 ............................................................................................. 171
11.19 Checking of design, provisions for supply of material and execution .................................... 171
12 SPECIFIC RULES FOR COMPOSITE STEEL – CONCRETE BUILDINGS ......................................... 172
12.1 Scope .............................................................................................................................................................. 172
12.2 Basis of Design ............................................................................................................................................ 172
12.2.1 Design concepts .......................................................................................................................................... 172
12.2.2 Safety verifications.................................................................................................................................... 172
12.3 Materials ....................................................................................................................................................... 172
12.3.1 Concrete ........................................................................................................................................................ 172
12.3.2 Reinforcing steel ........................................................................................................................................ 173
12.3.3 Structural steel ........................................................................................................................................... 173
12.4 Structural types, behaviour factors, limits of seismic action and limits of drifts ............... 173
12.4.1 Structural types .......................................................................................................................................... 173
12.4.2 Behaviour factors ...................................................................................................................................... 174
12.4.3 Limits of seismic action for design to DC1, DC2 and DC3 ............................................................ 175
12.5 Structural analysis .................................................................................................................................... 175
12.5.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................... 175
12.5.2 Stiffness of sections ................................................................................................................................... 176
12.6 Verification to limit states ...................................................................................................................... 176
12.6.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................... 176
12.6.2 Resistance conditions at Significant Damage limit state ............................................................. 176
12.6.3 Limitation of interstorey drift at Significant Damage limit state ............................................. 176
12.7 Design rules for low-dissipative (DC1) structural behaviour for all structural types ..... 177
12.7.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................... 177
12.7.2 Design rules for low-dissipative structures ..................................................................................... 177
12.8 Design rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) structural behaviour common to all structural
types ............................................................................................................................................................... 177
12.8.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................... 177
12.8.2 Design criteria for dissipative structures ......................................................................................... 177
12.8.3 Design rules for dissipative elements in compression or bending ......................................... 178
12.8.4 Design rules for dissipative elements in tension ........................................................................... 179
12.8.5 Design rules for members ...................................................................................................................... 179
12.8.6 Design rules for beams ............................................................................................................................ 180
12.8.7 Composite columns ................................................................................................................................... 183
12.8.8 Design rules for composite connections in dissipative zones ................................................... 186
12.8.9 Design rules for column-to-column splices...................................................................................... 187
12.9 Design and detailing rules for composite moment resisting frames in DC2 and DC3 ...... 187
12.9.1 Design criteria ............................................................................................................................................ 187
12.9.2 Analysis ......................................................................................................................................................... 188
12.9.3 Beams ............................................................................................................................................................. 188
12.9.4 Columns......................................................................................................................................................... 189

7
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

12.9.5 Column diaphragm plates ....................................................................................................................... 189

12.9.6 Beam to column joints .............................................................................................................................. 190
12.9.7 Column base joints..................................................................................................................................... 190
12.10 Design and detailing rules for composite frames with concentric bracings in DC2 and DC3190
12.10.1 Design criteria..................................................................................................................................... 190
12.10.2 Analysis ................................................................................................................................................. 191
12.10.3 Diagonal members ............................................................................................................................ 191
12.10.4 Beams and columns .......................................................................................................................... 191
12.10.5 Beam to column connections......................................................................................................... 191
12.10.6 Brace connections.............................................................................................................................. 191
12.10.7 Column base joints ............................................................................................................................ 192
12.11 Design and detailing rules for composite frames with eccentric bracings in DC2 and DC3192
12.11.1 Design criteria..................................................................................................................................... 192
12.11.2 Analysis ................................................................................................................................................. 192
12.11.3 Seismic Links ....................................................................................................................................... 192
12.11.4 Diagonal members ............................................................................................................................ 192
12.11.5 Beams and columns .......................................................................................................................... 193
12.11.6 Members and connections not containing seismic links ..................................................... 193
12.11.7 Connections of the seismic links .................................................................................................. 193
12.11.8 Beam to column connections......................................................................................................... 193
12.11.9 Column base joints ............................................................................................................................ 193
12.12 Design and detailing rules for composite frames with buckling restrained bracings ...... 193
12.12.1 Design criteria..................................................................................................................................... 193
12.12.2 Analysis ................................................................................................................................................. 193
12.12.3 Design rules of buckling restrained bracings .......................................................................... 193
12.12.4 Conformity criteria............................................................................................................................ 193
12.12.5 Beams and columns .......................................................................................................................... 193
12.12.6 Beams to column connections....................................................................................................... 194
12.12.7 Brace connections.............................................................................................................................. 194
12.12.8 Column base joints ............................................................................................................................ 194
12.13 Design and detailing rules for composite dual frames in DC2 and DC3 ................................. 194
12.13.1 Design criteria..................................................................................................................................... 194
12.14 Design and detailing rules for structural wall systems made of reinforced concrete shear
walls composite with structural steel elements in DC2 and DC3.............................................. 194
12.14.1 Design criteria..................................................................................................................................... 194
12.14.2 Analysis ................................................................................................................................................. 195
12.14.3 Detailing rules for composite walls in DC2............................................................................... 195
12.14.4 Detailing rules for coupling beams in DC2 ............................................................................... 195
12.14.5 Additional detailing rules for DC3 ............................................................................................... 196
12.15 Composite diaphragms, chords and collectors ............................................................................... 197
12.15.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 197
12.16 Transfer level: Design for DC2 and DC3 ............................................................................................. 197
12.17 Checking of design and construction .................................................................................................. 197
13 SPECIFIC RULES FOR TIMBER BUILDINGS ......................................................................................... 198
13.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................................................... 198
13.2 Basis of design ............................................................................................................................................. 198
13.2.1 Design concepts ........................................................................................................................................... 198
13.2.2 Safety verifications ..................................................................................................................................... 199
13.3 Materials........................................................................................................................................................ 199
13.3.1 Mechanical properties of dissipative zones ...................................................................................... 199
13.3.2 Material properties .................................................................................................................................... 200
13.4 Structural types, behaviour factors, capacity design rules and limits of seismic action.. 201

8
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

13.4.1 Structural types .......................................................................................................................................... 201

13.4.2 Behaviour factors ...................................................................................................................................... 204
13.4.3 Capacity design rules common to all dissipative structural types .......................................... 207
13.4.4 Limits of seismic action for design to DC1 ........................................................................................ 208
13.5 Structural analysis .................................................................................................................................... 209
13.6 Verification of limit states ...................................................................................................................... 210
13.6.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................... 210
13.6.2 Limitation of interstorey drift at Significant Damage limit state ............................................. 211
13.6.3 Non-linear static analysis ....................................................................................................................... 211
13.7 Rules for cross laminated timber structures................................................................................... 211
13.7.1 General rules ............................................................................................................................................... 211
13.7.2 Design rules for DC2 ................................................................................................................................. 213
13.7.3 Design rules for DC3 ................................................................................................................................. 215
13.7.4 Detailing rules............................................................................................................................................. 217
13.8 Rules for light-frame structures........................................................................................................... 218
13.8.1 General rules ............................................................................................................................................... 218
13.8.2 Design rules for DC2 ................................................................................................................................. 219
13.8.3 Design rules for DC3 ................................................................................................................................. 220
13.8.4 Detailing rules............................................................................................................................................. 221
13.9 Rules for log structures ........................................................................................................................... 221
13.9.1 General Rules .............................................................................................................................................. 221
13.9.2 Design rules for DC2 ................................................................................................................................. 223
13.9.3 Detailing rules............................................................................................................................................. 223
13.10 Rules for moment-resisting frames .................................................................................................... 224
13.10.1 General rules ....................................................................................................................................... 224
13.10.2 Rules for DC2....................................................................................................................................... 224
13.10.3 Rules for DC3....................................................................................................................................... 225
13.10.4 Detailing rules .................................................................................................................................... 225
13.11 Rules for braced frame structures with dowel-type connections ............................................ 226
13.11.1 General rules ....................................................................................................................................... 226
13.11.2 Rules for DC2....................................................................................................................................... 227
13.11.3 Detailing rules .................................................................................................................................... 227
13.12 Rules for vertical cantilever structures ............................................................................................. 228
13.12.1 General rules ....................................................................................................................................... 228
13.12.2 Design rules for DC2 ......................................................................................................................... 228
13.12.3 Detailing rules .................................................................................................................................... 228
13.13 Rules for braced frame structures with carpentry connections and masonry infill ......... 229
13.13.1 General rules ....................................................................................................................................... 229
13.13.2 Design rules for DC2 ......................................................................................................................... 230
13.13.3 Detailing rules .................................................................................................................................... 230
13.14 Rules for braced frame structures with carpentry connections .............................................. 230
13.14.1 General rules ....................................................................................................................................... 230
13.14.2 Detailing rules .................................................................................................................................... 231
13.15 Floor and roof diaphragms .................................................................................................................... 231
13.15.1 General rules ....................................................................................................................................... 231
13.15.2 Cross laminated timber floor and roof diaphragms ............................................................. 231
13.15.3 Light-frame floor and roof diaphragms .................................................................................... 233
13.15.4 Timber-concrete composite floor and roof diaphragms .................................................... 234
13.16 Transfer level. Design for DC2 and DC3............................................................................................. 234
13.17 Checking of design and construction .................................................................................................. 234
14 SPECIFIC RULES FOR MASONRY BUILDINGS .................................................................................... 235
14.1 Scope .............................................................................................................................................................. 235

9
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

14.2 Basis of design ............................................................................................................................................. 235

14.2.1 Design concepts .......................................................................................................................................... 235
14.2.2 Rules applicable to structures designed to DC1 or DC2 ............................................................... 235
14.3 Materials........................................................................................................................................................ 236
14.4 Behaviour factors ....................................................................................................................................... 236
14.4.1 Behaviour factors for in-plane analysis ............................................................................................. 236
14.4.2 Behaviour factors for out-of-plane analysis ..................................................................................... 238
14.5 Structural analysis ..................................................................................................................................... 238
14.5.1 Model for linear global structural analysis....................................................................................... 238
14.5.2 Model for non-linear global structural analysis ............................................................................. 240
14.5.3 Global structural linear analysis .......................................................................................................... 242
14.5.4 Linear structural analysis for determining the out-of-plane bending moment demand on
piers ................................................................................................................................................................ 244
14.6 Verification of limit states ....................................................................................................................... 245
14.6.1 Verification for in-plane actions ........................................................................................................... 245
14.6.2 Verification for out-of-plane actions at SD limit state .................................................................. 247
14.7 Design rules for members ....................................................................................................................... 248
14.7.1 Limitations of piers and walls dimensions in DC1 and DC2 ....................................................... 248
14.7.2 Design rules for unreinforced masonry in DC2............................................................................... 249
14.7.3 Design rules for confined masonry in DC2........................................................................................ 249
14.7.4 Design rules for reinforced masonry in DC2 .................................................................................... 250
14.8 Rules for simple masonry buildings.................................................................................................... 251
14.8.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 251
14.8.2 Design criteria for simple masonry buildings ................................................................................. 251
14.8.3 Design rules for simple masonry buildings ...................................................................................... 252
14.9 Ultimate deformations ............................................................................................................................. 254
14.9.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 254
14.9.2 Unreinforced masonry members ......................................................................................................... 254
14.9.3 Reinforced masonry members .............................................................................................................. 255
14.9.4 Confined masonry members .................................................................................................................. 255
15 SPECIFIC RULES FOR ALUMINIUM BUILDINGS................................................................................. 256
15.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................................................... 256
15.2 Basis of Design............................................................................................................................................. 256
15.2.1 Design concepts .......................................................................................................................................... 256
15.2.2 Safety verifications .................................................................................................................................... 256
15.3 Materials........................................................................................................................................................ 257
15.4 Structural types, behaviour factors and limits of seismic action.............................................. 257
15.4.1 Structural types .......................................................................................................................................... 257
15.4.2 Behaviour factors ....................................................................................................................................... 258
15.4.3 Limits of seismic action for design to DC1 and DC2 ....................................................................... 258
15.5 Structural analysis ..................................................................................................................................... 259
15.6 Verification to Limit States ..................................................................................................................... 259
15.6.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 259
15.6.2 Resistance conditions at Significant Damage limit state ............................................................. 259
15.6.3 Limitation of interstorey drift at Significant Damage limit state ............................................. 259
15.7 Design rules for low-dissipative (DC1) structural behaviour common to all structural
types ................................................................................................................................................................ 259
15.7.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 259
15.7.2 Design rules for low-dissipative structures ..................................................................................... 259
15.8 Design rules for dissipative (DC2) structural behaviour common to all structural types259
15.8.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 259
15.8.2 Design criteria for dissipative structures ......................................................................................... 260

10
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

15.8.3 Design rules for dissipative elements in compression or bending ......................................... 260
15.8.4 Design rules for dissipative parts of elements in tension ........................................................... 260
15.8.5 Design rules for non-dissipative members ...................................................................................... 260
15.8.6 Design rules for connections in dissipative zones ......................................................................... 261
15.8.7 Design rules for column-to-column splices...................................................................................... 261
15.9 Design rules for moment resisting frames ....................................................................................... 262
15.9.1 Design criteria ............................................................................................................................................ 262
15.9.2 Beams ............................................................................................................................................................. 262
15.9.3 Columns......................................................................................................................................................... 262
15.9.4 Beam to column joints ............................................................................................................................. 262
15.9.5 Column base joints .................................................................................................................................... 262
15.10 Design rules for frames with concentric bracings ......................................................................... 263
15.10.1 Design criteria for DC2 .................................................................................................................... 263
15.10.2 Analysis for DC2 ................................................................................................................................. 263
15.10.3 Diagonal members ............................................................................................................................ 263
15.10.4 Beams and columns .......................................................................................................................... 263
15.10.5 Beam to column connections ........................................................................................................ 264
15.10.6 Brace connections ............................................................................................................................. 264
15.10.7 Column base joints ............................................................................................................................ 264
15.11 Design rules for dual frames - moment resisting frames combined with concentric
bracings ......................................................................................................................................................... 264
15.11.1 Design criteria .................................................................................................................................... 264
15.12 Design rules for inverted pendulum structures ............................................................................. 264
15.13 Aluminium diaphragms........................................................................................................................... 264
15.14 Transfer level. Design for DC2 .............................................................................................................. 264
15.15 Checking of design, supply of material and execution ................................................................. 264
(informative) CHARACTERISTICS OF EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT BUILDINGS AND IN
PLAN REGULARITY .................................................................................................................................... 266
A.1 Scope and general...................................................................................................................................... 266
A.2 Structural simplicity ................................................................................................................................. 266
A.3 Uniformity, symmetry and redundancy ............................................................................................ 266
A.4 Bi-directional resistance and stiffness .............................................................................................. 266
A.5 Torsional resistance and stiffness ....................................................................................................... 267
A.6 Diaphragmatic behaviour at storey level ......................................................................................... 267
A.7 Adequate foundation ................................................................................................................................ 267
A.8 Regularity in plan ...................................................................................................................................... 267
(informative) NATURAL ECCENTRICITY AND TORSIONAL RADIUS .................................... 269
B.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................... 269
B.2 Uniform type of lateral load resisting system ................................................................................. 269
B.3 Calculation by a 3D model ...................................................................................................................... 271
(normative) FLOOR ACCELERATIONS FOR ANCILLARY ELEMENTS..................................... 272
(normative) BUILDINGS WITH ENERGY DISSIPATION SYSTEMS ......................................... 274
D.1 Displacement ductility ratio .................................................................................................................. 274
D.2 Complementary rules for structures with velocity dependent energy dissipation devices274
D.2.1 Effective period .......................................................................................................................................... 274
D.2.2 Effective damping ...................................................................................................................................... 275
D.3 Complementary rules for structures with displacement-dependent energy-dissipation
devices ........................................................................................................................................................... 276
D.3.1 Calculation of Ee .......................................................................................................................................... 276
D.3.2 Calculation of EH,k ....................................................................................................................................... 277
D.3.3 Calculation of EpH,k,max ............................................................................................................................... 278

11
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

D.3.4 Calculation of EdH,k,max ................................................................................................................................ 278

(normative) SEISMIC DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS FOR STEEL BUILDINGS .......................... 279
E.1. Scope ............................................................................................................................................................... 279
E.2. Pre-qualified moment resisting beam-to-column joints ............................................................. 279
E.2.1. General ........................................................................................................................................................... 279
E.2.2. Classification of pre-qualified moment resisting beam-to-column joints ............................. 280
E.2.2.1. Classification by rotational stiffness ........................................................................................... 280
E.2.2.2. Classification by moment resistance .......................................................................................... 280
E.2.3. Types of pre-qualified joints and technological requirements ................................................. 282
E.2.3.1. General .................................................................................................................................................. 282
E.2.3.2. Detailing of column web panel...................................................................................................... 283
E.2.3.3. Detailing of welds .............................................................................................................................. 284
E.2.3.4. Joints with haunched stiffeners .................................................................................................... 288
E.2.3.5. Joints with rib stiffeners .................................................................................................................. 291
E.2.3.6. Unstiffened Joints .............................................................................................................................. 295
E.2.3.7. Joints with reduced beam section ................................................................................................ 298
E.2.3.8. Other types of joints.......................................................................................................................... 300
E.3. Beam-to-column connections allowing rotations in braced frames........................................ 300
E.3.1. General ........................................................................................................................................................... 300
E.4. Gusset plate connections in concentric bracings............................................................................ 301
E.4.1. General ........................................................................................................................................................... 301
E.4.2. Gussets with linear clearance ................................................................................................................ 301
E.4.3. Gussets with elliptical clearance .......................................................................................................... 304
E.4.4. Gussets detailed for in-plane rotations .............................................................................................. 304
E.5. Partial strength connections in concentrical bracings ................................................................. 305
E.5.1. General ........................................................................................................................................................... 305
E.5.2. INERD-PIN connection .............................................................................................................................. 305
E.6. Brace connections in eccentric bracings ........................................................................................... 307
E.6.1. General ........................................................................................................................................................... 307
E.6.2. Gusset plate connections ......................................................................................................................... 307
E.7. Gusset plate connections in buckling restrained bracings ......................................................... 309
(normative) STEEL LIGHT WEIGHT STRUCTURES...................................................................... 310
F.1. Scope and description .............................................................................................................................. 310
F.1.1. Scope ............................................................................................................................................................... 310
F.1.2. Description ................................................................................................................................................... 310
F.2. Strap braced walls ..................................................................................................................................... 310
F.2.1. Description ................................................................................................................................................... 310
F.2.2. Overstrength requirements ................................................................................................................... 311
F.3. Shear walls with steel sheet sheathing............................................................................................... 311
F.3.1. Description ................................................................................................................................................... 311
F.3.2. Geometrical and mechanical provisions for the components and parts ............................... 312
F.3.3. Overstrength provisions .......................................................................................................................... 312
F.3.4. Effective strip method .............................................................................................................................. 313
F.4. Shear walls with wood sheathing ......................................................................................................... 315
F.4.1. Description ................................................................................................................................................... 315
F.4.2. Geometrical and mechanical provisions for the components and parts ............................... 315
F.4.3. Overstrength provisions .......................................................................................................................... 316

12
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(normative) DESIGN OF COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS IN DISSIPATIVE COMPOSITE STEEL-

CONCRETE MOMENT RESISTING FRAMES......................................................................................... 319
G.1. Scope .............................................................................................................................................................. 319
G.2. Materials ....................................................................................................................................................... 319
G.3. Design provisions ...................................................................................................................................... 319
G.3.1. General .......................................................................................................................................................... 319
G.4. Joints between steel beams and reinforced concrete or composite Columns ..................... 319
G.4.1. General .......................................................................................................................................................... 319
G.4.2. Joint forces ................................................................................................................................................... 320
G.4.3. Joint failure modes .................................................................................................................................... 321
G.4.4. Effective joint width .................................................................................................................................. 322
G.4.5. Vertical bearing .......................................................................................................................................... 323
G.4.6. Joint shear resistance............................................................................................................................... 323
G.4.7. Column horizontal reinforcing bar tie requirement .................................................................... 326
G.4.8. Column vertical reinforcing bars ......................................................................................................... 326
G.4.9. Face bearing plate provisions ............................................................................................................... 326
G.4.10. Steel beam flanges ..................................................................................................................................... 327
G.4.11. Extended face bearing plates and steel columns ........................................................................... 327
G.5. Composite joints using diaphragm plates ........................................................................................ 327
G.6. Full-strength composite joints with double-split tee connections in concrete filled tube
columns ......................................................................................................................................................... 330
(informative) SEISMIC DESIGN OF EXPOSED AND EMBEDDED COLUMN BASE
CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................................................................. 334
H.1. Scope .............................................................................................................................................................. 334
H.2. Materials ....................................................................................................................................................... 334
H.3. Exposed column base connections ...................................................................................................... 334
H.3.1. General .......................................................................................................................................................... 334
H.3.2. Base plate eccentricity and critical eccentricity............................................................................. 334
H.3.3. Base plate with a small moment .......................................................................................................... 335
H.3.4. Base plate with a large moment ........................................................................................................... 336
H.3.4.1. Base plate bearing length ............................................................................................................... 336
H.3.4.2. Anchor tensile resistance ............................................................................................................... 336
H.3.4.3. Required base plate thickness...................................................................................................... 338
H.3.4.4. Concrete anchorage resistance and required anchor embedment depth .................... 338
H.3.4.5. Development by lapping with concrete reinforcement ...................................................... 338
H.3.5. Design for shear ......................................................................................................................................... 338
H.4. Embedded column base connections ................................................................................................. 339

13
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

H.4.1. General ........................................................................................................................................................... 339

H.4.2. Required shear resistance at the embedded column base ......................................................... 340
H.4.3. Required column embedment depth .................................................................................................. 340
H.4.4. Required horizontal foundation reinforcement ............................................................................. 341
H.4.5. Minimum face bearing plate thickness .............................................................................................. 341
H.4.6. Yielding in the face bearing plates ....................................................................................................... 341
H.4.7. Required transfer reinforcement......................................................................................................... 341
H.4.8. Steel base plate ........................................................................................................................................... 341
(normative) DESIGN OF THE SLAB OF STEEL-CONCRETE COMPOSITE BEAMS AT BEAM-
COLUMN JOINTS IN MOMENT RESISTING FRAMES ......................................................................... 343
I.1. General ........................................................................................................................................................... 343
I.2. Design of joints at exterior columns under negative moment .................................................. 343
I.3. Design of joints at exterior columns under positive moment.................................................... 345
I.4. Interior columns ......................................................................................................................................... 347
(informative) DRIFT LIMITS FOR ECCENTRICALLY LOADED UNREINFORCED MASONRY
PIERS ............................................................................................................................................................... 349
Annex K (informative) SIMPLIFIED EVALUATION OF DRIFT DEMANDS ON INFILLED FRAMES .. 350
Annex L (normative) LOAD-DEFORMATION RELATIONSHIPS OF DISSIPATIVE TIMBER
COMPONENTS FOR NON-LINEAR ANALYSES..................................................................................... 353

14
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

FOREWORD

This standard gives values with notes indicating where national choices may be made. Therefore, the national
standard implementing EN 1998-1-2 can have a National annex containing all Nationally Determined
Parameters to be used for the design of buildings and civil engineering works to be constructed in the relevant
country.

National choice is allowed in EN 1998-1-2 through the following clauses:

4.1(1); 4.1(3); 6.3.2.1(2); 7.2.2(1); 7.2.2(2)

National choice is also allowed in EN 1998-1-2 through the following Informative Annexes: A, B, E, J and N.

INTRODUCTION

The scope of EN 1998 is defined in 1.1 and the scope of this Part 1-2 of EN 1998 is defined in 1.2.
Additional Parts of EN 1998 are listed in 1.3.

As mentioned in 1.1, attention must be paid to the fact that, for the design of buildings in seismic regions,
the provisions of EN 1998 should be applied in addition to the provisions of the other relevant EN 1990 to
EN 1997 and EN 1999.

EN 1998-1 contains clauses related to the design of new buildings, including rules for structural materials,
additional to the corresponding other Eurocodes.

EN 1998-1 contains in its clause 14 related to masonry buildings specific provisions that simplify the
design of "simple masonry buildings”.

EN 1998-1 also contains provisions for the design of base isolated buildings and buildings with energy
dissipation systems.

By nature, perfect protection (a null seismic risk) against earthquakes is practically not feasible, in particular
because the knowledge of the hazard itself is characterised by a significant uncertainty. Therefore, in Eurocode
8, the seismic action is represented in a conventional form, proportional in amplitude to earthquakes likely to
occur at a given location and representative of their frequency content. This representation is not the
prediction of a particular seismic movement, and such a movement could give rise to more severe effects than
those of the seismic action considered, inflicting damage greater than the one described by the Limit States
contemplated in this Standard.

Nevertheless, the definition of the seismic action allows adaptation to a local specific seismic context
through Nationally Determined Parameters (NDP) defined by National Authorities or in the National Annex or
through a site-specific description.

Not only the seismic action cannot be predicted, but in addition, it should be recognized that engineering
methods are not perfectly predictive when considering the effects of this specific action, under which
structures are assumed to respond in the non-linear regime. Such uncertainties are taken into account
according to the general EN 1990 frame with a residual risk of underestimation of the effects.

15
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

1 SCOPE
1.1 Scope of EN1998

(1) The scope of EN1998 is defined in EN1998-1-1:2019, 1.1.

1.2 Scope of EN 1998-1-2

(1)P EN 1998-1-2 shall be applied to the design of new buildings and temporary structures in seismic
regions.

(2) EN1998-1-2 should be applied to buildings of consequence classes CC1, CC2 and CC3, as defined in
EN1990:2018, 4.3.

(3)P EN 1998-1-2 contains only those provisions that, in addition to the provisions of the other relevant
Eurocodes, shall be observed for the design of new buildings in seismic regions.

NOTE EN1998-1-2 complements in this respect the other Eurocodes.

(4)P EN 1998-1-2 shall be used in complement to EN1998-1-1:2019.

(5) EN 1998-1-2 is subdivided in clauses.

NOTE 1 Clauses 4 to 6 contain general rules for verification of new buildings.

NOTE 2 Guidance for the analysis and the design of ancillary elements is given in 7.

NOTE 3 Specific rules for various structural materials and elements used in buildings are given in 10 to 15 in addition
to the other relevant Eurocodes.

NOTE 4 Guidance for the design of base-isolated buildings is given in 8.

NOTE 5 Guidance for the design of buildings equipped with energy dissipation systems is given in 9.

NOTE 6 General rules for assessment and retrofitting of existing buildings are given in EN1998-3.

(6) Annexes are included in EN1998-1-2. Annexes C, D, F, G, I, K, L and M are normative, A, B, E, J, N, P and
Q are informative.

2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) This European Standard incorporates by dated or undated reference, provisions from other
publications. These normative references are cited at the appropriate places in the text and the publications
are listed hereafter. For dated references, subsequent amendments to or revisions of any of these publications
apply to this European Standard only when incorporated in it by amendment or revision. For undated
references the latest edition of the publication referred to applies (including amendments).

2.1 Reference to other Eurocodes

(1)P For the application of EN 1998, reference shall be made to the following Eurocodes:

EN 1990 Eurocode - Basis of structural design

16
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

EN 1992-1-1 Eurocode 2 – Design of concrete structures – Part 1-1: General – Common rules for building
and civil engineering structures

EN 1993-1-1 Eurocode 3 – Design of steel structures – Part 1-1: General – General rules

EN 1993-1-8 Eurocode 3 – Design of steel structures - Part 1-8: Design of joints

EN 1993-1-10 Design of Steel Structures— Part 1-10: Selection of steel for fracture toughness and

through-thickness properties;

EN 1994-1-1 Eurocode 4 – Design of composite steel and concrete structures – Part 1-1: General –
Common rules and rules for buildings

TC 250 WI SC5.T2:2019 (E) Technical Specification - Eurocode 5: Design of Timber Structures - Structural
design of timber-concrete composite structures – Common rules and rules for buildings

EN 1996-1-1 Eurocode 6 – Design of masonry structures – Part 1-1: General –Rules for reinforced and
unreinforced masonry

EN 1997-1 Eurocode 7 - Geotechnical design – Part 1: General rules

EN 1999-1 Eurocode 9 - Design of aluminium structures – Part 1-1: General – Common rules and rules for
buildings

2.2 Reference to other Codes and Standards

(1) EN 1998 incorporates other normative references cited at the appropriate places in the text. They are
listed below:

ISO 80 000 The international system of units (SI) and its application;

EN 300 Oriented Strand Boards (OSB) – Definitions, classification and specifications

EN 312 Particleboards. Specifications

EN 622 Fibreboards. Specifications

EN 636 Plywood. Specification

EN 10034 Structural steel I and H sections. Tolerances on shape and dimensions

EN 1090-1 Execution of steel structures and aluminium structures - Part 1: Requirements for conformity
assessment of structural components (including Amendment A1);

EN 12512 Timber structures – Test methods – Cyclic testing of joints made with mechanical fasteners;

EN 13353 Solid wood panels (SWP). Requirements

EN 14080 Timber structures - Glued laminated timber and glued solid timber – Requirements

EN 14279 Laminated veneer lumber (LVL). Definitions, classification and specifications

EN 14374 Timber structures - Structural laminated veneer lumber - Requirements

17
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

EN 14592 Timber structures. Dowel type fasteners. Requirements

EN 15129 Anti-seismic devices

EN 15283-2 Gypsum boards with fibrous reinforcement - Definitions, requirements and test methods -
Part 2: Gypsum fibre boards

EN 16351 Timber Structures - Cross Laminated Timber – Requirements

EN 26891 Timber structures – Joints made with mechanical fasteners – General principles for the
determination of strength and deformation characteristics

EN 61061-3-1 Non-impregnated densified laminated wood for electrical purposes. Specification for
individual materials. Sheets produced from beech veneer

2.3 Assumptions

(1) EN1998-1-1:2019, 2.3, should be applied.

18
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

3 TERMS, DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS

3.1 Terms and definitions
3.1.1 General

(1) The terms and definitions given in EN 1990:2018, 3.1, should be applied.

(2) The terms and definitions given in EN 1998-1-1:2019, 3.1, should be applied.

(3) Additional terms in 3.1.2 to 3.1.32 should be used in EN 1998–1-2 with the corresponding meanings.

3.1.2
balloon frame construction
construction type that uses long continuous framing members running from the foundation or base of the
timber structure to the top of the building, with intermediate floor structures nailed to them. The walls are
therefore continuous vertically.

3.1.3
bounding frame
columns and upper and lower beams that surround infill walls and provide structural support.

3.1.4
box behaviour
A structure behaves as a box if it is composed of stiff vertical and horizontal planes connected to each other
along lines where there is no relative displacements between the planes.

3.1.5
carpentry connection
connection where loads are transferred primarily in compression by shaping the connecting timber elements.
Fasteners may be present but only to provide integrity to the connection.

NOTE Skew notch, mortice and tenon, and halving connections are examples of carpentry connections.

3.1.6
cladding
element that covers the surface of a building; claddings are fixed by means of connections onto the frame and
protects the building from e.g. humidity, light, temperature, wind. Cladding can be made of different products
like precast concrete panels, lightweight steel panels, glazing…).

3.1.7
coupling effect
Coupling effect refers to the increase of horizontal stiffness and strength of the building that results from the
flexural stiffness of floors, ring beams or spandrels and the moment frame interaction of these elements with
walls. The coupling effect leads to a change in internal forces (axial load, shear force and bending moment) in
vertical elements that results from shear forces and bending moments transferred by the horizontal members.

3.1.8
critical region
region of a primary seismic element, where the most adverse combination of action effects (M, N, V, T) occurs
and where plastic hinges may form.

NOTE In concrete buildings critical regions are potential dissipative zones. The length of the critical region is defined
for each type of primary seismic element in the relevant clauses of 10.

19
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

3.1.9
dowel-type connection
connection with dowel-type mechanical fasteners loaded perpendicular to their axis.

NOTE Nails, staples, screws, dowels and bolts are examples of dowel-type mechanical fasteners.

3.1.10
ductility
ratio between the ultimate deformation and the deformation at the end of elastic behaviour.

3.1.11
infill
masonry wall constructed within the plane of an internal or external structural frame and bounded by that
frame.

3.1.12
integrated connection systems
integrated connection systems couple structure and cladding panels response. If the supporting structure is a
moment frame and if the cladding panels are elements of walls, the integrated structural system can be a
moment frame-equivalent dual system or a wall-equivalent dual system, depending on the performance of the
connections and of the relative stiffness of the claddings and of the supporting frame.

3.1.13
interacting cladding
cladding activated by deflection of the supporting frame and significantly affecting the structural response of
a building.

3.1.14
interacting infill
infill activated by deflection of the bounding frame and significantly affecting the structural response of a
building.

3.1.15
isolation interface
surface or zone which separates the substructure and the superstructure and where the isolation system is
located.

NOTE Arrangement of the isolation interface at the base of the structure is usual in buildings, tanks and silos. In
bridges, the isolation system is usually combined with the bearings and the isolation interface lies between the deck and
the piers or abutments.

3.1.16
isostatic connection systems
connection systems which allows a free relative displacement between cladding and supporting structure
under earthquake conditions.

3.1.17
non-interacting infill
infill designed not to significantly change the structural response of a building, e.g. infill separated from the
frame by a construction joint.

3.1.18
partitions
wall or division made used to divide the internal space into separate rooms. Partitions can be made of different
materials, bricks, glass or other. Partition walls are placed inside the building between the floor above and the

20
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

floor under it and vertical elements like walls columns. A partition is not meant to play any structural role else
than supporting itself.

3.1.19
pier
A pier is a vertical masonry element in a wall with openings which axis spans between two floors or a floor
and the roof.

3.1.20
platform frame construction
construction type that involves floor structures bearing onto wall panels, thereby creating a ‘platform’ for
construction of the next level of wall panels. The timber walls are therefore interrupted by the floor structures.

3.1.21
principal direction of a building
horizontal direction in which a main lateral force resisting system is designed.

3.1.22
primary member
a structural member which participates to the lateral load resisting system.

3.1.23
primary structure
the set of primary seismic members over the building.
3.1.24
primary bracing
a set of primary members installed in a vertical plane at a given level of the building.

3.1.25
rigid joints
joints with negligible flexibility.

3.1.26
ring beams and ring ties
ring beams and ring ties are horizontal elements that connect all piers at a specific elevation of a building.

3.1.27
secondary seismic member
a structural member which does not participate to the lateral load resisting system.

3.1.28
semi-rigid joints
joints with significant flexibility.

3.1.29
spandrel
a spandrel is a masonry element with a horizontal axis spanning between two adjacent piers.

3.1.30
substructure
part of the structure, which is located under the isolation interface, including the foundation.

NOTE The lateral flexibility of the substructure(s) is generally negligible in comparison to that of the isolation
system, but this is not always the case (for instance in bridges).

21
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

3.1.31
superstructure
part of the structure that is located above the isolation interface.

3.1.32
transfer zone
zone of a building where vertical components of the primary structure are interrupted for architectural
reasons (for open spaces, car parks or setbacks, etc.).

3.2 Symbols and abbreviations

3.2.1 Symbols

3.2.1.1 Latin upper-case symbols

Abr area of a brace section

Ac column cross-section area

Aj,ef effective cross-sectional area of the beam-column joint

Amp,i area of the section of primary pier i

Amp,tot pier section area

As,int integrity reinforcement area in the flat slab

As1 area of the beam top longitudinal reinforcement used to calculate the design shear in the joint

As2 area of the beam bottom longitudinal reinforcement used to calculate the design shear in the
joint

AsL area of the longitudinal bars

Ast area of one leg of the transverse reinforcement within the lap zone

Astif area of a stiffener

Asw area of shear reinforcement

A+ (A-) areas of the vertical projections of the cross sections of a tension diagonal

𝐵 one dimension of a rectangular floor together with 𝐿

Ceff,j effective damping coefficient of a velocity-dependent energy-dissipation device

CF1 weighing factor of the response at stage of maximum displacement

CF2 weighing factor of the response at stage of maximum velocity

Cj damping coefficient of the velocity-dependent energy dissipation device j

CVF correction factor for velocity

22
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Dlower smallest sieve size of the coarsest fraction of the aggregates permitted by the specification of
the concrete

Dmax maximum sieve size of the coarsest fraction of the aggregates

Ea modulus of elasticity of structural steel

Ecm mean modulus of elasticity of concrete

Ed redistribution of bending moments in accordance with EN 1992-1-1:2004, EN 1993-1:2004

and EN 1994-1-1:2004

Edes,k elastic strain energy stored by the energy dissipation devices at k-th storey while the primary
seismic elements of the main structural system at the k-th story remain in the elastic domain

EdH,k energy dissipated in form of plastic strain by the energy dissipation devices at the k-th storey
while the primary seismic elements of the main structural system at the k-th story remain in
the elastic domain

EdH,k,max maximum energy dissipation demand at the k-th storey from the energy dissipation devices
under the reference seismic action

EdH,k,SD amount of energy that can be dissipated by the energy dissipation devices at the k-th storey
under cyclic deformations when any energy dissipation device on the storey attains its SD limit
state

Edi design value of the action effect on the zone or element i in the seismic design situation

Ed,E combination of action effects EF,E and EF,G

Ee amount of energy that the structure can absorb while the primary seismic elements of the main
structural system remain in the elastic domain

EF,E action effect from the analysis of the design seismic action

EF,G action effect due to the non-seismic actions included in the combination of actions in the design
seismic situation

EH,k required amount of energy dissipation in form of plastic strain at the k-th storey of the building

Epes,k elastic strain energy stored by the primary seismic elements of the main structural system at
the k-th storey while these elements remain in the elastic domain

EpH,k energy dissipated by the primary seismic elements of the main system at the k-th storey of the
building

EpH,k,max maximum energy dissipation demand at the k-th storey in the primary seismic elements of the
main structural system under the design earthquake

EpH,k,SD amount of energy that can be dissipated by the primary seismic elements of the main structural
system at the k-th storey under cyclic deformations before reaching the SD limit state

Es design value of modulus of elasticity of reinforcing steel

23
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Esec short term secant modulus of elasticity of masonry

F* force of the equivalent SDOF system

F1 load at the first cycle and at a certain deformation δ in a cyclic test performed in accordance
with EN 12512

F3 load at the third cycle and at a certain deformation δ in a cyclic test performed in accordance
with EN 12512

Fap horizontal seismic force, acting at the centre of mass of the ancillary element in the most
unfavourable direction

Fb seismic base shear force

Fc compression force

Fb,Rd design bearing resistance of the member-to-sheathing connection

FEd design value of the lateral force acting on a steel shear wall in the seismic design situation

FEd,E action effect (shear force, bending moment, axial force) in the non-dissipative joint, connection
or member due to the design seismic action

FEd,G action effect (shear force, bending moment, axial force) in the non-dissipative joint, connection
or member due to the non-seismic actions in the design seismic situation

FH hysteresis loop adjustment factor

Fi horizontal force acting on storey i

Fi1 design lateral force at i-th floor in the first mode

Fim design lateral force at i-th floor in the m-th mode

FM,Ed design shear force in a fastener in the outer circle due to the bending moment transmitted by
the joint

Fmax maximum load attained on the 1st cyclic envelope load-deformation curve in a cyclic test
performed in accordance with EN 12512

Foop resultant horizontal force acting on an out-of-plane loaded pier

FRd,b design value of the strength of the non-dissipative, brittle components

FRk,b characteristic value of the strength of the non-dissipative, brittle components

FRd,c design strength in seismic conditions of the single timber-to-timber connection used in the
vertical joint

FRd,d design value of the strength of the dissipative, ductile zones

FRk,d characteristic value of the strength of the dissipative, ductile zones

24
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

FRd,h design strength in seismic conditions of the anchoring connection against uplift

FRm,d,M mean maximum resistance of the dissipative connection under seismic loading

FRm,d,U mean ultimate resistance of the dissipative connection under seismic loading

FRm,d,Y mean yield resistance of the dissipative connection under seismic loading

Ft,90,Ed design tensile force in reinforcement

Fu ultimate load attained on the 1st cyclic envelope load-deformation curve corresponding to the
ultimate deformation δu in a cyclic test performed in accordance with EN 12512

Fv,Rd design shear resistance of screws

Fv,Rk,d characteristic strength of the selected ductile failure mode providing energy dissipation,
according to EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014

Fv,Rk,nd characteristic strength of the less ductile failure mode

Fy yield load in a cyclic test performed in accordance with EN 12512

Hb height of the building in m above the foundation or the top of a rigid basement

Ia moment of inertia of the structural steel cross section with respect to the axis through the
centroid of the transformed section

Ib second moment of area of the beam section

Ic moment of inertia of the un-cracked concrete section with respect to the axis through the
centroid of the transformed section

Ioop moment of inertia of a pier with regard to out-of-plane bending

Is moment of inertia of the steel reinforcement with respect to the axis through the centroid of
the transformed section;

𝐼 , ,𝐼 , mass moments of inertia of the floor around axis x and y respectively, going through the floor
centre of mass Gi

Keff effective stiffness

KEDD,sj horizontal elastic storage stiffness component of the viscoelastic energy dissipation device j
installed at the s-th storey

Kser slip modulus of a connection at serviceability limit state calculated according to EN 1995-1-
1:2004, 7.1 and A2:2014

Kser,c slip modulus of a connection measured in cyclic tests according to EN 12512

Kser,anc elastic stiffness of anchoring 2D- or 3D-nailing plate against uplift

Kser,con elastic stiffness of the single timber-to-timber connection used in the vertical joint

25
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Lbr brace length

L distance between parallel walls

Le distance between the two-outermost lateral load resisting elements, measured

perpendicularly to the direction of the seismic action considered

Lb beam length

Lh distance between dissipative zones at ends of a beam span

Li floor-dimension perpendicular to the direction of the seismic action

Lst distance between lateral-torsional restraints

Mb,Rd design bending resistances of a steel beam cross section

Mdst,d,E overturning moment of due to design seismic action

M’Edw design bending moment of the wall in the seismic design situation obtained from analysis

M’Edw,base design bending moment at the base of the wall in the seismic design situation obtained from
analysis

MEd design bending moment from the analysis for the seismic design situation

MEd,E,i,j design rocking moment of the jth segmented shear-wall at the ith storey due to the seismic action

MEdw design bending moment of the wall in the seismic design situation (envelope)

Mi,d moment at beam or column end i

MT,j,Ed design moment in a joint j

Mj,Rd resistance of connections

Moop,Ed design bending moment due to out of plane action

Moop,Rd design bending resistance against out of plane action effect

Mpier total mass of a pier

Mp,link design value of plastic moment resistance of a link in eccentrically braced frames

Mpl,Rd design value of plastic moment resistance of a steel component

MRb,i design moment of resistance of the beam at end i

MRc,i design moment of resistance of the column at end i

MRd design moment of resistance

MRd,rock design rocking strength of the shear wall

26
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

MRd,rock,i,j design rocking strength of the jth segmented shear-wall at the ith storey including the stabilizing
effect of the vertical load

MRdw,base design moment of resistance at the base of the wall

Mstb,d,G stabilising moment due to gravity loads in the seismic design situation

N axial force

Nb,Rd design axial resistance of a beam cross sections (squash load, buckling load)

Nc,Rd design resistance of a column cross section

NC,j,Ed design compression in a joint j

NCT,BRS Eulerian critical load of the sleeve of a buckling restrained brace

NEd design axial force from the analysis for the seismic design situation

NEd,E axial force due to the design seismic action

NEd,G axial force due to the non-seismic actions in the seismic design situation

NEDD,j1 maximum axial force in energy dissipation device j in the first mode

NEDDd,j1 axial viscous damping force component in energy dissipation device j in the first mode

NEDDe,1j axial elastic force component in a viscoelastic-type energy dissipation device j in the first mode

Nf,Ed axial force in a compressed flange

Ni number of shear walls parallel to the seismic action at the ith storey

Nmax maximum number of storeys in simple masonry buildings

Npl,Rd design value of yield resistance in tension of the gross cross-section of a member in accordance
with EN 1993-1-1:2004

NT,j,Ed design tension in a joint j

Ns number of storeys of a building

Nu,link upper design resistance of a link in an eccentric bracing

Ptot total gravity load at and above a storey in the seismic design situation

Qm local forces

Rc,Rd in-plane lateral resistance corresponding to the resistance of the member to sheathing
connection in a light weight steel structure

Rd design resistance of a connection as given in the reference Eurocode

Rdi design resistance of the zone or element i

27
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Rfy plastic resistance of a dissipative member

Rfo plastic resistance of an aluminium dissipative member

Sa value of the floor acceleration spectrum

Sd (T1) ordinate of the reduced spectrum at period T1

Se ordinate of the elastic response spectrum

Sea value of Se at the ancillary element period

Sep,1 value of Se at the period of the first (fundamental) mode of the primary structure

Sep,i value of Se to the ith mode of the primary structure

Sδ seismic action index

T1 fundamental period of the structure with energy dissipation system in elastic conditions

T1 fundamental period of vibration of the building for lateral motion in the direction considered

T1,est estimate of the fundamental period of vibration of the building

TA short period cut-off of the zero-period spectral acceleration – see EN1998-1-1, 5.2.2.2(1)

Tan natural period of the ancillary element

TC upper corner period of vibration of the constant spectral acceleration range

Td1 fundamental period of the structure with energy dissipation devices when the primary seismic
elements of the main structural system reach the design displacement dDs at each storey s

Teff effective period

Teff1 effective period in the first mode

Tfm m-th mode vibration period of the main structural system in elastic conditions, exclusive of
energy dissipation system

Tm m-th mode vibration period of the structure with energy-dissipation system in elastic
conditions

Tn period of the nth mode of the structure in the considered horizontal direction

Tp,i natural period of the ith mode of the structure; Tp,1 corresponds to T1 (in s)

Tp1 fundamental period of the primary seismic elements of the main structural system in elastic
conditions, exclusive of energy dissipation system

Ts1 period that gives the maximum input energy between Td1 and 1,4Td1

Tv fundamental vibration period in the vertical direction

28
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

V shear force

Vb,Rd design shear resistance of a steel beam cross sections

Vc shear force applied to a column

Vc,Rd design shear resistance of a steel column cross sections

V’Edw design shear force of the wall in the seismic design situation as obtained from the analysis

V’Edw,1 design shear force of the wall due to the mode with the largest participating mass in the
direction of analysis of the structure as obtained from the modal response spectrum analysis

Vdys s-th storey yield shear of the energy dissipation system

VEd design shear force from the analysis in the seismic design situation

VEd,E,i,j design global shear of the jth segmented timber shear-wall at the ith storey due to seismic action

VEd,M Design shear coherent with plastic hinges present at both ends of a member

VEdw diagram of magnified shear force applied to the wall

VEdw,base design shear at the base of the wall in the seismic design situation (envelope)

VEdw,env design shear of the wall in the seismic design situation (envelope)

VEdw,top design shear at the top of the wall in the seismic design situation (envelope)

VfD1 maximum base shear that can be endured by the primary seismic elements of the main
structural system within the linearly elastic range

VfDs maximum shear that can be endured by the primary seismic elements of the main structural
system at the s-th storey within the linearly elastic range

Vfys s-th storey yield shear corresponding to the formation of a full plastic mechanism in the
primary seismic elements of the main structural system

Vi shear force in pier i

Vi,d design shear force at beam or column end i

Vp,Rd in-plane design resistance in shear of an infill panel

Vpl,Rd design value of shear resistance of a steel member

Vp,link design value of shear resistance of a link in eccentrically braced frames

VRd design shear resistance

VRd,a,i,j design lateral strength related to shear connections of the jth segmented timber shear-wall at
the ith storey

VRd,c design shear resistance of concrete without shear reinforcement

29
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

VRd,int resistance of the integrity reinforcement in the flat slab

VR,peak peak shear strength of an unreinforced masonry spandrel

VR,lim absolute maximum value of the peak shear strength VR,peak

VRd,MRF shear resistance of the moment resisting frames at the building base

VRd,sh,i,j design lateral strength related to connections between sheathing material and timber frame of
the jth shear wall at the ith storey

VRd,total shear resistance of the whole structure at the building base

VRd,walls shear resistance of the walls at the building base

Vstorey storey shear action effect

Vtot total shear at a given storey in the seismic design situation

Vwp,Ed design shear force in the web panel due to the action effects

Vwp,Rd shear resistance of the web panel

Vwb,Rd shear buckling resistance of a web panel

Wpl,y plastic section modulus

3.2.1.2 Latin lower-case symbols

an index, corresponding to the ancillary element

a slab overhang

aV velocity exponent of a velocity-dependent energy dissipation device

aCL smaller size (width) of a hole in a cross laminated timber floor panel

b cross-section width of a beam or column

b0 length of the control perimeter for punching shear resistance verification

b0C smallest dimension of the concrete core (to the centreline of the hoops)

bb cross-section width of a beam

bc cross-section width of a column

bCL length of each single panel making a shear wall; longer size (length) of a hole in a cross
laminated timber floor panel

bef effective width

beff,Rd partial effective width of the slab for the calculation of plastic resistance of composite sections

bf wall flange thickness or steel beam flange width

30
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

bint control perimeter activated by the integrity reinforcement in a flat slab

bj,ef effective joint width

bmax largest cross-sectional dimension of a column

bsp correction coefficient in the calculation of masonry spandrel strength

bw wall thickness

bw0 wall web thickness

c outstand of a steel flange of also named the side width of a steel member

cE correction factor in pushover analysis which primarily account for the higher mode effects in
elevation

cE,i correction factor cE for ith storey of the structural member

cf factor accounting for the masonry typology

cP correction factor in pushover analysis which primarily account for the torsional effects

cP,j correction factor cP for jth location of structural member in plan

cv1 coefficient for the determination of the shear resistance at the interfaces

d lateral elastic displacement of the top of the building, in m, due to the gravity loads applied in
the corresponding horizontal direction

db depth of a beam section

d* displacement of the equivalent SDOF system

dbL longitudinal bar diameter

dbL,min minimum longitudinal bar diameter

dbw hoops diameter or straight links diameter

dc depth of a section of column or of composite beam

ddg size parameter describing the crack and failure zone roughness taking account of concrete type
and its aggregate properties

dDs maximum interstorey drift that can be sustained by the primary seismic elements of the main
structural system at the s-th storey within the linearly elastic range

ddys s-th storey drift at yielding of the energy dissipation devices of this storey

de,jt value of the displacement at the jth location in the plan obtained by the linear elastic analysis
associated with the design seismic action

31
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

det value of the control displacement obtained by the linear elastic analysis associated with the
design seismic action

dfa fastener diameter

df,y yielding displacement of a structure with velocity-dependent energy dissipation devices

relative to the ground at roof level

dfys s-th storey drift corresponding to the formation of a full plastic mechanism in the primary
seismic elements of the main structural system

di1 maximum horizontal displacement at i-th floor relative to the ground in the first mode

dr design interstorey drift, evaluated as the difference of the average lateral displacements ds at
the top and bottom of the storey under consideration and calculated in accordance with 6.4.1

dr,DL design interstorey drift at DL Limit state

dr,SD design interstorey drift at SD Limit state

dr,SD interstorey drift at SD limit state

dret,i interstorey drift at the centre of mass of the i-th storey obtained by linear elastic analysis
associated with the design seismic action

droof,y yielding displacement of a structure with displacement-dependent energy dissipation devices

relative to the ground at roof level

droof1 maximum displacement relative to the ground at roof level for inelastic behaviour of the
structure with energy dissipation system, including the elastic part, in the first mode

droof1e maximum displacement relative to the ground at roof level in the first mode for a structure
with energy dissipation in the elastic range

drs1 maximum interstorey drift at the s-th storey

drt,i interstorey drifts at the centre of mass of the i-th storey which corresponds to the target
displacement associated with the considered limit state

dt,j displacement at the j-th location in the plan if the control displacement is equal to the target
displacement dt

dsp spandrel depth

dSD, displacement of a control node at which a primary pier first reaches its resistance

dv shear-resisting effective depth of the slab or drop panel

𝑑∗ displacement of a control node at which a primary pier first reaches its resistance

e length of a link in an eccentric bracing

eox distance between the centre of stiffness and the centre of mass, measured along the x direction,
which is normal to the direction of analysis y considered

32
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

fa,p design lateral load per unit area

fb normalised compressive strength fb of masonry units

fbv normalised compressive strength fb of masonry units normal to bed face

fbh normalised compressive strength fb of masonry units parallel to bed face

f 'cd increased joint concrete compressive strength due to confinement by joint reinforcement

fcd design concrete compressive strength

fck characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete

fctm mean tensile strength of concrete

fk characteristic compressive strength of masonry

fu,k characteristic ultimate tensile strength of the metal fastener

fy nominal yield strength of constructional steel

fyd design yield strength of steel reinforcement

fyk characteristic yield strength of steel reinforcement

fy,mean mean yield strength of constructional steel

fy,max specified upper value of yield strength of constructional steel

fy,dl design yield stress of the longitudinal rebars in a composite section

fy,dw design yield stress of the confining hoops in a composite section

fy,df design yield stress of the flange of the steel cross section in a composite section

fywd design yield strength of the transverse reinforcement

fywd,j yield strength of the transverse reinforcement in the joint

fk characteristic compressive strength of the masonry

fkt characteristic shear strength associated to diagonal cracking of a masonry spandrel

fu ultimate strength of steel

fvk0 characteristic initial shear strength of masonry under zero compressive stress

f0 conventional elastic strength of aluminium

h cross-section depth of a beam or column

h0 largest dimension of the concrete core to the centreline of the hoops

hb cross-section depth of a beam

33
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

hc cross-section depth of a column

hcr height of the wall critical region

hef effective height of a masonry as defined in EN 1996-1-1:2019

hj,ef effective joint depth

hmin free height of the shortest pier

hop clear height of an opening adjacent to a masonry pier

hp length of an infill wall

hpier clear height of a pier as in EN 1996-1:2019, 7.5.1.3(9)

hRB depth of reinforced concrete ring beams

hs storey height (also named interstorey height)

hs,cl clear storey height

hsp length of a spandrel

hss distance between the upper flanges of a steel profiles or the tops of floor slabs at each of the
levels above and below a splice

hw wall height

iz radius of gyration refering to the weak axis of a steel cross section

k ratio of characteristic tensile strength to yield strength of reinforcement

kbr vertical stiffness of a steel bracing

kD factor for the anchorage verification of beams reinforcement in joints, reflecting the ductility
class

kdeg strength reduction factor due to degradation under cyclic loading

kIR amplification factor that applies on seismic action for masonry infills in case of structural
irregularity in elevation

kmean ratio between the mean and the characteristic strength in static conditions

kmod modification factor for duration of load and moisture content for the strength of timber

kstif minimum value over all stories of the ratio between the horizontal stiffness of the cross
laminated timber walls and the total horizontal stiffness of the hybrid primary structure in
each main direction at the ith storey

kt factor of reduction of the design shear resistance of connectors related to the shape of profiled
steel sheeting supporting a concrete slab

34
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

kw factor accounting for the prevailing failure mode in large walls structures

ky ratio between the yield and the maximum strength of dissipative connections

l1, l2 slab spans

l0 distance between the centrelines of two walls

lb anchorage length

lc length of the boundary elements in the wall

lcl beam or column clear length

lCL width of a cross laminated timber floor panel

lcr beam or column critical region length

lf wall flange width

linfill,left,x,i length of an infill parallel to axis x situated at left of axis x

linfill,right,x,i length of an infill parallel to axis x situated at the right of axis x

lmp length of a masonry pier or wall

lop length of an opening

lp height of an infill wall

ls length of an infill panel diagonal

𝑙 , radius of gyration of floor i

lw wall length

m total mass of the building above the foundation or above the top of a rigid basement

m* mass of an equivalent SDOF system

man mass of an ancillary element

meff,j effective modal mass corresponding to the j-th horizontal direction of loading

meff1 first mode effective mass of the structure with energy dissipation system in the elastic range

mf,eff1 first mode effective mass of the main structural system in the elastic conditions, exclusive of
the energy dissipation system

mlp number of cross laminated timber panels in a segmented wall

mi mass of storey or floor or level i

ms factor for the determination of the shear magnification factor in the wall

35
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑚 mass above the s-th storey normalized by the total mass of the building

nvj number of fasteners used in the vertical joint

n value representing the extent to which the required amount of energy absorption of the
building is distributed to each storey according to the stiffness and strength of each storey

n0 modular ratio equal to Ea/Ecm

ne number of fasteners in the outer circle of a moment transmitting joint

p index corresponding to the primary structure

pA minimum ratio of the area of masonry walls in one direction

pA,min absolute minimum ratio of the area of masonry walls in one direction

pA,ref reference ratio of the area of masonry walls in one direction

ps deviation of the s-th storey seismic shear from an optimum value that would provide a even
distribution of damage among stories

Ptot total gravity load at and above the storey considered in the seismic design situation

pts coefficient that accounts for the increase in the required energy absorption capacity in a storey
s resulting from torsional effects

q behaviour factor

qa behaviour factor of an ancillary element

qD behaviour factor component accounting for the deformation capacity and energy dissipation
capacity

qD,CL default value for the reference Ductility Class of the component qD of the behaviour factor q for
the cross laminated timber primary structure

qD,Hyb value of the component qD of the behaviour factor q for a hybrid light-frame - cross laminated
timber primary structure

qD,LTF default value for the reference Ductility Class of the component qD of the behaviour factor q for
the light-frame primary structure

qoop behaviour factor for out-of-plane bending of masonry walls

qR behaviour factor component accounting for overstrength due to the redistribution of seismic
action effects in redundant structures

qS behaviour factor component accounting for overstrength due to all other source

𝑟 minimum torsional radius of the i-th floor

rx square root of the ratio of the torsional stiffness to the lateral stiffness in the y direction
(“torsional radius”)

36
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

rx,I , ry,I x component of the torsional radius (respectively y component)

s spacing of transverse shear or punching shear reinforcement

sh distance between the centre of a plastic hinge and the column axis

si displacement of storey i under horizontal unitary acceleration

sint width of the integrity bars group in a flat slab

ss ratio of the required amount of energy absorption on storey s to the required amount of energy
absorption on the first storey

t thickness

tb,f thickness of a beam flange

tc,f thickness of a column flange

tef effective thickness of a masonry wall as defined in EN 1996-1-1:2019

tf steel flange thickness

tgp thickness of a gusset plate

tp thickness of an infill panel

tpen pointside penetration length of a smooth nail

tRB width of reinforced concrete ring beams

tsp masonry spandrel thickness

tw masonry wall thickness / thickness of the web of a steel profile

twsp thickness of a supplementary web plate

uult interstorey displacement in direction x (respectively y) at the pier where the shear force is
incremented corresponding to the attainment of the ultimate rotation in any pier of the storey
along direction x (respectively y)

w gravity load per unit length applied on the shear wall in the seismic design situation

wgp effective width of a gusset plate

ws width of the compression strut in an infill panel

x distance of the element under consideration from the centre of mass of the building in plan,
measured perpendicularly to the direction of the seismic action considered

z distance along the wall height

zc plastic neutral axis depth of a composite section

37
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

zi, zj heights of the masses mi and mj above the level of application of the seismic action (foundation
or top of a rigid basement)

3.2.1.3 Greek upper-case symbols

1 first mode participation factor of a structure with energy dissipation system in the elastic range

Γi modal participation factor for the ith mode

f1 first mode participation factor of the main structural system in elastic conditions, exclusive of
the energy dissipation system

m m-th mode participation factor of a structure with energy dissipation system in the elastic
range

dj1 relative displacement between each end of the energy dissipation device measured along its
axis in the first mode

vj1 relative velocity between each end of the energy dissipation device j measured along its axis in
the first mode

ΔF1-3 impairment of strength, namely the load reduction ΔF1-3=F1-F3 when attaining a certain
deformation δ from the first to the third cycle of the same amplitude in a cyclic test performed
in accordance with EN 12512

Δφ fraction of the critical section with the maximum punching shear stress

Vmax,I maximum value of the reduction or increase V of the absolute value of the shear force in a
pier resulting from a redistribution of forces

ΔVRw difference between the shear resistance of two storey above storeys related to the quantity of
infills in each storey

ΔMEd variation of the moment in a column adjacent over one storey height

MRb sum of the design values of the moments of resistance of the beams framing the joint

MRc sum of the design values of the moments of resistance of the columns framing the joint

ƩVEd sum of the calculated seismic shears in all vertical primary seismic members of a storey

ϕij value of the ith mode shape at floor j

1 vector of first mode of vibration normalized so that its component at roof level is equal to 1

i1 component of the first mode vector (normalised so that at roof level the value is equal to 1) at
the i-th floor of the structure with energy dissipation system in the elastic range

m vector of m-th mode of vibration normalized so that its component at roof level is equal to 1

Ωd,i ratio of the design resistance Rdi to the design action effect Edi in member i or in storey i

Ωd particular value of Ωd,i selected out of all Ωd,I and applied in the design of specific parts of a
structure

38
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

 seismic action magnification factor

3.2.1.4 Greek lower-case symbols

α angle of a brace with the horizontal

α0 prevailing aspect ratio i.e. prevailing height-to-length ratio of walls

α1 value by which the horizontal seismic design action is multiplied in order to first reach the
plastic resistance in any member in the structure, while all other design actions remain
constant

αjo joint aspect ratio

SD ratio between resistance at the SD limit state and the ultimate resistance in terms of
generalised displacements

αu value by which the horizontal seismic design action is multiplied, in order to form plastic
hinges in a number of sections sufficient for the development of overall structural (plastic)
instability, while all other design actions remain constant

αult angle between the integrity bars and the flat slab plan at failure

a performance factor of ancillary element

γc partial safety factor for concrete

γCT compression strength adjustment factor in buckling restrained braces

d overstrength factor which is used for multiplication of the seismic action effects in the
diaphragm obtained from the analysis

γDL,CC performance factor for DL limit state and a Consequence Class CC

γM partial safety factor for material properties for seismic design situation

M,SD partial factors for resistance of masonry

Rd overstrength factor used for multiplication of action effect from the analysis of the design
seismic action

Rd,NC partial factors on resistance at NC limit state

Rd,SD partial factors on resistance at SD limit state

rm ratio between the expected average yield strength of steel products of a certain steel grade and
the nominal yield strength of that steel grade; for aluminium, ratio of the expected (i.e. average)
value of the conventional elastic limit 𝑓 to its design value from EN 1999-1-1

γs partial safety factors for reinforcing steel

γSB partial safety factor in the calculation of required area of masonry walls

sh factor taking into account the strain hardening effect

39
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

γSM safety margin coefficient

s,SD partial factors on resistance at SD limit state for reinforcing steel

x amplification factor for energy dissipation devices

lag phase lag angle

δ deformation (displacement, rotation)

δFmax deformation of the dissipative connection corresponding to the attainment of the maximum
load Fmax in a cyclic test performed according to EN 12512

δNC deformation at NC point of a dissipative connection under seismic loading

δSD deformation at SD point of a dissipative connection under seismic loading

δu ultimate deformation of a dissipative connection under seismic loading

δy yield deformation of a dissipative connection under seismic loading

ε shear magnification factor for walls

𝜀 total strain of the steel profile in a composite section

εcu unconfined concrete ultimate strain

𝜀 ultimate compressive strain of concrete considering confinement

loss loss factor of a viscoelastic energy-dissipation device

θ interstory drift sensitivity coefficient

e drift ratio or chord rotation of a masonry member

 i angle between the member axis at end section i and the chord line that joins the centroids of
the two end sections

j angle of inclination of energy dissipation device j to the horizontal

p plastic rotation

SD chord rotation capacity of a pier

θtot rotation capacity of strong and weak partial strength joints for moment resisting frames

u2 deformation capacity in terms of member drift at 20% drop in strength

y chord rotation at yield

θ* largest chord rotation in the shortest pier

 correction factor used in the lateral force method of analysis

40
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝜆 coefficient accounting for sensitivity of ancillary elements to interstorey drift at DL

𝜆 coefficient reflecting the limitation of drift at SD

𝜆̅ non-dimensional slenderness of columns

µ ductility of a dissipative connection under seismic loading

f displacement ductility ratio of a structure with velocity-dependent energy dissipation devices

ν strength reduction factor for cracked concrete

νd normalised axial load

E,k axial load ratio calculated as E,k =NEd/(Afk)

νG,k axial load ratio calculated as νG,k =NEd,G/(Afk)

νG,k,av average axial load ratio of a set of piers

ξa damping value of the ancillary element in % of critical damping

eff effective damping

eff1 effective damping in the first mode

effm effective damping in the m-th mode

H component of effective damping of the structure due to post-yield hysteretic behaviour of the
primary seismic elements of the main structural system

I inherent damping ratio

ξp,i damping value of the primary structure for buildings in % of critical damping

V1 component of effective damping of the first mode of the structure due to viscous dissipation of
energy by the damping system at or just below the yield displacement of the primary seismic
elements of the main structure

ρ’l longitudinal reinforcement ratio in the compression zone

ρl longitudinal reinforcement ratio

ρl,max maximum longitudinal reinforcement ratio

ρl,min minimum longitudinal reinforcement ratio

ρn factor related to the effective height as in EN 1996-1:2019, 7.5.1.3(10)

ρv,min minimum vertical reinforcement ratio in the vertical joint between precast panels relatively to
the area of grout

ρw shear reinforcement ratio

41
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

ρw,min minimum shear reinforcement ratio

ρwj transverse reinforcement ratio of the joint

σcm mean value of the concrete stress in the compression zone of the section of the wall

σEd stress level

τEd design punching shear stress for the seismic design situation

τEd,grav punching shear stress for the gravity loads design situation

τEdj joint shear stress

τRd,c design resistance of concrete to punching shear stress for members without shear
reinforcement

τRdj joint shear resistance

τRd,max maximum punching shear stress resistance of planar members with shear reinforcement

 exponent used for the modification of the 1st mode shape in dependence on structural response
characteristic

φimp strength impairment factor in a cyclic test performed in accordance with EN 12512

ψmax maximum slab rotation relatively to the slab-support connection

ωwd mechanical volumetric ratio of confining hoops

3.2.2 Abbreviations

AAC Aerated autoclaved concrete

EPPP Equivalent Energy Elasto-Plastic

GF Gypsum Fibre board

KLD Knowledge Level on Details

LVL Laminated Veneer Lumber

LVL-C Symmetrically arranged structural laminated veneer lumber comprising at least two crossband
veneers

MRF Moment Resisting Frame

OSB Oriented Strand Board

PFA Peak Floor Acceleration

SD Significant Damage limit state

SDOF Single-Degree-Of-Freedom

42
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

SWP Solid Wood Panels

1D One-dimensional

2D Two-dimensional

3D Three-dimensional

3.3 S.I. Units

(1)P S.I. Units in accordance with ISO 80000 shall be used.

(2) For calculations, the following units should be used when applicable:

— mass: kg, t

— unit mass: kg/m3, t/m3

— forces and loads: kN, kN/m, kN/m2

— unit weight: kN/m3

— stresses and strengths: Pa (= N/m2), kPa (= kN/m2), MPa (= MN/m2)

— moments (bending, etc): kNm

— acceleration: m/s2

— length m, mm

— modulus of elasticity GPa

— angle Degree, mrad

43
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

4 BASIS OF DESIGN
4.1 Building classification

(1) Consequence class CC3 should be divided into CC3-a and CC3-b according to EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.2(3).

NOTE The definitions of buildings included in CC3-a and CC3-b are given in Table 4.1 unless the National Annex or
relevant Authorities give different definitions for use in a country.

Table 4.1 — Definitions of consequence classes CC3-a and CC3-b for buildings

CC3-a Buildings whose seismic resistance is of importance in view of the consequences

associated with a collapse, e.g. schools, assembly halls, cultural institutions etc.
CC3-b Buildings of installations of vital importance for civil protection, e.g. hospitals,
fire stations, etc. and their equipment.
NOTE Buildings that house very dangerous installations or materials are generally classified as CC4, which is not
fully covered by the present standard.

(2) For the application of EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.1(4),  values should be determined.

NOTE The values of  applicable to buildings are those given in Table 4.2 (NDP) unless the National Annex or
relevant Authorities give different values for use in a country.

Table 4.2 (NDP) —  values for buildings

Consequence class (CC)

CC1 CC2 CC3-a CC3-b
 0,60 1,0 1,25 1,60

4.2 Seismic actions

(1) EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.3(3) and (4), should be applied.

NOTE 1 The values of TLS,CC according to EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.3(3), are those given in Table 4.3 (NDP), unless the
National Annex or relevant Authorities give different values for use in a country.

Table 4.3 (NDP) — Return periods of seismic action in years

Limit state Consequence class (CC)
CC1 CC2 CC3-a CC3-b
NC 800 1600 2500 5000
SD 250 475 800 1600
DL 50 60 60 100

NOTE 2 When performance factors are used according to EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.3(4), the values of LS,CC are those given
in Table 4.4 (NDP), unless the National Annex or relevant Authorities give different values for use in a country.

Table 4.4 (NDP) — Performance factors

Limit state Consequence class (CC)
(LS)
CC1 CC2 CC3-a CC3-b
NC 1,2 1,5 1,8 2,2
SD 0,8 1 1,2 1,5

44
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

DL 0,4 0,5 0,5 0,6

NOTE 3 When the OP limit state is required for CC3 buildings and their equipment, and unless the National Annex or
relevant Authorities give different values for use in a country,

— the return periods and performance factors for the structure are the same as under the DL limit state,

— the return period and performance factor for equipment are 475 years and 1 respectively.

(2) If Sv is greater than 6 m/s2, the vertical component of the seismic action, as defined in EN1998-1-
1:2019, 5.2.2.3, should be considered for the verification of the following primary or secondary structural
elements and their directly associated supporting structural elements:

horizontal or nearly horizontal structural members spanning longer than 20 m;

horizontal or nearly horizontal cantilever components longer than 5 m;

horizontal or nearly horizontal pre-stressed components;

beams supporting columns.

(3) The value of  introduced in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.1(5), is equal to 0,08 for buildings.

4.3 Compliance criteria

(1) The seismic performance of the building should be verified according to 6.

NOTE Specific rules for ''simple masonry buildings” are given in 14. By conforming to those rules, such “simple
masonry buildings” are deemed to satisfy the performance requirements of EN 1998-1-2 without analytical safety
verifications.

4.4 Characteristics of earthquake resistant buildings

4.4.1 Conceptual design

P A building structure shall be able to resist horizontal actions in any direction.

Seismic performance of a building should be considered in the early stages of conceptual design,
achieving a structural system which, with acceptable costs, satisfies the performance requirements specified
in EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.1.

NOTE Guidance for good practice is given in informative Annex A.

4.4.2 Primary and secondary seismic members

(1) A certain number of structural members (e.g. beams and/or columns) may be designated as
“secondary” seismic members (or elements), not forming part of the seismic action resisting system of the
building. The strength and stiffness of these elements against seismic actions should be neglected in the
models for seismic analysis. For them, the provisions related to primary seismic members in 10 to 15 may be
neglected.

(2) The secondary seismic members and their connections should be designed and detailed to maintain
support of gravity loads when subjected to the displacements caused by the most unfavourable seismic design
condition. Due allowance of second order effects (P- effects) in both the structure and these members should
be made in the design of these members.

45
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) The designation of some structural elements as secondary seismic members should not change the
classification of the structure from non-regular to regular as described in 4.4.3 and 4.4.4.

(4) All structural members not designated as being secondary seismic members should be taken as
primary. They should be modelled in the structural analysis in accordance with 5.1 and designed and detailed
for earthquake resistance in accordance with 10 to 15.

NOTE The primary structure is composed of the set of primary seismic members over the building. A primary
bracing is a set of primary members installed in a vertical plane at a given level of the building.

(5) The contribution of lateral stiffness of secondary elements to the total stiffness should not affect
significantly the dynamic behaviour of the structure. To fulfil this requirement, either a) or b) should be met:

a) The total contribution to lateral stiffness of all secondary seismic elements does not exceed 15% of that
of all primary seismic members.

b) Two analysis are performed: one with only the primary elements in the model, the other one including all
primary and secondary elements in the model. The most unfavourable seismic actions are taken into account
and distributed only in primary elements.

(6) The primary structure should be assigned a ductility class according to EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.4.2(3).
The ductility class should be unique for the building.

4.4.3 Torsionally flexible buildings

(1) A building should be considered torsionally flexible if the largest effective modal mass in the
corresponding horizontal direction is not that of the first or second mode, provided that possible local modes
and equipment modes are not considered.

NOTE This condition corresponds to the fact that the first mode (in at least one horizontal direction) is substantially
influenced by torsion.

(2) Buildings verifying Formula (4.1) at every storey i, with the possible exception of the highest storey,
may be considered as not being torsionally flexible.
𝑟
≥1 (4. 1)
𝑙,
where:
𝑟 is the minimum torsional radius of the i-th floor equal to the square root of the ratio of the
torsional stiffness with respect to the centre of lateral stiffness Ci (Figure 4.1) to the largest of
the floor lateral stiffnesses: 𝑟 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝑟 , , 𝑟 , ;

NOTE Annex B gives procedures to calculate 𝑟 , and 𝑟 , .

, ,
𝑙 , is the radius of gyration of floor i: 𝑙 , = ; in the case of approximately rectangular floor

with a well distributed mass, 𝑙 , may be taken as 𝑙 , = ;

𝐼 , and 𝐼 , are the mass moments of inertia of the floor around axis x and y respectively, going through
the floor centre of mass Gi;

mi is the mass of floor i;

46
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝐿 and 𝐵 are the dimensions of the rectangular floor.

𝑒 ,

𝐺 𝑒 ,

k
𝑥

Figure 4.1 — Relative position of each primary resisting element k with respect to the centre of
lateral stiffness 𝑪𝒊 and relative position of the latter with respect to the centre of mass 𝑮𝒊

4.4.4 Structural regularity

4.4.4.1 General

(1) Although not mandatory, achieving building regularity should be regarded as a good practice for the
design of earthquake resistant buildings.

NOTE Guidance for in plan regularity is given in informative Annex A, while criteria for regularity in elevation are
given in 4.4.4.2.

4.4.4.2 Regularity in elevation

(1) For a building to be categorised as being regular in elevation, it should satisfy all the conditions listed
in a) to c), considering that criteria in b) and c) apply to the structure above the top of the foundation or the
top of a rigid basement when it exists.

All primary elements, such as cores, structural walls, frames and diaphragms, provide a continuous
resisting system without interruption from the top of the foundation or the top of a rigid basement to the
top of the building or, if setbacks at different heights are present, to the top of the corresponding zone of
the building.

Both the lateral stiffness and the mass of the individual storeys remain constant or decrease gradually by
no more than 20% relative to the storey below, without abrupt changes, from the base to at least one
storey below the top storey.

the ratio of the actual storey resistance to the resistance required by the analysis does not vary by more
than 30% between adjacent storeys.

NOTE Within this context, the special aspects of masonry infilled frames are treated in 7.

47
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

5 MODELLING AND STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

5.1 Modelling
5.1.1 General

(1) The model of the building should comply with EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.2.

(2) Seismic analysis may be performed using two planar models, one for each main horizontal direction,
if the height of the single or multi-storey building does not exceed respectively 15 m or 10 m and if the floors
may be considered as rigid in their planes according to 5.1.3(6). In that case, the structural (natural) mass
eccentricity multiplied by 1,1 should be taken into account in both directions for the calculation of the seismic
action effects.

5.1.2 Masses

(1) The combination coefficients Ei in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.2.1(3), for the masses associated to variable
actions should be calculated by Formula (5.1) where  values should not be smaller than those given in
Table 5.1.

𝜓 ≥𝜙𝜓 (5.1)
Table 5.1 — Minimum values of  for calculating Ei
Type of variable action 
Categories A-C* 0,5
Other categories 1,0
* Categories as defined in EN 1991-1-1:2002

(2) When the floor and roof diaphragms or bracings of the building may be considered as being rigid in
their planes according to 5.1.3(6), the masses and the mass moments of inertia of each of those planes may
be lumped at the centre of gravity.

5.1.3 Stiffness

(1) The stiffness of secondary seismic and ancillary elements against seismic actions should be neglected.
However, when the total contribution to lateral stiffness of all lateral-force resisting secondary seismic and
ancillary elements exceeds 15% of that of the primary lateral-force resisting system, a complementary seismic
analysis with a model including all lateral-force resisting secondary and ancillary elements should be
performed and the more unfavourable seismic actions resulting from both analyses should be considered in
the verification of the primary seismic elements, neglecting the resistance of the secondary and ancillary
elements to the lateral forces.

(2) In concrete buildings, in composite steel-concrete buildings and in masonry buildings the stiffness of
the concrete and masonry primary seismic elements should be evaluated considering the effect of cracking.
For concrete elements and composite steel-concrete elements, this effect may be considered in adopting the
stiffness corresponding to the initiation of yielding of the reinforcement, considering mean values of material
properties and the presence of axial forces.

(3) Unless a more accurate analysis of the cracked elements is performed, the elastic flexural and shear
stiffness properties of concrete and masonry elements according to (2) may be taken to be equal to one-half
of the corresponding stiffness of the uncracked elements or to other fractions, if any, of the corresponding

48
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

stiffness of the uncracked elements defined in 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15.

(4) According to EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.2.1(6), infill walls which contribute significantly to the lateral
stiffness and resistance of the building should be considered.

NOTE See 7.4 for masonry infills of concrete, steel or composite frames.

(5) For non-linear analyses, the model should comply with EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.2.1 and 6.2.2.

(6) When appropriate for the application of the relevant provisionsof this standard, a floor or a roof may
be considered as being rigid in plane in a given direction if it satisfies related rules per material and structural
types in 10 to 15.

NOTE These rules are, in particular, in 10.12, 10.14.2, 10.14.5, 11.17, 13.5(4), 13.5(5), 14.4, 14.5.2.3 and 15.13.

5.2 Minimum design eccentricity in buildings

(1) In application of EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.1(10), design effects of the seismic action should consider a
minimal torsion effect about the vertical axis.

(2) In order to comply with (1), a minimal eccentricity, measured at right angle to the considered direction
i of the seismic action, should be calculated at every storey j using Formula (5.2) and should be taken into
account if it exceeds the natural eccentricity e0,i,j.

𝑒 ,, = 0,05 𝐿 , (5.2)
where Li,j is the width of the floors at the considered level j, measured at right angle to the direction i of the
seismic action considered.

NOTE 1 The purpose is to cover uncertainties in cases where the natural eccentricity is very low.

NOTE 2 Annex B gives procedures for the calculation of the natural eccentricity.

(3) When the force-based approach is used, the effects at any storey j of mass eccentricity perpendicular
to direction i should be calculated as resulting from a torsional moment Mi,j, which acts around the building
vertical axis, given by Formula (5.3).

𝑀, = 𝑒 , ×𝐹, (5.3)
where:

𝐹, is the horizontal force acting on the considered storey j in direction i;

ei,j is the maximum value of emin,i,j and e0,i,j when using planar models,

is equal to emin,i,j - e0,i,j. when using 3D models that encompass natural eccentricity.

(4) When the non-linear static analysis is used, (1) may be considered as satisfied if, in 5.3.5.3,
calculations of det and det,j comply with (2) and (3).

(5) When the response-history analysis is used, (1) may be considered as satisfied if the storey mass is
modelled in such a way that the eccentricity of the centre of mass of the storey is at least equal to emin,i,j in both
horizontal directions.

49
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

5.3 Methods of analysis

5.3.1 General

(1) Depending on the selected method, corresponding provisions in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4 to 6.6, should
be applied.

(2) The vertical component of the seismic action may be neglected in structural analysis, except in cases
in 4.2(2).

5.3.2 Behaviour factors

(1) Tables of default values of the behaviour factor given in 10 to 15 may be used for a given structural type
and a given ductility class DC. They correspond to upper bound values which should not be exceeded.

(2) For buildings which are non-regular in elevation, the ductility behaviour factor qD should not be higher
than the default value multiplied by 0,8, without being smaller than 1.

(3) If the primary structure or the regularity classification of the building in elevation is different in the two
horizontal directions and if the building is not torsionally flexible, the value of the behaviour factor q may also
be different in the two directions.

(4) If primary structures of different types or materials are used to resist the seismic action in the same
direction, the lowest value of the behaviour factor q of the different primary structures should be used.

(5) For torsionally flexible buildings, the value of the behaviour factor q should be taken as the minimum of
both horizontal directions, multiplied by 0,8, but not smaller than qs.

(6) In case the force-based approach is used, the qR factor given in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.1, may be taken as
given by Formula (5.4).

qR u /1, (5.4)

where:

1 is the value by which the horizontal seismic design action need to be multiplied in order to first
reach the plastic resistance in any member in the structure, while all other design actions
remain constant;

u is the value by which the horizontal seismic design action need to be multiplied, in order to
form plastic hinges in a number of sections sufficient for the development of overall structural
(plastic) instability, while all other design actions remain constant. Factor u may be obtained
from a nonlinear static (pushover) global analysis.

(7) For buildings which are torsionally flexible, qR should be taken equal to 1.

(8) Except when (7) applies, default values of qRgiven in 10 to 15 may be used.

NOTE Default values of qRdepend on the construction material and structural systems.

5.3.3 Lateral forces method of analysis

(1) This type of analysis should comply with EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.1 and 6.4.3. It should not be used for
buildings taller than 30 m and for buildings with T1 > min (4TC; 1,5 s).

50
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) The seismic base shear force Fb, for each horizontal direction in which the building is analysed, should
be determined using Formula (5.5).

𝐹 = 𝜆 𝑚 𝑆 (𝑇 ) (5.5)
where:

Sd (T1) is the ordinate of the reduced spectrum (EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.1) at period T1;

T1 is the fundamental period of vibration of the building for lateral motion in the direction
considered;

m is the total mass of the building, above the foundation or above the top of a rigid basement, in
accordance with 5.1.2;

 = 0,85 if T1 < min (2 TC; 1,2 s) and the building has more than two storeys,

= 1,0 otherwise.

NOTE The correction factor  accounts for the fact that in buildings with at least three storeys and translational
degrees of freedom in each horizontal direction, the effective modal mass of the 1st (fundamental) mode is smaller, on
average by 15%, than the total building mass.

(3) The fundamental period of vibration period T1 of the building and the associated mode shape may be
calculated using approximate methods of structural dynamics or taken as given by Formula (5.6).

∑
𝑇 =2 (5.6)
∑
where:

mi is the i-th storey mass calculated in accordance with 5.1.2,

si is the displacement in meters of i-th storey under the acceleration of gravity, 9,81 m/s², applied
on the structure in the considered horizontal direction.

(4) The seismic action effects should be determined by applying horizontal forces Fi in each horizontal
direction, according to Formula (5.7).

𝐹 =𝐹 ∑
(5.7)
with the same notations as in (3).

5.3.4 Response spectrum analysis

(1) Response spectrum analysis should comply with EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.1 and 6.4.3. It may be applied
to any building.

5.3.5 Non-linear static analysis

5.3.5.1 General

(1) Non-linear static analysis should conform to EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.5.

(2) The seismic action should be applied with both positive and negative signs and the maximum seismic

51
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

action effects resulting from the two cases should be used.

(3) In low-rise masonry buildings in which the bending moment in walls is low in comparison to shear
action effects, each storey may be analysed independently.

(4) The condition in (3) may be considered as satisfied if the number of storeys is no more than three and
if the average aspect (height to width) ratio of structural walls is smaller than 1,0.

5.3.5.2 Construction of the capacity curve

(1) EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.5.1 and 6.5.2, should be applied, with the additional provisions given in (2) to
(5).

(2) The 𝛷 value in EN1998-1-1:2019, Formula (6.19), should be defined at the i-th storey of the building.

(3) If the building satisfies the condition for applying the lateral force method of analysis given in 5.3.3(1),
the values of 𝛷 may be based on the displacement corresponding to the horizontal forces defined in Formula
(5.6).

(4) The lateral force 𝐹 given by EN1998-1-1:2019, Formula (6.20), should be applied at the location of
the centre of masses at each storey.

(5) The control displacement dn as in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.5.2(4), should be the displacement at the
centre of mass of the slab at the top of the building or at the slab one storey below if the top storey has less
than 50% of the mass of the storey below.

5.3.5.3 Seismic action effects on structure and structural elements

THIS PARAGRAPH SHOULD BE REVIEWED TO BE FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH PART 1-1

(1) EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.3.1(1) and 6.5.1(2), may be considered as satisfied if the effects obtained from
the pushover analysis are corrected as given in a) and b):

a) displacements at different locations in the building are multiplied by the correction factor cP,j, defined in
(5), where j is the index denoting the location of the structural member in plan;

b) other (generalised) deformations, such as storey drifts and rotations, and (generalised) stresses, are
multiplied by the product of correction factors cP,j and cE,i, defined in (6) and (8). The corrected
(generalised) stress should not be larger than that determined from the (generalised) stress –
(generalised) deformation diagram.

NOTE The correction factors cP,j and cE,i primarily account, respectively, for the torsional effects and higher mode
effects in elevation. The values of cP,j vary in plan, while the values of cE,i vary in elevation of the building.

(2) Correction factor cP,i may be taken equal to 1 if, in both horizontal directions and at each storey, the
natural eccentricity e0,i,j is not greater than 0,10 𝐿 , , where 𝐿 , is defined in 5.2(2).

(3) Correction factor cE,i may be taken equal to 1 if conditions a) to c) are met:

the height of a building is smaller than 25 m;

T1 < min (4TC; 1,5 s);

52
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

the resistance of any storey is not less than 80% of that required by the force-based approach, using the
value of q applicable to the structure under consideration.

(4) The values of the corrections factors cP,j and cE,i should be calculated as the ratio between normalised
deformations obtained from the linear elastic analysis and the pushover analysis. The normalised
deformations from linear elastic analysis should be calculated by the response spectrum method (5.3.3) with
consideration of the effects of torsion due to minimal eccentricity (5.2) and the effects of combination of
horizontal components of the seismic action (EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.3). If conditions for the use of the lateral
force method are met, it may be used for the calculation of the correction factors.

NOTE It is assumed that correction factors cPj and cEi account also for the effects of torsion due to minimal
eccentricity and those due to the combination of horizontal components of the seismic action if they are calculated as
defined in (4). In this case, cdt = 1 (EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.5.4(7)).

(5) For each structural member, the correction factor cP,j should be calculated for each direction of lateral
forces for pushover analysis.

(6) Unless (7) is applied, the value of cP,j should be determined from Formula (5.8).

,
𝑐 , = ≥1 (5.8)
,
where:

j is the index denoting the location of the structural member in plan;

det, det,j are the values of the control displacement from the linear elastic analysis for the design seismic
action and the corresponding displacement at location j in plan, respectively;

dt, dt,j are the target displacements associated with the considered limit state and the corresponding
displacement at location j in plan.

(7) If the structural system is not torsionally flexible (see 5.2) and if, in both horizontal directions i and
at each storey , the two components of the natural eccentricity, e0x,j and e0y,j are not greater than 0,10 Lij, the
correction factor cP,j may be taken from Formula (5.9).

𝑐 = 1 + 0,6 (5.9)

where:

Lij is defined in 5.2(2);

x is the distance of the element j under consideration from the centre of mass of the building in
plan, measured perpendicularly to the direction of the seismic action considered;

Le is the distance between the two-outermost lateral load resisting elements, measured
perpendicularly to the direction of the seismic action considered.

(8) Correction factor cE,i should be calculated for each direction of lateral forces for pushover analysis from
Formula (5.10).

,
𝑐 , = ≥1 (5.0)
,

where:

53
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

i is the index denoting the storey of the structural member;

dt and det as in (6);

dret,i, is the interstorey drift at the centre of mass of the i-th storey from the linear elastic analysis
for the design seismic action, in the direction under consideration;

drt,i is the interstorey drift at the centre of mass of the i-th storey which corresponds to the target
displacement due to the design seismic action, in the direction under consideration.

5.3.6 Response-history analysis

(1) Response-history analysis should conform to EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.6.

54
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

6 VERIFICATION OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS TO LIMIT STATES

6.1 General

(1) Provisions of EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.7, should be applied, taking into account the Limit State under
consideration and the associated seismic action.

(2) For buildings of consequence classes other than CC3-b (see Table 7.1) the verifications prescribed in
6.2 and 6.3 may be considered as satisfied if conditions a) and b) are met:

EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.3, 4.4.2 (7) and 6.7, are met and, if its height is taller than 20 m, the building is
regular in elevation.

The shear force over the entire structure at the base level of the building (foundation or top of a rigid
basement) in the seismic design situation is less than the corresponding shear force in other design
situations, based on a linear analysis.

NOTE For example, this can be the case in regions were the wind action can be higher than the seismic action.

(3) For the application of (2), in case of the force-based approach, the base shear force should be
calculated with a behaviour factor equal to qS.

(4) For geotechnical structures as defined in EN1998-5:2019, values of acceptable displacements, given
in a) to e) as appropriate, should be determined at the Limit States considered for the building, and their effects
taken into account in the verification of the building and of the geotechnical structures:

residual ground displacements of slopes;

settlements of soils under cyclic loading or liquefaction;

foundation sliding displacement;

residual rotation and settlement of the foundation;

permanent displacements of retaining structures.

NOTE EN1998-5:2019 provides rules for geotechnical structures to comply with these limitations.

6.2 Verification of Significant Damage (SD) limit state

6.2.1 General

(1) In application of EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.7.1, the SD limit state may be considered as verified if the
conditions in 6.2.2 to 6.2.10 are met.

(2) In the primary structure of the building, for all ductility classes, global plastic mechanisms should
be controlled through limitation of drift (6.2.5) and of second order effects (6.2.4) and through capacity
design (6.2.6 and 6.2.7).

6.2.2 Equilibrium condition

(1) In application of EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.7.1(4)P, the building structure should be stable - including
overturning or sliding - in the seismic design situation.

55
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

6.2.3 Resistance conditions

(1) EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.7.1 and 6.7.2, should be applied, supplemented as given in a) and b):

For the calculation of action effects, Ed, redistribution of bending moments in accordance with EN 1992-
1-1, EN 1993-1 and EN 1994-1-1 may be applied.

The design resistance, Rd should be calculated in accordance with the rules specific to the material used
(in terms of the characteristic values of material properties fk and partial factor M) and in accordance with
the mechanical models which relate to the specific type of structural system, as given in 10 to 15 of this
part and in other relevant Eurocode parts. In application of EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.7.2(4), the resistance
conditions should be expressed in terms either of generalised stresses (internal forces) or of generalised
strains such as interstorey drifts, or member chord rotations.

(2) It should be verified that the structural elements comply with the design provisions that are required
by the selected ductility class.

NOTE These provisions are given in 10 to 15. They aim in particular at preventing from brittle mechanisms and
instability in critical regions. They complement provisions of the corresponding material Eurocode.

(3) Fatigue resistance verification may be neglected under the seismic design situation.

6.2.4 Control of second order effects

(1) Second-order effects (P- effects) may be neglected if the condition given by Formula (6.1) is fulfilled
in all storeys.

𝜃 ≤ 0,10 (6.1)
where:

 is the interstorey drift sensitivity coefficient, given by Formula (6.2), unless a different value is
given for a specific material in the relevant clause;

,
𝜃= (6.2)
Ptot is the total gravity load at and above the storey, due to the masses considered in the seismic
analysis of the structure, in accordance with 5.1.2(1) and EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.2.1(4);

dr,SD is the design interstorey drift, defined as the difference of the average lateral displacements ds
at the top and bottom of the storey under consideration and calculated in accordance with
EN1998-1-1:2019, Formula (6.8), for the force-based approach and using 6.5.2 for the
displacement-based approach, at the SD Limit State;

Vtot is the total storey shear in the seismic design situation;

hs is the interstorey height;

qS and qR are the behaviour factor components according to EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.1(1), specified in 10
to 15 for structural materials.

(2) If 0,1 <   0,2, the second-order effects may approximately be taken into account by multiplying the
relevant seismic action effects by a factor equal to 1/ (1 - ).

(3) If 0,2 <   0,3 at any storey, the second order effects should be taken into account directly by using

56
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

the established methods of second-order analysis which take account of geometric non-linearity, i.e. consider
the equilibrium conditions on the deformed structure.

(4) The value of  should not exceed 0,3.

6.2.5 Limitation of interstorey drift

(1) Interstorey drift should be limited at any storey of the building by complying with the condition given
by Formula (6.3).

𝑑 , ≤𝜆 ℎ (6.3)
where:

dr,SD and hs are defined in 6.2.4(1);

λs is a coefficient reflecting the limitation of drift, given in 10.4.4, 11.6.3, 12.6.3, 13.6.2 and
15.6.3 for the different structural types.

NOTE Drift limitation at SD applies to all ductility classes.

6.2.6 Capacity design in DC2

(1) Specific material related provisions defined in 10 to 15 should be satisfied.

(2) Capacity design provisions defined in 10 to 15 should be satisfied.

NOTE These provisions are meant to avoid brittle failure modes and obtain the hierarchy of resistance of the various
structural components within specific zones like the most stressed zones of the structure or the connections between
structural elements.

(3) Dissipative zones may be in the structural members or in the connections.

(4) If dissipative zones are in the structural members, the non-dissipative zones and the connections of
the dissipative zones to the rest of the structure should have sufficient overstrength to allow the development
of cyclic yielding in the dissipative zones.

(5) If dissipative zones are in the connections, the connected members should have sufficient
overstrength to allow the development of cyclic yielding in the connections.

(6) In multi-storey buildings, formation of a soft storey plastic mechanism should be prevented.

NOTE 1 Such a mechanism might entail excessive local ductility demands in the columns of the soft storey.

NOTE 2 The q factors given in this standard are valid if and only if (6) is fulfilled.

(7) For concrete wall systems, concrete wall-equivalent dual systems with concrete or steel structures (6)
may be considered satisfied.

(8) For seismic action not greater than values given in 10 to 15, (6) may be considered satisfied for
systems other than in (7) by compliance with drift limitations given in 6.2.5(1).

(9) In case a force-based approach is used, (6) may be considered satisfied with moment resisting frame
systems and moment frame-equivalent dual systems if the condition given by Formula (6.4) is satisfied in all

57
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

storeys of the moment resisting frame.

𝑞 𝑞 𝑉 (𝑞 − 𝑞 )𝑑 , ≤ 2∑ 𝑀 , , (𝑁 ) × 𝜃 (6.4)
where:

qS , qR and Vtot have the same definition as in 6.2.4;

i is the index of a column in the storey

n is the number of columns in the storey

de,top is the displacement calculated under the reduced spectrum associated to the design seismic
action at the level of the roof top under the design seismic action;

MRd,ci(NEd) is the moment of resistance of column section i where plastic hinge can occur, at the storey
under consideration, taking into account the influence of the axial force NEd in that same section
under the gravity load due to masses considered in the seismic analysis of the structure, as
given in 5.1.2;

𝜃 is the the minimum value of the plastic part of the ultimate chord rotation among all column
sections i where a plastic hinge can occur at a given level, as given in EN1998-1-1:2019, 7.

(10) In case a displacement-based approach is used, (6) may be considered satisfied for moment resisting
frame systems and moment frame-equivalent dual systems, if 𝜃 nowhere exceeds the plastic part of the
chord rotation of column hinges.

6.2.7 Capacity design in DC3

(1) 6.2.6(1) to (7) should be applied.

(2) Structures with dissipative zones should be designed such that yielding or cracking or local buckling or other
phenomena due to hysteretic behaviour do not affect the overall stability of the structure.

(3) Unless otherwise specified in 10 to 15, to satisfy 6.2.6(6) in moment resisting frame buildings, including
moment resisting frame equivalent ones as defined in 10.1.2(1), with two or more storeys, the condition given
by Formula (6.5) should be satisfied at all joints of primary or secondary seismic beams with primary seismic
columns.

∑𝑀 ≥ 1,3 ∑ 𝑀 (6.5)
where:

MRc is the sum of the design absolute values of the moments of resistance of the columns framing the joint.
The minimum absolute value of column moments of resistance within the range of column axial forces
produced by the seismic design situation should be used in Formula (6.2);

MRb is the sum of the design absolute values of the moments of resistance of the beams framing the joint.
When partial strength connections are used, the moments of resistance of these connections are considered
in the calculation of MRb.

NOTE A rigorous interpretation of Formula (6.5) requires calculation of the moments at the centre of the joint. These
moments correspond to development of the design values of the moments of resistance of the columns or beams at the

58
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

outside faces of the joint, plus a suitable allowance for moments due to shears at the joint faces. However, the loss in
accuracy is minor and this approximation is acceptable.

(4) Formula (6.5) should be satisfied in two orthogonal vertical planes of bending, which, in buildings with frames
arranged in two orthogonal directions, are defined by these two directions. It should be satisfied for both
directions (positive and negative) of action of the beam moments around the joint, with the column moments
always opposing the beam moments. If the structural system is a moment resisting frame or equivalent to a
moment resisting frame in only one of its two main horizontal directions, Formula (6.5) should be satisfied
only within the vertical plane through that direction.

(5) (3) and (4) may be neglected at the top level of multi-storey buildings.

6.2.8 Resistance of horizontal diaphragms and bracings

(1) Diaphragms and bracings in horizontal planes and quasi horizontal planes (roofs) should be able to
transmit, with appropriate overstrength when required, the effects of the design seismic action to the lateral
load-resisting systems to which they are connected.

NOTE Design provisions for diaphragms are given in 10 to 15 according to the structural material used.

(2) (1) may be considered as satisfied if, for the relevant resistance verifications, the seismic action effects
in the diaphragm or bracing obtained from the analysis are multiplied by an overstrength factor d given in
Table 6.1.

Table 6.1 — d values for diaphragms

Diaphragm failure mode DC1 DC2 DC3
Ductile 1,0 1,1 1,2
Brittle 1,0 1,2 1,5

6.2.9 Resistance of foundations

(1)P The foundation system shall conform to EN 1998-5:2019, 9, to EN 1997-1 and to EN 1997-3.

6.2.10 Seismic joint condition

(1) Buildings should be protected from earthquake-induced pounding with adjacent structures or
between structurally independent units of the same building.

(2) (1) may be considered satisfied if a) or b) applies:

for buildings, or structurally independent units, that do not belong to the same property, if the distance
from the property line to the potential points of impact is not less than the maximum horizontal
displacement of the building at the corresponding level, calculated in accordance with EN1998-1-1:2019,
Formula (6.8), for the force-based approach or EN1998-1-1:2019, Formula (6.29), for the displacement-
based approach;

for buildings, or structurally independent units, belonging to the same property, if the distance between
them is not less than the square root of the sum of the squares (SRSS) of the maximum horizontal
displacements of the two buildings or units at the corresponding level, calculated in accordance with
EN1998-1-1:2019, Formula (6.8), for the force-based approach or EN1998-1-1:2019, Formula (6.29), for
the displacement-based approach.

59
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) If the floor elevations of the building or independent unit under design are the same as those of the
adjacent building or unit, the above referred minimum distance may be multiplied by a factor of 0,7.

6.2.11 Design of transfer zones to DC2 and DC3

NOTE The design provisions for the structural elements of transfer zones are given in 6.2.11. Some specific material
related provisions are given in 10.5.2, 11.18, 12.16 and 13.16.

(1)P A transfer zone shall be designed to resist the action effects including a magnification factor.

(2) The magnification factor in (1) should be applied to the seismic action effects from the analysis which
enter in the calculation of the design forces in the transfer zone and should be taken equal to 1,25.

(3) The effect of the vertical component of earthquake should be taken into account in the design of the
structural elements of transfer zones.

(4) There may be more than one transfer zone in a building.

(5) The model of the structure for analysis should be in 3D with explicit modelling of the structural
elements of the transfer zone and below it.

(6) The analysis should be a 3D response spectrum analysis or a 3D non-linear dynamic analysis.

(7) Buildings in which the interstorey drift at a storey of the primary structure in the transfer zone or
below is more than two (2) times greater than the interstorey drift of the first storey above the transfer zone,
dr,SD, as defined in 6.2.3(3), should be designed to DC2 with q ≤ 2.

(8) The resistance to the bending moment, shear and vertical forces at the bottom of an interrupted wall
or column at any level may be provided by one or more of the following:

• the diaphragm at the level of the interruption and a beam placed in the plane of the wall which is
supported by columns placed in the same plane; a couple of horizontal forces in two diaphragms, one
at the bottom level of the interrupted element and the other one at an upper level; columns placed in
the plane of the interrupted wall.
(9) In a force–based approach, the design action effects in structural elements in the height of a transfer
zone under the interrupted element, like beams, columns, walls and diaphragms, should be calculated using
Formula (6.6).

𝐸 =𝐸 , " + "1,25 𝛺 𝐸 , with 𝛺 ≤ 𝑞 (6.6)

where:
EF,G is the action effect of the non-seismic actions in the transfer zone included in the combination
of actions for the seismic design situation (EN 1990:2017, 9.4.5.5);

EF,E is the action effect of the design seismic action in the transfer zone calculated from the seismic
analysis of the structure;

Ωd is the ratio of the design resistance Rdi to the action effect in the seismic design situation Edi at
the dissipative zone of element i of the structure above the transfer zone which has the highest
influence on the effect E in the elements of the transfer zone under consideration -with Ωd = 1
in large reinforced concrete walls (see 10.9);

"+" means combined with + or – sign.

60
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

NOTE Formula (6.6) includes the magnification factor 1,25 introduced in (2).

(10) If the action effects on the transfer zone are determined using the value of the behaviour factor q
applicable to ductility class DC1, no capacity design considerations in accordance with (10) are needed and
the action effects in the transfer zone should be calculated with Formula (6.6) with Ωd taken equal to 1,0

(11) Condition given by Formula (6.5) may be neglected in beams of the transfer zone.

6.2.12 Verification of underground basements

(1) Underground basements should be verified under the action of surrounding soil in the seismic design
situation, considering, for each component of the seismic action, the most unfavourable effects resulting from
the application of the action as defined in (2) in one direction or the opposite.

(2) The soil pressures due to the seismic action on the windward side of the basement should be as given
in EN1998-5:2019, 10.3.3.

(3) The verification of overall stability of the building and resistance of soil should be made as specified
in EN1998-5:2019, 9.3.

(4) The verification of the underground structures of the basement should take into account the effects of
actions resulting from (2) and (3).

6.3 Verification to other limit states

6.3.1 Verification to Near Collapse (NC) limit state

(1) In case the NC limit state is used, it should be verified that, under the specified seismic action, the
deformation limits or other relevant limits given in EN 1998-3:2019 are not exceeded.

6.3.2 Verification of Damage Limitation (DL) limit state

6.3.2.1 General

(1) The Damage Limitation (DL) limit state may be considered as verified when the interstorey drifts due
to the seismic action associated to the DL limit state are limited in accordance with 6.3.2.2.

(2) Additional damage limitation verifications may be required for buildings of consequence class CC3-b,
specific to the building under consideration.

6.3.2.2 NOTE The additional verifications at DL limit state applied to specified

buildings can be found in the National Annex or can be provided by the
relevant Authorities or agreed for a specific project by the relevant
parties.Limitation of interstorey drift

(1) Unless otherwise specified in 10 to 15, the condition given by Formula (6.7) should be satisfied.

𝑑 , ≤𝜆 ℎ (6.7)
where:

dr,DL has a similar definition as dr,SD in 6.2.4(1), but calculated for the DL Limit state;

hs is the storey height;

61
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

λns coefficient accounting for sensitivity of ancillary elements to interstorey drift:

= 0,0025 for buildings having ancillary elements of unreinforced masonry units of Group 4
attached to the structure,

= 0,0045 for buildings having ancillary elements of brittle materials attached to the structure,
in particular unreinforced masonry with clay units of Groups 1, 2 or 3 with a thickness greater
than 200mm and the normalised mean compressive strength fb ≥ 3MPa,

= 0,0075 for buildings having ductile ancillary elements,

= 0,010 for buildings having ancillary elements fixed in a way so as not to interfere with
structural deformations.

6.3.3 Verification of Operational (OP) limit state

(1) Criteria applicable to the building structure in addition to EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.7.3(5), should be
derived from the analysis of the components the operability of which is required as well as from the analysis
of their supporting systems.

NOTE For a specific project, the relevant parties can specify all ancillary components of interest in the verification,
together with a description of relevant damage states for each component and the associated provisions.

62
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

7 ANCILLARY ELEMENTS
7.1 General

(1)P Ancillary elements of buildings (e.g. claddings, parapets, gables, antennas, mechanical appendages and
equipment, curtain walls, partitions, railings), ceilings that might, in case of failure, pose risks to human
life or affect the main structure of the building or the services of facilities, shall, together with their
supports, be verified to resist the design seismic action.

(2) For application of (1)P, the seismic analysis should be based on a realistic model of the relevant
structures and on an appropriate floor response spectra derived from the response of the supporting
structural elements of the main seismic resisting system.

NOTE The use of floor spectra assumes that the dynamic interaction between the structure and the ancillary
component is negligible. Structural interaction can occur when the ratio of the ancillary component mass, ma, to floor
mass, mi, is larger than 0,01.

7.2 Verification at Significant Damage (SD) limit state

7.2.1 Seismic action effects

(1) The ancillary elements, as well as their connections to the structure, should be verified for the seismic
design situation in terms of acceleration and displacement.

(2) The local transfer of action effects to the structure due to the fastening of ancillary elements and their
influence on the seismic response should be accounted for.

NOTE The provisions for fastenings to concrete are given in EN1992-4:2017.

(3) The seismic action effects on ancillary elements may be determined by applying to them a horizontal
force Fap defined by Formula (7.1).

Fap = γan man San/qan (7.1)

where:
Fap is the horizontal seismic force, acting at the centre of mass of the ancillary element in the most
unfavourable direction;

man is the mass of the element;

San is the value in the floor acceleration spectrum, see (4);

an is the performance factor of the element, see 7.2.2;

qan is the behaviour factor of the ancillary element, given in 7.3.2.

(4) The floor acceleration spectral values San should be determined for two horizontal directions.

(5) In case of ancillary elements with uniformly distributed mass (e.g. partition wall), the resultant force
Fap may be distributed proportionally to the mass or its deformed shape, as this is affected by the boundary
and connecting conditions to the structure.

(6) In case the ancillary element can be considered as rigid as given in (7), the San value at floor j, San,j, in
the direction under consideration may be determined by Formula (7.2).

63
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑆 , = 𝛤 ≥ (7.2)

where:

H is the height of the building above the foundations

zj is the height of floor j above the foundation or the top of a rigid basement

S, FA are values associated to the response elastic spectrum associated to the limit state under
consideration, defined in EN1998-1-1:2019, 5.2.2.2

Γ1 is the participation factor of the fundamental mode in the direction under consideration, which
may be taken from Formula (7.3);

𝛤 = (7.3)

Ns is the number of storeys.

(7) The ancillary element may be considered rigid in cases a) or b):

a) The element is one of the following:

— cantilevering parapets or ornamentations

— signs or billboards

— chimneys or masts not taller than 4 m.

b) If Tan  TA

where

TA is the short period cut-off of the zero-period spectral acceleration–see EN1998-1-1, 5.2.2.2(1)

Tan is the natural period of the ancillary element

(8) In other cases, San should be calculated using Annex C.

(9) If the displacement-based approach is used for the analysis of the structure, the ratio S/qD in
Formula (7.2) should be replaced by the acceleration of the inelastic primary structure determined as Say =
F*y/m*, where F*y and m* are given in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.5.3. In case of hardening after yielding, the force at
yield should be used as F*y instead of the force at the target displacement.

7.2.2 Performance factors

(1) The performance factor an of ancillary elements should not be smaller than 1,0.

NOTE Except for elements participating to safety systems in (2), the value of an is 1,0, unless the National Annex or
the relevant Authorities or the relevant parties for a specific project set greater values.

(2) For anchorage elements of machinery or for equipment participating to safety systems, the
performance factor an should be greater than in (1).

64
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

NOTE The value of a for this type of elements is 1,5, unless the National Annex or the relevant Authorities or the
relevant parties for a specific project set different values.

7.2.3 Behaviour factors of ancillary elements

(1) The value of the behaviour factor qan of an ancillary element should not be higher than the
corresponding value given in Table 7.1.

Table 7.2: Values of qan for ancillary elements

Type of non-structural element qan

Cantilevering parapets or ornamentations

Signs and billboards
1,0
Chimneys, masts and tanks on legs acting as unbraced cantilevers along more than one
half of their total height
Exterior and interior walls
Partitions and facades
Chimneys, masts and tanks on legs acting as unbraced cantilevers along less than one half 2,0
of their total height, or braced or guyed to the structure at or above their centre of mass
Anchorage elements for permanent cabinets and book stacks supported by the floor
Anchorage elements for false (suspended) ceilings and light fixtures

7.3 Verification at Near Collapse (NC) limit state

(1) In case the NC limit state is used, it should be verified that, under the specified seismic action, the
deformation limits or other relevant limits given in EN 1998-3 are not exceeded.

7.4 Masonry infilled frames

7.4.1 Scope

(1) Masonry infills may be classified as interacting or non-interacting; interacting infills may be ductile or
non-ductile.

(2) Infills which satisfy a) and b) should be classified as interacting:

a) infills constructed after the hardening of the concrete of the frame or the assembly of the steel or
composite frame;
b) infills in contact with the frame without separation joints.
(3) Interacting masonry infills should be considered as non-ductile unless they satisfy (4).

(4) Infills with horizontal or vertical sliding planes along which a displacement capacity exist may be
considered ductile.

(5) Masonry infills with only vertical or only horizontal reinforcement or with reinforcement mesh in a
layer of plaster should be considered as unreinforced.

(6) For concrete wall systems, the in-plane interaction with the masonry infills may be neglected.

65
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

7.4.2 Basis of design with interacting infills in DC1, DC2 and DC3

(1) Interacting infills may be realised with unreinforced, confined and reinforced masonry as defined in
EN1996-1-1.

(2) The effects of interacting infills on the global response of a structure and the local effects due to the
frame-infill-interaction like local additional shear in columns should be taken into account.

NOTE In comparison to bare frames, the presence of interacting infills increases the stiffness of structures, reduces
their periods and modifies the action effects. An unsymmetrical distribution of interacting infills in plan in an otherwise
symmetrical structure induces torsion and an increase in the ductility demand in elements of the frame.. An irregular
distribution of interacting infills in elevation can increase the action effects in the non-infilled storeys. The lack of strength
and/or the limited drift capacity of interacting infills can cause premature failure of some of them so that the subsequent
distribution of effective infills can correspond to an irregularity in elevation or to a more unsymmetrical distribution of
stiffness in plan.

(3) The effects on the global response of a structure of in plan non-symmetrical layout of interacting infills
should be taken into account.

(4) The effects on the global response of a structure of irregularity in elevation due to interacting infills
should be taken into account.

(5) It should be verified that the in-plane drift demand on interacting infills is smaller than their drift
capacity.

(6) It should be verified that the out-of-plane seismic action effects on interacting infills are smaller than
their out-of-plane resistance and deformation capacity.

NOTE 7.4.3.7 gives the rules corresponding to (5) and (6).

7.4.3 Interacting infills in DC1, DC2 and DC3

7.4.3.1 Design with model of the bare frame only in DC1, DC2 and DC3

(1) Regular structures with regular infill distribution may be analysed with a bare frame model and the
inter-storey drift demand may be calculated with a simplified procedure taking into account the infills only
for their masses, layout and type. The drift limitations in (5) should be satisfied.

NOTE Annex K gives a simplified procedure for regular RC structures with infills regularly distributed in elevation.

(2) Structures with infilled frames may be considered regular in plan if at any storey both ratios Rsym,x and
Rsym,y are smaller than 0,2, where Rsym,x is given by Formula (7.4) and Rsym,y by a similar Formula, replacing x
by y.

Rsym,x = {ABS [(Σlinfill,left,x,i di2 - Σlinfill,right,x,i di2 )]} / (Σlinfill,left,x,i di2 + Σlinfill,right,x,i di2) (7.4)
where:

linfill,left,x,i is the length of an infill parallel to axis x situated at left of axis x;

linfill,right,x,i is the length of an infill parallel to axis x situated at the right of axis x;

66
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

axis x is the axis in direction x passing through the centre of rigidity of the bare frame;

di is the distance from infill i to axis x.

NOTE The ratios Rsym,x and Rsym,y characterise the regularity in plan of the interacting infills layout.

(3) Structures with infilled frames for which the ratios Rsym,x and Rsym,y are both smaller than 0,4 may be
analysed with a bare frame model; the seismic design action effects should be taken as the calculated ones
amplified by 1,3 and the design inter-storey drift demand as those calculated as in (1) amplified by 1,3. The
drift limitations in (5) should be satisfied.

(4) The analysis of structures with infilled frames for which one of the ratios Rsym,x or Rsym,y is greater than
0,4 should conform to 7.4.3.2.

(5) The calculated inter-storey drift, dr,SD and dr,DL as defined in 6.2.4(1) should not be greater than the
limits at SD and at DL given in Table 7.2.

NOTE (5) is meant to protect infills from premature failure, to prevent the structural irregularities induced by infill
failure and to protect human lives.

Table 7.3— Limits of interstorey drift in % in buildings with masonry infills

Masonry Type Drift Drift limits Drift

limits at DL [%] limits at
at IO [%] SD [%]
Ductile masonry infills 0,38 0,75 2,00
Unreinforced masonry with clay units in Groups 0,23 0,45 1,40
1,2 or 3 with a thickness ≥ 200 mm and fk ≥ 3MPa
Unreinforced masonry with units of Group 4 0,13 0,25 0,90

(6) For units of unreinforced masonry other than those in Table 7.2, values of drift justified by tests may
be used.

(7) In case of infills with openings, the limits of drift given in Table 7.2 should be reduced.

(8) The reduction required in (7) may be taken equal to 30%.

(9) With confined and reinforced masonry infills or in the case of insertion of vertical or horizontal
reinforcement in the masonry panel or in the case of insertion of a reinforcement mesh in the plaster, the
values in Table 7.2 may be increased by a factor not greater than 1,20.

(10) If the total horizontal cross-sectional area of infills is reduced by more than 30% in one or more
consecutive storeys compared to the storey below or above, the increase of the seismic action effects in the
vertical elements of the storey where the reduction takes place should be taken into account.

(11) (10) may be implemented by multiplying the seismic action effects calculated in the storey where
infills are reduced by a factor KIR given by Formula (7.5).

KIR = (1+ΔVRw/ƩVEd) ≤ q (7.5)

where:

67
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

ΔVRw is the difference between the resistance of the storey above storey i which contains the largest
quantity of infills and the resistance of the storey i under consideration, the resistance of a
storey being the sum of the shear resistance of infills (see Equation 7.13) at that storey”

ƩVEd is the sum of the calculated seismic shears in all vertical primary seismic members of storey i.

q is the behaviour factor used in the design of the structure

(12) If Formula (7.5) leads to a magnification factor KIR smaller than 1,1, the amplification of the calculated
action effects may be neglected.

(13) In (11), the resistance of an infill panel with one or more openings may be calculated as the resistance
of a panel without openings, multiplied by factor ρop given by Formula (7.11).

(14) In (1) and (11) infill panels with one or more openings should be neglected if the ratio of the sum of
the lateral areas of openings to the total lateral area of the infill is greater than 0,4.

NOTE Panels with openings have a very limited strength and stiffness. Overestimating the stiffness of a panel with
openings induce wrong estimates of periods, torsion effects, etc.

7.4.3.2 Design with model of the interaction between frame and infills in DC1,
DC2 and DC3

(1) The inter-storey drift demand in an infilled frame should be calculated considering the frame for the
structure and the infills for their masses and stiffness.

(2) 7.4.3.1(5), (6), (7), (8), (9), (13) and (14) should be applied.

(3) In a linear elastic analysis, each infill may be modelled as a strut having the elastic modulus of the
infilled masonry, the thickness tp of the infill and a width ws as given by Formula (7.6).

ws = 0,25 ls (7.6)

where ls is the length of the panel diagonal.

NOTE A single concentric strut framing into beam-column joints and with the same stiffness in tension and
compression can be used to model the two diagonals of infilled panels and calculate their effect on global deformation
and action effects in structural members, but not their local effects like local additional shear in columns where
compression struts are supported. The local effects can be taken into account with 7.4.3.4 but they could also be obtained
directly in a model in which the eccentricity of struts to the intersection of the beam and column axis is represented.

7.4.3.3 Analysis of out-of-plane action effects on infills in DC1, DC2 and DC3

(1) The out-of-plane seismic action effect should be calculated using 7.2.1.

(2) The design lateral load per unit area fa,p may be calculated using Formula (7.7).

fa,p = Fa,p/hp lp (7.7)

where:

Fa,p is the horizontal seismic force applied at the centre of the infill wall calculated as in 7.2.1(3);

hp is the length of the infill wall;

68
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

lp is the height of the infill wall.

7.4.3.4 Design at SD limit state of concrete columns adjacent to infills in DC1, DC2
and DC3

(1) In DC1, the entire length of columns surrounding infills should be considered as a critical region and
10.6.3.2 for critical regions of columns in DC2 should be applied.

(2) In DC2 and DC3, the entire length of ground floor columns surrounding infills should be considered as
a critical region and 10.6.3.2 for critical regions of columns should be applied.

(3) In DC2 and DC3, if an infill extends over the entire height of an adjacent column and there is no infill
on the other side of that column (e.g. a corner column), the entire clear height of the column should be
considered as a critical region and (1) should be applied as a minimum.

NOTE The explicit calculation of the shear effect due to the infill required by (5) can be more demanding than (2)
and (3) and then it overrules (2) and (3).

(4) The length lc of a column over which the diagonal strut force of the infill is applied may be taken from
Formula (7.8).

𝑙 = 𝑤 /𝑐𝑜𝑠𝛼 (7.8)
where:

ws is the width of the strut defined by Formula (7.6);

α is the angle between the infill panel diagonal and the horizontal (beam).

(5) In DC2 and DC3, if an infill extends on the entire clear height lcl of the adjacent columns, the top and
bottom of these columns should be designed to resist over a height lc, as defined in (4), a shear force VEd,infill
given by Formula (7.9).

VEd,infill = min(Vp,Rd; Vi,d) (7.9)

where:
Vp,Rd is the horizontal component of the strut force of the infill, assumed to be equal to the horizontal
resistance in shear of the infill panel as given by Formula (7.10);

Vi,d is the shear force calculated according to 10.6.2 assuming that the overstrength flexural
capacity of the column, γrdMRc,i develops at the two ends of the contact length lc.

(6) In DC2 and DC3, if the height of an infill is smaller than the clear height of the adjacent column, a) to
d) should be applied:

as a minimum, the entire height of the column should be considered a critical region and 10.6.3.2 for
critical regions should be applied;

(5) and Formula (7.19) should be applied with the column shear force Vi,d calculated according to 10.6.2,
assuming that the overstrength flexural capacity of the column γRd MRc,i develops over the ends of the
length lc of the column not in contact with the infills;

If the height of the opening is smaller than 1,5hc, the shear action effect should be resisted by diagonal
reinforcement over the length of the opening extended of hc into the column.

69
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

7.4.3.5 Design at SD limit state of steel columns adjacent to infills in DC1, DC2 and
DC3

(1) If an infill extends on the entire clear height lcl of the adjacent columns, the top and bottom of these
columns should be designed to resist over a height lc as defined by Formula (7.8) a design shear force VEd,infill
taken equal to the sum of Vp,Rd as given by Formula (7.10) and the design shear force VEd calculated according
to Formula (11.2) in DC1 and DC2 and according to Formula (11.3) in DC3.

(2) If the height of an infill is smaller than the clear height of the adjacent column, the whole length of the
column should be designed to resist the shear force VEd,infill defined in (1).

7.4.3.6 Design at SD limit state of composite columns in DC1, DC2 and DC3

(1) 7.4.3.5(1) and (2) should be applied with VEd according to 12.8.5(1) in DC1 and DC2 and according
to 12.8.5(2) in DC3.

7.4.3.7 Design of interacting infills at SD limit state

(1) Interacting infills should be designed to resist to the maximum in-plane and to the maximum out-of-
plane action effects” taken separately.

(2) The drift capacity of interacting infills should not be smaller than the calculated action effects.

(3) The resistance of panels should be greater than the calculated action effects.

(4) The in-plane design resistance in shear Vp,Rd of an infill panel without openings may be taken from
Formula (7.10).

𝑉 , =𝑡 𝑙 𝑓 (7.10)

where:
fvk0 is the characteristic initial shear strength of masonry panel under zero vertical compression

tp is the infill panel thickness

lp is the infill panel length

(5) The in-plane design shear resistance of a masonry infill panel with an opening may be calculated as
the product of the design shear resistance Vp,Rd of an infill panel without opening from Formula (7.10) and
factor ρop from Formula (7.11).

ρop = a exp (bαa) + c exp(dαl) (7.11)

where:

αa = lophop / lp hp is the ratio of the opening's area to that of the infill panel

αl = lop / lp is the ratio of the length of the opening to the infill panel length

hp is the infill panel heigth;

lop is the length of the opening

hop is the height of the opening

70
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

a, b, c and d are coefficient which should be taken from Table 7.3 for unreinforced, partially reinforced
and reinforced openings (see Figure 7.1).

Table 7.3 — Coefficients a, b, c and d for the calculationation of the shear resistance of panels with
openings

Type of opening a b c d
Non reinforced 0,55 - 0,035 0,44 - 0,025
Partially reinforced 0,58 - 0,030 0,42 - 0,020
Reinforced 0,63 - 0,020 0,40 -0,010

Not reinforced Partially reinforced Reinforced

Figure 7.1 — Types of reinforcement of infills around openings

(6) The design lateral load (out-of-plane) per unit area fa calculated according to 7.4.3.3(1) and (2) should
not exceed the design lateral (out-of-plane) resistance.

(7) The design lateral (out-of-plane) resistance may be taken as 0,5 times the flexural or the arching effect
resistance as in EN1996-1-1: 8.4.2 or 8.4.3.

NOTE The factor 0,5 takes into account the reduction in resistance due to the interaction between in-plane and out-of-
plane action effects. More sophisticated methods relating the reduction to the drift demand are available.

(8) Connections of infill wall to the bounding frame distributed regularly along the infill perimeter should
be designed to resist the resultant Fa of lateral action effect.

NOTE Some measures can reduce the risk of brittle failure of infills and of out-of-plane collapse of slender panels, in
particular if their slenderness ratio greater than 15. It may be light wire meshes anchored on the faces of the wall; cement-
based mortar/plasters reinforced by multi-directional textiles applied to the masonry panel; wall ties fixed to the
columns and cast into the bedding planes; reinforced masonry; trimmed edges of the openings with belts and posts.

(9) Values of the design lateral resistance of the infill corresponding to special reinforcement techniques

71
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

and greater than those in EN1996-1-1:2019 may be used if they have been established by tests.

NOTE Tests are described in TS-XXX which gives a loading protocol and acceptance criteria.

7.4.3.8 Non-linear analysis of frames with interacting infills

(1) Non-linear analysis should conform to 5.3.5.

NOTE 1 In non-linear analysis, the in-plane response of masonry infills can be modelled in various ways, from detailed
micro-modelling to simple macro-modelling, like for example by diagonal single elements or multi-strut elements. Annex
Q presents a simplified model with single strut elements.

NOTE 2 With interacting infills, the additional local shear in the columns can be evaluated directly using eccentric struts
or, indirectly, considering the horizontal component of the axial action in concentric struts.

7.4.4 Basis of design for non-interacting infills

(1) The design of non-interacting infills should be such that their contribution to the lateral stiffness and
resistance of the structure against seismic actions may be neglected.

(2) The analysis of the structure should be made considering a bare frame structure. Infills should be
considered only for their mass.

(3) The out-of-plane and in-plane seismic action effect on infills should be taken into account.

7.4.5 Design provisions for non-interacting infills

7.4.5.1 In plane design provisions

(1) A gap between bounding frame and infill panels should be provided to prevent interaction between
infill and frame. This gap should be greater than the sum of the interstorey displacement demand at SD limit
state of the bare frame and the thickness of the material used to fill the gap. depending on the characteristics
of material in the gap so that the contribution of the infills is in accordance with 7.4.4(1).

(2) The material used to fill the gaps should be such that the contribution of the infills is in accordance
with 7.4.4(1).

(3) (2) may be considered satisfied if the closure of the gap is realised under a force which is not greater
than 20% of the shear resistance of the adjacent columns.

NOTE Adequately soft materials are available to satisfy (2) or (3).

7.4.5.2 Out-of-plane design provisions

(1) The design out-of-plane load per unit area fa calculated according to 7.4.3.3(1) and 7.4.3.3 (2) should
conform to 7.4.3.7(6).

(2) 7.4.3.7(9) may be applied.

(3) The connections of infill wall to the bounding frame should be distributed regularly along the infill
perimeter, or on parts of it, either laterally or on top.

(4) The connections should be designed to resist the resultant Fa,p of lateral action effect as given in
7.4.3.3(2).

72
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(5) The connections should not induce local failure of the infill walls due to stress concentrations in the
bricks or blocks.

(6) The connections should accommodate the design interstorey drift at SD.

7.5 Structures with claddings

7.5.1 Basis of design

(1) Claddings connection systems may be either isostatic or integrated.

(2) The seismic analysis of structures with cladding panels and integrated connections should consider
their influence on the global behaviour of the structure.

(3) Out-of-plane collapse of claddings should be prevented.

(4) Hammering between adjacent panels and between panels and the structure should be prevented.

7.5.2 Analysis

7.5.2.1 Analysis applicable to structures with any cladding systems

(1) EN1998-1-1, 6, should be applied.

(2) 10.14.4 should be applied to precast concrete cladding panels.

(3) The out-of-plane seismic action effect should be calculated according to 7.2.1.

(4) The design lateral load per unit area fa may be calculated using Formula (7.7).

7.5.2.2 Analysis of structures with isostatic arrangements of wall panel

connections, applicable to DC1, DC2 and DC3

(1) The analysis may refer to the frame system alone.

(2) If the wall panels are introduced as structural members in the model, they may be modelled as
prismatic elements with their weight distributed along their axis.

(3) If the wall panels are introduced as masses in the model, their total mass M should be added to that of
the members restraining them.

(4) Cladding panels may rock if 7.5.3.1(3) and 7.5.3.2 are satisfied.

7.5.2.3 Analysis of structures with integrated panels and non-dissipative panel

connections, applicable to DC1 and DC2

(1) The model for the analysis should include the cladding panels and their connections to the frame and
to other panels.

(2) The stiffness of the connections may be taken into account in the model.

(3) Walls panels may be modelled by means of plate elements or beam-column elements.

73
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

7.5.2.4 Analysis of structures with integrated panels and dissipative panel

connections, applicable to DC3

(1) The analysis of structures with integrated panels and dissipative panel connections should be non-
linear.

(2) The panel connections should be represented by their constitutive laws.

7.5.3 Cladding panels

7.5.3.1 Design provisions applicable to all types of cladding panels

(1) The out of plane resistance of claddings should be greater than the calculated action effects in bending
and shear due to the design out of plane force per unit area fa calculated according to according to 7.4.3.3(2)
and using Formula (7.10).

(2) The resistance of claddings to in-plane forces should be greater than the calculated action effects.

(3) The resistance and deformation capacity of the connections should be 1,25 times greater than the
calculated action effects.

(4) Friction due to compression forces other than by prestressing should be neglected in the evaluation
of the resistance of connections to in-plane and out-of-plane forces.

NOTE Additional rules specific to steel and timber cladding panels in lightweight steel structures are given in
11.14.4 and 11.14.5. Additional rules specific to light-frame timber structures with wood-based cladding panels or with
other types of sheathing material panels are given in 13.8.1.

7.5.3.2 Design provisions for cladding panels with isostatic connection systems

NOTE In isostatic systems, action effects in the cladding and in the connections are determined by gravity and inertia
forces; they do not depend on relative displacements between the supporting structure and the cladding. Thermal
expansion is unrestrained. In precast concrete structures, isostatic arrangements are often used for both horizontal and
vertical panels.

(1) Isostatic connection systems may consist of pinned, seated and sliding connection devices or by a
combination of those.

NOTE Different concepts correspond to an isostatic connection of a cladding to a structure. If the cladding is
connected by a single hinge, it is a pendulum; connected by two hinges, it is a cantilever cladding; connected by two
special hinges which allow, besides rotation, a free move upwards but not downwards, it is a rocking cladding; connected
by one hinge and one sliding support, it is a beam cladding, either sitting or hanging.

(2) Sliding devices should allow free alternate displacements in both directions with negligible reactions.

(3) The design of sliding connections should be based on the displacement between the main structure
and the claddings and comply with 7.5.3.1(3).

(4) Installation of sliding devices should keep positioning deviations within the admissible linear and
angular tolerances of the joint.

(5) Compatibility of displacements at the corners of a building where orthogonal panels are jointed, with
or without interposed angle elements, should be verified.

74
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

7.5.3.3 Design provisions for interacting cladding panels

NOTE 1 Integrated arrangement are recommended mainly for vertical panels. In case of horizontal panels, integrated
connections applied to the columns can induce significant shear forces in the columns, which can reduce their ductility.

NOTE 2 There are different integrated fastening schemes. Vertical panels connected to beams by two bottom and two
top connections, each restraining horizontal and vertical displacement, realize a doubly fixed panel. A hinged-fixed panel
can be realised by means of two bottom connections restraining horizontal and vertical displacement and two top
connections restraining horizontal displacement and allowing vertical free displacements .

(1) Connections of integrated panels may be dissipative. Their effectiveness should be confirmed by
appropriate tests.

NOTE Tests are described in TS-XXX which gives a loading protocol and acceptance criteria.

7.6 Partitions
7.6.1 Basis of design

(1) P Out of plane collapse of partitions shall be prevented at SD limit state.

(2) The connections of partitions to the structure should resist seismic action effects.

7.6.2 Analysis

(1) 7.5.3.1 should be applied to structures with partitions.

7.6.3 Design provisions for partitions

(1) 7.5.4.1 should be applied.

(2) For masonry partitions, 14.7.1 should be applied.

75
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

8 BASE ISOLATED BUILDINGS

8.1 Scope

(1) 8 should be used for the design of seismically fully isolated buildings in which the isolation system,
located below the main mass of the structure, aims at reducing the seismic response of the lateral force
resisting system.

NOTE 8 does not cover passive energy dissipation systems that are not arranged on a single interface but are
distributed over several storeys or levels of the structure. These are covered in 9.

8.2 Basis of design

8.2.1 Compliance criteria

(1) The design of base isolated buildings should comply with EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.4, with additional rules
given in 8.2 of this standard.

(2) The rules given in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.8, should be satisfied.

8.2.2 Control of undesirable movements

(1) To minimise torsional effects, the effective stiffness centre and the centre of damping of the isolation
system should be as close as possible to the projection of the centre of the superstructure mass on the isolation
interface.

(2) To minimise different behaviour of isolators, the compressive stress induced in them by the
permanent actions should be as uniform as possible.

(3) Devices should be fixed to the superstructure and the substructure by means of mechanical anchors.
Anchorages should be in accordance with EN 1992-4, and reliably ductile over any brittle failure modes.

(4) The isolation system should be designed so that shocks and potential torsional movements are
controlled by appropriate measures.

(5) (4) may be considered to be satisfied if potential shock effects are avoided through suitable devices
(e.g. dampers, shock-absorbers, etc.).

8.2.3 Control of differential seismic ground motions

(1) The structural elements located above and below the isolation interface should be sufficiently rigid
both horizontally and vertically, so that the effects of differential seismic ground displacements are minimised.

(2) In buildings, (1) may be considered as satisfied if conditions a) and b) are met:

A rigid diaphragm is provided above and under the isolation system, consisting of a reinforced concrete
slab or a grid of tie-beams, designed taking into account all relevant local and global modes of buckling.
This rigid diaphragm is not necessary if the structure consists of rigid boxed parts.

The devices constituting the isolation system are fixed at both ends to the rigid diaphragms defined in a),
either directly or, if not practicable, by means of vertical elements, the relative horizontal displacement of
which in the seismic design situation should be less than 5% of the relative displacement of the isolation
system.

76
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

8.2.4 Control of displacements relative to surrounding ground and constructions

(1) Sufficient space should be provided between the isolated superstructure and the surrounding ground
or constructions, to allow its displacement in all directions in the seismic design situation, taking into account
the amplification factor x on displacement.

8.3 Structural analysis

8.3.1 General

(1) Analysis methods in EN1998-1-1, 6.8.5, may be applied as appropriate.

(2) Torsional effects about the vertical axis should be taken into account.

(3) In buildings of consequence classes CC1 or CC2, mean values of physical and mechanical properties of
isolators may be used, provided that extreme (maximum or minimum) values do not differ by more than 15%
from the mean values.

8.3.2 Fundamental-mode equivalent linear response-spectrum analysis

(1) If conditions a) to e) in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.8.5.3(2), and conditions a) to g) below are met,

fundamental-mode equivalent linear response-spectrum analysis may be used, in which the horizontal
displacements and the torsional movement about the vertical axis are considered, but the substructures and
the superstructures are assumed to behave rigidly.

the conditions for vicinity to well identified seismically active faults according to EN1998-1-1:2019,
5.1.1(5), do not apply;

the largest dimension of the superstructure in plan is not greater than 50 m;

all devices are located above elements of the substructure which support vertical loads;

the site is of category A or B;

NOTE EN1998-1-1:2019, 5.2.1, gives the categorisation of sites. When the site is softer than A or B, there may be
vertical displacement and rocking that require more refined modelling including Soil-Structure Interaction (see EN1998-
5, 8.1).

the effective period Teff defined in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.8.5.2(5), satisfies Formula (8.1).

3𝑇 ≤ 𝑇 ≤3𝑠 (8. 1)
where:

Teff is the effective vibration period calculated from the effective stiffness defined in EN1998-1-
1:2019, 6.8.5.2(3);

Tf is the fundamental period of the superstructure assuming a fixed base (estimated through a
simplified expression, e.g. Formula (5.5));

the ratio between the vertical and the horizontal stiffness of the isolation system satisfies Formula (8.2).

𝐾
≥ 150 (8. 2)
𝐾
where 𝐾 is defined in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.8.5.2(3).

77
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

the fundamental period in the vertical direction, TV, given by Formula (8.3), is not longer than 0,1 s.

𝑀
𝑇 = 2𝜋 (8. 3)
𝐾
(2) Displacements at every point of the structure should be calculated combining the translational and
torsional rotation displacements. This should apply for the evaluation of the effective stiffness of each isolator.

(3) The inertial forces and moments should be taken into account for the verification of the isolators and
their connections, and of the substructures and the superstructures.

8.4 Verification of Significant Damage Limit State

(1)P The substructure shall be verified under the inertia forces directly applied to it and the forces and
moments transmitted to it by the isolation system.

(2) Safety verifications regarding equilibrium and resistance in the substructure and in the superstructure
should be performed in accordance with 6.

(3) The structural elements of the substructure and the superstructure may be designed as non-
dissipative. Ductility class 1 (DC 1) may be adopted for them. Capacity design and global or local ductility
conditions may be neglected.

(4) The resistance condition of the structural elements of the substructure and the superstructure may be
satisfied taking into account seismic action effects divided by a behaviour factor q = 1,5.

(5) Depending on the type of device, the resistance of the isolators and their connections to the
substructure and superstructure should be verified at the SD Limit State in terms of either a) or b):

in terms of forces, taking into account the maximum and minimum vertical forces due to non-seismic
actions, as well as maximum possible vertical and horizontal forces due to the seismic action, including
overturning effects;

in terms of total relative horizontal displacement between lower and upper faces of the isolator. The total
horizontal displacement should include the deformation due to the design seismic action and the effects
of shrinkage, creep, temperature and post tensioning (if the superstructure is prestressed).

NOTE The reliability factor x defined in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.8.2.2, applies to forces and displacements.

(6) In buildings, ancillary elements should be analysed in accordance with 7.2, with due consideration to
the dynamic effects of the isolation.

78
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

9 BUILDINGS WITH ENERGY DISSIPATION SYSTEMS

9.1 Scope

(1) 9 should be applied to the design of building structures with passive energy dissipation devices
classified as displacement dependent or velocity dependent.

NOTE 1 Two types of displacement-dependent energy dissipation devices are covered: (i) devices that exhibit rigid
plastic behaviour; and (ii) devices that exhibit multilinear hysteresis.

NOTE 2 Two types of velocity-dependent energy dissipation devices are covered: (i) viscoelastic (solid and fluid)
devices; and (ii) viscous (fluid) devices.

(2) The response of displacement-dependent energy dissipation devices should be independent of

velocity and frequency of excitation.

NOTE 1 The force-displacement relationship of a displacement-dependent energy dissipation device with rigid plastic
behaviour changes its shape only if loaded above its yield force, and then deforms at approximately constant force.

NOTE 2 A displacement-dependent energy dissipation device with multilinear hysteresis deforms according to a
linear elastic force-displacement relation characterized by an elastic stiffness ke below the yield force, and then deforms
following plastic branches with stiffness smaller than ke.

9.2 Basis of design

9.2.1 Compliance criteria

(1) If not otherwise specified, the seismic performance of the structure with an energy dissipation system
should be verified according to EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.4.

(2) The rules given in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.8, should be satisfied.

9.2.2 Main structural system

(1) The primary seismic elements of the main structural system should conform to one of the types
covered in 10 to 15.

(2) The primary seismic elements of the main structural system should provide a complete lateral load
path; the main structural system should maintain support of the gravity loading when subjected to the
displacements caused by the most unfavourable seismic design condition.

NOTE The main structural system includes both primary and secondary structural elements.

9.2.3 Energy dissipation system

NOTE This standard does not cover the systems where conditions given in 9.2.3 are not met.

(1) The yield displacement of displacement-dependent energy dissipation devices installed in a storey, in
the direction under consideration, should not be greater than 0,4 times the yield displacement of the primary
seismic elements of the main structural system at the same storey.

(2) The yield resistance to shear of displacement-dependent energy dissipation devices installed in a
storey, in the direction under consideration, should not be greater than the maximum storey resistance to
shear of the primary seismic elements of the main structural system at the same storey.

79
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) All structural elements of the energy dissipation system, exclusive of the elements that are common
with the main structural system and exclusive of the energy dissipation devices, should remain in the elastic
domain for the action effects of the design seismic action magnified by 1,5.

9.2.4 Control of torsional effects

(1) The in-plan distribution of energy dissipation devices should provide torsional resistance and
stiffness.

NOTE Layouts of energy dissipation devices close to the periphery of the building are more effective.

9.3 Structural analysis

9.3.1 General

(1) The model should conform to 5.1 for the structural system, to EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.8.2, and to 9.3 of
this standard.

(2) The method described in 9.3.2 may be applied when the conditions in 9.3.2.1(1) are met.

(3) The method described in 9.3.3 may be applied when the conditions in 9.3.3.1(1) are met.

(4) The method described in 9.3.4 may always be applied.

9.3.2 Non-linear response spectrum analysis

9.3.2.1 General

(1) The non-linear response spectrum analysis defined in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.8.5.4 may be used for
analysis and design of building structures with velocity-dependent energy dissipation devices.

(2) The non-linear response spectrum analysis may be used for analysis and design provided that all the
conditions in a) to c) are satisfied:

The floor diaphragms of the buildings are rigid in their planes in accordance with 5.1.2(2).

In each direction, the energy-dissipation system has at least two energy dissipation devices in each storey,
arranged in accordance with 9.2.4.

All storeys of the building above ground level have energy dissipation devices of the same type (viscous
or viscoelastic), all of them should have similar velocity exponent a and similar loss factor loss and, in case
of viscoelastic type energy dissipation devices, a = 1.

(3) If one of the conditions a) to c) in (2) is not fulfilled, a time-history analysis should be used.

(4) At SD limit state, the amount of energy that can be dissipated by the primary seismic elements of the
main structural system on each storey k before it reaches the SD limit state should be greater than the
maximum energy dissipation demand on the main structural system at the k-storey under the design seismic
action.

(5) (4) may be considered as satisfied if conditions a) to c) are met:

in DC3, the primary seismic elements of the main structural system meet the global ductility conditions
given in 6.2.7;

80
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

the primary seismic elements of the main structural system meet the material dependent provisions to be
categorised as ductility class DC1, DC2 or DC3;

the displacement ductility ratio f, where f is given by Formula (9.1) and calculated in accordance with
Annex D, D.1, does not exceed the highest qD behaviour factor that can be assigned to the primary seismic
elements of the main structural system to meet the provisions of material dependent Clauses.

𝑑
𝜇 = (9. 1)
𝑑
where:

droof 1 is the maximum horizontal displacement relative to the ground at roof level for the first mode;

𝑑 is a horizontal displacement at yield which takes different values (given in Annex D, D.1)
according to the type of energy dissipation system.

(6) The amount of energy that can be dissipated by the energy dissipation devices installed on each storey
k before one of them reaches the SD limit state should be greater than the maximum energy dissipation
demand on the energy dissipation system at the k-th storey under the design seismic action.

(7) (6) may be considered as satisfied if the energy dissipation capacity of the energy dissipation devices
installed on each storey k when any energy dissipation device on the same storey attains its SD limit state,
evaluated in accordance with EN 15129, is greater than the maximum energy dissipation demand given by
Formula (9.2).

1 𝑇
𝑚 𝑆 (𝑇 , 5%) 𝜂(𝑇 , 𝜉 ) (9. 2)
2 2𝜋
where:

Ts1 is a period that gives the maximum value of [Ts1S(Ts1,5%)(Ts1,I)] between T1,e and 1,4T1,e

T1,e is the fundamental period of the structure with energy dissipation system in elastic conditions,
in the direction under consideration;

m is the total mass of the building;

Se(1,4T1,e , 5%) is the spectral acceleration value of the 5% damped elastic response spectrum given in
EN1998-1-1:2019, 5.2.2.2(1), corresponding to a period equal to 1,4 times the fundamental
period T1,e;

(1,4T1,e , I) is the damping correction factor given by EN1998-1-1:2019, 5.2.2.2(12), corresponding to a
period equal to 1,4 times the fundamental period T1,e and to the inherent damping ratio I
defined in Annex D, D.2.2.

NOTE The factor 1,4 takes into account the lengthening of the fundamental period of the structure when it undergoes
plastic deformations.

(8) Every velocity-dependent device with non-negligible stiffness (e.g. viscoelastic energy dissipation
devices) should be modelled with an effective stiffness corresponding to the amplitude and predominant
period of its response.

81
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(9) The seismic action effects in the primary seismic elements of the main structural system should be
calculated for both the upper-bound and lower-bound properties of the energy dissipation devices in three
distinct stages: stage of maximum displacement, stage of maximum velocity, stage of maximum acceleration.

NOTE The design value of a seismic action effect EE in primary elements of the main structural system is the
maximum among EE,max.disp, EE,max.vel and EE,max.accel obtained after combination of the corresponding effects of the seismic
components.

9.3.2.2 Response in the first mode

9.3.2.2.1 Elastic response

(1) The maximum displacement relative to the ground at roof level corresponding to the elastic behaviour
of the structure with energy dissipation system should be calculated using Formula (9.3).

𝑑 =𝛤𝑆 𝑇 , , 5% 𝜂 𝑇 , , 𝜉 𝑇 , ⁄𝑇 +𝜉 (9. 3)
where:

T1,e as in 9.3.2.1(7);

Tp1 is the fundamental period of the primary seismic elements of the main structural system in
elastic conditions, exclusive of energy dissipation system;

1 is the first mode participation factor of the structure with energy dissipation system in the
elastic range;

I is the component of effective damping of the structure due to inherent dissipation of energy by
the primary seismic elements of the main structural system, exclusive of the energy dissipation
system, at or just below its yield displacement, I should be calculated according to Annex D,
D.2.2;

V1 is the component of effective damping of the first mode of vibration of the structure due to
viscous dissipation of energy by the damping system, at or just below the yield displacement
of the primary seismic elements of the main structural system, V1 should be calculated
according to Annex D, D.2.2;

SDe (T1,e, 5%) is the spectral displacement value of the 5% damped elastic displacement response spectrum
given in EN1998-1-1:2019, 5.2.2.2(13), corresponding to period T1,e

(T1,e , I +V1) is the value of the damping correction factor given in EN1998-1-1:2019, 5.2.2.2(12),
corresponding to period T1,e and damping ratio (I +V1).

9.3.2.2.2 Inelastic response

(1) The maximum displacement relative to the ground at roof level for inelastic behaviour of the structure
with energy dissipation system, including the elastic part, should be calculated using Formula (9.4).

𝑑 = 𝛤 𝑆 (𝑇 , 5%) 𝜂(𝑇 ,𝜉 ) (9. 4)

where:

SDe (Teff 1,5%) is the spectral displacement value of the 5% damped elastic displacement response spectrum
given in EN1998-1-1:2019, 5.2.2.2(13), at period Teff 1;

82
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(Teff 1,eff 1) is the value of the damping correction factor given in 5.2.2.2(12), corresponding to the period
Teff 1 and damping ratio eff 1.

(2) The base shear of the structure with energy dissipation system at roof displacement droof1 may be
obtained by either a) or b):

By summing i) the base shear Vfy1 associated with the formation of a plastic mechanism in the primary
seismic elements of the main structural system, obtained with a pattern of loads proportional to first
mode, and ii) the base shear exerted by the viscoelastic dampers corresponding to the roof displacement
droof 1 given in (1).

NOTE Vfy 1 obtained by a plastic analysis and the base shear force sustained by the elastic component of the
viscoelastic dampers for the roof displacement droof 1 are both calculated assuming a displacement according to the first
mode.

Conducting a pushover analysis on a numerical model that includes the primary seismic elements of the
main structural system and the storage stiffness Kk,j of the viscoelastic-type energy dissipation devices
evaluated at the fundamental period T1.

NOTE Kk,j = G’ sf where G’ is the storage shear moduli of the damper and sf is a shape factor, both provided by the
producer of the damper according to EN15129.

(3) If, for the roof displacement droof 1, the base shear of the structure with energy dissipation system in
the direction under consideration, is less than 0,95Vb1max or larger than 1,05Vb1max, where Vb1max is given by
Formula (9.5), an iterative procedure should be applied by varying droof 1.

𝑉 =𝑚 𝑆 (𝑇 , 5%) 𝜂(𝑇 ,𝜉 ) (9.5)

where:

meff 1 is the first mode effective mass of the structure with energy dissipation system in the elastic
range;

Se(Teff 1, 5%) is the spectral acceleration value of the 5% damped elastic acceleration response spectrum
given in EN1998-1-1:2019, 5.2.2.2(1), corresponding to period Teff 1.

NOTE To obtain the response in the first mode, the structure is idealised with an equivalent SDOF system of period
Teff 1 and damping ratio eff 1. Teff 1 is associated with a secant stiffness keff determined from the capacity curve of the
structure determined as described in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.5.2, with the control node located at roof level. droof 1 is the
(target) displacement of the capacity curve associated with keff. The iteration is needed due to the fact that Teff 1 and eff 1
depend on the ductility ratio f.

9.3.2.2.3 Maximum response displacement

(1) The maximum horizontal displacements at i-th floor relative to the ground, in the direction under
consideration, should be calculated with Formula (9.6).

𝑑 = max {𝑑 ,𝑑 }𝜙 (9. 6)
where:

i1 is the component of the first mode vector 1 at the i-th floor of the structure with energy
dissipation system in the elastic range; 1 should be normalised so that at roof level the value
is unity;

droof1e is defined in 9.3.2.2.1(1).

83
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) The design lateral force at i-th floor in the direction under consideration should be calculated using
Formula (9.7).

𝐹 = 𝑚 𝜙 𝛤 𝑆 (𝑇 , 5%) 𝜂(𝑇 ,𝜉 )/𝑞 𝑞 (9. 7)

where:

mi is the mass of level i;

qR and qS are behaviour factor components of the main structural system.

NOTE The forces given by Formula (9.7) are used to calculate the contribution of the first mode to the design value
of the action effects in the primary seismic elements of the main structural system at the stage of maximum displacement
(see 9.3.2.4 (1)).

(3) The axial elastic force component Nej1 in a viscoelastic-type energy dissipation device j installed in the
k-th storey should be calculated using Formula (9.8).

𝑁 = 𝐾 , Δ𝑑 (9. 8)
where:

dj1 is the relative displacement of the two ends of the energy dissipation device measured along
its axis;

Kk,j is the axial elastic storage stiffness component of the viscoelastic energy dissipation device j
installed at the k-th storey, corresponding to the first mode of vibration.

NOTE The elastic forces in the viscoelastic dampers given by Formula (9.8) are used in conjunction with Formula
(9.11) to determine the maximum forces in the dampers. These maximum forces are used to verify the damper.

9.3.2.2.4 Maximum response velocity

(1) The maximum horizontal velocity at a given floor relative to the ground should be calculated by
multiplying the maximum horizontal displacement relative to the ground at the same floor di1 given by
Formula (9.6) by (2/Teff 1) and by the correction factor for velocity CFV given by Formula (9.9).

−𝑇
𝐶𝐹𝑉 = 0,88 + 1,25 𝜉 − (0,29 + 1,63 𝜉 ) exp ≥1 (9. 9)
0,75 + 1,53 𝜉
(2) The axial viscous damping force component in energy dissipation device j, Nvj1, should be determined
by Formula (9.10).

Nvj1=Cj vaVj1 (9.10)

where:

vj1 is the relative velocity between each end of the energy dissipation device j measured along its
axis; it is obtained multiplying dj1 given in 9.3.2.2.3(3) by (2/Teff 1) and by the correction
factor CFV given by Formula (9.9);

aV is the velocity exponent of the velocity-dependent energy dissipation devices, provided by the
producer of the device;

Cj is the damping coefficient of the velocity-dependent energy dissipation device j, provided by

the producer of the device.

84
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) The maximum axial force Nj1 in energy dissipation device j should be calculated using Formula (9.11)
where loss is the loss factor of viscoelastic energy dissipation devices.

Nj1 = cos(tan-1loss) Nej1+ sin(tan-1loss) Nvj1 (9.11)

where Nej1 and Nvj1 are given by Formulas (9.8) and (9.10) respectively.

NOTE 1 In viscous-type energy dissipation devices Nej1 = 0 and sin(tan-1loss) = 1.

NOTE 2 loss is provided by the producer of the damping device.

9.3.2.2.5 Maximum response acceleration

(1) The design value of a seismic action effect at stage of maximum acceleration EEi,max.accel in the direction
under consideration should be obtained weighting the responses at stages of maximum displacement and of
maximum velocity according to Formula (9.12).

𝐸 , , = 𝐶𝐹 × 𝐸 , , + 𝐶𝐹 × 𝐸 , , (9. 12)

where:

CF1 is given by Formulae (9.13) to (9.16).

if f  1 and a  0,25: CF1 = 1 (9.13)

if f  1 and 0,25 < a: CF1 = coslag  0,5 (9.14)
if 1 < f < 1/coslag: CF1 = f coslag (9.15)
if f  1/coslag: CF1 = 1 (9.16)
CF2 is given by Formulae (9.17) to (9.19);

if a  0,25: CF2 = 1 (9.17)

if 0,25 < a 1 CF2 = (sinlag)a (9.18)
if a > 1: CF2 = sinlag (9.19)
f is the displacement ductility factor defined in 9.3.2.1(4);

lag is a phase lag angle that should be calculated with Formula (9.20);

2𝜋𝑎
𝛿 = (𝜉 −𝜉 ) (9. 20)
2,1 + 1,9 𝑒𝑥𝑝(−0,6𝑎)
H is the component of effective damping of the structure in the direction under consideration,
due to post-yield hysteretic behaviour of the primary seismic elements of the main structural
system associated with the ductility factor f, calculated in accordance with Annex D, D.2.2.

9.3.2.3 Response in the higher modes

(1) The response of the structure in the higher modes of vibration (m > 1) should be obtained assuming
that: (i) the primary seismic elements of the main structural system remain elastic; and (ii) the nonlinear
viscous-type energy dissipation devices behave as linear with an effective damping coefficient Ceff j given by
Formula (9.21).

𝐶 = 𝑎 𝐶 (∆𝑣 ) (9. 21)

Where:

85
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Δ𝑣 is given in 9.3.2.2.3(2).

(2) The response at the stages of maximum displacement, maximum velocity and maximum acceleration
in the higher mode m should be calculated as in the first mode using Formulae (9.3), (9.4), (9.6) to (9.20) and
Formulas of Annex D, replacing the subscript 1 that indicates the first mode with subscript m for the m-th
mode, and modifying the Formulas as given in a) to i):

f should be taken equal to 1;

aV should be taken equal to 1 for all energy-dissipation devices;

Cj should be taken equal to Ceff j given by Formula (9.21);

T1,e should be replaced by the m-th mode period of the structure with energy-dissipation system in elastic
conditions Tm;

Tp1 should be replaced by the m-th mode period of the main structural system in elastic conditions Tpm;

1 should be replaced with the m-th mode of the structure with energy dissipation system in elastic
conditions m; m should be normalized so that it equals 1 at the roof level;

1 should be replaced by the m-th mode participation factor m of the structure with energy dissipation
system in elastic conditions;

qRqS should be taken equal to 1.

For the determination of CF1, the ductility demand should be taken equal to that of the fundamental mode
f .

(3) 9.3.2.2.1(4) should not be applied for higher modes.

9.3.2.4 Combination of modal responses

(1) At the stage of maximum displacement, the design value of the action effects in the primary seismic
elements of the main structural system should be calculated by combining in accordance with EN1998-1-
1:2019, 6.4.2.2, the action effects obtained for each mode by applying to the model of the structure with
energy dissipation system the design lateral forces Fi1 given by Formula (9.7) for the first mode, and the design
lateral forces calculated in accordance with 9.3.2.3 for higher modes. Torsional effects should be included.

NOTE At the stage of maximum displacement, the viscous damping force components of the energy dissipation
devices are zero, but the elastic force components of the viscoelastic dampers are not and the model accounts for them.

(2) At the stage of maximum velocity, the design value of the action effects in the primary seismic elements
of the main structural system and in the elements of the energy dissipation system exclusive of the energy
dissipation devices should be calculated, combining in accordance with EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.2.2, the action
effects obtained for each mode by applying to the model the axial viscous damping force components of the
energy dissipation devices Nvj1 given by Formula (9.10) for the first mode and the axial viscous damping force
components of the energy dissipation devices calculated in accordance with 9.3.2.3 for the higher modes.
These forces should be applied at the points of attachment of the devices and in the directions consistent with
the deformed shape of the building at maximum displacement. The inertia forces at each floor level should be
applied concurrently with the viscous component of forces so that the displacement of each floor is zero.

(3) At the stage of maximum acceleration, the design value of the action effects in the primary seismic
elements of the main structural system and in the elements of the energy dissipation system exclusive of the

86
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

energy dissipation devices should be calculated combining in accordance with EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.2.2, the
action effects for each mode as the sum of the action effects obtained at the stage of maximum displacement
times CF1 and of the action effects obtained at the stage of maximum velocity times CF2. Factors CF1 and CF2
should be calculated in accordance with 9.3.2.2.4(1).

(4) The design force in a velocity-dependent energy dissipation device should be based on the maximum
force in the device obtained combining in accordance with EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.2.2, the maximum axial
force of the energy dissipation device Nj1 obtained with Formula (9.11) for the first mode and the maximum
axial force of the energy dissipation device calculated in accordance with 9.3.2.3 for the higher modes.
Torsional effects should be included.

(5)At the stage of maximum displacement, the design value of the action effect in the elements of the energy
dissipation system, exclusive of the elements that are common with the main structural system and exclusive
of the energy dissipation devices, should be calculated combining in accordance with EN1998-1-1:2019,
6.4.2.2, the action effects obtained for each mode by applying to the model of the structure with energy
dissipation system the design lateral forces Fi1 given by Formula (9.7) times qR qS for the first mode, and the
design lateral forces Fim calculated in accordance with 9.3.2.3 for the higher modes. Torsional effects should
be included. The rules in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.2.1(2), (3), and (4), should be applied.

9.3.2.5 Torsional effects

(1) Torsional effects should be considered in accordance with 5.2(3) by setting the horizontal force acting
on the considered storey in a given direction equal to the design lateral forces given by Formula (9.7) for the
first mode, or to the design lateral forces calculated in accordance with 9.3.2.3 for the higher modes.

9.3.3 Energy-balance based analysis

9.3.3.1 General

(1) The energy-balance based analysis may be used for analysis and design of building structures with
displacement-dependent energy-dissipation devices.

NOTE Energy-balance based analysis applies energy concepts through the basic formula EI = Ek + Es + E + EH, where
EI is the energy input at the foundation, Ek the kinetic energy, Es the fully recoverable elastic strain energy, E the viscous
damping energy and EH the energy dissipated through hysteretic plastic deformation. EH is the sum of the energy
dissipated by the primary seismic elements of the main system, EpH, and by the energy dissipation devices, EdH.

(2) The energy-balance based analysis may be used for analysis and design provided that the conditions
in a) to c) are satisfied.

The floor diaphragms of the buildings are rigid in their planes in accordance with 5.1.2(2).

In the direction under consideration, the energy-dissipation system has at least two energy dissipation
devices in each storey, arranged in accordance with 9.2.4.

All storeys of the building above ground level have energy dissipation devices.

(3) If at least one of the conditions a) to c) in (2) is not fulfilled, a time-history analysis should be used.

(4) The stiffness of displacement-dependent energy dissipation devices should be modelled with an
effective stiffness that represents the force in the energy dissipating device at the response displacement of
interest (e.g., design interstorey drift). Alternatively, design forces in these devices may be applied as external
loads, in which case the stiffness of the energy dissipation devices may be neglected in the model.

87
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(5) The amount of energy that the structure can absorb while the primary seismic elements of the main
structural system remain within the elastic domain should exceed one-fourth of the amount of input energy
in the building due to the reference seismic action.

NOTE This provision is intended to avoid the damage in the primary seismic elements of the main system under low
intensity earthquakes characterised by an amount of energy (EI - E) equal to one fourth of the corresponding value in
case of the design earthquake.

(6) The provision in (5) may be considered as satisfied if Formula (9.22) is satisfied.

11 𝑇
𝐸 ≥ 𝑚 𝑆 (𝑇 , , 5%)𝜂(𝑇 , 𝜉 ) (9. 22)
42 2𝜋
where:
m is the total mass of the building;

Ee is the amount of energy that the structure with energy dissipation system can store in form of
elastic strain energy and absorb in form of plastic strain energy dissipated by the dampers
while the primary seismic elements of the main structural system remain in the elastic range,
calculated according to Annex D, D.3.1;

NOTE In the basic energy-balance Formula, Ee represents the sum Ek + Ees +EH specialised for a low intensity
earthquake for which the primary seismic elements of the main system remain elastic (i.e. EH = Ed and Ep = 0).

Se (T1,e , 5%) is the spectral acceleration value of the 5% damped elastic response spectrum given in
EN1998-1-1:2019, 5.2.2.2(1), corresponding to period T1;

(T1,e , I) is the value of the damping correction factor in EN1998-1-1:2019, 5.2.2.2(12), corresponding
to period T1 and inherent damping ratio I in accordance with Annex D, D.2.2.

(7) The amount of energy that the primary seismic elements of the main structural system at the k-th
storey can dissipate before reaching the SD limit state should be greater than the maximum energy dissipation
demand on the primary seismic elements of the main structural system at the k-th storey under the design
seismic action.

(8) (7) may be considered as satisfied at SD limit state if Formula (9.23) is satisfied at each storey k.

𝐸 , , ≥𝐸 , , (9. 23)
where:

p index standing for primary seismic elements;

EpH,k,SD is the amount of energy that can be dissipated by the primary seismic elements of the main
structural system at the k-th storey before reaching the SD limit state as specified in (9);

EpH,k,max is the maximum energy dissipation demand at the k-th storey in the primary seismic elements
of the main structural system under the design earthquake, according to Annex D, D.3.3.

NOTE Formula (9.23) can be checked and satisfied without need to assign a ductility class to the primary seismic
elements of the main structural system and without need to meet the global ductility provision of 6.2.5(9).

(9) EpH,k,SD should be taken as a value not exceeding the amount of energy that can be dissipated by the
primary seismic elements of the main structural system at the k-th storey under cyclic deformations, until any
primary seismic element of the main structural system attains the SD limit state.

88
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(10) As an alternative to (8) and (9), (7) may be considered satisfied if conditions a) to c) are met:

In DC3, the primary seismic elements of the main structural system meet the global ductility conditions
prescribed in 6.2.7.

the primary seismic elements of the main structural system meet the conditions established in the
material dependent Clauses of EN-1998-1-2 to be categorised as ductility class DC1, DC2 or DC3;

the displacement ductility ratio f calculated in accordance with 9.3.2.1(5), does not exceed the highest
qD behaviour factor that can be assigned to the main structural system to meet the requirements of
material dependent Clauses of EN-1998-1-2.

(11) The amount of energy that the energy dissipation system at the k-th storey can dissipate before it
reaches the SD limit state should be greater than the maximum energy dissipation demand on the energy
dissipation system at the k-th storey under the reference seismic action.

(12) (11) is considered as satisfied if Formula (9.24) is satisfied at SD limit state at each storey k.

𝐸 , , ≥𝐸 , , (9. 24)
where:

d index standing for device;

EdH,k,SD is the amount of energy that can be dissipated by the energy dissipation devices at the k-th
storey under cyclic deformations when any energy dissipation device on the storey attains its
SD limit state evaluated in accordance with EN 15129;

EdH,k,max is the maximum energy dissipation demand on the energy dissipation system at the k-th storey
under the seismic action, calculated in accordance with Annex D, D.3.4.

(13) The design value of seismic action effects in the primary seismic elements of the main structural
system should be calculated for both the upper- and lower-bound properties of the energy dissipation devices
at the stage of maximum displacement.

9.3.3.2 Response in the first mode

(1) The maximum interstorey drift at the k-th storey dr,k1, in the direction under consideration, for inelastic
behaviour of the main structural system including the elastic part should be determined by Formula (9.25).

,
𝑑 , , =𝑑 , + (9. 25)
, ,

where:

EH,k is the required amount of energy dissipation in form of plastic strain energy on the k-th storey
of the building as a result of the design seismic action, and should be calculated according to
Annex D, D.3.2;

Vdy,k is the k-th storey yield shear of the energy dissipation system;

Vpy,k is the k-th storey yield shear corresponding to the formation of a plastic mechanism in the
primary seismic elements of the main structural system;

89
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

dpy,k is the k-th storey drift corresponding to the formation of a plastic mechanism in the primary
seismic elements of the main structural system.

NOTE The meaning of Vdy,k , Vpy,k , dpy,k and other variables is shown in Figure 9.1 that represents the typical
relationship between the inter-storey drift 𝑑 , , and the storey shear Vk at a given storey k.

Vk
Vpy,k+Vdy.k f

VpD,k+Vdy,k
Vpy,k
Vdy,k a b
VpD,k c

o e d g
ddy,k dD,k dpy,k dr,k,1

Figure 9.1 — Inter-storey drift 𝒅𝐫,𝒌,𝟏 vs. storey shear Vk at a given storey k. Vpy,k is the storey shear of
primary seismic elements of main structural system; Vdy,k is the storey shear provided by the energy-
dissipation devices at the k-th storey.

(2) The maximum horizontal displacements at i-th floor relative to the ground, in the direction under
consideration, for inelastic behaviour of the main structural system and including the elastic part, should be
calculated with Formula (9.26), where the summation extends to all the storeys below the i-th floor.

𝑑 =∑ 𝑑 , , (9. 26)

(3) The design seismic force acting on the structure with energy-dissipation system at the i-th floor level
located above storey k and below storey k+1, in the direction of interest, should be calculated using Formula
(9.27).

𝐹 = 𝑉 , +𝑉 , 𝑚 + 𝑚 −𝑚 − 𝑚 + 𝑚 −𝑚 (9.27)

where:
VpD,1 is the maximum base shear that can be resisted by the primary seismic elements of the main
structural system within the elastic domain;

Vdy,1 is the base storey yield shear of the energy dissipation system;

𝑚 =∑ 𝑚 /𝑚 is the mass above the k-th storey normalised by the total mass of the building.

9.3.3.3 Response in higher modes

(1) The response in higher modes (m > 1) should be obtained using modal analysis, assuming elastic
response for the primary seismic elements and the displacement-dependent energy dissipation devices.

90
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) The response at the stage of maximum displacement in the higher mode m should be calculated with
Formulas (9.3), (9.4), (9.6) and (9.7) and Formulae of Annex D, D.3, replacing the subscript 1 that indicate the
first mode with subscript m and modifying formulae as follows:

v1 should be taken equal to zero;

T1,e and Teff,1 should be replaced by the m-th mode period of the structure with energy-dissipation system
in elastic conditions Tm;

1 should be replaced with the m-th mode of the structure with energy dissipation system in elastic
conditions m. m should be normalized so that the value at roof level is unity;

eff1 should be replaced by the inherent damping ratio I calculated according to Annex D, D2.2;

1 should be replaced with the m-th mode participation factor m of the structure with energy dissipation
system in elastic conditions;

qR qS should be taken equal to 1.

NOTE With the modifications a) to f), Formulas (9.2) and (9.3) give always the same value, i.e. droof1e = droof1.

9.3.3.4 Combination of modal responses

(1) The design value of action effects in the primary seismic elements of the main structural system should
be calculated by combining, in accordance with EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.2.2, the action effects obtained for each
mode by applying to the structural model with the energy dissipation system the design lateral forces Fi1 given
by Formula (9.27) for the first mode, and those in accordance with 9.3.3.3 for the higher ones.

(2) The design displacement in a displacement-dependent energy dissipation device should be based on
the maximum displacement obtained by combining, in accordance with EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.2.2, the
relative displacement between the two ends of the device along its axis calculated for the first mode on the
basis of Formula (9.25) and the relative displacement due to the higher modes in accordance with 9.3.3.3..

(3) Design values of action effects in the energy dissipation system, except of elements common with the
main structural system and of the energy dissipation devices, should be calculated combining in accordance
with EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.2.2, the action effects obtained for each mode by applying to the structural model
with the energy dissipation system the design seismic forces Fi1 given by Formula (9.27) multiplied by
{qRqS[1+(Vdy,1/Vpy,1)]/[1+qRqS(Vdy,1/Vpy,1)]} for the first mode, and those from9.3.3.3 for the higher ones.

NOTE The energy dissipation system includes: (i) elements that can be common with the main structural system;
theur calculation is made in accordance with 9.4.3.4(1) (see also 9.5(1)). (ii) the energy dissipation devices; their
calculation is made in accordance with 9.3.3.4(2). (iii) elements required to transfer the forces from the energy
dissipation devices to the main structural system and to the base of the structure;their calculation is made in accordance
with 9.3.3.4(3). The magnification factor {qRqS[1+(Vdy,1/Vpy,1)]/[1+qRqS(Vdy,1/Vpy,1)]}applied in the calculation of the latter
removes reductions of the design value of the action effects due to overstrength.

(4) EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.2.1 (2) to (4), should be applied.

9.3.3.5 Torsional effects

(1) Torsional effects should be considered in accordance with 5.2(3) setting the horizontal force acting
on the considered storey in a given direction equal to the design lateral forces given by Formula (9.27) for the
first mode, or to the design lateral forces calculated in accordance with 9.3.3.3 for the higher modes.

91
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

9.3.4 Non-linear response history analysis

(1) The provisions in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.6, the additional modelling rules of EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.9.2,
and the additional rules of EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.9.3.2, should be applied.

9.3.5 Combination of the effects of the components of seismic action

(1) The rules in EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.3, should be applied.

9.4 Verification to Limit States

9.4.1 General

(1) Structural elements that are common to the main structural system and to the energy dissipation
system should be considered as part of the main structural system in the verifications.

9.4.2 Verification to Significant Damage (SD) limit state

(1) Safety verifications regarding equilibrium and resistance of the primary seismic elements of the main
structural system as well as seismic joints should comply with 6.2.2 to 6.2.8.

(2) The primary seismic elements of the main structural system should be verified according to EN1998-
1-1:2019, 6.7.2(1) to (4) and (6) to (9). In case of structures with velocity-dependent energy dissipation
devices, the verification should be performed at the stages of maximum displacement, maximum velocity and
maximum acceleration, using the design seismic actions calculated according to 9.3.2.4. In case of structures
with displacement-dependent energy dissipation devices the verification should be performed at the stage of
maximum displacement using the design seismic actions calculated according to 9.3.3.4.

(3) All component of the energy dissipation system should be verified according to EN1998-1-1:2019,
6.7.2(1), taking into account 6.9.1(3), (4), (5), and 9.2.3(4).. Verification should be made in terms of forces
in velocity-dependent energy dissipation devices, of displacements in displacement-dependent ones and of
forces in the other components of the energy dissipation system.

9.4.3 Verification to Near Collapse (NC) limit state

(1) 6.3.1 should be applied to the primary seismic elements of the main structural system.

(2) It should be verified that, under the specified seismic action, the amount of energy that can be
dissipated by the energy dissipation devices of each storey k before one of them reaches the NC limit state is
greater than the maximum energy dissipation demand on the energy dissipation system at the k-th storey.

(3) In case of velocity-dependent energy dissipation devices, the provision in (2) may be considered
satisfied if the energy dissipation capacity of the energy dissipation devices of each storey k at the point in the
response when any energy dissipation device on that storey attains its NC limit state, evaluated in accordance
with EN 15129, is greater than the maximum energy dissipation demand given by Formula (9.2) for the
spectral acceleration value Se corresponding to the design seismic action associated to NC.

(4) In case of displacement-dependent energy dissipation devices, (2) may be considered satisfied if the
energy dissipation capacity of the energy dissipation devices installed on each storey s at the point in the
response when any energy dissipation device on that storey attains its NC limit state evaluated in accordance
with EN 15129, is greater than EdH,k,max calculated in accordance with Annex D, D.3.4, for the spectral
acceleration value Se corresponding to the design seismic action associated to NC.

92
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(5) It should be verified that, under the corresponding design seismic action, all the structural elements
of the energy dissipation system, exclusive of the elements that are common with the main structural system
and of the energy dissipation devices, remain in the elastic range.

9.4.4 Verification to Damage Limitation (DL) limit state

(1) At the DL limit state, 6.3.2 should be applied to the primary seismic elements of the main structural
system.

9.4.5 Verification of Operational (OP) limit state

(1) At OP limit state, 6.3.3 should be applied to the primary seismic elements of the main structural
system.

93
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

10 SPECIFIC RULES FOR CONCRETE BUILDINGS

10.1 Scope

(1) 10 should be applied to the design and the verification of reinforced and prestressed concrete
buildings, both monolithic cast-in-situ and precast, henceforth called concrete buildings, in seismic regions.

(2) 10 should be applied as a complement to EN 1992-1-1:2019.

(3) 10 should be applied to the design of structural members and the detailing of their critical regions.
Outside the critical regions, detailing of structural members should satisfy EN 1992-1-1:2019.

(4) EN 1992-1-1:2019, EN 1998-5:2019, 9, and 10.15 of this standard should be applied to the design of
concrete foundation members, such as footings, tie-beams, foundation beams, foundation slabs, foundation
walls, pile caps and piles, as well as of connections between such members, or between them and vertical
concrete members, and the verification of sliding and bearing capacity.

(5) Seismic design for DC1, adopted according to the seismic action indices limits in 10.4.3, should comply
with 10.2.2, 10.3.1, 10.3.2, 10.3.4, 10.4.2.1, 10.4.3, 10.4.4 and 10.7(1), (3) and (4).

(6) Seismic design for DC2 and DC3, adopted according to the seismic action indices limits in 10.4.3,
should comply with 10.

10.2 Basis of design and design criteria

10.2.1 General rules on design action effects

(1) With the exception of ductile walls and large walls, to which 10.8.2 and 10.9.2 should be applied, the
design values of bending moments and axial forces should be obtained from the analysis of the structure in
the seismic design situation according to EN 1990:2019, 8.4.3.5, taking into account second order effects in
accordance with 6.2.4, and the capacity design provisions of 6.2.7(3).

(2) In addition to (1), the design values of axial forces in columns should also comply with 10.6.2(1).

(3) Redistribution of bending moments in accordance with EN 1992-1-1:2019, 7.4 and 7.5, may be used.

(4) The design values of shear forces of primary seismic beams, columns, ductile walls and large walls,
should be determined in accordance with 10.5.3, 10.6.2, 10.8.2 and 10.9.2, respectively.

10.2.2 Local resistance condition

(1) All critical regions of the structure should satisfy EN 1998-1-1:2020, 6.7.2(1).

10.2.3 Local ductility condition

(1) For the required overall ductility of the structure to be achieved, the potential regions for plastic hinge
formation, to be defined for each type of building member, should satisfy the conditions a) and b), in addition
to the material properties provisions in 10.3.1 and 10.3.3:

a sufficient ductility and plastic rotation capacity should be provided in all critical regions of primary
seismic members (at column ends, depending on the potential for plastic hinge formation there) (see (2));

local buckling of compressed steel bars in potential plastic hinge regions of primary seismic members
should be prevented by applying relevant provisions in 10.5.4, 10.6.3, 10.7, 10.8.3 and 10.9.3.

94
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) To satisfy (1)a), the product of the global displacement ductility factor, taken equal to the ductility
dependent component of the behaviour factor, qD, and the chord rotation at yielding of each member end,
determined according to EN 1998-1-1:2020, 7.2.2.1.1, should not exceed the chord rotation for the SD Limit
State, determined as a fraction of the ultimate chord rotation given in EN 1998-1-1:2020, 7.2.2.1.2, divided
by 1,6.

10.2.4 Capacity design rule for moment resisting frames

(1)P In accordance with 6.2.6 and 6.2.7, brittle failure or other undesirable mechanisms (e.g. a soft-storey
mechanism, shear failure of members or joints, plastic hinging in foundation members intended to remain
elastic) shall be prevented, by deriving the design action effects of selected regions from equilibrium
conditions, assuming that plastic hinges with their possible overstrength have formed in adjacent areas.

(2) The primary seismic columns of moment resisting frame and moment resisting frame-equivalent
concrete structures should satisfy 6.2.7(3) for DC3, and in the situations listed in 6.2.6(9) for DC2, except in
cases a) to c) for DC3, and b) for DC2:

in one column out of every four columns in a plane moment resisting frame, if its seismic acting shear
force does not exceed 25% of the total seismic shear force in the set of columns;

at the bottom storey of two-storey buildings, if the normalised axial load νd in the seismic design situation
does not exceed 0,3 in any column;

at the base of discontinued columns (see 10.5.2) supported by primary seismic beams.

(3) On each side of a beam, slab reinforcement parallel to the beam and within an effective width up to
one-quarter of the beam’s clear span, or up to mid-distance to the nearest parallel beam, or to the edge of the
slab, whichever is smallest, should be assumed to contribute to the beam flexural capacity taken into account
for the calculation of ΣMRb in Formula (6.5), if it is anchored beyond the beam section at the face of the joint.

10.3 Materials requirements

10.3.1 General

(1) In primary beams and columns and in the critical regions of ductile walls of DC2 or DC3, reinforcing
steel of ductility class B or C in EN 1992-1-1:2019, Table 5.4, should be used.

10.3.2 Design for DC1

(1) Concrete of a class lower than C16 should not be used in primary seismic elements.

10.3.3 Design for DC2 and DC3

(1) Concrete of a class lower than C20 should not be used in primary seismic elements.

(2) Ribbed bars should be used as reinforcing steel in critical regions of primary seismic elements.

10.3.4 Safety verifications

(1) For the Significant Damage (SD) limit state verifications, partial factors for concrete and steel
strengths γc and γs should be used.

NOTE γc and γs are equal to 1,5 and 1,15 respectively, unless the National Annex gives different values for use in a
country.

95
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

10.4 Structural types, behaviour factors, limits of seismic action and limits of drift
10.4.1 Structural types

(1) Concrete buildings should be classified into one of the following structural types, according to their
behaviour under horizontal seismic actions:

moment resisting frame structure: structure in which both the vertical and lateral loads are mainly
resisted by spatial concrete moment resisting frames, whose shear resistance at the building base exceeds
65% of the total shear resistance of the whole structure (VRd,MRF/VRd,total  65%).

dual structure (moment resisting frame-equivalent or wall-equivalent): structure in which the resistance
to lateral loads is contributed to in part by the moment resisting frame structure and in part by ductile
walls, coupled or uncoupled (VRd,MRF/VRd,total = 35% to 65%).

moment resisting frame-equivalent dual structures: those in which the shear resistance of the moment
resisting frames at the building base is greater than 50% of the total (VRd,MRF/VRd,total = 50% to 65%).

wall-equivalent dual structures: those in which the shear resistance of ductile walls at the building base
is greater than 50% of the total (VRd,MRF/VRd,total = 35% to 50%).

wall structures (coupled or uncoupled): those in which lateral loads are mainly resisted by concrete
ductile walls, coupled or uncoupled, whose shear resistance at the building base exceeds 65% of the total
shear resistance (VRd,walls/VRd,total  65%).

coupled walls structures: ductile wall structure in which at least 50% of the total shear resistance is
provided by walls; comprising two or more single ductile walls, connected by a regular pattern of ductile
beams ("coupling beams"), where at least 25% of the total overturning moment at the base is supported
by frame action of the vertical walls (“coupled walls”) to the coupling beams.

large walls structures: wall structures with at least two large walls in the horizontal direction of interest,
which collectively support at least 20% of the total gravity load and have a fundamental fixed base period
T1 not greater than Tc. It is sufficient to have only one wall meeting these conditions in one of the two
directions, provided that: (a) the basic value of the behaviour factor, q, in that direction is divided by a
factor of 1,5 over the value in Table 10.1 and (b) there are at least two walls meeting these conditions in
the orthogonal direction.

flat slab structure: those composed of flat slabs considered in the design as primary seismic elements,
supported directly by columns, in which the lateral loads are mostly resisted by the slab-column
mechanism.

inverted pendulum structures: those in which 50% or more of the mass is in the upper third of the height
of the structure, or in which the dissipation of energy takes place mainly at the base of a single building
element.

(2) Concrete buildings may be classified to one structural type in one horizontal direction and to another
in the other direction.

(3) If, in one direction, a structure does not qualify as a large walls structure according to (1)g), then all
of its walls in that direction should be designed and detailed as ductile walls, and the foundations should be
designed to fix the rotation at their base.

96
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(4) Buildings with vertical elements that are mainly located near the perimeter in plan, with a balanced
stiffness distribution between parallel sides (Figure 10.1), may be considered to have the torsional rigidity
which is necessary to be classified as not torsionally flexible (see 4.4.3(1)), without analytical verification.

Figure 10.1 — Concrete buildings with vertical elements mainly located near the perimeter and a
balanced stiffness distribution between parallel sides

(5) One-storey moment resisting frame structures with column tops connected (rigidly or hinged) along
both main directions and with the value of the column normalised axial load νd in the seismic design situation
nowhere exceeding 0,3, may be classified as moment resisting frame structures. Otherwise, they should be
classified as inverted pendulum structures.

10.4.2 Behaviour factor for horizontal seismic actions

10.4.2.1 Design for DC1

(1) A behaviour factor q up to 1,5 may be used, regardless of the structural type and the regularity.

10.4.2.2 Design for DC2 and DC3

(1) The default values of the behaviour factor components qR and qD, and of the behaviour factor q, are
presented in Table 10.1.

Table 10.1 — Default values of the behaviour factors

Structural type qR qD q = qR qS qD
DC2 DC3 DC2 DC3
multi-storey, multi-bay moment resisting
Moment resisting frame frames or moment resisting frame- 1,3 2,5 3,9
or equivalent dual structures
moment resisting multi-storey, one-bay moment resisting 1,3 2,0
frame-equivalent dual 1,2 2,3 3,6
frames
structures
one-storey moment resisting frames 1,1 2,1 3,3
wall-equivalent dual structures 1,2 1,3 2,3 3,6
Wall- or coupled walls structures 1,2 1,4 2,0 2,5 3,6
wall-equivalent dual
structures uncoupled walls structures 1,0 1,3 2,0 3,0
large walls structures -- -- 3,0 kw
Flat slab structures 1,1 1,2 -- 2,0 --

(2) To account for the prevailing failure mode in large walls structures, the behaviour factor q should be
calculated taking into consideration the factor kw given by Formula (10.1)

97
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

0,5 if 𝛼 ≤ 0,5
𝑘 = (1 + 𝛼 )/3 if 0,5 < 𝛼 < 2,0 (10.1)
1,0 if 𝛼 ≥ 2,0

where:

α0 is the prevailing aspect ratio (height-to-length ratio) of the walls of the structural system,
which may be calculated by Formula (10.2):

𝛼 = ∑ ℎ ⁄∑ 𝑙 (10.2)

where:

hwi is the height of wall i;

lwi is the length of the section of wall i.

(3) The behaviour factor q should be reduced for structures non-regular in elevation (see 4.4.4.2(1))
according to 5.3.2(2) and for torsionally flexible structures (see 4.4.3(1)) according to 5.3.2(5), but a
minimum value of 1,5 may be adopted for q.

(4) For inverted pendulum structures, 1,5 should be used for the behaviour factor q.

10.4.3 Limits of seismic action for design to DC1, DC2 and DC3

(1) Seismic design for DC1 should not be adopted: (a) for moment resisting frame structures, dual
structures (moment resisting frame-equivalent or wall-equivalent) and flat slab structures with Sδ > 2,5 m/s2;
and (b) for wall structures with Sδ > 5,0 m/s2 (see EN 1998-1-1:2020, 4.1(4)).

(2) For Sδ > 5,0 m/s2, moment resisting frame structures should be designed for DC3.

(3) Flat slab structures should not be adopted for Sδ > 5,0 m/s2.

(4) Flat slab structures should not be designed for DC3.

(5) With the exceptions of (2) to (4), seismic design for DC2 and DC3 may be adopted for all levels of Sδ
and structural types.

10.4.4 Limits of drift

(1) The interstorey drift at SD limit state according to 6.2.5(1) should be limited to: dr,SD ≤ 0,02 hs where
dr,SD is defined in 6.2.4(1) and hs is the storey height.

10.5 Beams
10.5.1 Geometrical and other provisions

(1) Prismatic concrete members should be designed as beams when subjected mainly to transverse loads
and to a normalised design axial force in the seismic design situation νd = NEd/(Ac fcd) not greater than 0,1.

(2) The eccentricity of the primary seismic beam axis relative to that of the column into which it frames
should not be greater than bmax/3, where bmax is the largest cross-sectional dimension of the column normal to
the longitudinal axis of the beam.

98
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) The width b of the primary seismic beam should not be larger than the minimum of bmax+h and 2bmax,
where h is the beam depth and bmax is as defined in (2).

(4) The effective flange width of beams cast monolithically with the slab may be taken in the model for
the analysis equal to the constant value specified in EN 1992-1-1:2019, 7.3.2.1(4) for the whole span.

10.5.2 Specific rules for beams supporting discontinued vertical members

(1) Structural walls should not be supported on beams, unless conditions a) and b) are fulfilled:

a transfer structure is designed in the seismic design situation according to 6.2.11 and 10.15;

the resistance of the transfer structure matches the overstrength capacity of the discontinued walls.

(2) For a primary seismic beam which support discontinued columns, conditions a) and b) should be
fulfilled:

there should be no eccentricity of the column axis relative to that of the beam;

the beam should be supported by at least two direct supports, such as walls or columns directly founded,
unless the beam is part of the transfer structure designed according to 6.2.11 and 10.15.

(3) 10.5.4.2(2) should be applied.

10.5.3 Design action effects

(1) For DC2 and DC3, in primary seismic beams of all structural types, with clear length lcl, the design
values of shear forces Vi,d should be determined on the basis of the equilibrium of the beam under the effects
of actions in a) and b) (Figure 10.2a):

the transverse load acting on it in the seismic design situation;

end moments Mi,d (with i = 1, 2 denoting the ends of the beam), as given by Formula (10.3), corresponding
to plastic hinge formation at the ends of the beam or, if they form there first (as in the exceptions in
10.2.4(2) for frame or frame-equivalent structures), in the vertical members connected to the joints into
which the beam ends frame, for positive and negative directions of seismic demand (Figure 10.2b):

𝛾 𝑀 , if ∑𝑀 < ∑𝑀
𝑀, = (10.3)
𝛾 𝑀 , (∑𝑀 ⁄∑𝑀 ) if ∑𝑀 > ∑𝑀

where:

γRd is a factor accounting for possible overstrength due to steel strain hardening and confinement
of the concrete of the compression zone, which may be taken equal to 1,1;

MRb,i is the design value of the beam resisting moment at end i in the sense of bending moment
considered, taking into account the slab reinforcement within an effective width defined in
10.2.4(3);

ΣMRc is the sum of the design values of the resisting moments of the columns framing into the joint
(see 6.2.7(3)), corresponding to the column axial force(s) in the seismic design situation for
the considered sense of beam bending;

99
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

ΣMRb is the sum of the design values of resisting moments of the beams framing into the joint (see
6.2.7(3)).
g + 2 q

M1,d M2,d
(a)

V1,d V2,d
1 2
l cl

i
M Rb < MRc

M i,d = Rd M Rb,i

(b) MRb
i
MRc MRb > MRc

M i,d = Rd M Rb,i ( MRc / MRb )

Figure 10.2 — Capacity design shear forces on beams: a) determination of design shear forces; b)
design end moment

(2) At a beam end i supported by another beam, instead of framing into a vertical member, the beam end
moment Mi,d there may be taken equal to the moment at the beam end section obtained from the analysis in
the seismic design situation.

10.5.4 SD limit state verifications and detailing

10.5.4.1 Resistance in bending and shear

(1) The bending resistance should be calculated in accordance with EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.1.

(2) The shear resistance should be calculated in accordance with EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2, modified
according to (3) to (7).

(3) The value of ddg in Formula (8.8) of EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.1(4), should be taken equal to 16,
corresponding to Dlower = 0.

(4) The value of fywd used in Formula (8.23) of EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.3(4), should observe an upper limit
on fyw (MPa) equal to of 6/ρw, where ρw is the transverse reinforcement ratio.

(5) Instead of the lower limit on the strut inclination angle in EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.3(3), and the
constant value of factor ν in EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.3(5), EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.3(6), should be used, with
the modifications a) to d):

Factor ν in Formula (8.27) of EN 1992-1-1:2019 should be divided by 1,6;

100
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Outside the critical regions, , as defined in 10.5.4.2(1), the average strain of the two chords in Formula
(8.28) of EN 1992-1-1:2019 should be calculated from Formula (8.29) to (8.33) of EN 1992-1-1:2019 with
the values of MEd and VEd in the seismic design situation;

In member end zones expected to enter the inelastic range, the average strain of the two chords in
Formula (8.28) of EN 1992-1-1:2019 should be calculated from Formulae (8.29) to (8.33) of EN 1992-1-
1:2019 with the values of MEd and VEd from the analysis multiplied by the following factor:

 if the analysis is nonlinear according to EN 1998-1-1:2020, 6.5 or 6.6, by the chord rotation
ductility factor at the nearest member end (where the chord rotation ductility factor is defined as
the maximum value of the chord rotation at a member end during the response) divided by the
chord rotation of the same end at yielding.

 if the analysis is linear elastic with the design spectrum according to EN 1998-1-1:2020, 6.4, by
the behaviour factor q.

The value of the average strain of the two chords obtained from b) or c) should not be taken greater than
0,02.

NOTE Zones expected to enter the inelastic range are the end zones near connections to stronger members – as in
columns or walls connected to stronger beams or to the foundation, and in beams connected to stronger columns or walls
- and the plastic hinge zones according to a nonlinear analysis.

(6) When applying Formula (8.24) of EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.3(3), outside the critical end regions, the
concrete class should not be considered as greater than C50.

(7) If the compression field is at an inclination to the member axis less than that of the diagonal connecting
the opposite ends of the member's end sections, the calculation of the shear resistance should be in accordance
with EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.3(12), and the relevant provisions of (3) to (6).

NOTE (7) applies to members with clear length shorter than 2zcotθ.

10.5.4.2 Detailing for local ductility

(1) The regions of a primary seismic beam up to a distance lcr = h (where h denotes the beam depth) from
an end cross-section where the beam frames into a beam-column joint, as well as from both sides of any other
cross-section liable to yield in the seismic design situation, should be considered as critical regions.

(2) In primary seismic beams supporting discontinued (cut-off) vertical members, the regions up to a
distance of 2h on each side of the supported vertical member should be considered as being critical regions.

(3) Along the entire length of a primary seismic beam, the reinforcement ratio of the tension zone, ρl,
should not be smaller than the minimum value ρl,min given by Formula (10.4).

𝜌, = 0,5 𝑓 ⁄𝑓 (10.4)

Alternatively to the explicit calculation of ρl,min given by Formula (10.4), the values in Table 10.2 may be used.

Table 10.2 — Minimum longitudinal reinforcement ratio in tension zones of beams (ρl,min)
Steel grade
Concrete grade B400 B500
C20-C25 0,35% 0,25%

101
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

C30-C45 0,50% 0,35%

C50-C90 0,60% 0,45%

(4) At the compression zone of critical regions of primary seismic beams, reinforcement not lower than
half of the reinforcement provided at the tension zone should be placed.

(5) The tension reinforcement ratio should not exceed a maximum value ρl,max in Table 10.3, where ρ’l is
the reinforcement ratio in the compression zone. For beams with reinforcing steel grade B450, the maximum
tension reinforcement ratio may be obtained by linear interpolation of the values in Table 10.3.

Table 10.3 — Maximum longitudinal reinforcement ratio in tension zones of beams (ρl,max)
DC2 DC3
Steel grade Steel grade
Concrete grade B400 B500 B400 B500

C20-C25 ρ’l + 0,7% ρ’l + 0,5% ρ’l + 0,5% ρ’l + 0,3%

C30-C45 ρ’l + 1,2% ρ’l + 0,8% ρ’l + 1,0% ρ’l + 0,6%
C50-C90 ρ’l + 1,7% ρ’l + 1,2% ρ’l + 1,5% ρ’l + 1,0%

(6) Within the critical regions of primary seismic beams, hoops should satisfy the conditions in a) to c):

the diameter dbw of the hoops should not be smaller than 6 mm;

the spacing s of hoops should not exceed:

 for DC2: s = min{h/4; 30dbw; 12dbL,min};

 for DC3: s = min{h/4; 24dbw; 8dbL,min},

where:

dbL,min is the minimum longitudinal bar diameter;

h is the beam depth.

the distance of the first hoop to the beam end section should not be larger than 50 mm (Figure 10.3).

< 50mm < 50mm

s s

l cr l cr

102
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Figure 10.3 — Transverse reinforcement in critical regions of beams

10.6 Columns
10.6.1 Geometrical and other provisions

(1) Prismatic concrete members with a depth to width ratio hc/bc not greater than 5 should be designed
as columns when supporting gravity loads by axial compression or when subjected to a normalised design
compression axial force in the seismic design situation νd = NEd/(Ac fcd) greater or equal to 0,1.

(2) The minimum cross-sectional dimension of primary seismic columns should not be smaller than:

If θ ≤ 0,05: 200 mm (where θ is defined in 6.2.4(1)).

If θ > 0,05: the maximum of:

• one tenth of the longer distance between the point of contraflexure of the deflected shape and the
ends of the column, for bending within a plane parallel to the column dimension considered;

• 200 mm for DC2 or 250 mm for DC3.

10.6.2 Design action effects

(1) In primary seismic columns of DC2 and DC3 the design column axial force should be obtained from
Formula (10.5).

𝑁 , =𝑁 , , "+" Ω 𝑁 , , (10.5)

where:

NEd,G,I is the column axial force fraction due to the gravity loads in the seismic design situation;

NEd,E,I is the column axial force fraction due to the seismic action in the seismic design situation;

Ω is the magnification factor of the column axial force, which may be taken equal to 2,0;

"+" "+" means combined with + or – sign.

(2) For DC2 and DC3, in primary seismic columns, the design shear forces Vi,d should be determined on
the basis of equilibrium of the column under end moments Mi,d (i = 1, 2 denoting the end sections), calculated
from Formula (10.6), corresponding to plastic hinge formation for positive and negative directions of the
response (Figure 10.4):

𝛾 𝑀 , (∑𝑀 ⁄∑𝑀 ) if ∑𝑀 < ∑𝑀

𝑀, = (10.6)
𝛾 𝑀 , if ∑𝑀 > ∑𝑀

where:

γRd accounts for overstrength due to strain hardening and confinement and may be taken equal to
1,1;

MRc,i is the design value of the column resisting moment at end i.

ΣMRc and ΣMRb are defined in 10.5.3.1(1)b).

103
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) The values of MRc,i and ΣMRc should correspond to the column axial force NEd,I from Formula (10.5) for
the considered sense of seismic response.

N
M 2,d
V2,d (= V1,d )
2

l cl

1
V1,d
M1,d
N

Figure 10.4 — Determination of capacity design shear forces in columns

10.6.3 SD limit state verifications and detailing

10.6.3.1 Resistance in bending and shear

(1) In primary seismic columns the normalised axial force νd based in Formula (10.5) should not exceed:

 for DC2: 0,65;

 for DC3: 0,55.

(2) The shear resistance should be calculated in accordance with 10.5.4.1(2). Moreover, EN 1992:1-
1:2018, 8.2.1(7), should be applied, considering as inclined compression force the diagonal strut which
transfers the column axial force in the seismic design situation, from the compression zone of the column top
section in the storey to that of the bottom section.

10.6.3.2 Detailing for local ductility

(1) The total longitudinal reinforcement ratio ρl should not be less than 1% and nor greater than 4%.

(2) The diameter of the longitudinal bars should not be smaller than 12 mm.

(3) In symmetrical cross sections symmetrical reinforcement should be provided (ρl = ρ’l).

(4) At least one intermediate bar should be provided between corner bars along each column side.

(5) The region up to a distance lcr given by Formula (10.7) from an end section of a primary seismic column
should be considered a critical region:

𝑙 = max{𝑏 ; 𝑙 ⁄6 ; 0,45 m} (10.7)

104
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

where:

bmax is the largest cross-sectional dimension of the column;

lcl is the clear length of the column.

(6) If lcl/bmax < 3, the entire height of the primary seismic column should be taken as critical region.

(7) In a critical region of a primary seismic column, hoops and cross-ties, of at least 6 mm in diameter or
dbL,min/4, whichever is greater, should be provided with a pattern such that the cross-section benefits from
confinement (examples in Figure 10.5a). The spacing, s, of hoops and cross-ties (Figure 10.5b) should not
exceed:

 for DC2: s = min{b0C/2; 200 mm; 9dbL,min};

 for DC3: s = min{b0C/2; 175 mm; 8dbL,min},

where:

b0C is the smallest dimension of the concrete core (to the centreline of the hoops) (Figure 10.5a);

dbL,min is the minimum diameter of the longitudinal bars.

(8) The distance between consecutive longitudinal bars engaged by hoops or cross-ties should not exceed
250 mm for DC2 and 200 mm for DC3, taking into account EN 1992-1-1:2019, 12.5.1(2).

l cr

l cl

h0 h h0 h

s l cr
b0
b
b0
b

(a) (b)

Figure 10.5 — Transverse reinforcement in columns: a) examples of hoops and cross-ties pattern
and confined concrete core; b) critical regions

105
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(9) A minimum value of mechanical volumetric ratio of confining hoops within the critical regions, given
by Formula (10.8), should be provided within all critical regions in the primary seismic columns equal to:

 for DC2: 0,05;

 for DC3: 0,08.

𝜔 = 𝑓 ⁄𝑓 (10.8)

(10) The mechanical volumetric ratio of confining hoops of columns with rectangular cross sections with
dissimilar amount of reinforcement in the two directions should be taken from Formula (10.9).

𝜔 = 2 min 𝜌 , ,𝜌 , 𝑓 ⁄𝑓 (10.9)

where ρw,x and ρw,y are the volumetric ratios of confining hoop legs in the perpendicular directions x and y.

10.7 Beam-column joints

(1) For DC1, the horizontal confinement reinforcement in beam-column joints should not be smaller than
that of the columns framing into the joint, with the exception in (3).

(2) For DC2 and DC3, the horizontal confinement reinforcement in beam-column joints should not be
smaller than that specified in 10.6.3.2(7) to (10) for the critical regions of columns, with the exception in (3).

(3) If beams frame into all four sides of the joint and their width is at least three-quarters of the parallel
cross-sectional dimension of the column, the spacing of the horizontal confinement reinforcement in the joint
may be increased to twice that specified in (1) and (2), but should not exceed 150 mm.

(4) For DC1, DC2 and DC3, at least one intermediate vertical bar should be provided between column
corner bars at each side of the primary beam-column joint.

(5) For DC3, in addition to (2) to (4), the design shear acting force on the concrete core of the joints, VEdj,
obtained in each seismic design situation by either a) or b), should not exceed the design shear resistance
given by (6) to (10):

for exterior beam-column joints, Formula (10.10):

𝑉 , =𝛾 𝐴 𝑓 −𝑉 (10.10)

for interior beam-column joints, Formula (10.11):

𝑉 , =𝛾 (𝐴 +𝐴 )𝑓 −𝑉 (10.11)

where:

γRd accounts for overstrength due to steel strain hardening and may be taken equal to 1,2;

As1, As2 is the area of the top and bottom beam longitudinal reinforcement generating shear in the joint
(Figure 10.6);

fyd is the design yield strength of the beam longitudinal reinforcement;

106
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Vc is the shear force in the column above the joint obtained from the analysis in the the seismic
design situation (Figure 10.6).

Vc

As1
bj,ef hb
A h j,ef = hc

A j,ef A

bb
As2

bc

hc

Key

A forces generating shear in the joint

Figure 10.6 — Effective cross-sectional area of the beam-column joint

(6) The design value of the horizontal shear force in a joint at first cracking, VRdj,cr, assumed unreinforced,
may be taken as a lower limit to its design shear resistance, given by Formula (10.12):

𝑓 1+ 𝐴, if 𝑁 > −𝐴 𝑓
𝑉 , = (10.12)
0 if 𝑁 ≤ −𝐴 𝑓

where:

fctd is the design concrete tensile strength;

NEd is the column axial force in the seismic design situation, taken positive for compression;

Ac is the full cross-sectional area of the column;

Aj,ef is the effective cross-sectional area of the beam-column joint (Aj,ef = bj,ef hj,ef) (Figure 10.6).

bj,ef is the effective joint width, taken as the average of the beams and columns width at right angles
to the direction in which the shear verification of the joint is carried out;

hj,ef is the effective joint depth, taken as the column depth hc in the direction of the shear force.

(7) At SD limit state, the design shear resistance of a reinforced joint after cracking may be estimated as
the maximum resistance over all values of the compression field inclination, θ, in the concrete within the joint,
calculated according to (8) or (9).

(8) If θ < β (Figure 10.7b), where tanβ is the joint aspect ratio (β is the angle between the vertical and the
diagonal of the joint - tan β=hc/hb, with hb denoting the beam depth - Figure 10.7a), the design shear resistance
of the joint, VRdj, may be calculated from Formula (10.13):

107
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑉 =𝑉 , + min 𝑉 , +𝑉 , ;𝑉 , (10.13)

where:

VRdj,min is the minimum joint shear resistance, given by Formula (10.14):

𝑉 , = 𝛼𝑓 𝑏 , ℎ ℎ (10.14)

αjo is a coefficient which may be taken equal to 0,55 for exterior joints and 1,15 for interior ones;

VRdj,h is the contribution of the horizontal reinforcement in zone A of the joint, given by Formula
(10.15):

𝑉 , =𝐴 𝜎 (10.15)

Ash is the area of the horizontal reinforcement in the joint;

σsh is the stress in the horizontal reinforcement in the joint, obtained from the horizontal strain at
the centre of the joint, estimated from the strain along the compression field (assumed to be
equal to -0.001) and from the vertical strain at the centre of the joint, given by Formula (10.16):

𝜎 = 𝐸 [(𝜀 + 0,001) cot 𝜃 − 0,001] ≤ 𝑓 , (10.16)

Es is the modulus of elasticity of the reinforcing steel;

εv is the vertical strain at the centre of the joint, given by Formula (10.17):

𝜀 = 𝜎 ⁄𝐸 (10.17)

σsv is the stress in the vertical reinforcement in the joint, with σsv ≥ 0, given by Formula (10.18):

𝜎 = 𝑉 −𝑉 , cot 𝜃 − 𝑁 /𝐴 ≤𝑓 , (10.18)

Asv is the area of the vertical reinforcement in the joint;

fyd,h, fyd,v is the design yield strength of the horizontal and vertical reinforcement in the joint, with the
upper limit given in 10.5.4.1(4) using the ratio of the corresponding joint reinforcement,
Ash/(bbhb) and Asv/(bchc);

NOTE As σsv in Formula (10.18) depends on VRdj, given by Formula (10.13), iterations are needed.

VRdj,c is the contribution of the diagonal concrete compression field in zone B of the joint, given by
Formula (10.19):

𝑉 , = 𝜐𝑓 𝐴 , sin 𝜃 (cot 𝜃 − cot 𝛽)/1,6 (10.19)

υ should be taken from Formula (8.27) of EN 1992-1-1:2019 in terms of the principal tensile
strain ε1, considered to take place at right angles to the compressive stress field in the concrete
and estimated from the strain along the compression field (assumed to be equal to -0,001) and
from the vertical strain εv at the centre of the joint (Formula (10.17)), according to Formula
(10.20):

𝜀 = 𝜀 + (𝜀 + 0,001) cot 𝜃 (10.20)

108
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

VRdj,v is the contribution of the vertical reinforcement in zone A of the joint, given by Formula
(10.21):

𝑉 , = [𝑁 + 𝐴 𝜎 ] tan 𝜃 ≥ 0 (10.21)

fcd is the design concrete strength.

(9) If θ > β (Figure 10.7c), the design shear resistance of the joint, VRdj, may be calculated from Formula
(10.22):

𝑉 =𝑉 , + min tan 𝛽 𝑉 , ; tan 𝛽 𝑉 , +𝑉 , (10.22)

where:

VRdj,min is given by Formula (10.14);

VRdj,h is given by Formula (10.23):

𝑉 , = 𝐴 𝜎 cot 𝜃 (10.23)

σsh is the stress in the horizontal reinforcement in the joint, with σsh ≥ 0, given by Formula (10.24):

𝜎 = 𝑉 −𝑉 , tan 𝜃 cot 𝛽 /𝐴 ≤𝑓 , (10.24)

NOTE As VRdj in Formula (10.22) depends on σsh, given by Formula (10.24), iterations are needed.

VRdj,v is given by Formula (10.25):

𝑉 , =𝑁 +𝐴 𝜎 ≥0 (10.25)

σsv is the stress in the vertical reinforcement in the joint, obtained from the vertical strain at the
centre of the joint, estimated from the strain along the compression field (assumed to be equal
to -0.001) and from the horizontal strain at the centre of the joint, given by Formula (10.26):

𝜎 = 𝐸 [(𝜀 + 0,001) tan 𝜃 − 0,001] ≤ 𝑓 , (10.26)

εh is the horizontal strain at the centre of the joint, given by Formula (10.27):

𝜀 = 𝜎 ⁄𝐸 (10.27)

VRdj,c is given by Formula (10.28):

𝑉 , = 𝜈𝑓 𝐴 , cos 𝜃 (tan 𝜃 − tan 𝛽)/1,6 (10.28)

ν is the strength reduction factor for cracked concrete; itshould be taken from Formula (8.27)
of EN 1992-1-1:2019 in terms of the principal tensile strain ε1, considered to take place along
the compressive stress field in the concrete and estimated from the strain along the
compression field (assumed to be equal to -0,001) and from the horizontal strain εh at the
centre of the joint (Formula (10.27)), according to Formula (10.29):

𝜀 = 𝜀 + (𝜀 + 0,001) tan 𝜃 (10.29)

109
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

hc
N+Asv sv N+Asv sv
VRdj,h VRdj,c VRdj,h
A A B VRdj,c
B VRdj,v VRdj,v 
Ash Ashsh   Ashsh
hb Ashsh
 VRdj,v   Ashsh  VRdj,v
VRdj,c
Asv VRdj,c VRdj,h VRdj,h
N+Asv sv N+Asv sv

(a) (b) (c)

Key
A joint zone outside the diagonal compression field zone
B diagonal compression field zone

Figure 10.7 — Design of beam-column joints in DC3: a) definition of variables; b) stress conditions
with θ < β; c) stress conditions with θ > β

(10) The beneficial effect of the lateral confinement of the joint by slabs and/or beams connected to the
joint’s lateral faces may be taken into account by multiplying VRdj,c given by Formula (10.19) and (10.28) by
the ratio of the total lateral surface area on the two lateral faces of the joint, 2hbhc, to the total surface area left
exposed on these two lateral faces.

10.8 Ductile walls

10.8.1 Geometrical and other constraints

(1) Concrete walls are defined as the vertical members which have an elongated cross-section with a
length to thickness ratio lw/bw greater than 5.

(2) Concrete ductile walls should be fixed at the base so that the relative rotation of their base with respect
to the rest of the structure is prevented and should be designed and detailed to dissipate energy in a flexural
plastic hinge zone free of openings or large perforations, just above their base.

(3) The thickness of the web, bw0, should satisfy Formula (10.30).

𝑏 ≥ max 0,15 m; ℎ , /20; 𝑙 ⁄40 (10.30)

where hs,cl is the clear storey height.

(4) Openings not regularly arranged to form coupled walls should be avoided in primary seismic
walls, unless their effect is either insignificant or accounted for in the analysis, dimensioning and
detailing.

10.8.2 Design action effects

(1) Seismic action effects may be redistributed between primary seismic walls up to 30%, provided that
the total resistance is not reduced. Shear forces should be redistributed along with bending moments, so that
in the individual walls the ratio of bending moment to shear force is not much affected. If the variation of the
axial force is large, as e.g. in coupled walls, bending moments and shear forces should be redistributed from
the wall(s) which are under low compression or in net tension, to those which are under higher compression.

110
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) In coupled walls, as defined in 10.4(1)c), seismic action effects may be redistributed between coupling
beams of different storeys up to 20%, provided that the seismic axial force at the base of each individual wall
is not affected.

(3) The design moment at the base of the wall should be the value from the analysis, M’Edw,base. Elsewhere
along the height of the wall the design moment MEdw should be given by a vertically displaced (tension shift)
envelope of the bending moment diagram from the analysis, with the value at the base section replaced by the
flexural overstrength moment, γRdMRdw,base, with γRd = 1,2, where MRdw,base is the moment resistance of the wall
at the base section including the vertical web reinforcement. Within the critical height of the wall, defined in
10.8.3.2(1), the design moment should be taken equal to MRdw,base. The tension shift and the critical height of
the wall should be consistent with the strut inclination taken in the SD limit state verification for shear. The
envelope may be assumed linear, if the structure does not exhibit significant discontinuities in mass, stiffness
or resistance over its height (Figure 10.8).

MEdw MEdw

hcr hcr
M'Edw M'Edw

M'Edw,base M'Edw,base

M Rdw,base M Rdw,base
Rd M Rdw,base Rd MRdw,base

(a) (b)

Key
M’Edw moment diagram from analysis
MRdw,base flexural resistance at the base section
MEdw design moment envelope
hcr critical height

Figure 10.8 — Design envelope of bending moments in ductile walls: a) wall structures; b) dual
structures

(4) In primary seismic walls, the design shear force VEdw at level z should be derived from Formula (10.31).

𝑉 (𝑧) = 𝜀(𝑧) 𝑉 , (𝑧) ≤ 𝑞 𝑉 (𝑧) (10.31)

where:

V’Edw(z) is the shear force at level z from the analysis (all modes);

V’Edw,1(z) is the shear force at level z due to the mode with the largest participating mass in the direction
of VEdw from modal response spectrum analysis;

q is the behaviour factor used in the design;

111
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

ε(z) is the shear magnification factor from Formula (10.32), but not smaller than 1,5 nor greater
than q 𝑉 /𝑉 , ;

( )
𝜀(𝑧) = ,
+ 𝑚 (𝑧) ( )
(10.32)
,

M’Edw,base is the design moment at the base of the wall (from analysis);

MRdw,base is the design moment of resistance at the base of the wall;

γRd accounts for overstrength due to steel strain-hardening and may be taken equal to 1,2;

Se(T) is the ordinate of the elastic response spectrum;

TC is the upper corner period of the constant spectral acceleration range;

T1 is the period of the mode with the largest participating mass in the direction of VEdw;

ms (z) is a factor varying along the height of the wall, hw, as given by Formula (10.33).

0,10 for 0 ≤ 𝑧 ≤ 0,33ℎ

𝑚 (𝑧) = 0,05 for 0,33ℎ < 𝑧 < 0,67ℎ (10.33)
0,25 for 0,67ℎ ≤ 𝑧 ≤ ℎ

(5) For DC2, alternatively to Formula (10.32), ε(z) may be assumed equal to q.

(6) In walls in dual structures, the design shear forces VEdw,env should be in accordance with Figure 10.9.

VEdw,top

VEdw
2
h
VEdw,env 3 w

V'Edw 1
h
3 w

VEdw,base

Key
V’Edw shear diagram from analysis
VEdw magnified shear diagram (obtained from (4))
VEdw,env design shear envelope
hw wall height
VEdw,base design shear at the base of the wall
VEdw,top design shear at the top of the wall (VEdw,top ≥ VEdw,base/2)

Figure 10.9 — Design envelope of the shear forces for ductile walls in dual structures

112
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

10.8.3 SD limit state verifications and detailing

10.8.3.1 Resistance in bending, shear and sliding shear

(1) Flexural resistance should be calculated according to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.1 and 8.2, unless specified
otherwise in the following, using the value of the axial force from the analysis in the seismic design situation.

(2) Vertical web reinforcement should be taken into account in the moment resistance of wall sections.

(3) 10.6.3.1(2) should be applied for the calculation of shear resistance of ductile walls.

(4) Composite wall sections consisting of connected or intersecting rectangular segments (T-, L-, U-, I- or
similar sections) should be taken as integral units, consisting of a web or webs parallel, or approximately
parallel, to the direction of the acting seismic shear force and a flange or flanges normal, or approximately
normal, to it. In the calculation of the moment resistance and in the analysis (considering the properties of the
cracked cross-section), the effective flange width on each side of a web should be taken to extend from the
web face by the minimum of a) and b):

the actual flange width;

one-half of the distance to an adjacent web of the wall.

(5) In primary seismic walls, the normalised design axial load νd in the seismic design situation should not
exceed:

 for DC2: 0,40;

 for DC3: 0,35.

(6) The SD limit state against sliding shear at horizontal construction joints should be verified according
to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.6. The anchorage length of reinforcing bars crossing the construction joints should
be 1,5 times that required by EN 1992-1-1:2019, 11.4. The value of coefficient cv1 for the determination of the
shear resistance at the interfaces according to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.6(5) should be halved, unless a rigorous
value is experimentally obtained.

10.8.3.2 Detailing for local ductility

(1) The height of the critical region hcr above the base of the wall (defined as the top of the foundation or
of a rigid basement) may be taken from Formula (10.34).

ℎ = max{𝑙 ; ℎ /6} (10.34)

with the limitation given by Formula (10.35).

2𝑙
ℎ ≤ ℎ if 𝑛 ≤ 6 (10.35)
2ℎ if 𝑛 ≥ 7

where hs is the storey height and n is the number of storeys of the wall.

(2) 10.6.3.2(1), (4), (8), (9) and (10) should be applied within boundary elements of the wall extending
vertically over the height hcr of the critical region as defined in (1), and horizontally along a length lc measured
from the extreme compression fibre in the confined part of the wall up to a length not lower than 0,15lw and
1,5bw (Figure 10.10).

113
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

lc

b0 b = bw

lw

Figure 10.10 — Confined boundary element of free-edge wall end

(3) Confined boundary element may be omitted over wall flanges with thickness bf ≥ hs,cl/15 and width
lf ≥ hs,cl/5 (Figure 10.11), where hs,cl denotes the clear storey height.

NOTE Confined boundary elements can be required at the ends of such flanges against out-of-plane bending.

bf

l f > h s,cl /5
lf bf > h s,cl /15
bw0

Figure 10.11 — Confined boundary element not needed at wall end with large transverse flange

(4) In the boundary elements of walls, every other longitudinal bar should be engaged by a hoop or cross-
tie.

(5) The thickness bw of confined parts of walls (boundary elements) should satisfy a) to c) (Figure 10.12):

bw should not be smaller than 200 mm;

if the length of the confined part does not exceed the maximum of 2bw and 0,2lw, bw should not be smaller
than hs,cl/15, where hs,cl is the clear storey height;

if the length of the confined part exceeds both 2bw and 0,2lw, bw should not be smaller than hs,cl/10.

114
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

lc < max {2b w ; 0,2l w } b w > max {h s,cl /15 ; 200mm}

bw0
lc

lc > max {2b w ; 0,2l w } b w > max {h s,cl /10 ; 200mm}

bw0
lc

Figure 10.12 — Minimum thickness of confined boundary elements

(6) The relevant rules of EN 1992-1-1:2019, 12.6.2, regarding vertical, horizontal and transverse
reinforcement in the wall, should be applied, complemented with (7) to (13).

(7) In the critical region of the wall, the total vertical reinforcement ratio should not be smaller than 0,25%
and the horizontal reinforcement ratio at each wall face should not be smaller than 0,125%.

(8) In the critical region of the wall, the distance between consecutive vertical and horizontal bars should
not exceed 300 mm for DC2 or 250 mm for DC3.

(9) In the critical region of the wall, horizontal reinforcement contributing to shear strength should be
continuous and distributed uniformly.

(10) Vertical reinforcement should be extended beyond the wall section at which it is no longer required
to resist flexure by at least 0,8lw. At locations where yielding of vertical reinforcement is likely to occur,
anchorage lengths should be 1,25 times the values obtained from EN 1992-1-1:2019, 11.4.2(2) and (3).

(11) Above the critical region of the wall, the vertical reinforcement ratio should be at least 0,5% in the
parts of the section where under the seismic design situation the compressive strain εc exceeds 0,002.

(12) The transverse reinforcement of the boundary elements in (2) to (5) may be determined according to
EN 1992-1-1:2019, 12.5.1, alone, if one of the conditions in a) or b) is fulfilled:

the value of the normalised design axial force νd in the seismic design situation is not greater than 0,15;

the value of νd in the seismic design situation is not greater than 0,20 and the behaviour factor q used in
the analysis is reduced by 15%.

(13) Where confinement boundary elements are provided, the horizontal web reinforcement should be
anchored by hooks or bends in the confined core of the boundary elements at not less than 150 mm from the
end of the section. If the horizontal web reinforcement is not more than the transverse reinforcement of the
boundary element parallel to it, it may terminate with a straight anchorage provided that the boundary
element has sufficient length to accommodate it.

10.9 Large walls

10.9.1 Geometrical provisions

(1) Concrete large walls should have a horizontal dimension lw at least equal to 4,0 m or to two-thirds of
the height of the wall hw, whichever is less.

115
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

NOTE A concrete large wall, due to its dimensions, or to lack-of-fixity at the base, or to connection with large
transverse walls cannot form a plastic hinge at the base and plastic hinging cannot be an effective energy dissipation
mechanism. It develops limited cracking and inelastic behaviour in the seismic design situation.

(2) 10.8.1(3) should be applied to large walls.

10.9.2 Design action effects

(1) The additional dynamic axial forces developing in large walls when an uplifting footing re-establishes
contact with the soil, or when a horizontal crack closes, should be taken into account in the SD limit state
verification of the wall for bending with axial force.

(2) Unless a response-history non-linear analysis takes into account the effects listed in (1), the additional
dynamic axial forces may be taken as being 50% of the axial force due to the gravity loads in the seismic design
situation, with a plus or a minus sign, whichever is most unfavourable.

(3) If the behaviour factor q does not exceed 2,0, the dynamic axial force in (1) and (2) may be neglected.

(4) To ensure that flexural yielding precedes attainment of the SD limit state in shear, the shear force 𝑉
from the analysis should be increased.

(5) (4) may be considered satisfied if at every storey of the wall the design shear force VEd is obtained
from Formula (10.36).

𝑉 = 𝑉 (10.36)

(6) When using a non-linear static analysis of large walls structures, the elastic stiffness k* of a bilinear
idealisation as in EN 1998-1-1:2020, 6.5.3(2), should correspond to their uncracked stiffness.

10.9.3 SD limit state verifications and detailing

10.9.3.1 Resistance in bending

(1) The SD limit state in bending with axial force should be verified according to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.1.

(2)P Normal stresses in the concrete shall be limited, to prevent out-of-plane instability of the wall.

(3) (2)P may be satisfied on the basis of the rules of EN 1992-1-1:2019, 7.8, for second order effects.

(4) In the SD limit state verification for bending with axial force taking into account the dynamic axial
force defined in 10.9.2(1) and (2), the limiting strain εcu for unconfined concrete may be increased to 5‰. A
higher value may be taken into account for confined concrete, in accordance with EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.1.4,
provided that spalling of the unconfined concrete cover is taken into account in the verification.

10.9.3.2 Resistance in shear and sliding shear

(1) Wherever the value of VEd from 10.9.2(5) is less than the design value of shear resistance without
shear reinforcement, VRd,c in EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2, the web minimum shear reinforcement ratio ρw,min may
be omitted.

NOTE This is due to the safety margin provided by the magnification of design shear forces in 10.9.2(4) and (5) and
because the response (including possible inclined cracking) is deformation controlled.

116
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) Wherever the condition VEd ≤ VRd,c is not fulfilled, web shear reinforcement should be calculated in
accordance with EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.3, on the basis of a variable inclination truss model, or a strut-and-tie
model, whichever is most appropriate for the particular geometry of the wall.

(3) If a strut-and-tie model is used, the strut width should take into account any openings in the wall and
should not exceed 0,25lw or 4bw0, whichever is smaller, where lw is the wall length and bw0 the web thickness.

(4) 10.8.3.1(6) applies.

10.9.3.3 Detailing for local ductility

(1) The amount of vertical reinforcement placed in the wall should not unnecessarily exceed the amount
required for the verification of the SD limit state in flexure with axial load and for the integrity of concrete.

(2) The wall vertical reinforcement should be at least the minimal reinforcement of flexural members
given in EN 1992-1-1:2019, 12.1.1(2) and (3), or the minimum vertical wall reinforcement given in EN 1992-
1-1:2019, 12.6.2(1), whichever is greater.

(3) Vertical bars for the verification of the SD limit state in bending with axial force should be concentrated
in boundary elements at the ends of the cross-section. These elements should extend in the direction of the
length lw over a length not smaller than bw0 or 3bw0σcm/fcd, whichever is greater, where σcm is the mean value
of the concrete stress in the compression zone in the SD limit state of bending with axial force.

(4) The vertical reinforcement in each boundary element mentioned in (3) should not be less than four
bars with 12 mm diameter in the lower storey of the building, or 10mm in all other storeys.

(5) When in any storey the length lw of the wall is reduced over that of the storey below by more than one-
third of the storey height hs, the vertical reinforcement in each boundary element of this storey should not be
less than four bars with 12 mm diameter, and should be extended to the storey above.

(6) Bars in the form of continuous steel ties, horizontal or vertical, should be provided, as given in a) to e),
but not less than those specified in EN 1992-1-1:2019, 12.9:

along all intersections of walls and along the connections of walls with flanges: not less than four vertical
bars with 10 mm diameter;

an effectively continuous peripheral tie with at least 300 mm2 cross-sectional area at each floor and roof
level;

a horizontal tie at interior wall-floor connections with a cross sectional area (in mm2) of at least max {150;
28 L}, where L is the distance between the horizontal tie and the adjacent wall, in meters;

horizontal ties above and below openings larger than 1 m2 of not less than two bars with 10 mm diameter,
and vertical boundary elements of not less than four bars with 10 mm diameter extending to the storey
above, on both sides of the opening;

horizontal ties above and below and vertical ties on both sides of openings of up to 1 m2, of not less than
two bars with 10 mm diameter per tie.

(7) Vertical bars for the verification of the SD limit state in bending with axial force in accordance with
(3), or for the satisfaction of any minimum reinforcement provisions in accordance with (4) to (6), should be
engaged by hoops or cross-ties with a diameter of not less than 6 mm and one-third of the vertical bar with
smallest diameter, dbL, whichever is larger. Hoops and cross-ties should be at a vertical spacing s of not more
than 100 mm or 8dbL, whichever is less.

117
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

10.10 Flat slabs

10.10.1 Basis of design

NOTE A concrete flat slab is a two-way slab (solid or waffle), with constant thickness or with drop panels, supported
directly on columns (with or without capitals) or walls.

(1) 10.10 should be applied to cast-in-place flat slabs considered as primary seismic members, in flat slab
structures.

NOTE Use of edge beams framing into supports or short slab overhangs improves the seismic behaviour of slab
connections to edge and corner supports in terms of punching shear and reduces the flexural reinforcement.

(2) Vertical supporting members should be arranged in a regular pattern in two orthogonal directions.

(3) The connection of flat slabs to edge and corner columns should use the full section of these supports
and should have edge beams.

(4) The thickness of each flat slab should not be smaller than 3,5% of its largest span.

(5) In waffle flat slabs, a solid area with constant thickness should be adopted up to a distance from the
column or wall support not less than 3 times the effective depth dv of the slab.

(6) Openings in flat slabs should be avoided at a distance from the column or wall support less than the
shear-resisting effective depth dv of the slab or the drop panel. In the presence of openings at a distance from
the column or wall support up to 5,5 times the shear-resisting effective depth dv of the slab or the drop panel,
the reduction of the control perimeter length according with EN 1992-1-1:2019 8.4.1(4) should be adopted.

(7) For structural analysis with equivalent-beam models:

the equivalent-beam width may be taken as: one-sixth of the longitudinal span plus the longitudinal
column size, for exterior columns; and one-third of the longitudinal span plus the longitudinal column
size, for interior columns;

the elastic flexural and shear stiffness properties of the equivalent-beam may be taken equal to one-third
of the corresponding uncracked stiffness.

(8) For structural analysis with the entire flat slab simulated with finite element models, the elastic
flexural and shear stiffness properties of the flat slab should be validated with experimental results. In the
absence of a detailed information, it may be taken equal to one-fourth of the corresponding uncracked
stiffness.

10.10.2 SD limit state verifications and detailing

(1) Flexural reinforcement should be concentrated over the supporting columns and walls and in slab
strips between adjacent supports called support strips.

(2) Support strip width (Figure 10.13) should be taken as the maximum of a) and b):

the sum of 25% of the panel width on each side of the column or wall centreline;

the dimension of the supporting vertical member perpendicular to the support strip.

(3) The slab top and bottom flexural reinforcement to resist the full hogging and sagging moments in the
slab at the ULS in the seismic design situation should be placed within the support strip.

118
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(4) A minimum flexural reinforcement should be provided in the support strips, according to a) to c):

over the whole span, top reinforcement of not less than one-fourth of the top reinforcement at the
supports;

over the whole span, bottom reinforcement of not less than one-third of the top reinforcement at the
supports;

at the face of the column or wall, bottom reinforcement of not less than the mid-span bottom
reinforcement.

(5) In the slab strip between two support strips (Figure 10.13), called “middle strip”, bottom flexural
reinforcement over its intersection with the support strip in the orthogonal direction of not less than half of
its mid-span bottom reinforcement should be provided.

D C

a
bef = bc+min { hc ; 1,5d v } +a
0,25 l 2
A

B
l2

C
D

0,25 l 2
A
bef = bc +min {2h c ; 3d v} bc
0,25 l1

hc
l1 B
C
D

bef = bc +min { hc ; 1,5d v } A

0,25 l1

Key
A support strip
B middle strip
C internal support
D external support

Figure 10.13 — Support-strips, middle strips and slab effective width for one direction

(6) In each direction, the slab top and bottom flexural reinforcement corresponding to the moments
transferred from the slab to the supports should be placed within the effective slab width bef defined in (7).

(7) The effective slab width bef should be taken as the width of the column, column capital or wall plus, on
each side of the support, the column or wall depth or the slab overhang length a, but not exceeding on each
side 1,5 times the slab or drop panel shear-resisting effective depth dv (see Figure 10.13 for bef).

119
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(8) For internal slab-support connections, the slab top and bottom flexural reinforcement corresponding
to the fraction of the hogging and sagging design moment in the slab transferred by flexure to the support in
the seismic design situation should be placed within the effective slab width bef. This reinforcement should not
be less than 50% of the reinforcement in (3).

(9) For external slab-support connections, the slab top and bottom flexural reinforcement required to
resist the total hogging and sagging design moments in the slab in the seismic design situation should be
placed within the effective slab width bef and should be anchored at the support according to 10.11.2.

(10) In addition to (3) to (9), the slab bottom reinforcement over the column or wall support width, termed
"integrity reinforcement" should satisfy a) and b) in each direction (Figure 10.14):

a minimum of four continuous bars with diameter not larger than 0,12dv should be placed over the
support width with an anchor length from the support face not smaller than dv+lb, where dv is the slab or
drop panel shear-resisting effective depth at the support face, and lb the anchorage length;

the vertical force resistance it provides, VRd,int, from Formula (10.37), should be greater than the vertical
load transferred to the support.

,
𝑉 , = ∑𝐴 , 𝑓 𝑘 sin 𝛼 ≤ 𝑑 𝑏 (10.37)

where:

As,int is the integrity reinforcement’s cross-sectional area;

fyd is the design yield strength of the steel;

k is the characteristic tensile strength to yield strength ratio of the reinforcement (ft/fy)k defined
in EN 1992-1-1:2019, 5.2.2(4), Table 5.5;

αult is the angle between the integrity bars and the slab plane at failure (αult=20° for reinforcing
steel of ductility class B; αult=25° for reinforcing steel of ductility class C);

fck is the characteristic strength of concrete;

γc is the partial factor for concrete (according to 10.3.4(1));

bint is the control perimeter activated by the integrity reinforcement from Formula (10.38);

𝑏 =∑ 𝑠 + 𝑑 (10.38)

sint is the width of the integrity bars group at each support face (Figure 10.14).

120
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

dv

As,int > dv + lb

b int
A s,int

sint

A s,int
sint

Figure 10.14 — Integrity reinforcement

(11) Punching shear resistance should be verified in all slab-column, slab-wall connections and drop panel
borders, based on the control perimeter b0 defined in EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.4.2(2) and (3), where the slab or
drop panel shear effective depth dv should be determined according to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.4.2(1).

(12) Punching shear should be verified considering the eccentricity of the shear forces, according to EN
1992-1-1:2019, 8.4.2(6), (8) and (9).

(13) At control perimeter sections around the column and wall supports, and around the drop panels, the
design punching shear stress resistance of concrete τRd,c, calculated according to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.4.3(1),
should be at least 3,5 times the punching shear stress for the gravity loads in the quasi-permanent combination
τEd,grav obtained according to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.4.2(6), unless (14) is satisfied.

(14) Punching shear reinforcement may be omitted when the maximum design punching shear stress τEd
in the control perimeter in the seismic design situation is smaller than the value given by Formula (10.39).

, ∆
𝜏 ≤ (MPa) (10.39)

where:

Δφ is the fraction of the critical section where the maximum punching shear stress occurs (for
slabs supported by circular columns, it may be taken equal to 0,4);

ψmax is the maximum slab rotation (in rad) relative to the slab-support connection in the seismic
design situation (as a simplification, it may be assumed equal to the maximum value of the
interstorey drift dr,SD, given in 6.2.4(1) divided by the storey height hs, below or above the slab-
support connection);

dv is the slab or drop panel shear-resisting effective depth, defined in (11) (in mm).

121
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(15) When (14) is not satisfied, at the slab critical sections punching shear reinforcement should be
calculated according to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.4.4(1), providing a minimum resistance τRd,s equal to 0,29 𝑓 ,
and extending by at least 4 times the slab or drop panel shear-resisting effective depth dv from the support
face.

(16) At critical sections, the punching shear resistance should not exceed the limit τRd,max given in EN 1992-
1-1:2019, 8.4.4(3).

(17) Punching shear reinforcement detailing should follow EN 1992-1-1:2019, 12.4.2(1) and (2), but bent-
up bars or other type of inclined reinforcement should not be used.

(18) The radial spacing s of the punching shear reinforcement link legs should not exceed 0,5dv, and the
first line of link legs should be placed no farther than 0,25dv from the support face (Figure 10.15).

<0,25d v s <0,5d v

dv

> 4d v

Figure 10.15 — Punching shear reinforcement within critical sections of flat slabs

10.11 Provisions for anchorages and laps

10.11.1 General

(1) EN 1992-1-1:2019, 11.4 and 11.5, for the detailing of reinforcement should be applied for DC2 and
DC3, complemented with (2), 10.11.2 and 10.11.3.

(2) For the transverse reinforcement in beams, columns, beam-column joints, walls or slabs, closed
stirrups with 135° hooks and extensions of 10-diameter length should be used.

10.11.2 Anchorage of reinforcement in beams

(1) The part of beam longitudinal reinforcement bent in beam-column joints for anchorage should always
be placed inside the corresponding column hoops.

(2) To prevent bond failure, the diameter dbL of beam longitudinal bars crossing beam-column joints
should be limited in accordance with a) or b), as appropriate:

for interior beam-column joints, Formula (10.40):

, ,
≤ ,
(10.40)
,

for exterior beam-column joints, Formula (10.41):

,
≤ (1 + 0,8 𝜐 ) (10.41)

122
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

where:

hc is the cross-sectional dimension of the column parallel to the bars;

fctm is the mean value of the tensile strength of concrete;

fyd is the design yield strength of steel reinforcement;

νd = NEd/(fcd Ac) is the normalised axial force in the column above the joint in the seismic design
situation;

kD is the factor reflecting the ductility class equal to 1/2 for DC2 and to 2/3 for DC3;

ρ’l is the compression steel ratio of the beam bars passing through the joint;

ρl,max is the maximum allowed tension steel ratio (see 10.5.4.2(5));

γRd accounts for overstrength due to strain-hardening and may be taken equal to 1,1 for DC2 and
1,2 for DC3.

(3) The limitations in (2) may be disregarded for diagonal bars crossing joints.

(4) Alternatively to the explicit calculation of dbL given by Formulas (10.40) and (10.41), the values in
Table 10.4 may be used, for reinforcing steel of ductility class C, when a) and b) are satisfied:

if the normalised design axial force in the column is not less than 0,15;

at interior beam-column joints, if the ratio of beam compression bars crossing the joint is less than 1%.

Table 10.4 — Maximum diameter of beam longitudinal bars passing through beam-column joints
Steel grade (ductility class C)
Concrete grade
B400 B500
DC2: dbL ≤ 4,0% hc DC2: dbL ≤ 3,0% hc
Interior C20-C25
DC3: dbL ≤ 3,0% hc DC3: dbL ≤ 2,0% hc
beam-column
joints DC2: dbL ≤ 6,0% hc DC2: dbL ≤ 5,0% hc
C30-C45
DC3: dbL ≤ 4,5% hc DC3: dbL ≤ 3,5% hc
DC2: dbL ≤ 8,5% hc DC2: dbL ≤ 7,0% hc
C50-C90
DC3: dbL ≤ 7,0% hc DC3: dbL ≤ 5,5% hc
Steel grade (ductility class C)
Concrete grade
B400 B500
Exterior
beam-column C20-C25 DC2 or DC3: dbL ≤ 4,5% hc DC2 or DC3: dbL ≤ 3,5% hc
joints
C30-C45 DC2 or DC3: dbL ≤ 6,5% hc DC2 or DC3: dbL ≤ 5,5% hc
C50-C90 DC2 or DC3: dbL ≤ 9,5% hc DC2 or DC3: dbL ≤ 7,5% hc

(5) If (2) cannot be satisfied in exterior beam-column joints because the depth, hc, of the column parallel
to the bars is too shallow, one of the additional measures in a) to c) may be taken, to ensure anchorage of the
longitudinal reinforcement of beams:

the beam or slab may be extended horizontally in the form of exterior stubs (Figure 10.16a);

123
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

headed bars according to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 11.4.5, may be used (Figure 10.16b);

bends according to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 11.4.3, and transverse reinforcement placed tightly inside the
bend of the bars may be added (Figure 10.16c).

hc
hc hc
d bw > 0,6d bl
lb > 5d bl
d bl
>10d bl
h h h
A

(a) (b) (c)

Key
A anchor plate
B hoops around column bars

Figure 10.16 — Additional measures for anchorage in exterior beam-column joints

(6) Top or bottom bars crossing interior joints should be anchored in the members framing into the joint
beyond a distance not less than lcr (length of critical region, see 10.5.4.2(1)) from the face of the joint.

10.11.3 Laps and mechanical couplers

(1) There should not be laps in the critical regions of beams.

(2) There should not be any lap-splicing by welding within the critical regions of structural members.

(3) There should not be splicing by mechanical couplers in the critical regions of primary seismic columns
and beams and within a distance of twice the member depth from the critical regions, unless (4) is satisfied.

(4) There may be splicing by mechanical couplers in the critical regions of primary seismic walls or within
a distance of twice the member depth from the critical regions of primary seismic columns and beams, if these
devices are covered by testing under conditions compatible with the seismic design situation and if their
resistance is not smaller than 1,25 times the tensile strength of the lapped bars.

(5) The transverse reinforcement to be provided within the lap length should be calculated in accordance
with EN 1992-1-1:2019, 11.5. In addition, a) to c) should also be met:

if the anchored and the continuing bar are arranged in a plane parallel to the transverse reinforcement,
the total area of all lapped bars, ΣAsL, should be used in the calculation of the transverse reinforcement.

if the anchored and the continuing bar are arranged within a plane normal to the transverse
reinforcement, the area of transverse reinforcement should be calculated on the basis of the area of the
larger lapped longitudinal bar, AsL;

the spacing, s, of the transverse reinforcement in the lap zone (in mm) should not exceed the value given
by Formula (10.42).

124
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑠 = min{ℎ⁄4 ; 100} (10.42)

where h is the minimum cross-sectional dimension (s and h in mm).

(6) The required area of transverse reinforcement Ast within the lap zone of the longitudinal
reinforcement of columns spliced at the same location (as defined in EN 1992-1-1:2019, 11.5), or of the
longitudinal reinforcement of boundary elements in walls, may be calculated with Formula (10.43).

𝐴 = 𝑠 (𝑑 ⁄50) 𝑓 ⁄𝑓 (10.43)

where:

Ast is the area of one leg of the transverse reinforcement;

dbL is the diameter of the lapped longitudinal bars;

s is the spacing of the transverse reinforcement;

fyd is the design yield strength of the longitudinal reinforcement;

fywd is the design yield strength of the transverse reinforcement.

10.12 Provisions for concrete diaphragms

10.12.1 Cast in place diaphragms

(1) A solid reinforced concrete slab may be considered as a rigid diaphragm, as defined in 5.1.3(6), if its
thickness is not less than 70 mm and if it is reinforced in both horizontal directions with at least the minimum
reinforcement specified in EN 1992-1-1:2019, 12.3.1(1).

(2) A cast-in-place topping on a precast floor or roof structure may be considered as a rigid diaphragm, if
a) to d) are fulfilled:

the thickness of the topping layer is not less than 40 mm for span between supports not longer than 8 m,
or 50 mm for longer spans;

its mesh reinforcement is connected to the beams or walls supporting the diaphragm;

it is designed to provide alone the required diaphragm stiffness and resistance, according to 6.2.8;

it is cast over a clean, rough substrate, or connected to it through shear connectors.

(3) Design action effects should take into account overstrength according to 6.2.8.

(4) The design resistances should be derived in accordance with EN 1992-1-1:2019.

10.12.2 Precast concrete diaphragms

(1) 10.14 should be applied in addition to 10.12.1 and EN 1992-1-1:2019, 13.6.2.

10.13 Prestressed concrete

(1) Prestressed concrete beams and columns should be designed according to 10.5 and 10.6, adding to
the calculated action effects the hyperstatic axial force and bending moment generated by prestress.

125
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) In the design of prestressed concrete beams and columns, the vertical component of the seismic action
should be taken into account according to 4.2(2).

(3) Bonded prestressing tendons should not be used in critical regions of primary seismic members.

(4) Anchorage of the prestressing tendons (bonded or unbonded) should not be located in the critical
regions of primary seismic members.

10.14 Precast concrete

10.14.1 Structural types and behaviour factor q

(1) 10.14 should be applied to all structural types defined in 10.4.1, to wall panel structures and to cell
structures (precast monolithic room cell structures). Structures may be made partly or fully of precast
members.

(2) Beam to column joints considered as strong or weak partial strength joints for moment resisting
frames in Table 10.5 should be characterised by a design moment resistance MRd greater or smaller,
respectively, than 0,5 times the moment resistance MRd at the bottom of the connected column.

NOTE Weak partial strength joints developing negligible bending moments, like for instance dowel type joints, are
called nominally pinned joints.

(3) The rotation capacity θtot of strong and weak partial strength joints for moment resisting frames
should not be smaller than 25 mrad in DC2 and 35 mrad in DC3.

(4) The values of the behaviour factor components qR, qD and q defined in Table 10.5 should be applied.

Table 10.5 — Default values of the behaviour factors of precast concrete structures
Structural type qR qD q = qR qS qD
DC2 DC3 DC2 DC3
Multi-storey, multi-bay moment resisting frames or
moment resisting frame-equivalent dual structures with
1,3 2,5 3,9
beams with strong partial strength joints or rigid joints
without cladding or with isostatic cladding
Multi-storey, one-bay moment resisting frames with strong
1,3 2,0
partial strength joints or rigid joints without cladding or 1,2 2,3 3,6
with isostatic cladding
Moment
One-storey moment resisting frames with strong partial
resisting frame
strength joints or rigid joints without cladding or with 1,1 2,1 3,3
or
isostatic cladding
moment
One-storey one bay or multi-bay, moment resisting frames
resisting frame-
with beams with weak joints without cladding or with 1,1 1,3 2,1 2,1 3,0
equivalent dual
isostatic cladding and νd ≤ 0,3
structures
Multi-storey, one bay or multi-bay, moment resisting
frames with beams with weak joints without cladding or 1,1 NA* 2,1 NA* 2,0
with isostatic cladding and νd ≤ 0,3
One-storey one bay or multi-bay, or multi-storey, one bay
or multi-bay moment resisting frames with beams with
NA**
weak joints without cladding or with isostatic cladding and
νd > 0,3
Wall-equivalent dual structures with strong partial
1,2 1,3 2,0 2,3 3,6
strength joints or rigid joints with or without cladding

126
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Coupled wall structures with strong partial strength joints

1,2 1,4 2,5 3,6
or rigid joints with or without cladding
Uncoupled wall structure with only two uncoupled walls
per horizontal direction, with or without cladding and 1,0 1,3 2,0 3,0
Wall- or other uncoupled wall structure, with or without cladding
wall-equivalent Multi-storey moment resisting frame with beams simply
dual structures supported or with weak partial strength connections and 1,2 1,3 NA* 2,3 NA*
with integrated cladding
Multi-storey moment resisting frame with beams with
strong partial strength connections and with integrated 1,2 1,4 NA* 2,5 NA*
cladding
Large walls structures and cell structures (factor kw given by Formula (10.1) - - - 3kw 3kw
NA*: Not Applicable NA**: Inverted pendulum - DC1 design only

10.14.2 Rules applicable to all structural types and to DC1, DC2 and DC3

(1) Unless otherwise specified, 10.1 to 10.13 and 10.15 to 10.17 should be applied, complemented with
10.14.

(2) The models for analysis should comply with a) to i):

the eccentricities between members should be modelled;

the joints between the members should be represented with their degrees of freedom in the different
planes;

the joints should be characterised by parameters related to the type of analysis as defined in EN 1998-1-
1:2020, 6.2;

the data on joints required for the analysis and for verifications should be based on experimental evidence
or on models based on such experimental evidence;

experimental evidence may be based on existing data; if such data is not available, they should be
established by experiments;

NOTE CEN doc. XXE gives additional information concerning cyclic testing of components.

the in-plane flexibility of the floors and roof precast members, the flexibility of the joints of floors and roof
members to the beams and the flexibility of peripheral beams in the horizontal plane should be taken into
account in the model;

the effect of rocking panels attached to the main structure by means of isostatic fastenings and of the
interaction between rocking panels on the response of the whole building should be taken into account;

If the diaphragm's horizontal displacements in the seismic design situation calculated considering the in-
plane flexibility of the diaphragm nowhere exceed by more than 10% those found with a rigid diaphragm
assumption, then the diaphragm may be taken as rigid;

diaphragms realised by reinforced concrete topping cast in place over precast concrete members and
complying with 10.12 may be considered as rigid.

(3) If diaphragms do not comply with the limit of deformability defined in (2)h) or with (2)i), the model
of the structure should be 3D and the method of analysis should be either modal response spectrum analysis
or pushover analysis or dynamic non-linear analysis.

127
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(4) The method of analysis of multi storey precast structures should be either modal response spectrum
analysis or pushover analysis or response-history analysis.

(5) Friction due to compression forces other than by prestressing should be ignored.

NOTE Rules are given for the design of dowel joints in CEN doc. XXF, for the design of joints between precast concrete
structural members in ISO 20987:2019 and for the design of joints of concrete claddings to concrete structures in ISO
xxxx:2019.

(6) Data for verification of action effects calculated through non-linear pushover or response-history
analysis should be as given in EN 1998-1-1:2020 for concrete joint zones and in CEN doc. XXF for dowel joints.

10.14.3 Precast moment resisting frames

10.14.3.1 Rules applicable to DC1, DC2 and DC3

(1) Precast beams and columns of precast moment resisting frames may be connected by cast in place
concrete zones or by other types of joints.

(2) Joints may be strong or weak partial strength joints as defined in 10.14.1.

(3) In precast moment resisting frames with weak partial strength or nominally pinned beam-to-column
joints, columns should be fully fixed against translation and rotation at their base.

(4) The shear resistance of structural members in the vicinity of joints and of all types of joints should be
verified for 1,5VEd, where VEd is the shear action effect calculated at the joints in the seismic design situation.

(5) Shear resistance at cast in place to precast interface and at precast to precast interfaces should be
verified using EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.6.

10.14.3.2 Design to DC1

(1) The design shear VEd in weak partial strength or nominally pinned connections at supports of beams
and at supports of floor members should not be smaller than ΔMEd/hs,cl,

where:

ΔMEd = MEd,i – MEd,i+1 is the variation of the moment in the column adjacent to the beam support at the storey
level i considered, in the seismic design situation;

hs,cl is the clear storey height.

10.14.3.3 Design to DC2 and DC3

(1) 10.5 for beams and 10.6 for columns should be applied.

(2) In moment resisting frames with beams with weak joints and without cladding or with isostatic
cladding, only the base of columns should be taken as critical region, with a length lcr as given by Formula
(10.44):

lcr = max {2 bmax; 1,00 m} (10.44)

where:

bmax is the greatest cross-sectional dimension of the column.

128
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) Dissipative zones may be in the structural members or in the joints.

(4) In DC3, 7.4.3 should be applied.

(5) If dissipative zones are in the structural members, a), b) and c) should be applied:

The design bending moment and shear in the non-dissipative structural members, their joints and the
joints of the members where dissipative zones are located should be those established by application of
the capacity design rules in 10.5.3 and 10.6.2, multiplied by a factor γRd = 1,2.

NOTE Non-dissipative joints in the vicinity of dissipative zones are called strong joints (see Figure 10.17).

Mechanical or welded or lap splices between reinforcing bars should not be closer than h/2 from the
centre of the dissipative zone, where h is the section depth (Figure 10.17).

The design resistance of mechanical or welded splices which are closer than h from the centre of a
dissipative zone should not be smaller than 1,25 times the yield strength of the bars they connect. The
length of straight lap splices should not be smaller than 1,25 times the straight lap length of bars in cast-
in-place concrete.

A
B A
B C C h
C B

h h A D

D h D h

a) beam to column joints b) beam to column joints c) column to footing joints

Key
A strong joint
B critical section
C plastic hinge zone
D joint length

Figure 10.17 — Examples of dissipative zones in the RC beam or column and adjacent overstrength
joints

(6) If dissipative zones are in the joints, a) to c) should be applied:

The design bending moment and shear outside the dissipative joints should be those established by
application of the capacity design rules in 10.5.3 and 10.6.2 multiplied by a factor γRd = 1,25.

The yield strength of elements of the joints that are not designed to yield should be greater than 1,2 times
the yield strength of the yielding portion of the joints.

(5)b applies.

129
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(7) The design shear VEd in weak partial strength or nominally pinned connections at supports of beams
and at supports of floor members should not be smaller than γRd MRd/hs,cl where MRd is the bending resistance
of the column adjacent to the beam support at the storey level considered, hs,cl is the clear storey height and
γRd = 1,15 in DC2 and 1,25 in DC3.

10.14.4 Precast walls

10.14.4.1 Rules applicable to DC1, DC2 and DC3

(1) Precast walls, considered as those made of precast concrete panels connected along their edges,
should be designed to behave as monolithic walls.

10.14.4.2 Design to DC2 and DC3

(1) Precast walls should be designed as cast in place ductile walls or as large walls and comply respectively
with 10.8.2 or 10.9.2 in the determination of the design action effects, and with 10.8.3.1 or 10.9.3.1 and
10.9.3.2 in the determination of the wall resistance in bending and shear.

(2) Boundary elements should comply with the provisions on concrete confinement of 10.8.3.2 for DC2
ductile walls and 10.9.3.3 for large RC walls.

NOTE The boundary elements are the edge regions of the overall cross-section of precast walls.

(3) Precast panels should be reinforced by two layers of mesh with pitch not larger than 200 mm and bar
diameter not smaller than 8 mm. Perimeter reinforcement by two longitudinal bars of diameter at least 12
mm and edge links of diameter not smaller than 8 mm at 200 mm spacing should be placed.

(4) Splices of vertical bars between adjacent panels may be lapped, welded or with mechanical splices.

(5) The resistance of mechanical or welded splices should not be smaller than 1,25 times the yield
strength of the bars that they connect. The length of straight lap splices should be at least 1,25 times the
straight lap length of bars in cast-in-place concrete.

(6) Welded splices of vertical reinforcement should be within recesses (Figure 10.18).

~100mm

A bj
~100mm

~100mm

Key
A lap-welding of bars

Figure 10.18 — Tensile reinforcement possibly needed at the edge of walls (Elevation view;
dimensions are indicative)

(7) The shear resistance of cast in place concrete joints between panels and of concrete along joints
between panels should be verified for 1,5VEd, where VEd is the shear action effect at the joints in the seismic
design situation.

130
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(8) The horizontal reinforcement ratio across vertical joints of panels should be between 0,2% and 2%.

(9) Horizontal reinforcement may be distributed in three bands at the top, middle and bottom of the
vertical joint of panels.

(10) Continuity of horizontal reinforcement across vertical panel-to-panel joints should be ensured.

NOTE Horizontal continuity can be obtained by using loops of the horizontal reinforcement with a vertical bar placed
in the loop (Figure 10.19a) or by welding of horizontal bars across the joint (Figure 10.19b).

(11) The vertical reinforcement ratio relative to the area of grout in vertical joints should not be less than
1%.
A A

D D

C B C B

(a) (b)
Key
A reinforcement protruding across joint
B vertical reinforcement along joint
C trace of indentations in concrete panel
D grout filling between panels

Figure 10.19 — Plan view. Cross-section of vertical joints between precast large-panels: a) joint with
two accessible faces; b) joint with one accessible face

10.14.4.3 Design to DC3

(1) Precast walls should be designed as cast in place ductile walls and comply with 10.8.3.2.

(2) Boundary elements should comply with the provisions on confinement in 10.8.3.2.

(3) A square part of the section at each edge of a precast panel, with side equal to the wall panel thickness,
bw, should be confined according to 10.6.3.2.

(4) 10.14.4.2(4) to (6) on splices should be applied.

(5) The total tension force in the wall should be resisted by vertical reinforcement placed in the zone of
the wall panel under tension.

(6) Shear sliding should be verified according to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.6 on the part of the horizontal
joint under compression and for the compression force Fc acting on the compression zone. The value of
coefficient cv1 for the shear resistance at interfaces according to EN 1992-1-1:2019, 8.2.6(5), should be halved.

(7) The shear resistance of non-dissipative components should be verified for 1,3VEd, where VEd is the
shear action effect at the joint in the seismic design situation as defined in 10.8.3.1(4) and (5) for cast in place
DC3.

131
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(8) The horizontal reinforcement ratio across vertical joints of panels should not be lower than 0,10% in
fully compressed joints and 0,25% in partly compressed joints; it should not be more than 2%.

10.14.5 Precast floors and roof diaphragms. Rules for ductility classes DC1, DC2 and DC3

(1) Precast concrete floors and roof diaphragms should not be dissipative components of the structure.

NOTE Possible ways to achieve a diaphragm effect with precast floor members are: by a concrete topping cast in
place over precast members and connected to peripheral tie-beams: by connecting wide precast floor members to
peripheral beams in such a way that the precast members act as fixed beams in a horizontal frame; by floor to floor joints
between precast beam or slab members which are connected to peripheral beams; by precast slabs or beams simply
connected to peripheral moment resisting frames.

(2) Rigid diaphragms or flexible diaphragms may be used.

10.15 Design and detailing of foundations

(1) The foundation members should be designed according to EN 1998-5: 2019, 9.

132
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11 SPECIFIC RULES FOR STEEL BUILDINGS

11.1 Scope

(1) 11 should be applied to the design and the verification of steel buildings, in seismic regions.

(2) 11 should be applied as a complement to EN 1993-1-1:20XX.

11.2 Basis of Design

11.2.1 Design concepts

(1) Earthquake resistant steel buildings should be designed in one of the Ductility Classes introduced in
EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.4.2(3) and 4.4.2, (see Table 11.1), according to their dissipation capacity:

— DC1: Low-dissipative structural behaviour;

— DC2 and DC3: Dissipative structural behaviour.

Table 11.1 — Structural ductility classes and upper limit reference values of the behaviour factors

Structural ductility Range of the reference values of

class the behaviour factor q

DC1 1,5

DC2 1,5  q  3,5

only limited by the values of

DC3
Table 11.3

(2) In DC2 and DC3, the capability of parts of the structure (dissipative zones) to resist seismic action
through inelastic behaviour may be taken into account with upper limit values of qD and qR depending on the
Ductility Class and the structural type (see 11.4). The rules in 11.3 to 11.6 and 11.8 to 11.18 should be met.

(3) In order for DC2 and DC3 classes to provide an increased ability of the structure to dissipate energy in
plastic mechanisms, 11.8 to 11.18 should be applied.

(4) In DC1, the seismic design should be checked according to 11.7.

11.2.2 Safety verifications

(1) In the capacity design verifications specified in 11.8 to 11.18, the possibility that the actual yield
strength of steel is higher than the nominal one should be taken into account through factor γrm , which is the
ratio between the expected (i.e. mean) yield strength fy,mean and the nominal yield strength fy at the plastic
hinge location and depends on steel grade.

NOTE The material overstrength factor γrm has the values given in Table 11.2 (NDP), unless the National Annex gives
different values.

133
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Table 11.2 — (NDP) Material overstrength factor γrm

Steel grade γrm

S235 1,45

S275 1,35

S355 and S420 1,25

S460 1,2

(2) Partial factors M,i should comply with EN1993-1-1:2004, 6.1(1).

11.3 Materials

(1)P The material properties, such as yield strength and toughness, in the dissipative zones shall be such
that plastic deformations form where they are intended to in the design.

(2) If the design of dissipative zones is made using a single steel grade with a specified upper value fy,max =
rm fy smaller than the nominal value fy of the steel grades specified for non-dissipative zones, factor, rm may
be taken as being 1,00 in the verifications of non-dissipative zones defined in 11.8 to 11.18.

NOTE 1 The actual value of rm is greater than 1,00. (2) is a simplification provided that the material properties of
dissipative and non-dissipative zones are consistently checked.

NOTE 2 In the verification of Formula (11.4) for connections, the Note to 11.2.2(1) applies for rm.

(3) For dissipative zones, the steel grade to be used shall be specified and noted on the drawings. A higher
grade shall not be supplied for these zones (see 11.19 (3)).

(4) The toughness of the steels and the welds should satisfy the provisions for the seismic action at the
quasi-permanent value of service temperature.

NOTE 1 The steel categories complying with (4) are given in EN 1993-1-10, where the stress level σEd=0,75fy(t) should
be considered to correspond to the case of yielded cross section, and should be used for the selection of material
toughness and thickness in the seismic design situation.

NOTE 2 The quasi-permanent values of the service temperature for use in a country can be set in the National Annex
or by the relevant Authorities.

(5) The required toughness of steel and welds and the lowest service temperature adopted in combination
with the seismic action should be defined in the project specification.

(6) In bolted connections of primary seismic members, high strength preloaded bolts of grade 8.8 or 10.9
with controlled tightening in accordance with EN 1993-1-8 should be used.

(7) The checking of material properties should be in accordance with 11.19.

134
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.4 Structural types, behaviour factors and limits of seismic action

11.4.1 Structural types

(1) Steel buildings should be assigned to one of the structural types in a) to i) according to the behaviour
of their primary resisting structure under seismic actions (see Figures 11.1 to 11.11).

a) Moment resisting frames, in which horizontal forces are mainly resisted by members acting in an
essentially flexural manner (see the design rules in 11.9).

b) Frames with concentric bracings, in which horizontal forces are mainly resisted by members subjected to
axial forces (see the design rules in 11.10).

c) Frames with eccentric bracings, in which horizontal forces are mainly resisted by axially loaded members,
but where the eccentricity of the layout is such that energy can be dissipated in seismic links by means of
either cyclic bending or cyclic shear (see the design rules in 11.11).

d) Frames with buckling restrained bracings, in which horizontal forces are mainly resisted by members
subjected to axial forces that are active both in tension and in compression and which are prevented from
buckling by a restraining mechanism (see the design rules in 11.12).

e) Dual frames, in which at least 25% of the lateral resistance is provided by moment resisting frames; the
rest is provided by frames with concentric, eccentric or buckling restrained bracings (see the design rules
in 11.13).

f) Lightweight steel systems using flat strap bracing or sheathed with steel sheets or wood sheeting or
gypsum sheeting, in which horizontal forces are mainly resisted by light weight members made of cold-
form members covered by EN 1993-1-3, which are mostly subjected to either a truss force pattern or to a
plastic deformation pattern in the connections between the sheeting and its supports (see the design rules
in 11.14).

g) Inverted pendulum structures in which 50% or more of the mass is in the upper third of the height of the
structure, or in which the dissipation of energy takes place mainly at the base of a single building element
or at the bases of columns (see the design rules in 11.15).

h) Structures with concrete cores or concrete walls, in which horizontal forces are mainly resisted by these
cores or walls, whose shear resistance at the building base exceeds 75% of the total shear resistance (see
the design rules in 11.16.1).

i) Moment resisting frames combined with infills (see the design rules in 11.16.2).

a) b) c) d)

Figure 11.1 — Moment resisting frames (dissipative zones in beams and at bottom of columns): a)
portal frame; b) single-storey MRF; c) single-span multi-storey MRF; d) multi-span multi-storey MRF

135
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Figure 11.2 — Frames with concentric bracings where the concept of tension-only diagonals is
allowed

Figure 11.3 — Frames with concentric bracings where the concept of tension-compression diagonals
is allowed

Figure 11.4 — Frames with eccentric bracings (dissipative zones in bending or shear links)

Figure 11.5 — Frames with buckling restrained bracings (dissipative zones in tension and
compression diagonals)

136
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

a) b)
Figure 11.6 — Lightweight steel systems: a) Strap braced walls; b) Shear walls with steel sheet or
wood sheathing or gypsum sheathing

a) b)
Figure 11.7 — Inverted pendulum: a) dissipative zones at the column base; b) dissipative zones in
columns (NEd,G/Npl,Rd ≥ 0,3)

Figure 11.8 — Structures with concrete cores or concrete walls

Figure 11.9 — Dual frames with moment resisting frame combined with either concentric, eccentric
or buckling restrained bracing (dissipative zones in both moment and braced frames)

Figure 11.10 — Moment resisting frame combined with infills

137
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Figure 11.11 — Frame with K bracings (not allowed)

(2) In single storey moment resisting frames, the dissipative zones may be located at the top and bottom
of primary columns in which NEd,G in columns satisfies the inequality: NEd,G / Npl,Rd < 0,3.

(3) In frames with concentric bracings, the dissipative zones should be located in the diagonals.

(4) The design of frames with concentric bracings should consider that both tension and compression
diagonals contribute to resist the seismic action, both in the pre-and post-buckling situations.

(5) The design of frames with concentric bracings may consider that only the tension diagonals resist the
seismic action only for X bracings and split X bracings in DC2 – see Figure 11.2. Bracings other than X bracings
and split X bracings in DC2 should not be designed as tension only bracings.

NOTE The "tension only" design method is an approximation in comparison to design considering both diagonals
contribution to resistance.

(6) Bracings in which the intersection of the diagonals lies on a column, usually named K bracings (see
Figure 11.11) shall not be used.

(7) Single-storey moment resisting frames in which the primary structure possesses more than one
column in each resisting plane and in which NEd,G ≥ 0,3 Npl,Rd in all primary columns should be considered as
inverted pendulum structures.

NOTE NEd,G is the axial force due to the non-seismic actions in the seismic design situation

11.4.2 Behaviour factors

(1) For regular structural systems, the behaviour factor components qD and qR and the behaviour factor q
may be taken with the default values given in Table 11.3, provided that 11.8 to 11.16 are satisfied.

Table 11.3 — Default upper limit values of behaviour factors for steel systems regular in elevation
Ductility Class
STRUCTURAL TYPE DC2 DC3
qD qR q qD qR Q
a) Moment resisting frames (MRFs)
Portal frames and single-storey MRFs with class 3 and 4 cross sections 1,3 1 2 - - -
Portal frames and single-storey MRFs with class 1 and 2 cross sections 1,8 1,1 3 3,3 1,1 5,5
Multi-storey MRFs 1,8 1,3 3,5 3,3 1,3 6,5
b) Frames with concentric bracings
Diagonal bracings
1,7 1 2,5 2,4 1,1 4
V-bracings
X-bracings on either single or two-storey
c) Frames with eccentric bracings 1,8 1,3 3,5 3,1 1,3 6

138
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

d) Frames with buckling restrained braces 3,3 1,2 6

e) Dual frames
MRFs with concentric bracing 1,8 1,1 3 2,9 1,1 4,8
MRFs with eccentric bracing 2,1 1,3 4 3,3 1,3 6,5
MRFs with buckling restrained braces - - - 3,3 1,3 6,5
See Table 10.1:
f) Structures with concrete cores or concrete walls
walls or wall equivalent structures
g) Lightweight steel frame wall systems
with flat strap bracing 1,3 1 2 1,7 1 2,5
with steel sheeting 1,3 1 2 1,7 1 2,5
with wood sheathing 1,3 1 2 1,7 1 2,5
with gypsum sheathing 1,1 1 1,7 1,3 1 2
h) Inverted pendulum 1,3 1 2 1,5 1 2,3
i) Moment resisting frames with infills
Unconnected concrete or masonry infills, in contact with the frame 2 1 3
See Table 12.2:
Connected reinforced concrete infills
composite structural wall systems
Infills isolated from moment frame (see MRFs)
NOTE The values of qR and qD in Table 11.3 are default values in the sense of 5.3.2 and the values of q are obtained
as the product of the default values of qD and qR with qS equal to 1,5.

(2) For buildings non-regular in elevation (see 4.4.4.2(1)), the behaviour factor q should be reduced
according to 5.3.2(2). For torsionally flexible structures (see 4.4.3(1)) and according to 5.3.2(5), q should
not be smaller than 1,5.

11.4.3 Limits of seismic action for design to DC1, DC2 and DC3

For each structural type, design to a given Ductility Class should not be made above levels of seismic
action index Sδ (see EN 1998-1-1:2019, 4.1(4)) given in Table 11.4.

Table 11.4 — Limits of seismic action index for design to DC1, DC2 and DC3
Limits of seismic action index
Structural type
Sδ (m/s2)
DC1 DC2 DC3
Moment frames 5,0 6,5 no limits
Frames with concentric or eccentric bracings 5,0 6,5 no limits
Buckling-restrained braced frames - - no limits
Dual frames (moment frames with bracings) 5,0 7,5 no limits
Steel structure with concrete cores/walls 5,0 7,5 no limits
Lightweight steel frame wall systems 50 7,5 no limits
Inverted pendulum 2,5 5,0 no limits
Moment resisting frames with unconnected concrete or
See 7.
masonry infills, in contact with the frame
Moment resisting frames with connected reinforced
See 12.4.3
concrete infills
(2) If a behaviour factor q=1,0 is used in design, the upper limits of seismic action index Sδ in Table 11.4 may
be waived for all structural systems.

139
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.5 Structural analysis

(1) Except where otherwise specified in 11 (e.g. frames with tension-only concentric bracings, see
11.4.1(5) and 10.2(2), the analysis of the structure may be made assuming that all primary members are
active.

11.6 Verification to Limit States

11.6.1 General

(1) The verification of structural elements to limit states should comply with 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3.

11.6.2 Resistance conditions at Significant Damage limit state

(1) The resistance of structural members and connections at Significant Damage should be verified using
Eurocode 3.

(2) Second-order effects should be verified in accordance with 6.2.4. In DC3 steel structures, if qS <γrmΩd,
where Ωd is given in 11.8.5(4), coefficient  for second-order effects (see 6.2.4 should be evaluated at all
storeys in accordance with Formula (11.1).

𝜃= ,
(11.1)

rm is the material overstrength factor of the steel in the dissipative zones (see 11.2.2);

Ωd is the design overstrength ratio, as specified in 11.8.5(2) and (3) and in 11.9 to 11.15;

qR is given in Table 11.3;

other notations are given in 6.2.4(1).

11.6.3 Limitation of interstorey drift at Significant Damage limit state

(1) For all ductility classes, the interstorey drift at SD limit state should be limited to:

a) dr,SD ≤ 0,020 hs for moment frames;

b) dr,SD ≤ 0,015 hs for braced frames and inverted pendulum structures;

c) for frames with buckling restrained bracings see 11.12.4(4);

d) dr,SD ≤ 0,020 hs for dual frames;

e) dr,SD ≤ 0,010 hs for light weight structures;

where:

dr,SD is as given in 6.2.4;

hs is the interstorey height.

140
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.7 Design rules for low-dissipative (DC1) structural behaviour for all structural types
11.7.1 General

(1) 11.7.2 should be applied to the primary members of structures designed for low-dissipative
behaviour.

11.7.2 Design rules for low-dissipative structures

(1) Low-dissipative structures should be designed to resist seismic actions almost in the elastic range.
Therefore, the design forces should be evaluated assuming that both qD and qR are equal to 1,0.

(2) The structural members and connections should have stiffness and resistance in accordance with
Eurocode 3.

11.8 Design rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) structural behaviour common to all
structural types
11.8.1 General

(1) 11.8.2 to 11.8.5 should be applied to the members of the primary structures designed for dissipative
behaviour.

11.8.2 Design criteria for dissipative structures

(1)P Structures with dissipative zones shall be designed so that yielding or local buckling or other
phenomena due to hysteretic behaviour do not affect the overall stability of the structure.

(2) Dissipative zones should have adequate ductility and resistance.

(3) Dissipative zones may be located in the structural members or in the connections.

(4) If dissipative zones are located in the structural members, the non-dissipative parts and the
connections of the dissipative parts to the rest of the structure should have sufficient overstrength to allow
the development of cyclic yielding in the dissipative parts.

(5) When dissipative zones are located in the connections, the bolts and welds of the connections and the
connected members should have sufficient overstrength to allow the development of cyclic yielding in the
weakest components of the connections.

11.8.3 Design rules for dissipative elements in compression or bending

(1) Sufficient local ductility of members which dissipate energy in compression or bending should be
ensured by restricting the width to thickness ratio b/t according to the cross-sectional classes specified in EN
1993-1-1:2005, 5.5. Further rules dependent on structural types are given in 11.9 to 11.16.

(2) Depending on the ductility class and the behaviour factor q, cross-sectional classes of dissipative
elements should be chosen according to Table 11.5.

141
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Table 11.5 — Provisions on cross-sectional class of dissipative elements depending on Ductility Class
and behaviour factor
Ductility class Value of q Required cross-sectional class
class 1, 2, 3 and 4
1,5 < q  2 for portal frames, lightweight systems and
single-storey moment frames
class 1, 2
1,5 < q  2
DC2 for inverted pendulum
class 3, 4
1,5 < q  2,5
for lightweight systems
class 1, 2
2 < q  3,5
for MRFs, CBFs, EBFs and dual frames
q > 3,5 class 1
DC3 class 3 or 4
2  q  2,5
for lightweight systems

11.8.4 Design rules for dissipative parts of elements in tension

(1) For tension members or parts of members in tension, the ductility provision of EN 1993-1-1:2005,
6.2.3(3), should be met.

11.8.5 Design rules for members

(1) In DC2, the resistance and stability of members defined by structural type in Table 11.6 and of the
connections of these members should be verified under the most unfavourable combination of the axial force
NEd, bending moments MEd and shear force VEd from the following Formulae:

𝑁 =𝑁 , "+"𝛺∙𝑁 ,

𝑀 =𝑀 , "+"𝑀 , (11.2)
𝑉 =𝑉 , "+"𝑉 ,

where:

NEd,G , MEd,G and VEd,G are the effects of the non-seismic actions in the seismic design situation;

NEd,E , MEd,E and VEd,E are the effects of the design seismic action;

 is the seismic action magnification factor, see (3).

"+" "+" means combined with + or – sign;

NOTE The non dissipative elements are defined in Table 11.6.

(2) The resistance and stability of non-dissipative members in DC3 should be verified under the most
unfavourable combination of the axial force NEd, bending moments MEd and shear force VEd from Formulae
(11.3).

𝑁 =𝑁 , "+"𝛾 𝛾 𝛺 𝑁 ,

𝑀 =𝑀 , "+"𝛾 𝛾 𝛺 𝑀 , (11.3)
𝑉 =𝑉 , "+"𝛾 𝛾 𝛺 𝑉 ,

142
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

where:

rm is the material overstrength factor of the steel in the dissipative zone (see 11.2.2);

sh is the factor accounting for hardening of the dissipative zone (see Table 11.7);

Ωd is the minimum design overstrength, see (3);

"+" means combined with + or – sign;

NOTE The members to which (2) applies are the members which in DC3 are considered non dissipative and which are
defined in Table 11.6.

Table 11.6 — Members to which (1) or (2) apply. Values of seismic action magnification factor Ω in
DC2
Members to which
STRUCTURAL TYPE Ω
(1) or (2) apply
Moment resisting frames (MRFs)
Portal frames with class 3 and 4 cross sections 1,5
Single-storey MRFs with class 3 and 4 cross sections 1,5 columns
Portal frames and single-storey MRFs with class 1 and 2 cross sections 1,7
Multi-storey MRFs 2
Frames with concentric bracings
Diagonal bracings
1,5 beams and columns
V-bracings
X-bracings on either single or two-storey
beams outside the link,
Frames with eccentric bracings 2
braces and columns
Dual frames
beams and columns of
the concentric bracing;
MRFs with concentric bracing 1,7
columns of the MRF;

beams out of the link,

braces and columns of
MRFs with eccentric bracing 2
the eccentric bracing;
columns of the MRF
Structures with concrete cores or concrete walls See 10
Lightweight steel frame wall systems
with flat strap bracing 1,5 connections and
with steel sheeting 1,5 framing: chord studs
with wood sheathing 1,5 and tracks
with gypsum sheathing 1,3
Inverted pendulum structures 1,5 columns
Moment resisting frames with infills
Unconnected concrete or masonry infills, in contact with the frame 1,5 columns
Connected reinforced concrete infills See 10 See section 10
Infills isolated from moment frame (see MRFs) columns

143
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) In DC3 the design overstrength factor Ωd should be taken not smaller than 1 and to depend on the
structural system, as specified in 11.9 to 11.15. The non-dissipative members to which Formula (11.3) applies
are those defined in Table 11.6.

(4) In DC2 and DC3 structures the resistance of the non-dissipative elements connected to dissipative
connections should not be lower than rmsh Rd, where Rd is the resistance of the connections in accordance
with EN1993-1-8, rm is the factor for variability of steel yield strength in the dissipative zones (see 11.2.2),
and sh is the overstrength factor for hardening of the dissipative zones (see Table 11.7).

11.8.6 Design rules for connections in dissipative zones

(1) Non-dissipative connections of dissipative members made by means of full penetration butt welds
may be considered to satisfy Formula (11.4).

(2) Non-dissipative connections should be designed for the relevant forces/moments at the location of
the connection in accordance with 11.8.5. For fillet welded or bolted non-dissipative connections at the
location of the dissipative zones, Formula (11.4) should be satisfied.

𝑅 ≥𝛾 𝛾 𝑅 (11.4)

where:

Rd is the resistance of the connection in accordance with EN 1993-1-8;

Rfy is the plastic resistance of the connected dissipative member evaluated in the expected position of
the plastic hinge and based on the nominal yield stress of the material as defined in EN 1993-1;

rm is the material overstrength factor in the dissipative zones (see 11.2.2);

sh is the hardening factor in the dissipative zones (see Table 11.7).

(3) In DC2 sh may be assumed equal to 1,1. Unless estimated with refined either analytical method,
experimental validation or finite element simulation, γsh in DC3 should be taken from Table 11.7.

Table 11.7 — Overstrength factor γsh accounting for hardening of the dissipative zones
Structural Type Dissipative Zone Plastic Mechanism γsh
beams
Moment resisting 𝑓 +𝑓
connections bending 𝛾 = ≤ 1,2
frames 2𝑓
columns at base
diagonal members axial 1,1
bending (see 11.10.5 and
Frames with all members 1,1
11.10.6)
concentric
bracings (simple axial 1,1
and dual) dissipative
bending 1,2
connections
shear 1,5

Frames with shear

eccentric bracings short links e ≤ Mp,link /Vp,link 1,8
(simple and dual) (very short links)

144
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

shear
Mp,link /Vp,link <e ≤ 1,6Mp,link /Vp,link 1,5
(short links)
bending and shear
1,5
e ≤ 2,6Mp,link /Vp,link
intermediate links bending and shear
2,6Mp,link /Vp,link < e ≤ 1,35
3Mp,link /Vp,link
Bending
1,25
3Mp,link /Vp,link < e ≤ 5Mp,link /Vp,link
long links
Bending 𝑓 +𝑓
𝛾 = ≤ 1,2
e > 5Mp,link /Vp,link 2𝑓
beams - columns bending (see 11.11.5) 1,1
Frames with diagonal members axial see 11.12.3(4)
buckling
restrained braces beams - columns bending (see 11.12.6) 1,2

(4) In DC3, category C bolted joints in shear in accordance with EN 1993-1-8 and category E bolted joints
in tension in accordance with EN 1993-1-8 should be used. In DC1 and DC2, category B or C bolted joints in
shear and category E bolted joints in tension may be used. Shear joints with fitted bolts may be used. Friction
surfaces should be of class A or B as defined in EN 1090-2.

NOTE Category B bolted joints should be verified to resist the forces due to the loading combination with the seismic
actions at damage limitation state. Category C bolted joints should be verified to resist the forces due to the loading
combination with the seismic design actions at significant damage limite state.

(5) The resistance of hybrid joints with both bolts and welds either in shear or in tension should be
calculated considering the resistance of only one type of connection.

(6) For bolted shear connections, the design shear resistance of the bolts should not be less than the
design bearing resistance in at least one of the connected plates. In addition, bolted joints in shear should have
end distances in the line of seismic force not less than two bolt diameters when the bearing force in the seismic
combination of actions exceeds 75% of the bearing resistance.

(7) The resistance and ductility of members and their connections under cyclic loading should be
demonstrated by tests.

NOTE CEN doc. XXE gives a loading protocol and acceptance criteria for such tests.

(8) Past test results from the literature and refined finite element simulations may be used to
demonstrate the effectiveness of the designed partial and full-strength connections in or adjacent to
dissipative zones of DC2 and DC3 structures.

(9) Experimental validation for partial and full strength connections may be omitted if prequalified
connections are used.

NOTE Annex E gives complementary rules on seismic prequalification of beam-to-column joints and design rules
for gusset connections of braced structures.

145
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.8.7 Design rules for column-to-column splices

(1) Column splices may be either bolted or welded, or welded to one column and bolted to the other.

(2) For all columns, including those not designated as part of the primary structure, column-to-column
splices should be at least 1,20 m away from beam-to-column joints to avoid interaction. If the storey height is
smaller than 2,40 m, column splices should be at half the clear height.

(3) The required bending moment, shear and axial force resistance of column-to-column splices in the
primary structure should be the greater of the resistances of the spliced columns, as specified in 11.9 to 11.15.

(4) For all columns, including those which are not part of the primary structure (e.g. pinned columns), the
required shear resistance Vc,Rd of column splices with respect to both orthogonal axes of the column should
satisfy Formula (11.5).

, , ( )
𝑉, ≥ (11.5)

where:

Mc,pl,Rd(NEd) is the design moment resistance of the column in the considered direction , taking into account
the interaction with the axial load NEd, in the seismic design situation;

hss is the distance between the upper flanges of the steel profiles or the tops of floor slabs at each of
the levels above and below the splice.

11.9 Design rules for moment resisting frames

11.9.1 Design criteria

(1) In DC3 moment resisting frames should be designed so that plastic hinges form in the beams or in the
connections of the beams to the columns, but not in the columns. This rule may be neglected in cases a) to c):

at the base of the frame in which NEd,G in primary columns satisfies the inequality: NEd,G / Npl,Rd < 0,3;

at the top of primary columns in the upper storey of multi-storey buildings;

at the top and bottom of primary columns in single storey buildings in which NEd,G in columns satisfies the
inequality: NEd,G / Npl,Rd < 0,3.

(2) Depending on the location of the dissipative zones, either 11.8.2(4) or 11.8.2(5) should be applied.

(3) The target hinge formation pattern should be achieved by conforming to 11.9.2, 11.9.3 and 11.9.4.

11.9.2 Beams

(1) Beams should be verified to have sufficient resistance against lateral and lateral torsional buckling in
accordance with EN 1993-1-1:2004, 6, assuming the formation of a plastic hinge at one end of the beam
namely the plastic moment in one end and the design moment in the other end. The most stressed beam end
in the seismic design situation should be considered for the verification. This check is satisfied if lateral-
torsional restraints are detailed in accordance with (2) in DC2 and (3) in DC3.

(2) In DC2, the spacing and the resistance of lateral-torsional restraints (e.g. bracing) should comply with
EN1993:1-1: 2004, 6.3.5.3.

146
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) In DC3, the distance between lateral-torsional restraints should not be greater than the length Lst
given by Formula (11.6):

𝐿 = 0,19 𝑖 𝐸 ⁄ 𝛾 𝑓 (11.6)

where

iz is the radius of gyration with respect to the weak axis of the cross section;

Es is the elastic modulus of steel.

(4) The lateral-torsional restraints in DC3 should be designed to resist the effects of local forces Qm applied
at each stabilised member at the plastic hinge locations, given by Formula (11.7).

𝑄 = 0,06 𝛾 𝑁, (11.7)

where Nf,Ed is the axial force in the compressed flange of the stabilised member at the plastic hinge location,
which should be determined as Nf,Ed = bftffy with bf and tf the width and the thickness of the beam flange,
respectively.

(5) In accordance with Table 11.5, section classes 1 and 2 should be used for beams in DC2 MRFs and
section classes 3 and 4 may be used in DC2 portal frames and single-storey MRFs. In DC3, only section class 1
should be used for beams or the portions of the beams (e.g. the beam segment with reduced section) where
plastic hinges are expected to form.

(6) Formulae (11.8) to (11.10) should be satisfied.

𝑀 ≤𝑀 , (11.8)

𝑁 ≤ 0,15 𝑁 , (11.9)

0,5 𝑉 , for beams class 1 or 2

𝑉 ≤ (11.10)
𝑉, for beams class 3 or 4

where:

MEd, NEd and VEd are the bending moment, the axial force and the shear force, respectively, in the seismic design
situation;

Nb,Rd, Mb,Rd, Vb,Rd are the design resistances of the cross sections of the beams depending on their class.

(7) For beams in DC3, Formula (11.10) should be satisfied with the design shear VEd given by Formula
(11.11):

𝑉 =𝑉 , "+"𝑉 , (11.11)
where:

VEd,G is the design value of the shear force to be determined on the basis of the equilibrium of the beam
under the non-seismic actions;

VEd,M = (Mb,pl,Rd,A+Mb,pl,Rd,B)/Lh, where Lh is the distance between the dissipative zones at both ends of the
span, is the design value of the shear force due to the application of the plastic moments Mb,pl,Rd,A and Mb,pl,Rd,B
with opposite signs at the end sections “A” and “B” of the beam.

147
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

NOTE The ductility of moment resisting frames can be improved by weakening of the beam flanges at desired
locations of dissipative zones. Specific guidance to detail the weakening of the beam is given in Annex E.

(8) If Formula (11.9) is not satisfied, (6) may be considered satisfied if the provisions in 1993-1-1:2004,
6.2.9.1, are satisfied.

(9) If partial strength connections are used, Formulae (11.8) to (11.10) should also be satisfied
considering for Nb,Rd, Mb,Rd, Vb,Rd the design resistances of the connections.

11.9.3 Columns

(1) For columns in DC2, Formula (6.5) in 6.2.7(7) may be neglected. Their resistance and stability should
be verified in compression, bending and shear considering the most unfavourable combination of NEd, MEd and
VEd from Formula (11.2).

(2) Columns in DC3 should satisfy Formula (11.12)

∑𝑀 , , (𝑁 ) ≥ ∑ 𝛾 𝛾 𝑀 , , +𝑠 𝑉 , +𝑠 𝑉 , (11.12)

NOTE Formula (11.12) explicits Formula (6.5) in 6.2.7(9)

where:

ΣMc,pl,Rd(NEd) is the sum of the design moment resistances of the column in accordance with EN 1993-1-
1:2004, 6.2.9.1, taking into account the axial load NEd, in the seismic design situation;

ΣMb,pl,Rd is the sum of the design moments of resistance of the beams framing the joint or the sum of the
design values of the moments of resistance of the beam connections if partial strength
connections are used;

VEd,M is the shear force due to the formation of plastic hinges at both beam ends;

NOTE See Note 1 in 11.9.2(6).

VEd,G is the shear force due to the non-seismic actions in the seismic design situation;

sh is the distance between the centre of the expected plastic hinge and the column axis;

rm is the material overstrength factor (see 11.2.2);

sh is the hardening factor of the plastic hinge (see Table 11.7).

(3) Columns in DC3 should be verified in compression, bending and shear under the most unfavourable
combination of NEd, MEd and VEd from Formula (11.3), where Ω is the minimum value of (Mb,pl,Rd-MEd,G)/MEd,E of
all beams (or connections if partial strength connections are used) in which dissipative zones are expected
and MEd,Gi the moment due to the non-seismic actions.

(4) The resistance and stability verifications of columns should be according to EN 1993-1-1:2004, 6.

(5) If a plastic hinge is expected in the column, its shear force VEd from the analysis should satisfy Formula
(11.13).

0,5 𝑉 , for columns class 1 or 2

𝑉 ≤ (11.13)
𝑉, for columns class 3 or 4

148
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

where Vc,Rd is the design resistance of the column cross sections in accordance with EN 1993-1-1.

(6) The non-dimensional slenderness 𝜆̅ of columns where a plastic hinge is expected to form should not
exceed 0,85.

(7) The cross-sectional class of columns should comply with the requirements of Table 11.5.

(8) In columns of single storey MRFs with cross sections class 3 or 4, NEd should be not greater than
0,6Nc,Rd, where Nc,Rd is the design resistance of the column cross section in accordance with EN 1993-1-1.

11.9.4 Beam to column joints

The composite action between the beam and the concrete slab should be prevented using measures
specified in 12.8.6.2.3. Otherwise, the frame should be designed to 12 and beam-to-column joints should be
designed according to 12.8.6.

NOTE Further rules and design detailing to avoid the composite action are given in Annex E.2.1 (3).

In structures designed to dissipate energy in the beams, the connections of the beams to the columns
and the column web panels should satisfy Formula (11.12) for both external and internal joints.

Dissipative semi-rigid and/or partial strength connections may be used for DC2 and DC3 structures, if
a) to c) are all met:

the rotation capacity of the connections is consistent with the global deformations;

the resistance and stability of members framing into the connections are verified at the SD limit state;

the effects of connection deformation on global drift are taken into account using linear analysis if
prequalified partial strength connections are used, while non-linear analyses should be performed for all
other types of connections.

The rules in a) may be neglected if prequalified connections are used.

Transfer of forces from the beams to the columns should conform to EN 1993-1-8:2004, 6.2.

Column web panels framed by flanges and stiffeners (see Figure 11.12) should satisfy Formula
(11.14).

𝑉 , ≤𝑉 , (11.14)

where:

Vwp,Ed is the design shear force in the web panel due to the action effects, taking into account the plastic
resistance of the adjacent dissipative zones in beams or connections, see Figure 11.12;

Vwp,Rd is the shear resistance of the web panel

149
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Vc,2 Mc,2
Vc,2
Mb,pl,Rd /z
Mc,2
Mb,pl,Rd /z Mb,pl,Rd /z Vwp,Ed
Vwp,Ed z Vb Mb,pl,Rd
Vwp,Ed
Mb,pl,Rd /z Mc,1 Mb,pl,Rd /z
Mb,pl,Rd /z
Vc,1

Vc,1 Mc,1

Figure 11.12 — Web panel framed by flanges and stiffeners

Web panels should satisfy Formula (11.15).

𝑉 , ≤𝑉 , (11.15)

where Vwb,Rd is the shear buckling resistance of the web panel.

In DC3 frames, the total thickness t should satisfyFormula (11.16).

𝑡 = 𝑡 +𝑡 ≥ , ,
(11.16)

where:

db is the depth of the deeper connected beam;

tb,f is the thickness of the flange of the deeper connected beam;

dc is the depth of the column section;

tc,f is the thickness of the flange of column;

tw thickness of the web of a steel profile

twsp thickness of a supplementary web plate

If Formula (11.16) is satisfied, the condition given by Formula (11.15) may be considered satisfied.

(8) The joints should be designed to provide a plastic rotation p (see Figure 11.13) not smaller than:

 0,03 rad in DC3;

 0,02 rad in DC2.

NOTE Detailed rules for the design of joints compliant with (9) are given in Annex E.

150
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(9) The rotation capacity of the joint p should be ensured under cyclic loading without degradation of the
expected strength (see Figure 11.13) independently of the intended location of the dissipative zones. It should
be evaluated on the first cycle envelope curve from the tests.

NOTE 1 CEN Doc. XXE gives a loading protocol and acceptance criteria for tests.

NOTE 2 Experimental tests are not required if prequalified connections are used, because these connections
guarantee the required rotation capacity p.

Mp

θp

θ
θy θu

Figure 11.13 — Definition of plastic rotation p

(10) When partial strength connections are used, the column capacity design should be based on the plastic
capacity of the connections.

11.9.5 Column base joints

(1) If the column base joint is fully restrained, the resistance of the base connections Mc,j,Rd should comply
with Formula (11.17).

𝑀 ,, ≥𝛾 𝛾 𝑀, , (𝑁 ) (11.17)

where:

Mc,pl,Rd(NEd) is the design moment resistance of the column taking into account the axial loads NEd in the
seismic design situation;

rm is the material overstrength factor given in 11.2.2;

sh is the hardening factor of plastic hinge, which may be taken equal to 1,1 for DC2 and from Table
11.7 for DC3.

(2) Formula (11.17) may be satisfied by using either exposed or embedded column base joints.

NOTE Fixity at embedded column base joints can be obtained by extending the column below the assumed seismic
base into a basement, if any, and by restraining the horizontal displacements of the ground floor relative to the basement.
Other options to ensure the column fixity can be to encase the base joint into a grade beam or to embed it in a stocky
concrete wall. Details for column base joints are given in Annex H.

(3) Plastic hinges may develop at a column base joint, provided that all conditions a) to d) are met:

the base joint has a rotation capacity consistent with the global deformations and not smaller than 0,04
rad;

151
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

the column exhibits adequate overstrength to allow cyclic yielding in the base joint at the SD limit state;

the effects of deformability of base joints on lateral drifts and global stability are taken into account in the
analysis;

the column base joints satisfy the rules for connections in dissipative zones.

(4) The resistance of column bases and their attachments to the foundations to shear and axial force
should be greater than the shear force from Formula (11.5) and the design axial force NEd and design shear
force VEd from Formulae (11.2) in DC2 and (11.3) in DC3.

11.10 Design rules for frames with concentric bracings

11.10.1 Design criteria for DC2 and DC3

(1)P Concentrically braced frames shall be designed so that yielding of the diagonals in tension takes place
before failure of the connections and before yielding or buckling of the beams or columns.

(2) The diagonal elements of bracings should be placed in such a way that the structure exhibits similar
behaviour at each storey in opposite senses of the same braced direction under load reversals. To this end, the
rule given by Formula (11.18) should be met at each storey:

≤ 0,05 (11.18)

where A+ and A- are the areas of the vertical projections of the cross sections of the tension diagonals, when
the horizontal seismic actions have a positive or negative direction respectively (see Figure 11.14).

(+) direction (-) direction

Figure 11.14 — Example of application of 11.10.1(2)

(3) Eccentricities of diagonal elements in the end connections as respect to the beam-column axes should
not be greater than the beam depth and their effects on the members and connections forces should be taken
into account.

152
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.10.2 Analysis

(1) Beams and columns should be considered to resist gravity loads in the persistent and transient design
situation, without taking into account the bracing members. In addition, the buckling resistance of diagonal
bracings should be verified against the axial forces due to the imposed and variable loads as given in EN1991-
1-1, -1-3 and -1-4 at ultimate limit state in non-seismic design situation.

(2) The diagonals should be taken into account using an elastic analysis of the structure for the seismic
action according to a) to c):

The “tension-only” model may be only used for DC2 frames with X diagonal bracings or split X diagonal
bracings;

In DC2 frames with V bracings and two-storey X bracings, both the tension and compression diagonals
should be taken into account;

in DC3 frames, both the tension and compression diagonals should be taken into account.

(3) The compression diagonals in DC2 may be neglected in the analysis provided that the lateral resistance
of the building in pre-buckling range of diagonal members is smaller than the resistance of the building
evaluated with only the tension diagonals.

(4) Both tension and compression diagonals may be taken into account in the analysis of any type of
concentric bracing provided that both pre-buckling and post-buckling situations of diagonals are taken into
account in both design and modelling.

11.10.3 Diagonal members

(1) The cross section of diagonal bracings should be of class 1 in DC3 and class 1 or 2 in DC2 according to
EN1993-1-1:2004, 5.5. For DC3 frames, a) and b) should be also fulfilled:

If circular hollow sections are used for diagonal bracings, their local slenderness D/t should not be greater
than, 47,4 where D is the external diameter and t the thickness of the cross section and 𝜀 = 235⁄𝑓 ;

If either rectangular or square hollow sections are used for diagonal bracings, their maximum local
slenderness c/t should not be greater than 19,4 , where c is the side width in accordance with EN1993-
√
1:2005 and t the thickness of the cross section.

(2) The length of the bracing may be taken as the theoretical node-to-node length disregarding the gusset
connections at both brace ends. The buckling length should also account for the restraint given by the brace
end-connections and the mutual restraint at the mid-length connection between the diagonals of X bracings.
The assumed degree of connection restraint between the diagonals should be verified through analytical
calculations, refined finite element simulations or experimental results from the literature.

(3) In DC2 frames with X diagonal bracings, when the tension-only model is adopted, the non-dimensional
slenderness 𝜆̅ should be limited to: 1,3 < 𝜆̅  2,5.

(4) In frames with tension-compression diagonal bracings (see Figure 11.12), the non-dimensional
slenderness 𝜆̅ should not be greater than 2,0 in DC3 and 2,5 in DC2.

(5) In structures of up to two storeys with tension-compression diagonal bracings, there is no limitation
of non-dimensional slenderness 𝜆̅.

153
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(6) In frames designed with tension-only bracings, the yield resistance Npl,Rd of the gross cross-section of
the diagonals should not be smaller than the axial force NEd in the bracing member in the seismic design
situation.

(7) In frames with tension-compression bracings, the buckling resistance Nb,Rd of the bracing members
should be such that Nb,Rd  NEd.

(8) In DC3 frames with tension-compression bracings and with 6 storeys or more, the buckling resistance
Nb,Rd,rf of the bracing members at the top storey may be such that Nb,Rd,ts  NEd,ts, with NEd,ts from Formula
(11.19).

𝑁 , =𝑁 , , +𝑞 𝑁 , , (11.19)

where:

NEd,G,ts is the axial force due to gravity loads in the seismic design situation;

NEd,E,ts is the axial force due to seismic actions;

q is the behaviour factor.

(9) The connections of the diagonals to any member should satisfy 11.8.6. The required resistance of the
brace connection should satisfy Formula (11.4), with γsh from Table 11.7 for DC3 and γsh = 1,1 for DC2. The net
area of the brace cross-section in the joint zone (i.e. the area with deductions for all holes and other openings)
should be increased such that its axial resistance is not smaller than the axial resistance of its corresponding
gross area.

(10) In DC3 frames, at all storey with the exception of the top storey, the maximum buckling overstrength
b,i in the structure should not differ from the minimum value b by more than 25%, with b,i from Formula
(11.20).

𝛺 = min 𝛺 , = min , ,
with 𝑖 ∈ [1, (𝑁 − 1)] (11.20)
,

where:

Nb,Rd is the buckling resistance of the diagonal bracing;

NEd is the axial force in the bracing member in the seismic design situation;

Ns is the total number of storeys.

(11) Dissipative partial strength connections as well as reduced yielding segments in the bracings may be
used, provided that conditions a) to f) are satisfied:

a) The buckling of the gusset plates of the connections is prevented.

b) The buckling resistance of the diagonal bracings Nb,Rd is greater than 𝛾 𝛾 𝑅 , where Rd is the resistance
of the connection in accordance with EN 1993:1-8, or the resistance of the reduced yielding segments in
accordance with EN1993:1-1.

NOTE 1 Concentrical bracings with reduced yielding segments are slender diagonal members with one cut-out portion
at each end of the diagonal that do not modify the compression resistance of the member and which is detailed to have a
local tension resistance similar to the global buckling resistance of the diagonal.

154
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

c) the elongation capacity of the connections and of the reduced yielding segments should be consistent with
global deformations.

d) The elongation capacity of partial strength connections should be verified by means of either
experimental test or finite element simulations or past experimental results available in the literature.

NOTE 2 Annex E provides rules for INERD-PIN partial strength connections.

e) The elongation capacity of reduced yielding segments is considered guaranteed if the length Lr of the
segment with the reduce section is not smaller than 5,65(Ars)0,5, where Ars is the area of the reduced
section. In addition, the local slenderness of the parts of the reduced area should comply with (1).

f) The effect of deformations of partial strength connections on global drifts are taken into account using
linear analysis if connections covered by Annex E are used. Non-linear analysis should be carried out in
all other cases.

11.10.4 Beams and columns

(1) In DC2, the resistance and stability of beams and columns should be verified in compression, bending
and shear under the most unfavourable combination of NEd, MEd and VEd from Formula (11.2).

(2) In DC3 frames, beams and columns should be designed to resist the forces a) to c):

the total action effects NEd, MEd and VEd determined according to 11.8.5(2), where Ω is the minimum
value of the ratio Npl,Rd,i/NEd,Ei of all bracings and NEd,Ei is the design value of the axial force due to the
seismic actions in brace “i”;

internal forces calculated considering a free-body distribution of axial forces in both tension and
compression diagonals with values of forces equal to their expected buckling resistance rm Nb,Rd in
combination with the forces due to all non-seismic actions in the seismic situation;

internal forces calculated considering a free-body distribution of forces transmitted by the braces under
tension forces equal to rm sh NRd and those under compression forces equal to rm pb Nb,Rd in combination
with the forces due to all non-seismic actions in the seismic situation.

In a) and c), the overstrength factor sh should be taken from Table 11.7. In c), pb may be taken equal to 0,30.

NOTE pb is the multiplicative factor on design value Npl,Rd of yield resistance in tension of compression brace, for the
estimation of the residual post-buckling resistance of the brace.

(3) In frames with V bracings and two-storey X bracings (see Fig. 11.3), the beams should be designed to
resist all non-seismic actions in the seismic situation without considering the intermediate support by the
diagonals.

(4) In DC2 and DC3 frames with V bracings and two-storey X bracings, the flexural stiffness kb of the beams
which intersect a bracing should not be smaller than 0,2 times the vertical stiffness kbr of the intersecting
bracings.

where:

kb =(48EsIb/Lb3) is the flexural stiffness of the beam;

Es is the elastic modulus of steel;

155
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Ib is the second moment of area of the beam section;

Lb is the beam length;

 depends on the beam boundary condition (  = 4 for fixed ends and  = 1 for pinned ends);

𝑘 =2 sin 𝛼 is the vertical stiffness of the bracing;

Abr is the area of the brace section;

Lbr is the brace length;

α is the angle of the brace with respect to the horizontal line.

(5) If non-linear static or dynamic analyses are performed to verify the overall deformations and the
distribution of damage, (4) may be waived.

(6) If zipper V-bracings (where the brace-intercepted beams are tied by vertical struts, see Figure 11.3
case 7) are used, the resistance and stability of vertical elements connecting the brace-to-beam intersection
should be verified against the unbalanced vertical seismic action effect applied to the beam by the braces after
buckling of the compression diagonal, calculated according to 11.10.4.2(c).

(7) In DC3, the resistance and stability of columns should be verified under axial forces calculated
according to 11.10.4.2(c)and additional uniform bending moments in the direction of the braced bays equal
to 0,2 Mc,pl,Rd where Mc,pl,Rd is the plastic moment resistance of the gross section of the column.

(8) In frames with diagonal bracings in which the tension and compression diagonals are not intersecting
(see Figures 11.2 and 11.3), the tensile and compression forces which develop in the columns adjacent to the
diagonals in compression should be taken into account, with values of compression forces in the diagonals
equal to their expected buckling resistance.

11.10.5 Beam to column connections

(1) In braced bays, beam-to-column connections which serve also as connection of a bracing should be
designed to the transfer seismic action effects from that bracing to the surrounding frame.

(2) The beam-to-column connections may be either continuous or pinned and a) or b), as appropriate,
should be satisfied.

the rotation capacity of pinned and partial strength connections should not be lower than 0,02 rad;

the resistance Mj,Rd of continuous beam-to-column connections should be greater than the minimum
expected moment resistance of the connected members, taken as given in Formula (11.21):

𝛾 𝛾 𝑀, ,
𝑀, ≥ min (11.21)
𝛾 𝛾 ∑𝑀 , , (𝑁 )

where:

rm is the material overstrength factor (see 11.2.2);

sh is the hardening factor, which may be taken equal to 1,1 for DC2 and as in Table 11.7 for DC3.

156
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

NOTE Annex E provides complementary rules on the beam-to-column joints of braced structures.

11.10.6 Brace connections

(1) Brace connections should resist the axial force due to yielding and hardening of tensile diagonals and
they should either restrain the rotation at the end brace (see (2)) or accommodate brace buckling under
repeated cyclic loading (see (3)).

(2) For brace connections restraining buckling of diagonal members, the bending of bracings should be
considered as restrained in both main directions of their cross section. The resistance of the connections
should be verified against design forces acting on the connections both in-plane and out-of-plane separately
evaluated from Formulae (11.22) to (11.25).

𝑁 ,, =𝛾 𝛾 𝑁 , (11.22)

𝑁 ,, =𝛾 𝑁 , (11.23)

𝑀, =𝛾 𝛾 𝑀 , (11.24)

where:

Npl,Rd is the design plastic resistance of the brace in tension;

Nb,Rd is the design buckling resistance of the brace in compression;

Mpl,Rd is the design plastic moment of the cross section of the brace evaluated in the plan of the frame;

rm is the material overstrength factor (see 11.2.2);

sh is the hardening factor of bracings, which may be taken equal to 1,0 for DC2 and from Table 11.7
for DC3.

(3) Brace connections accommodating buckling of diagonal members in one plane should be verified
against forces separately evaluated from Formulae (11.22), (11.23) and (11.24) in the restrained plane. In the
buckling plane, they should resist the expected buckling resistance of the connected diagonal bracing, from
Formula (11.23). They should also have sufficient inelastic rotation capacity to accommodate the required
rotation at the design storey drift.

NOTE Inelastic rotation is typically accommodated by means of gusset plate connection with the brace terminating
before a linear or an elliptical clearance that corresponds to the theoretical line of restraint. For detailing see Annex E.

(4) For out-of-plane brace buckling, if gusset plate connections are adopted, the connection in DC3 should
resist a shear force in the direction in which the brace buckles and along the theoretical line of restraint,
calculated as

𝑉 , = 0,06 𝛾 𝑓 𝑡 𝑤 (11.25)

where:

rm is the material overstrength factor (see 11.2.2);

fy is the yield stress of the material of the gusset plate;

tgp is the thickness of gusset plate;

157
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

wgp is the effective width of the gusset plate, evaluated assuming spreading from the connected end of
the brace to the theoretical line of restraint at an angle of 30° on both side of the diagonal.

11.10.7 Column base joints

(1) The column base joint should be designed to resist the forces due to non-seismic actions in the seismic
design situation and both the axial and shear forces and moments transferred by the tensile resistance of the
connected diagonal brace equal to rm sh NRd. (in which sh may be taken equal to 1,0 for DC2 and should be
taken as in Table 11.7 for DC3). Where diagonal braces frame to both sides of a column, the effects of the
compression brace buckling force rm Nb,Rd should be added to the effects of the adjacent tension brace.

(2) Where column bases are designed as moment connections to the foundation, the required flexural
resistance should be at least equal to the required flexural resistance of diagonal brace connections from
Formula (11.24).

(3) Moments at column to column base connections designed as pinned connections may be ignored.

NOTE The detailing provisions for column base joints are described in Annex H.

11.11 Design rules for frames with eccentric bracings

11.11.1 Design criteria

(1) Frames with eccentric bracings should be designed so that specific elements or parts of elements
called seismic links are able to dissipate energy in plastic bending and/or plastic shear mechanisms.

(2) The structural system should be designed so that uniform dissipative behaviour of the whole set of
seismic links is realised.

(3) Seismic links may be horizontal or vertical components (see Figure 11.4).

11.11.2 Seismic links

(1) Links should be I-or H shaped cross sections (hot-rolled or built-up sections), or built-up box sections.
Cold-formed hollow sections should not be used as links, unless acceptable performance is demonstrated
through experimental results or detailed FE models.

(2) Cross section of seismic links should satisfy the provisions for cross section class 1 in DC3 and class 1
or 2 in DC2 in accordance with EN1993-1-1.

(3) The web of a link should be of single thickness without doubler plate reinforcement, hole or
penetration.

(4) Seismic links should belong to one of the three categories a) to c), according to the type of plastic
mechanism developed:

short links, which dissipate energy by yielding essentially in shear;

long links, which dissipate energy by yielding essentially in bending;

intermediate links, in which the plastic mechanism involves bending and shear.

(5) For I and H sections, the design resistances should be taken as given by Formulae (11.26) and (11.27).

158
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑀 , = 𝑏 𝑡 (𝑑 − 𝑡 ) 𝑓 (11.26)

𝑉 , = 𝑡 (𝑑 − 𝑡 ) 𝑓 ⁄√3 (11.27)

b tf b tf

d tw d tw tw

a) b)
Figure 11.15 — Definition of symbols for link sections: a) I and H sections; b) box sections

(6) For box sections, design resistances should be taken as given by Formulae (11.28) and (11.29).

𝑀 , = 𝑏 𝑡 (𝑑 − 𝑡 ) 𝑓 (11.28)

𝑉 , = 2𝑡 (𝑑 − 𝑡 ) 𝑓 ⁄√3 (11.29)

(7) If NEd/Npl,Rd  0,15, the design resistance of the link should satisfy Formulae (11.30) and (11.31) at
both ends of the link.

𝑉 ≤𝑉 , (11.30)

𝑀 ≤𝑀 , (11.31)

where NEd, MEd, VEd are, respectively, the design axial force, design bending moment and design shear force,
at both ends of the link in the seismic design situation.

(8) If NEd/NRd > 0,15, Formulae (11.30) and (11.31) should be satisfied with the reduced values Vp,link,r and
Mp,link,r given in Formulae (11.32) and (11.33), instead of Vp,link and Mp,link
,
𝑉 , , =𝑉 , 1 − 𝑁 ⁄𝑁 , (11.32)

𝑀 , , =𝑀 , 1 − 𝑁 ⁄𝑁 , (11.33)

(9) If NEd/NRd  0,15, the link length e should not exceed the value given by Formula (11.34) or by Formula
(11.35), as appropriate.

𝑒 ≤ 1,6 𝑀 ,link /𝑉 ,link when 𝑅 < 0,3 (11.34)

𝑒 ≤ (1,15 − 0,5 𝑅) 1,6𝑀 ,link /𝑉 ,link when 𝑅 ≥ 0,3 (11.35)

where:

R = tw (d –2tf) NEd / (A VEd) for I and H section, in which A is the gross area of the link;

R = 2tw (d –2tf) NEd / (A VEd) for box section.

159
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(10) In DC3 frames with eccentric bracings, the individual values of the design overstrength ratios Ω , at
each link, given by Formula (11.36) or (11.37), as appropriate, should not exceed the relevant minimum value
Ω by more than 25% of this minimum value with the exception of the links at the top storey.

Ω = min(Vp,link,i /VEd,i) for short links and intermediate links with e ≤ 2,6 (11.36)

Ω = min(Mp,link,i/MEd,i) for intermediate links with e >2,6𝑀 ,link /𝑉 ,link and long links (11.37)

where:

VEd,i, MEd,i are the design values of the shear force and of the bending moment in link i in the seismic
design situation;

Vp,link,i, Mp,link,i are the shear and bending plastic design resistances of link i from11.11.2(5) and 11.11.2(6).

(11) Where equal moments would form simultaneously at both ends of the link (with symmetric moment
diagram (see Figure 11.16a), links may be classified according to the length e for all types of cross sections as:

short links 𝑒 < 𝑒 = 1,6 𝑀 ,link /𝑉 ,link (11.38)

long links 𝑒 > 𝑒 = 3,0 𝑀 ,link /𝑉 ,link (11.39)

intermediate links 𝑒 ≤𝑒≤𝑒 (11.40)

(12) Where the moments at the link ends differ (see Figure 11.16b), links may be classified according to
the length e for all types of cross sections as:

short links 𝑒 < 𝑒 = 0,8(1 + 𝛼)𝑀 ,link /𝑉 ,link (11.41)

long links 𝑒 > 𝑒 = 1,5(1 + 𝛼)𝑀 ,link /𝑉 ,link (11.42)

intermediate links 𝑒 ≤𝑒≤𝑒 (11.43)

where  is the ratio of the smaller moments MEd,A at one end of the link in the seismic design situation, to the
greater moments MEd,B at the end where the plastic hinge would form, both moments taken as absolute values.

e e e
p

p

e p
p

Figure 11.16 — Link rotation angle θp between the link and the element outside of the link

160
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(13) If non-linear analyses are used, the link plastic rotation angle p between the link and the element
outside of the link as defined in Figure 11.16 should be consistent with global deformations. It should not
exceed the values given by Formulae (11.44) to (11.46), as appropriate.

short links θp ≤ θpR = 0,08 rad (11.44)

long links θp ≤ θpR = 0,02 rad (11.45)

intermediate links θp ≤ θpR = from linear interpolation between the above values (11.46)

(14) For I and H sections, full-depth web stiffeners should be provided on both sides of the link web at the
diagonal brace ends of the link with a combined width of not smaller than (bf – 2tw) and a thickness not smaller
than 0,8tw.

(15) Links with I and H sections should be provided with intermediate web stiffeners as given in a) to e):

a) short links should be provided with intermediate web stiffeners at intervals not exceeding (30tw – d/5)
for a link rotation angle p of 0,08 radians or (52tw – d/5) for p of 0,02 rad or less and linear interpolation
in-between;

b) long links should be provided with one intermediate web stiffener placed at a distance of 1,5 b from each
end of the link where a plastic hinge would form;

c) intermediate links should be provided with intermediate web stiffeners meeting a) and b);

d) intermediate web stiffeners are not required in links of length e greater than 5 Mp.link/Vp,link;

e) intermediate web stiffeners should be full depth. For links that are less than 600 mm in depth d, stiffeners
should be placed on only one side of the link web. The thickness of one-sided stiffeners should not be
smaller than tw or 10 mm, whichever is the greater, and the width should be not smaller than (b/2) – tw.
For links that are 600 mm in depth or greater, similar intermediate stiffeners should be provided on both
sides of the web.

(16) Either full penetration or fillet welds may be used to connect a link stiffener to the relevant link. Fillet
welds connecting a link stiffener to the link web of I and H sections should be designed to resist the tensile
resistance of the web stiffener rm fy Ast, where Ast is the cross area of the stiffener parallel to the web. The
design resistance of fillet welds fastening the stiffener to the flanges should resist a force of rm Ast fy/4.

(17) For box sections, full-depth web stiffeners should be provided on one side of each link web at the
diagonal brace connection. These stiffeners may be welded to the outside face of the link webs or each link
web segments may be welded on full plate stiffeners. They should each have a width not smaller than
(b – 2 tw)/2 and a thickness not smaller than 0,8 tw.

(18) Links with box sections should be provided with intermediate web stiffeners satisfying a) and b):

a) for a link rotation angle p of 0,08 rad, short links should be provided with intermediate web stiffeners
spaced at intervals not exceeding [20tw –(d - 2tf)/8]. Stiffeners may be omitted for link rotation angles p
not greater than 0,02 rad. Linear interpolation should be used for values of p between 0,08 and 0,02 rad;

b) for long and intermediate links with box sections stiffeners may be omitted.

(19) Fillet welds connecting a link stiffener to the link with box sections should have a design resistance
adequate to resist a force rm fy Astif, where Astif is the area of the stiffener.

161
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(20) In DC3 frames, lateral supports should be provided at both the top and bottom link flanges at the ends
of the link. End lateral supports of links should have a design axial resistance sufficient to provide lateral
support to a force equal to 6% of the expected axial resistance of the link flange calculated as rm b tf fy.

(21) In beams where a seismic link is present, the shear buckling resistance of the web panels outside of
the link should conform to EN 1993-1-5.

11.11.3 Members and connections not containing seismic links

(1) In DC2, the resistance and stability of members not containing seismic links should be verified against
the most unfavourable combination of NEd, MEd and VEd from Formula (11.2).

(2) In DC3, columns should be designed to resist the total effect EEd determined according to 11.8.5(2),
taking the overstrength factor sh for hardening of links from Table 11.7 and the design overstrength factor Ωd
as specified in 11.11.2(10), which should not be greater than the forces evaluated with plastic mechanism
analysis.

(3) In DC3, the beam segment outside the link, the diagonal bracings and the brace-to-link connections
should be verified to resist the effects transferred by the relevant connected seismic link at a rotation of 0,08
rad in combination with the effects induced by the non seismic actions in the seismic design situation. The link
induced effects on the diagonal bracings and their end-connections should be obtained according to a) or b):

a) in short and intermediate links with e ≤ 2,6𝑀 ,link /𝑉 ,link , from the free-body distribution of the ultimate
shear Vu,link  (rm sh Vp,Link) and the corresponding bending moment Mu,link  (0,5 e rm sh Vp,Link),

b) in long links or intermediate links with e > 2,6𝑀 ,link /𝑉 ,link , from the ultimate moment resistance of the
link Mu,link  rm sh Mp,Link and the corresponding shear force Vu,link  2Mu,Link/e.

(4) Eccentricities in the brace connections away from the link should not be greater than the link depth ;
the resulting effects in members and connection should be taken into account in their design.

11.11.4 Connections of the seismic links

(1) The shear and bending resistance of the connections of the links should be verified in accordance with
Formula (11.4), where the Rfy is 𝑉 ,link to which corresponds the bending moment 0,5 e Vp,Link for short and
intermediate links. For long links Rfy is 𝑀 ,link to which corresponds the shear force 2Mp,Link/e .

(2) In partial strength connections (i.e. those with resistance smaller than the expected ultimate
resistance of the link), energy dissipation may be considered to come from the connections only, provided that
all conditions in a) to c) are satisfied:

a) the connections ductility is greater than the deformation demands;

b) members framing into the connections are verified to be stable under the design action effects at SD;

c) the effect of the deformation of the connectionon global drift is taken into account.

(3) When partial strength bolted or welded connections are used for the seismic links, the capacity design
of the other elements in the structure should be based on the plastic resistance of the links connections,
calculated in accordance with EN1993:1-8.

(4) In DC3 frames with full strength bolted connections at both ends of short links of length e not greater
than (Mp,link /Vp,link ), the connections resistance should not be smaller than a tensile axial force Nu,link equal to

162
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Nu,link  (2rm fy bf tf), where bf and tf are the width and thickness of the link flange, in combination with the
ultimate shear resistance Vu,link =(rm sh Vp,Link) and the corresponding bending moment resistance Mu,link  (0,5e
rm sh Vp,Link ), where sh is equal to 1,8.

11.11.5 Beam to column connections

(1) In braced bays, beam-to-column connections which serve also as connection of a bracing should be
designed to transfer the seismic action effects of the diagonal bracing in accordance with 11.11.3(1) in DC2
and with 11.11.3(3) in DC3.

(2) Beam-to-column connections may be either continuous or pinned as specified in 11.10.5(2).

11.12 Design rules for frames with buckling restrained bracings

11.12.1 Design criteria

(1)P Buckling restrained bracings shall be designed in DC3 so that yielding of the diagonals in both tension
and compression occurs before failure of connections and before yielding or buckling of beams or columns.

(3) (4)

(2)

(1)

(C) (B) (A) (B) (C)

Key: (1) ”core”: bracing member; (2) “sleeve”: buckling restraining system; (3) longitudinal ”gap”; (4) transverse
”clearance”; (A): yielding zone, (B) transition zones, (C) connection zones.
Figure 11.17 — Geometrical features and main components of a typical BRB

(2) Lateral restraint of the core of the buckling restrained braces should be realised either by an unbonded
brace or by an all-steel brace.

(3) Buckling restrained bracings should be designed, tested and detailed to accommodate minimum
expected deformations corresponding to the greater between a interstorey drift of 2% of the storey height
and two times the design interstorey drift as given in 11.6.3, in addition to brace deformations resulting from
deformation of the frame due to non-seismic actions of the design seismic situation.

(4) Eccentricities of BRB-to-beam axis and BRB-to-column axis should comply with 11.10.1(3).

11.12.2 Analysis

(1) Compression and tension diagonals should be considered as active in elastic or non-linear analyses.

163
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) The axial stiffness should be modelled by the combination of two or more springs in series, having the
axial stiffness of the internal core and terminal tapered plates.

(3) If non-linear analyses are used, the inelastic response of the buckling restrained bracings should be
simulated accounting for the initial stiffness, the post-yield stiffness and the differences between tension and
compression resistance of the diagonal members. In addition, the hysteretic behaviour of the bracing should
be accurately simulated if non-linear time history analysis is used.

11.12.3 Design rules of buckling restrained bracings

(1) The yield resistance NRd of the cross-section of the core (segment “A” in Fig. 11.17) should satisfy NRd
 NEd, where NEd is the axial force in the bracing member in the seismic design situation.

(2) At all storey except the top storey, the maximum design overstrength d,i in the structure should not
be greater than the minimum value d by more than 25%, where di is defined by Formula (11.47).

𝛺 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝛺 , = min ,
with 𝑖 ∈ [1, 𝑛] (11.47)
,

where:

NRd is the design axial resistance of the core of the buckling restrained bracing;

NEd is the design axial effect in the bracing member in the seismic design situation;

𝛺 is the minimum design overstrength see 11.12.5(1);

Ns is the total number of storeys.

(3) The compression strength adjustment factor, γCT, should be calculated as the ratio of the maximum
resistance in compression to the maximum resistance in tension measured in qualification tests performed in
accordance with 11.12.4 at strains corresponding to twice the expected deformations. The greater of γCT
values measured in the qualification tests should be used in design Formula (11.49) and (11.51).

(4) The strain hardening factor, γsh, should be calculated as the ratio of the maximum tension force
measured from the qualification tests at strains corresponding to twice the expected deformations to the
measured yield force of the test specimen. The greater value of γsh from qualification tests should be used and
should not be greater than 1,50.

(5) The overall stability of the sleeve or buckling restraining system may be verified using Formula
(11.48).

,
≥ 2,5 (11.48)

where:

𝑁 , is the Eulerian critical load of the sleeve considering as buckling length the node-to-node length of
the bracing which includes the length of the portions of beams, columns and gussets connecting the
core;

NRd is the design axial resistance of the core of the buckling restrained bracing.

164
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.12.4 Conformity criteria

(1) Buckling restrained bracings should be qualified on the basis of tests to establish the tension and
compression resistance, the compression strength adjustment factor CT and the hardening factor sh according
to EN15129 for displacement dependent devices.

(2) In addition to the rules of EN15129, at least two successful cyclic tests should be carried out with the
loading protocol given by CEN doc. XXE. One test should be carried out on a brace sub-assemblage that
includes brace connection rotational demands. The other test should be either a uniaxial or a sub-assemblage
test.

(3) Interpolation or extrapolation of test results for different member sizes should be justified by rational
analysis that demonstrates stress distributions and magnitudes of internal strains consistent with or less
severe than the tested assemblies and that addresses the adverse effects of variations in material properties.
Extrapolation of test results should be based on similar combinations of steel core and buckling-restraining
system sizes.

(4) γCT should not be greater than 1,30.

(5) The interstorey drift at SD limit state should be limited to 50% the value of the maximum interstorey
drift imposed by the loading protocol given by EN15129.

11.12.5 Beams and columns

(1) Beams and columns should be designed to resist the most severe condition between a) and b):

a) the total action effect EEd given by Formula (11.49).

𝐸 =𝐸 , +𝛾 𝛾 𝛾 𝛺 𝐸 , (11.49)

where:

EEd,G is the action effect due to the non-seismic actions in the seismic design situation;

EEd,E is the seismic action effect in the beam or in the column due to the design seismic action;

rm is the material overstrength factor (see 11.2.2);

sh is the hardening factor of the core based on the results of the qualification tests but not be smaller
than 1,2 (see Table 11.7);

CT is the compression strength adjustment factor based on the results of the qualification tests but not
smaller than 1,1 and not greater than 1,3 (see 11.12.3(3));

𝛺 is the minimum value of the design overstrength of all BRBs (see Formula 11.48).

b) the internal forces calculated considering a free-body distribution of axial forces in both tension and
compression diagonals with values equal to their expected ultimate resistance, which may be
calculated assuming that the braces develop a compression force equal to rm sh CT NRd and a tension
force equal to rm sh NRd.

(2) In frames with V bracings and two-storey X bracings, the flexural stiffness of the brace-intersected
beams should comply with 11.10.4(5).

165
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.12.6 Beam to column connections

(1) The beam-to-column connections in the bays equipped with buckling restrained bracings may be
either continuous or pinned provided that adequate rotation capacity is verified; they should conform to
11.10.5(2).

NOTE Annex E gives additional rules on beam-to-column joints of frames with buckling restrained bracings.

11.12.7 Brace connections

(1) Brace connections should be designed to resist yielding and hardening of buckling restrained
diagonals without any buckling under cyclic loading.

(2) In connections providing flexural restraint to the diagonal members in both main directions of their
cross section, the resistance and stability of the gusset should be greater than the forces transferred by the
connected brace in its non-linear range of behaviour both in-plane and out-of-plane, given by Formulas
(11.50) to (11.52).

𝑁 ,, =𝛾 𝛾 𝑁 (11.50)

𝑁 ,, =𝛾 𝛾 𝛾 𝑁 (11.51)

𝑀, =𝛾 𝛾 𝑀 (11.52)

where:

NRd is the design plastic resistance in tension of the core (segment “A” in Fig. 11.17);

MRd is the design plastic moment of the cross section of the tapered segment of the core that is not
laterally restrained by the sleeve (segment “C” in Fig. 11.17), and it is evaluated in the plan of the
frame;

rm is the material overstrength factor (see 11.2.2);

sh is the hardening factor of the core based on the results of the qualification tests (see 11.12.3(4))
but not smaller than 1,2;

CT is the compression strength adjustment factor based on the results of the qualification tests but not
smaller than 1,1 and not greater than 1,3 (see 11.12.3(3)).

(3) Brace connections conceived as “pinned” should resist a force not smaller than the expected resistance
of the connected diagonal bracing as given by Formulae (11.50) and (11.51) and should accommodate the
rotation at the design storey drift.

(4) To prevent out-of-plane brace buckling, if gusset plate connections are adopted, the resistance of the
connection to shear in the transverse direction of the BRB and applied in the theoretical line of restraint,
should not be smaller than Vgp,Ed as given by Formula (11.53)

𝑉 , = 0,06 𝑁 ,, (11.53)

where 𝑁 ,, is the expected ultimate resistance of the BRB (see Formula 11.51).

166
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.12.8 Column base joints

(1) The column base joint should be designed to resist the action effect at the base of the column due to
gravity forces and the axial and shear forces transferred by the expected tensile resistance of the connected
diagonal brace, which should be taken equal to rm sh NRd.

(2) Where column bases are designed as moment connections to the foundation, the required flexural
resistance should be at least equal to the action effect at the base of the column due to gravity forces and the
required flexural resistance of diagonal brace connections, which should be calculated from Formula (11.52).

(3) Moments at column to column base connections designed as simple connections may be ignored.

11.13 Design rules for dual frames - moment resisting frames combined with either
concentric, eccentric or buckling restrained bracings
11.13.1 Design criteria

(1) In dual structures with both moment resisting frames and braced frames acting in the same direction
the horizontal forces should be distributed between the different frames according to their stiffness.

(2) The moment resisting frames should contribute with at least 25 % to the total resistance.

(3) The moment resisting frames and the braced frames should respectively conform to 11.9, 11.10,
11.11, 11.12.

NOTE DC3-compliant frames can provide re-centring capacity after severe earthquake if the yield deformation at
each storey of the moment resisting sub-system Δy,MRF is not smaller than the ultimate storey deformation of the
corresponding braced sub-system Δu,Braced (i.e. either CBF, or EBF, or BRB). In these cases, the dissipative components can
be designed to be replaceable.

(4) In DC3 the resistance and stability of non-dissipative elements should be verified in bending, axial and
shear forces under the most unfavourable combination of NEd, MEd and VEd calculated with Formulae (11.3),
where 𝛺 should be taken as the greater of the minimum design overstrength ratios of the moment resisting
frames and the braced frames.

11.14 Design rules for lightweight steel systems

11.14.1 General

(1)P Lightweight cold-formed steel frames shall be made of cold-formed steel frames braced by steel strap
braces (i.e. strap braced walls) or by sheathing panels (i.e. shear walls) connected by means of screws to the
steel frame.

(2) Walls should be made of studs, i.e. vertical load bearing equally spaced members screwed at each end
to tracks, i.e; horizontal steel members, which restrain the studs at their ends.

(3) Each wall should be provided at each end with hold-downs to resist in-plane shear forces.

NOTE Hold-downs are connections and shear anchorages used to resist the walls overturning forces.

(4) Floor and roof diaphragms should be composed of equally spaced joists, on top of which the sheathing
materials should be connected by means of screws along the whole perimeter of the sheathing panel;

(5) The sheating material may be a composite steel concrete slab made with profiled steel sheets.

167
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.14.2 Design rules for low-dissipative (DC1) structural behaviour

(1) The individual resistance of different components of walls such as strap braces, chord studs, tracks,
connections and other cold-formed steel components should be determined in accordance with EN1993-1-3.

(2) The design of composite steel concrete slab made with profiled steel sheets should be made in
accordance with EN1994-1-1.

(3) The design of the connection between wood sheathing and cold-formed steel frame in floor or roof
diaphragms, should be made in accordance with EN 1995-1-1:2004, 8, and A2:2014.

(4) The height-to-length ratio of strap braced walls and shear walls should not be greater than than 2,0.

(5) Hold-downs should be designed to resist wall overturning at each story.

(6) Shear anchorage should be designed to transmit the in-plane shear force from the horizontal
diaphragms into the top of the wall and from the base of the wall into the foundation.

(7) Chord studs, or other vertical boundary elements at the ends of strap braced walls and shear walls
should be anchored so that the track is not required to resist uplift by bending.

(8) Deflections should be determined by considering the deformation of the bracing components (i.e, strap
braces, steel sheets, wood sheathings, gypsum sheathings), of the connections of the bracing component and
of their chord studs.

(9) The effect of eccentricity on connections, chord studs or other vertical boundary elements at the ends
of wall, hold-downs and shear anchorage and all other components in the wall should be considered in the
design.

(10) Screws used to make connections between sheathing material and cold-formed steel frame or
connections between cold-formed steel frame elements should belong to one of the types allowed in EN 1993-
1-3.

NOTE The types allowed in EN1993-1-3 are the EN ISO 1478 Tapping screws thread; the EN ISO 1479 Hexagon head
tapping screws; the EN ISO 2702 Heat-treated steel tapping screws - Mechanical properties; the EN ISO 7049 Cross
recessed pan head tapping screws.

(11) The pull-out resistance of screws should be not used to resist seismic forces.

(12) For connections of strap braces, the design shear resistance of the screws should be greater than 1,2
times the design bearing resistance or the design net area resistance of the strap brace.

(13) For connections of steel sheet sheathing, the design shear resistance of the screws should be greater
than 1,2 times the design bearing resistance.

(14) For connections of wood or gypsum sheathing, the design shear resistance of the screws should be
greater than 1,2 times the design bearing resistance of the steel structural member or the design embedment
resistance of wood or gypsum sheathing.

(15) For strap braced walls, where the track is not designed to resist the horizontal shear force from the
strap braces by compression or tension, the horizontal shear force should be resisted by a device connected
directly to the strap braces and anchored directly to the foundation or supporting structural element.

168
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.14.3 General rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) structural behaviour.

(1) In DC2, non-dissipative components should be verified under the most unfavourable combination of
NEd, MEd and VEd from Formula (11.2).

(2) In DC3, non-dissipative components should be designed to provide adequate overstrength with
respect to the expected resistance of the dissipative elements in accordance with Annex F.

(3) The relevant provisions in 11.14.2 should be satisfied.

11.14.4 Specific rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) strap braced walls

(1) The mechanism of dissipative behaviour in a strap braced wall should be the tension yielding of the
strap braces. Other failure mechanisms should be avoided.

(2) Strap braced walls should be designed to resist in-plane lateral forces mainly with tension-only steel
straps applied diagonally to form a vertical truss and should be provided with chord studs or other vertical
boundary elements, hold-downs and shear anchorage at each end of the wall.

(3) The yield resistance Npl,Rd of the gross cross-section of the strap braces should be such that Npl,Rd ≥ NEd,
where NEd is the design value of the axial force in the strap brace in the seismic design situation, and should
not be lower than Nu,Rd, the design net area resistance of the strap brace.

NOTE Complementary design rules are given in Annex F.2.

11.14.5 Specific rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) shear walls with steel sheet sheathing

(1) In shear walls with steel sheet sheathing, the dissipative components should be the member-to-
sheathing connections.

(2) The in-plane lateral resistance Rc,Rd corresponding to the resistance of the member-to-sheathing
connections within the effective sheathing strip should not be smaller than FEd where FEd is the design value
of the lateral force acting on the shear wall in the seismic design situation, and should be smaller than Ry,Rd,
the design yielding resistance of the effective sheathing strip.

(3) The resistance of the single member-to-sheathing connection Fc,Rd should satisfyFormula (11.54).

𝐹, =𝐹 , ≤𝐹 , /1,2 (11.54)

where Fv,Rd and Fb,Rd are the design shear resistance of the screws and the design bearing resistance of the
member-to-sheathing connection, respectively, calculated as given in Annex F.3.
NOTE Complementary design rules are given in Annex F.3.

11.14.6 Specific rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) shear walls with wood sheathing

(1) In shear walls with wood sheathing, the structural member-to-wood sheathing connections should be
the dissipative components.

(2) The in-plane lateral resistance Rc,Rd corresponding to the resistance of the member-to-wood sheathing
connection should not be smaller than FEd where FEd is the design value of the lateral force acting on the shear
wall in the seismic design situation.

NOTE Complementary design rules are given in Annex F.4.

169
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

11.14.7 Specific rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) shear walls with gypsum sheathing

(1) In shear walls with gypsum sheathing, thestructural member-to-gypsum sheathing connections
should be the dissipative components.

(2) The in-plane lateral resistance Rc,Rd corresponding to the resistance of the member-to-gypsum
sheathing connection should not be smaller than FEd where FEd is the design value of the lateral force acting on
the shear wall in the seismic design situation.

NOTE Complementary design rules are given in Annex F.5.

11.15 Design rules for inverted pendulum structures

(1) In inverted pendulum structures (defined in 11.4.1(g)), the columns should be verified in
compression considering the most unfavourable combination of the axial force and bending moments.

(2) In the verifications, NEd, MEd, VEd should be calculated as given in 11.8.5.

(3) The geometrical slenderness of the columns should not exceed 70, as given in 11.9.3(6).

(4) The interstorey drift sensitivity coefficient defined in 11.6.2(2) should be not greater than 0,20.

11.16 Design rules for steel structures with concrete cores or concrete walls and for
moment resisting frames combined with infills
11.16.1 Structures with concrete cores or concrete walls

(1) Concrete wall equivalent systems which are dual with a steel structure and conform to the definition
in 10.4.1(d), (e) or (f) should be considered as satisfying 6.2.6(6).

(2) The steel elements should be verified in accordance with the relevant parts of Eurocode 3, while the
concrete elements should be designed in accordance with 10.

(3) Elements in which there is an interaction between steel and concrete should be verified in accordance
with 12.

11.16.2 Moment resisting frames combined with infills

(1) Moment resisting frames in which reinforced concrete infills are connected to the steel structure in
order to behave as a composite structure should be designed in accordance with 7.4 and 12.

(2) The moment resisting frames in which the infills are structurally disconnected from the steel frame
on the lateral and top sides should be designed as steel structures.

(3) The moment resisting frames in which the infills are in contact with the steel frame, but are not
positively connected to that frame, should be designed to 7.4.

11.17 Steel diaphragms

(1) The design of floor diaphragms should conform to 6.2.8.

170
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) Chord and collector beams should be designed to resist the in-plane diaphragm forces.

(3) In a floor truss used as a diaphragm, all members of the truss and their connections should be designed
to resist the loading combination specified in EN1998-1-1, 6.4.4, where the seismic action effects should be
amplified by the overstrength factor γd given in 6.2.8 and taken equal to the recommended value for brittle
failure modes.

(4) If there are shear connectorsalong all girders of the diaphragm, the collector beams and the
corresponding connections should be designed to resist the axial forces due to distributed shear forces of the
shear connectors.

(5) If shear connectors are not present on the collector beams, all shear forces should be resisted by the
beams of the seismic resisting frame.

11.18 Transfer zone. Design for DC2 and DC3

(1) Diaphragms in transfer levels should be designed to 6.2.11 and 11.17.

(2) In DC2, d in Formula (6.6) should be taken equal to 𝛺 , which is the seismic action magnification factor
the dissipative zones (see Table 11.6) to be applied to the effects (NEd,E , MEd,E and VEd,E ) of the design seismic
action.

(3) In DC3, d in Formula (6.6) should be taken as 𝛾 𝑅 ⁄𝐸 , where γrm is the material overstrength
factor (see 11.2.2).

11.19 Checking of design, provisions for supply of material and execution

(1)P The check of the design should ensure that the real structure corresponds to the designed structure.

(2) The grade of steel in the dissipative zones, the grade and the tightening force of bolts and the quality
of the welds should be indicated in the drawings for fabrication.

(3) The technical drawings and reports should clearly state that steel grade higher than specified should
not be used for the dissipative zones.

(4) For Consequence Classes 1, 2 and 3a and all ductility classes, Execution class 2 should be considered
for all parts of the primary structure, except pre-qualified connections, if adopted. Execution Class 3 should be
considered for Consequence Class 3b.

NOTE Further details on the provisions for the execution class of pre-qualified connections are given in Annex E.

171
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

12 SPECIFIC RULES FOR COMPOSITE STEEL – CONCRETE BUILDINGS

12.1 Scope

12 should be applied to the design and the verification of composite steel – concrete buildings, in
seismic regions.

12 should be applied as a complement to EN 1994-1-1:20XX.

Except where modified by the provisions of 12, the provisions of 10 and 11 should be applied where
applicable.

12.2 Basis of Design

12.2.1 Design concepts

(1) Earthquake resistant composite steel – concrete buildings should be designed in accordance with
one of the three Ductility Classes introduced in EN1998-1-1:2019, 4.4.2 (see Table 12.1).

Table 12.1 — Structural ductility class (DC) and upper limit reference values of the behaviour
factor

Structural ductility class Range of the behaviour factor q

DC1 𝑞 ≤ 1,5

DC2 1,5 ≤ 𝑞 ≤ 3,5

DC3 only limited by the values of Table 12.2

(2) In DC1, the seismic design of composite steel - concrete buildings should be verified according to
12.7.

(3) Composite steel - concrete buildings in DC2 and DC3 may be designed with upper limit values of 𝑞
and 𝑞 , which depend on the Ductility Class and the structural type according to 12.4.

(4) In DC2 and DC3, dissipative zones of composite steel - concrete buildings may resist earthquake
actions through inelastic behaviour. Dissipative zones should be designed according to 12.8 to 12.14 and
12.16.

12.2.2 Safety verifications

(1) 11.2.2 should be applied.

(2) Partial factors 𝛾 and 𝛾 for reinforced concrete should conform to 10.3.4.

(3) The partial factor 𝛾 for shear connectors should conform to EN 1994-1-1: 20xx.

12.3 Materials
12.3.1 Concrete

(1) In design for DC1 10.3.2(1) should be applied.

172
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) In design for DC2 and DC3 10.3.3(1) should be applied.

12.3.2 Reinforcing steel

(1) 10.3.1(1) and 10.3.3(2) should be applied.

12.3.3 Structural steel

(1) 11.3 should be applied.

12.4 Structural types, behaviour factors, limits of seismic action and limits of drifts
12.4.1 Structural types

(1) Composite steel - concrete buildings should be assigned to one of the structural types in a) to g),
according to the behaviour of their primary resisting structure under seismic actions:

Composite moment resisting frames, are those with the same definition and limitations as in 11.4.1(1)a,
but in which beams and/or columns may be either structural steel or composite steel - concrete (see
Figure 11.1) with full- or partial- strength beam-to-column connections. If columns are structural steel,
the limitations as in 11.4.1(2) should be applied. Partial-strength beam-to-column connections are these
that connect fully composite beams to structural steel columns with flexural resistance provided by a force
couple achieved with continuous steel reinforcement in the slab and a steel seat angle or comparable
connection at the bottom flange connection.

Composite frames with concentric bracings, are those with the same definition and limitations as in
11.4.1(1)b, 11.4.1(3), 11.4.1(4), 11.4.1(5), 11.4.1(6) and Figures 11.2 and 11.3. Columns and beams
may be either structural steel or composite-steel concrete. Braces should either be structural steel or filled
composite.

Composite frames with eccentric bracings, are those with the same definition and limitations as in
11.4.1(1)c and Figure 11.4. The members, which do not contain the links may either be structural steel
or composite - steel concrete. Other than the slab, the links should be structural steel. Energy dissipation
should occur only through yielding in bending and/or in shear of these links.

Composite frames with buckling restrained bracings, are those with the same definition and limitations
as in 11.4.1(1)d and Figure 11.5. Columns and beams may either be structural steel or composite - steel
concrete. Buckling restrained braces should be such that they are active both in tension and compression
without experiencing local and/or global buckling, so that energy is dissipated in the braces by means of
cyclic axial force.

Dual composite frames have the same definition and limitations as in 11.4.1(1)e (see Figure 11.9).

Inverted pendulum structures have the same definition and limitations as in 11.4.1(1)g (see Figure 11.7)
and 11.4.1(7).

Composite structural wall systems are those which behave essentially as reinforced concrete walls. The
composite wall systems may belong to one of the following types:

— Type 1 corresponds to a steel or composite moment resisting frame working together with concrete infill
panels connected to the steel frame (Figure 12.1a).

173
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

— Type 2 is a reinforced concrete wall in which encased structural steel cross sections connected to the
concrete structure are used as vertical reinforcement (see Figure 12.1b an example with edge
reinforcement).

— Type 3, in which steel or composite steel beams are used to couple two or more reinforced concrete or
composite walls (see Figure 12.1c).

(a) (b) (c)

Figure 12.1 — Composite structural wall systems: (a) Type 1 – steel or composite moment frame with
connected concrete infill panels; (b) Type 2 – composite walls reinforced by connected encased
vertical steel sections; (c) Type 3 - composite or concrete walls coupled by steel or composite beams

(2) Composite moment resisting frames with partial-strength beam-to-column connections may be used
in DC1. When designed as dissipative, composite moment resisting frames with partial-strength beam-to-
column connections should only be designed in DC2 and should also be verified against global hierarchy rules
in accordance with 11.9.3(2) and 6.2.7(3).

(3) In composite structural wall systems of Types 1 and 2, the energy dissipation should take place in the
vertical steel sections and in the vertical reinforcement of the walls. In composite structural wall systems of
Type 3, energy dissipation may also take place in the coupling beams.

(4) If in composite structural wall systems, the wall elements are not connected to the steel structure, 10
and 11 should be applied, respectively, for the seismic design of the concrete and steel elements.

12.4.2 Behaviour factors

(1) The behaviour factor 𝑞 should account for the relevant sources of overstrength, the deformation and
energy dissipation capacity, of the structural types of 12.4.1. For regular buildings, the behaviour factor
components 𝑞 and 𝑞 may be taken with the upper limit values of Table 12.2 provided that, 12.8 to 12.14
are applied.

(2) 11.4.2(2) should be applied.

Table 12.2 — Default upper limit values of behaviour factors for composite steel concrete systems
regular in elevation

Ductility Class
Structural type DC2 DC3
𝑞 𝑞 𝑞 𝑞 𝑞 𝑞
a) Composite moment resisting frames (CMRFs)
Full-strength connections
Portal frames and single-storey CMRFs with class 3 and 4 cross sections See Table 11.3
Portal frames and single-storey CMRFs with class 1 and 2 cross sections
Multi-storey CMRFs
b) CMRFs with partial-strength connections 2,3 1,0 3,5 - - -

174
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

c) Composite frames with concentric bracings See Table 11.3

d) Composite frames with eccentric bracings See Table 11.3
e) Composite inverted pendulum See Table 11.3

f) Composite dual frames

CMRFs with concentric bracings
See Table 11.3
CMRFs with eccentric bracings
CMRFs with buckling restrained braces
g) Composite structural wall systems
Composite walls (Type 1 and 2) 2,2 1,0 3,5 3,0 1,0 4,5
Composite or concrete walls coupled by steel or composite beams (Type 3) 2,2 1,0 3,5 3,3 1,0 5,0
NOTE The Note of Table 11.3 should be applied.

12.4.3 Limits of seismic action for design to DC1, DC2 and DC3

For each structural type, design to a given Ductility Class should not be made above the levels of the
seismic action index 𝑆 given in Table 12.3.

Table 12.3 — Limits of seismic action index for design to DC1, DC2 and DC3

Limits of seismic action index

Structural type
𝑺𝛅 (m/s2)
DC1 DC2 DC3

Composite moment resisting frames (any connection type) 5,0 6,5 No limits

Composite frames with concentric or eccentric bracings 5,0 6,5 No limits

Composite frames with buckling-restrained braces - - No limits

Composite dual frames 5,0 7,5 No limits

Composite inverted pendulum 2,5 5,0 No limits

Composite structural wall systems 5,0 7,5 No limits

(3) 11.4.3(2) should be applied.

12.5 Structural analysis

12.5.1 General

(1) 11.5(1) should be applied.

(2) In composite moment resisting frames designed with joints as those specified in Annex G, the
composite joint deformations should be considered in the lateral deflection calculations.

(3) In composite moment resisting frames designed with partial-strength connections, the joint
deformations should be considered in the lateral deflection calculations.

175
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

12.5.2 Stiffness of sections

(1) The stiffness of composite cross sections in which the concrete is in compression should be calculated
using the modular ratio n0 in application for short duration loading according to 5.4.2.2(2) in EN1994-1-1. In
this case, Formula (12.1) should be applied.

𝑛 = 𝐸 ⁄𝐸 =7 (12.1)

(2) For composite steel beams under positive bending, the second moment of area of the cross section,
𝐼 , should be calculated based on the effective width of the slab according to EN1994-1-1.

(3) The stiffness of composite beam cross sections in which the concrete is in tension should be
calculated by assuming that the concrete is cracked and that only the steel portion of the cross section is active.
The contribution of the longitudinal steel reinforcement may be considered.

(4) The structural model should take into account that concrete is in compression in some zones and in
tension in other zones. These zones are defined in 12.9 to 12.14.

(5) For stiffness calculations, the total effective width 𝑏 of the concrete flange associated with each
steel beam web should be taken as the sum of the partial effective widths be1 and be2 from each side of the steel
beam web (see Figure 12.2) and should be calculated according to EN1992-1-1; beff should not be greater than
the actual available widths b1 and b2 defined in (6).

Figure 12.2 — Definition of effective width be and beff

(6) The actual width, b from each side of the steel web should be taken as half the distance from the web
to the adjacent web; at a free edge, the actual width should be the distance from the web to the free edge.

12.6 Verification to limit states

12.6.1 General

(1) The verification of structural elements to limit states should comply with 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3.

12.6.2 Resistance conditions at Significant Damage limit state

(1) The resistance of structural elements and connections at Significant Damage should be verified using
EN1993-1-1, EN1993-1-8 and EN1994-1-1.

(2) 11.6.2(2) should be applied.

12.6.3 Limitation of interstorey drift at Significant Damage limit state

(1) The interstorey drift at SD limit state of composite steel-concrete buildings should be limited to:

176
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑑 , ≤ 0,020ℎ for composite moment resisting frames with full- or partial-strength

connections;

For composite frames with concentric or eccentric bracings 11.6.3(1)b should be applied;

For composite frames with buckling restrained braciings 11.6.3(1)c should be applied;

For composite dual frames and inverted pendulum structures 11.6.3(1)d should be applied;

𝑑 , ≤ 0,017ℎ for composite structural wall systems of Type 1, 2 and 3.

where:

dr,SD is defined in 6.2.4;

hs is the interstorey height.

12.7 Design rules for low-dissipative (DC1) structural behaviour for all structural types
12.7.1 General

(1) 11.7.1 should be applied.

12.7.2 Design rules for low-dissipative structures

(1) 11.7.2(1) should be applied.

(2) The structural members and connections should have stiffness and resistance in accordance with
Eurocode 3 and Eurocode 4, where applicable.

12.8 Design rules for dissipative (DC2 and DC3) structural behaviour common to all
structural types
12.8.1 General

(1) Composite members participating into energy dissipation should conform to EN1994-1-1.

(2) The design criteria given in 12.9 to 12.14 should be applied to all the components of composite -
steel concrete structural types designed in accordance with the concept of dissipative structural behaviour.

(3) 12.8.2 to 12.8.9 should be applied to members of the primary structural types of 12.4 designed for
dissipative behaviour.

12.8.2 Design criteria for dissipative structures

(1)P Dissipative zones in composite-steel concrete structural types shall have adequate ductility and
resistance such that their hysteretic behaviour does not affect the overall stability of the structure.

(2) 11.8.2 should be applied.

(3) The resistance of dissipative zones solely relying on the bare steel cross-section should be
determined in accordance with 11.

177
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

12.8.3 Design rules for dissipative elements in compression or bending

(1) For dissipative steel elements, 11.8.3 should be applied.

(2) For dissipative composite members under compression and/or bending, sufficient local ductility
should be ensured by restricting the local slenderness of their cross sections.

(3) Steel dissipative zones and the non-encased steel parts of composite members should conform to
11.8.3(1) and the local slenderness limits in Table 11.5 depending on their ductility class and the selected
behaviour factor 𝑞.

(4) Dissipative zones of encased or filled composite members under compression and/or bending should
conform with Table 12.4. Complementary design and detailing rules according to 12.8.7, 12.8.9 and 12.9 to
12.14 should be applied depending on the dissipative composite member.

Table 12.4 — Local slenderness limits of encased or filled composite cross sections in dissipative
members depending on Ductility Class and reference behaviour factor

Ductility class DC2 DC3

Reference value of behaviour factor q ≤ 1,5 1,5 < q ≤ 3,5 q > 3,5

Partially or fully encased H- or I-cross section: 𝑐/𝑡 limits: 20𝜀 14𝜀 9𝜀

Filled rectangular cross section: ℎ/𝑡 limits: 70𝜀 52𝜀 35𝜀

Filled circular cross section: 𝑑/𝑡 limits: 125𝜀 90𝜀 80𝜀

where
,
𝜀 = 235⁄𝑓

fy is the nominal yield stress of the steel material;

𝑐/𝑡 is as defined in Figure 12.3.

ℎ/𝑡 and 𝑑/𝑡 are the ratio between the maximum external dimension-to-the wall thickness of the steel
profile as defined in Figure 12.3.

Key

A Straight links

178
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Figure 12.3 — Definitions of local slenderness limits of encased or filled composite cross sections in
dissipative composite members

12.8.4 Design rules for dissipative elements in tension

(1) For dissipative steel elements or their parts in tension, the ductility provisions of EN1993-1-1 and
11.8.4 should be applied.

(2) For dissipative composite elements or their parts in tension, the ductility provisions of EN1994-1-1
should be applied.

12.8.5 Design rules for members

(1) In DC2, the resistance and stability of members defined by structural type in Table 12.5 and of the
connections of these members should be verified by considering the most unfavourable combination of the
axial force NEd, bending moments MEd and shear force VEd, calculated according to Formulae (11.2). The seismic
action magnification factor 𝛺 present in Formulae (11.2) should be taken as given in Table 12.5 with the
provisions of 11.8.5(1).

(2) In DC3, the resistance and stability of non-dissipative members should be verified considering the
most unfavourable combination of the axial force NEd, bending moment MEd and shear force VEd, calculated
according to Formulae (11.3) with the provisions of 11.8.5(2).

(3) In DC3, the design overstrength factor, Ωd should not be smaller than 1,0. It should depend on the
structural type as specified in 12.9 to 12.14. The non-dissipative members to which Formulae (11.3) should
be applied with the provisions of 11.8.5(2) are those defined in Table 12.5.

(4) 11.8.5(4) should be applied.

(5) In DC3, composite structural wall systems should be designed with a seismic action magnification
factor Ω equal to 2,0.

Note: The members to which (2) should be applied are the members, which in DC3, are considered as non-dissipative.
These members are defined in Table 12.5.

Table 12.5 — Members to which (1) or (2) should be applied. Values of seismic action magnification
factor Ω for structural types in DC2
Structural types Ω Members
Composite moment resisting frames (CMRFs):
See Table 11.6 Columns
With full-strength connections
With partial-strength connections 2,0 Columns
Composite frames with concentric bracings See Table 11.6 Beams and columns
Beams outside the link,
Composite frames with eccentric bracings See Table 11.6
braces and columns
Composite inverted pendulum structures See Table 11.6 Columns

Composite dual frames

Beams and columns of the
CMRFs with concentric bracings See Table 11.6 concentric bracing; columns
of the CMRF
Beams outside the link,
CMRFs with eccentric bracings
braces and oclumns of the

179
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

eccentricl bracing; columns

of the CMRF
Composite structural wall systems None
2,0
Types 1, 2 and 3 None

12.8.6 Design rules for beams

(1) 12.8.6 should be applied to dissipative composite or steel beams in composite structural types of
12.4.

(2) Secondary beams in all composite structural types of 12.4 should be either designed with EN1993-
1-1 or with EN1994-1-1, whichever applies.

12.8.6.1 General

(1) In DC2 and DC3, composite steel beams with slab (see 12.8.6.2) and concrete-encased composite
beams (see 12.8.6.3) should be braced laterally according to EN1994-1-1; alternatively, the beam cross
section should be braced with point torsional bracing.

(2) In DC2, the spacing and resistance of lateral-torsional restaints of composite steel beams with slab,
concrete-encased composite beams or bare steel beams, should conform to EN1993-1-1 (see 6.3.5.3).

(3) In DC3, the distance between lateral-torsional restraints in dissipative composite steel beams should
not be greater than the stable length Lst given by Formula (12.2).

𝐿 = 0,19𝑖 𝐸 /(𝛾 𝑓) (12.2)

where:

𝑖 is the radius of gyration in the plane of buckling calculated based on the elastic transformed
composite cross section by using the modular ratio 𝑛 according to Formula (12.1);

𝐸 is the elastic modulus of steel;

𝛾 is the steel material overstrength factor (see 11.2.2).

(4) In DC3, for dissipative composite steel beams satisfying 12.8.6.2.3, 11.9.2(3) should be applied.

(5) In DC3, 11.9.2(4) should be applied for dissipative composite steel or bare steel beams of composite
structural systems in DC3.

(6) Additional bracing should be placed adjacent to the expected dissipative zones of composite steel or
steel beams of composite structural types in DC2 and DC3, where required in 12.9 to 12.14.

(7) In DC3, the resistance Mb of torsional bracing adjacent to plastic hinges in dissipative zones of
composite steel beams with slab or concrete encased-composite beams should not be smaller than the value
given by Formula (12.3).

𝑀 = 0,06𝛾 𝑊 , 𝑓 (12.3)

where:

Wpl,y is the plastic section modulus of the composite steel beam with slab or the concrete encased
composite beam; the flexural resistance of composite beams may be calculated according to EN1994-1-1.

180
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

12.8.6.2 Composite steel beams with slab

12.8.6.2.1 General

(1)P The integrity of the concrete slab shall be maintained during a seismic event, while yielding takes
place in the bottom part of the steel cross section and/or in the reinforcing rebars of the slab.

(2) If it is not intended to use a dissipative composite steel beam with slab, 12.8.6.2.3 should be applied.
In this case, the composite steel beam should be designed in accordance with 11 for the seismic design
situation and in accordance with EN1994-1-1 for the rest of the design situations.

(3) Composite steel beams in dissipative zones of the structure may be designed with full or partial shear
connections in accordance with EN1994-1-1. The degree of connection, , as defined in EN1994-1-1, should
not be smaller than 0,8. The total resistance of the shear connectors within any negative (hogging) moment
region should not be less than the plastic resistance of the longitudinal reinforcement. The shear connectors
should be placed outside the plastic hinge region in the steel beam.

(4) The design resistance of shear connectors in dissipative zones of composite steel beams with slab
should conform to EN1994-1-1. For dissipative composite steel beams with slab with steel beam cross
sectional depths larger than 500mm, the design resistance of the shear connectors should be multiplied by a
reduction factor of 0,75.

(5) A full shear connection should be realised if non-ductile connectors are used.

(6) When a profiled steel sheeting with ribs transverse to the supporting beams is used, the reduction
factor 𝑘 of the design shear resistance of connectors given by EN1994-1-1 should be further reduced by
multiplying with the rib shape efficiency factor, 𝑘 given in Figure 12.4.

Figure 12.4 — Values of the rib shape efficiency factor

(7) To achieve ductility in plastic hinges forming in dissipative zones under positive bending, the ratio
zc/dc of the plastic neutral axis depth zc to the depth dc of the composite steel beam cross section, should satisfy
Formula (12.4).

𝑧 ⁄𝑑 < 𝜀 ⁄(𝜀 +𝜀 ) (12.4)

where:

𝜀 is the ultimate compressive strain of concrete by considering confinement (𝜀 = 0.0045);

𝜀 is the total strain of the steel profile at SD.

(8) To comply with (7), Table 12.6 may be used for limiting zc/dc of composite steel beams with slab.

(9) In dissipative zones of composite steel beams, specific ductile steel reinforcement of the slab called
“seismic rebars” should be present in the connection zone of the beam and the column. The seismic rebars
should be transverse to the steel beam and be designed and placed according to Annex I.

181
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Table 12.6 — Limit values of zc/dc for ductility of composite beams with slab

Ductility class zc/dc

q 𝒇𝐲 (N/mm2)
upper limit

355 0,45

DC2 1,5 < q  3,5 275 0,50

235 0,55

355 0,35

3,5 < q  5,0 275 0,40

235 0,45
DC3
355 0,30

q > 5,0 275 0,35

235 0,40

12.8.6.2.2 Slab effective width for plastic bending resistance calculations

(1) The partial effective width of the slab beff,Rd to be used for the calculation of the plastic bending
resistance of composite steel beams with slab is defined in Table 12.7.

NOTE In Table 12.7, the beff,Rd values are valid for primary composite steel beams with slab positioned with their
strong axis in the direction of the seismic action.

Table 12.7 — Partial effective width beff,Rd of slab for evaluation of plastic bending resistance, 𝑴𝐑𝐝 of
composite steel beams with slab designed according to Annex I

Stresses in slab Column location Transverse element beff,Rd

Tensile Interior With seismic re-bars beff

With re-bars anchored to façade beam or to concrete cantilever

Tensile Exterior beff
edge strip. With seismic rebars

With re-bars not anchored to façade beam or to concrete

Tensile Exterior 0,0
cantilever edge strip. With seismic rebars

Transverse beam with connectors and rigidly connected to

Compressive Interior/Exterior beff
column. With seismic re-bars

Compressive Interior/Exterior No transverse beam with connectors. With seismic re-bars bc+0,7ℎ

Exterior
Compressive No transverse beam with connectors. With seismic re-bars bc
(perimeter frame)

182
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

where:

beff is the effective width defined in EN1992-1-1,7.3.2.1;

bc is the column width intersecting the composite steel beam with slab;

hc is the depth of the respective column.

12.8.6.2.3 Condition for disregarding the composite action of steel beams with slab

(1) If the slab is totally disconnected from the steel beam in a circular zone around a column of diameter
2 beff where beff is the largest of the effective widths of the steel beams intersecting to the respective column,
the plastic moment resistance of a composite steel beam with slab may be calculated based on the steel profile
alone.

(2) The slab should be considered as totally disconnected when there is no contact between the slab and
any steel element in the transverse direction (e.g. columns, shear connectors, connecting plates, corrugated
flange, steel deck nailed to flange of steel section).

12.8.6.3 Concrete-encased composite beams

(1) In partially concrete-encased composite steel beams, the contribution to plastic bending resistance
of concrete between the flanges of the steel profile may be neglected.

12.8.7 Composite columns

12.8.7.1 General rules

(1) In the design of all composite column types in 12.8.7.1, 12.8.7.2, 12.8.7.3 and 12.8.7.4, the
resistance of the steel section alone or the combined resistances of the steel section and the concrete
encasement or infill may be taken into account.

(2) Encased composite columns with dissipative behaviour should have minimum cross sectional
dimensions b, h or d (see Figure 12.3) of at least 250 mm.

(3) The axial, shear and flexural resistance of non-dissipative encased and filled composite columns
should be determined in accordance with EN1994-1-1.

(4) The design of encased composite columns in which the member resistance is only provided by the
steel section may be carried out in accordance with 11.

(5) The design shear resistance of composite columns given in EN1994-1-1 (see 6.7), should be
multiplied by a reduction factor of 0,5.

In dissipative encased or filled composite columns, when the concrete encasement or infill are
assumed to contribute to the axial and/or flexural resistance of the member, 12.8.7.2 to 12.8.7.4 should be
applied. The full shear transfer between the concrete and the steel parts in a cross section should be ensured
by bond, friction and/or shear connectors.

(7) In dissipative encased composite columns, when the concrete encasement or infill do not contribute
to the axial and/or flexural resistance of the member, the transverse shear resistance should be determined
on the basis of the structural steel cross section alone.

183
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(8) Wherever a composite column is subjected to predominant axial forces, sufficient longitudinal shear
transfer should be provided to ensure that the steel and concrete parts share the loads applied to the column
at connections to beams and/or bracing members.

(9) At both ends of a column, the clear length should be defined as being in critical regions of columns in
composite moment resisting frames. In composite frames with eccentric bracings, the portion of columns
adjacent to the seismic links should be defined as a critical region.

NOTE Except at their base in some composite structural types, columns are not designed to be dissipative; (6) and
(9) are prescribed to mitigate uncertainties in the action effects in columns.

12.8.7.2 Encased composite columns

(1) The steel contribution ratio, 𝛿 of encased composite columns should conform to EN1994-1-1 (see
6.7).

(2) Concrete encasement of the steel core should be reinforced with continuous longitudinal rebars and
lateral ties or stirrups.

(3) In DC2 and DC3, the critical region length, lcr (in mm) of fully encased composite columns should be
taken as:

In DC2: 𝑙 = max {ℎ ; 𝑙 ⁄6 ; 450} (12.5)

In DC3: 𝑙 = max {1,5ℎ ; 𝑙 ⁄6 ; 600} (12.6)

where:

hc is the depth of the composite cross section (in mm);

lcl is the clear length of the composite column (in mm).

(4) If 𝑙 /ℎ < 3,0, the full height of the encased composite column should be considered as a critical
region.

(5) The spacing s (in mm) of confining hoops in critical regions should be taken as:

In DC2: 𝑠 = min{𝑏 ⁄2 ; 260; 9𝑑 } (12.7)

In DC3: 𝑠 = min{𝑏 ⁄2 ; 175; 8𝑑 } (12.8)

where:

boc is the minimum dimension of the concrete core to the centerline of the confining hoops (in mm);

dbl is the minimum diameter of the longitudinal rebars (in mm).

(6) In DC3, the spacing s (in mm) of confining hoops near the column base should satisfy Formula (12.9).

𝑠 = min{𝑏 ⁄2 ; 150; 6𝑑 } (12.9)

(7) The confining hoop diameter dbw(in mm) should not be smaller than:

In DC2: 𝑑 = 6 mm (12.10)

184
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

In DC3: 𝑑 = max 0,35𝑑 , ; 6 mm (12.11)

(8) In dissipative fully encased composite columns of composite structural types in DC2 and DC3, the
confining hoop diameter dbw (in mm) should satisfy Formula (12.12).
,
𝑑 ≥ 𝑏 𝑡 ⁄8 𝑓 , ⁄𝑓 , (12.12)

where:

fy,dl is the design yield stress of the longitudinal rebars;

fy,dw is the design yield stress of the confining hoops;

fy,df is the design yield stress of the flange of the steel cross section;

b is the flange width of the cross section (see Figure 12.3);

tf is the flange thickness of the cross section (see Figure 12.3).

(9) In critical regions, the distance between consecutive longitudinal rebars restrained by hoop bends or
cross-ties should not exceed 250 mm in DC2 or 200 mm in DC3.

(10) In the lower two storeys of a building, hoops in accordance with (7), (8) and (9) should be provided
beyond the critical regions for an additional length equal to 0,50 lcr.

(11) Dissipative fully encased composite columns should conform to 12.8.3.

(12) The longitudinal spacing s of confining hoops should be smaller than 0,50 of the flange outstand c
(see Figure 12.3). If s is such that 0,5 < 𝑠⁄𝑐 < 1,0 , the limits in Table 12.4 should be decreased by 50%.

(13) The minimum reinforcement ratio for continuous longitudinal reinforcing, 𝜌 , should be 0,004.

12.8.7.3 Partially encased composite columns

(1) The spacing of transverse reinforcement s should satisfy 12.8.7.2(5) over a length greater or equal
to lcr at the ends of a member. In DC3, 12.8.7.2(6) should be applied for confining hoops near a column base.

(2) Straight links as shown in Figure 12.3 may be welded in addition to the longitudinal rebars.

(3) The yield strength of the welds of the straight links in (2) should not be less than the yield strength
of the straight links.

(4) The minimum diameter dbw of the straight links in (2) should satisfy Formula (12.12).

(5) The clear concrete cover of straight links in (2) should not be smaller than 20mm and not greater
than 40mm.

(6) 12.8.7.2(12) should be applied.

(7) If the longitudinal spacing sl of straight links welded to the inside of the flanges is smaller than 0,50
of the flange outstand c (see Figure 12.3a), then the spacing s of the confining hoops in 12.8.7.2(12) may be
increased by 50%.

185
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(8) If the transfer of longitudinal shear between the steel and reinforced concrete parts of the composite
cross section is not verified, the moment resistance should be taken equal to that of the steel cross section
alone; else, the moment resistance should be taken equal to that of the composite cross section.

12.8.7.4 Filled composite columns

(1) The condition on the reinforcing steel contribution ratio of encased composite columns δ in EN1994-
1-1, 6.7, should be satisfied.

(2) Longitudinal reinforcement may be omitted. If longitudinal reinforcement is provided, internal

transverse reinforcement may be omitted.

(3) The shear resistance of non-dissipative filled composite columns should be determined in
accordance with EN1994-1-1.

(4) The shear resistance of dissipative filled composite columns should be determined on the basis of
either the structural steel cross section or the reinforced concrete cross section with the steel hollow
structural section taken only as shear reinforcement.

12.8.8 Design rules for composite connections in dissipative zones

(1) The design of composite connections should limit localisation of plastic strains, high residual stresses
and fabrication defects. The integrity of the concrete in compression should be maintained during a seismic
event; yielding should be limited to the steel cross sections.

(2) 11.8.6(2) and 11.8.6(3) should be applied.

(3) In DC3, unless if otherwise specified in Annex G, 11.8.6(4) should be applied to composite
connections in dissipative zones. γrm and γsh should be considered in the calculation of fy in 11.8.6(2).

(4) 11.8.6(5) and 11.8.6(6) should be applied for the design of bolted joints in shear.

(5) 11.8.6(6) should be applied for the design of hybrid joints with both bolts and welds either in shear
or in tension.

(6) In dissipative zones of composite steel beams with slab, 12.8.6.2 should be satisfied.

(7) Design of the reinforcing rebars needed in the concrete of the joint region should use models that
satisfy joint equilibrium (e.g. Annex I for slabs).

(8) The resistance and ductility of members and their connections other than those covered by Annex G
should be demonstrated by tests.

NOTE CEN Doc. XXE gives a loading protocol and acceptance criteria for such tests.

(9) Composite connections between steel and/or composite steel beams and reinforced concrete or
composite columns should comply with Annex G, G.4.

(10) Composite connections between steel and/or composite steel beams and steel columns should
comply with Annex E for composite - steel moment resisting frames.

(11) Composite connections using diaphragm plates should comply with Annex G, G.5.

186
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(12) Composite connections with double-split tees in filled composite columns should comply with Annex
G, G.6.

(13) In DC2 and DC3, past test results available in the literature and/or refined finite element simulations
may be used to verify the designed full-strength and partial-strength composite connections in or adjacent to
dissipative zones.

(14) Experimental validation for partial- or full-strength connections may be omitted if prequalified
connections according to Annexes E and/or G are used.

(15) In DC2 and DC3, gusset plate connections of composite-steel frames with concentric bracings should
be designed according to Annex E.

NOTE Annex E provides complementary rules on seismic prequalification of beam-to-column joints and design rules
for gusset plate connections of frames with bracings. Annex G provides complementary ruels on seismic prequalification
of full-strength composite beam-to-column joints.

12.8.9 Design rules for column-to-column splices

(1) In steel columns, splices should conform to 11.8.7.

(2) In reinforced concrete columns, anchorage and splices should conform to 10.6.

(3) In encased composite columns, splices should conform to 12.8.7.2, 11.8.7 and 10.6.

(4) In partially-encased composite columns, splices should conform to 12.8.7.3, 11.8.7 and 10.6.

(5) In filled composite columns, splices should be bolted and should conform to 11.8.7. Bolts should be
of grade 8,8 or 10,9 and preloaded. Controlled tightening should be used in accordance with EN1993-1-8.

12.9 Design and detailing rules for composite moment resisting frames in DC2 and DC3
12.9.1 Design criteria

(1) In composite moment resisting frames with steel columns, 11.9.1 should be applied.

(2) In DC3, composite moment resisting frames with composite columns should be designed so that
plastic hinges form in the beams or in the connections of the beams to the columns, but not in the columns.
This rule may be neglected in cases a) to c):

a) at the base of the frame in which NEd in primary composite columns satisfies: 𝑁 ⁄𝑁 , ≤ 0,75;

b) at the top of primary composite columns in the upper storey of multi-storey buildings;

c) at the top and bottom of primary composite columns in single storey buildings in which, 𝑁 in primary
composite columns satisfies 𝑁 ⁄𝑁 , ≤ 0,75.

where,

Npl,Rd is the plastic design resistance to compression of the composite cross section according to
EN1994-1-1;

NEd is the total design axial compressive force and is calculated in accordance to 12.8.5(2);

187
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) In DC2, composite moment resisting frames with partial strength connections other than stiffened
end plate connections, should conform to 11.9.3(2).

(4) The target hinge formation pattern should be achieved by conforming to 12.9.3, 12.9.4 and 12.9.6.

12.9.2 Analysis

(1) 12.5 should be applied.

(2) In composite steel beams, two different flexural stiffnesses should be taken into account: 𝐸𝐼 for the
part of the spans subjected to positive (sagging) bending (uncracked cross section) and 𝐸𝐼 for the part of the
span subjected to negative (hogging) bending (cracked cross section).

(3) As a simplification of (2), the analysis may be performed with an equivalent moment of inertia Ieq for
the entire beam span based on Formula (12.13).

𝐼 = 0,6𝐼 + 0,4𝐼 (12.13)

(4) The effective flexural stiffness of composite cross sections, (𝐸𝐼) , should be calculated according
to EN1994-1-1 using Formula (12.14).

(𝐸𝐼) , =𝐾 𝐸 𝐼 +𝐸 𝐼 +𝐾 , 𝐸 𝐼 (12.14)

where:

Ea, Es and Ecm are the modulus of elasticity of the structural steel cross section, of the steel reinforcement and
of the concrete, respectively; Long-term effects on the effective elastic flexural stiffness should
be considered according to EN1994-1-1 (see 6.7.3.3(4)).

Ia, Is and Ic are the moments of inertia of the structural steel cross section, of the steel reinforcement and of the
un-cracked concrete section, respectively, with respect to the axis through the centroid of the
transformed section;

𝐾, is a correction factor that should be taken as 0,5;

𝐾 is a calibration factor that should be taken as 0,9.

12.9.3 Beams

(1) 12.8.6 should be applied.

(2) Steel beams with slab that satisfy 12.8.6.2.3, should conform to 11.9.2.

(3) Composite steel beams with slab should conform to 12.8.6.2.

(4) Concrete-encased composite beams should conform to 12.8.6.3.

(5) Beams should be verified against lateral and lateral torsional buckling in accordance with EN1993-
1-1, assuming the development of a negative (hogging) plastic moment at one end of the beam.

(6) Composite steel beams with slab or encased-composite beams should conform to 11.9.2(6) and
11.9.2(8) with the exeption that in Formula (11.8) Mb,Rd is the design value of the bending resistance of the
composite steel beam according to EN1994: 1-1.

188
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(7) In DC3, 11.9.2(7) should be applied with the exception that the plastic moment resistance of the
composite steel beam under positive bending (sagging) should be computed according to EN1994: 1-1.

(8) If partial-strength connections are used, 11.9.2(9) shoud be applied.

(9) Composite trusses should not be used as dissipative beams.

12.9.4 Columns

(1) Columns should be structural steel, reinforced concrete, encased- partially-encased or filled-
composite.

(2) In DC2, 11.9.3(1) should be generally applied except if composite steel moment resisting frames are
designed with partial-strength connections.

(3) If plastic hinges form in steel columns, 11.9.3 should be applied.

(4) If plastic hinges form in reinforced concrete columns, 10.6, 11.9.3(1) and 11.9.3(2) should be
applied.

(5) If plastic hinges form in composite columns, 12.8.7, 11.9.3(1), 11.9.3(2), 11.9.3(3), and 11.9.3(5)
should be applied.

(6) The design resistance of composite columns should satisfy EN1994-1-1, 6.7.

(7) In DC3, encased, partially-encased or filled composite columns should satisfy Formula (12.15).

𝑁 /𝑁 , ≤ 0,75 (12.15)

where:

NEd is the design axial compressive force in the column from Formula (11.3);

Npl,Rd is the plastic design resistance to compression of the composite cross section according to EN1994-
1-1;

(8) 11.9.3(8) should be applied with (6) where applicable.

12.9.5 Column diaphragm plates

(1) Diaphragm plates present in joints of filled composite columns with composite steel or steel beams
may be external or internal to the column.

(2) The thickness of column diaphragm plates should not be smaller than that of the respective beam
flange.

(3) The column diaphragm plates should be welded around the full perimeter of the column using either
full penetration groove welds or two-sided fillet welds. The strength of these joints should not be lower than
the available strength of the contact area of the plate with the column sides.

(4) Internal column diaphragm plates should have circular openings sufficient for placing the concrete.

(5) Column diaphragm plate openings should be such that the concrete filling occupies the complete
internal volume.

189
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(6) Complementary design rules for column diaphragm plates of Annex G (see G.5) should be satisfied.

12.9.6 Beam to column joints

(1) In composite moment resisting frames with joints between steel beams and steel, reinforced concrete
or composite columns conforming to 12.8.6.2.3, 11.9.4 should be applied with the complementary rules of
Annexes E and G, whichever is applicable.

(2) 11.9.4(2), 11.9.4(9), 11.9.4(10), 11.9.4(11) and 11.9.4(12) should be applied.

(3) In composite moment resisting frames with joints between steel and/or composite steel beams and
reinforced concrete or composite columns, 12.8.8(9) should be applied.

(4) In composite moment resisting frames with composite joints using diaphragm plates, 12.8.8(11)
should be applied.

(5) In composite moment resisting frames with composite joints with double-split tee connections in
concrete filled tube columns, 12.8.8(12) should be applied.

(6) In composite moment resisting frames in which the condition for disregarding the composite action
of beams with slab (see 12.8.6.2.3) is not satisfied, dissipative semi-rigid and/or partial strength connections
may be used only in DC2. In this case, 11.9.4(3) should be applied.

(7) In composite moment resisting frames in DC3, with composite steel beams with slab, the design shear
force Vwp,Ed in the column web panel should be calculated as being the sum of the plastic moment resistance of
the adjacent dissipative zones in beams or connections, with a positive (sagging) moment on one side and a
negative (hogging) moment on the other side, divided by the web panel depth. The shear buckling resistance
of the web panels should satisfy Formula (12.16).

𝑉 , ≤𝑉 , (12.16)

where Vwp,Rd is the shear buckling resistance of the web panel for steel columns or the joint shear resistance
according to Annex G (see G.4.6) for reinforced concrete or composite columns.

(8) In (7), the positive (sagging) and negative (hogging) plastic moment resistance of composite steel
beams with slab should be calculated according to 12.8.6.2.2.

(9) In composite moment resisting frames, with steel columns, 11.9.4(4), 11.9.4(5), 11.9.4(6) and
11.9.4(8) should be applied.

(10) In composite moment resisting frames in DC3, with steel columns, 11.9.4(7) should be applied.

12.9.7 Column base joints

(1) 11.9.5 and ANNEX H should be applied.

12.10 Design and detailing rules for composite frames with concentric bracings in DC2 and
DC3
12.10.1 Design criteria

(1) Columns should be either structural steel, encased or partially encased composite, filled composite
or reinforced concrete.

190
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) Beams should be either structural steel or composite steel with slab or concrete-encased composite.

(3) Braces should be structural steel or filled composite.

(4) 11.10.1 should be applied.

12.10.2 Analysis

(1) 11.10.2 should be applied.

(2) 12.5 should be applied.

(3) 12.9.2 should be applied.

(4) In composite frames with filled composite bracings, the compression diagonals should be considered
in the analysis.

(5) The resistance of filled composite braces under tension should be calculated based on the structural
steel cross section only.

12.10.3 Diagonal members

(1) 11.10.3 should be applied.

(2) The local slenderness of filled composite braces should be of class 1 in DC3 and class 1 or 2 in DC2
according to Table 12.4.

12.10.4 Beams and columns

(1) 11.10.4 should be applied.

(2) Composite steel beams with slab should conform to 12.8.6.2.

(3) Concrete-encased composite beams should conform to 12.8.6.3.

(4) Encased of filled composite columns should conform to 12.8.7.

(5) Reinforced concrete columns, should conform to 10.6.

12.10.5 Beam to column connections

(1) 11.10.5 should be applied with the provisions of Annex E, wherever applicable.

(2) In composite frames with bracings and composite steel beams with slab or concrete-encased
composite beams, 11.10.5(2) should be applied with Mb,pl,Rd calculated according to 12.8.6.2 and 12.8.6.3,
whichever is applicable.

12.10.6 Brace connections

(1) 11.10.6 should be applied.

(2) In composite frames with filled composite bracings, 11.10.6(2) should be applied with Nb,Rd and Npl,Rd
calculated based on the entire composite cross section.

191
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) In composite frames with bracings, brace connections accommodating buckling of diagonal members
should conform to Annex E.

12.10.7 Column base joints

(1) 11.10.7 and Annex H should be applied.

(2) In composite frames with filled composite bracings, 11.10.7(1) should be applied with Nb,Rd
calculated based on the entire composite cross section.

12.11 Design and detailing rules for composite frames with eccentric bracings in DC2 and
DC3
12.11.1 Design criteria

(1) 11.11.1 should be applied.

(2) Columns should be either structural steel, reinforced concrete, encased composite or filled
composite.

(3) Beams should be either structural steel or composite with a concrete slab or concrete-encased
composite.

(4) Braces should be structural steel or filled composite.

(5) Braces, columns and beam segments outside the seismic links should be designed to remain elastic
under the maximum forces corresponding to fully yielded and cyclically strain-hardened beam links.

12.11.2 Analysis

(1) 12.5 should be applied.

(2) 12.9.2 should be applied.

(3) 12.10.2(4) and 12.10.2(5) should be applied.

12.11.3 Seismic Links

(1) 11.11.2 should be applied.

(2) Seismic links should not be encased.

(3) The concrete slab should be disregarded for calculating Mp,link according to Formula (11.28). Only the
steel components of the seismic link cross section should be taken into account.

(4) When a seismic link frames into an encased or reinforced column, face bearing plates should be
provided on both sides of the link at the column face and in the end section of the link. The design of the face
bearing plates should conform to Annex G, G.4.9.

(5) The design of composite connections adjacent to dissipative links should conform to 12.8.8.

12.11.4 Diagonal members

(1) 12.10.3 should be applied.

192
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

12.11.5 Beams and columns

(2) 12.10.4 should be applied.

12.11.6 Members and connections not containing seismic links

(1) Members not containing seismic links should conform to 11.11.3, taking into account the combined
resistance of composite members and the design rules for members in 12.8 and EN1994-1-1, wherever
applicable.

(2) Where a seismic link is adjacent to a fully encased composite column, transverse reinforcement
conforming to 12.8.7.1 should be provided above and below the link connection over a length of twice the
column depth.

12.11.7 Connections of the seismic links

(1) 11.11.4 should be applied.

12.11.8 Beam to column connections

(1) 11.11.5 should be applied.

(2) 12.10.5(2) should be applied.

12.11.9 Column base joints

(1) 12.10.7 and Annex H should be applied.

12.12 Design and detailing rules for composite frames with buckling restrained bracings
12.12.1 Design criteria

(1) 11.12.1 should be applied.

(2) Columns should be either structural steel, reinforced concrete, encased or filled composite.

(3) Beams should be either structural steel or composite with a concrete slab or concrete-encased
composite.

12.12.2 Analysis

(1) 11.12.2 and12.9.2 should be applied.

12.12.3 Design rules of buckling restrained bracings

(1) 11.12.3 should be applied.

12.12.4 Conformity criteria

(1) 11.12.4 should be applied.

12.12.5 Beams and columns

(1) 11.12.5 should be applied.

(2) Composite steel beams with slab should conform to 12.8.6.2.

193
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) Concrete-encased composite beams should conform to 12.8.6.3.

(4) Encased of filled composite columns should conform to 12.8.7.

(5) Reinforced concrete columns, should conform to 10.6.

12.12.6 Beams to column connections

(1) Beam-to-column connections should be designed according to 11.12.6 and Annex E for joints of
frames equipped with buckling restrained bracings.

(2) In composite frames with buckling-restrained bracings and composite steel beams with slab or
concrete-encased composite beams, 12.10.5(2) should be applied.

12.12.7 Brace connections

(1) 11.12.7 should be applied.

(2) In composite frames with buckling-restrained bracings and composite steel beams with slab or
concrete-encased composite beams, 11.11.7(2) should be applied with MRd calculated according to 12.8.6.2
and 12.8.6.3, whichever is applicable.

12.12.8 Column base joints

(1) 11.12.8 and Annex H should be applied.

12.13 Design and detailing rules for composite dual frames in DC2 and DC3
12.13.1 Design criteria

(1) In composite dual frames with both composite moment resisting frames and/or composite frames
with concentric, eccentric or buckling-restrained bracings acting in the same loading direction, the horizontal
forces should be distributed between the different frames according to their lateral stiffness.

(2) The composite moment resisting frames should contribute with at least 25% to the total lateral
resistance.

(3) In composite dual frames, the component moment resisting frames should conform to 12.9.

(4) In composite dual frames, the composite frames with concentric, eccentric or buckling-restrained
bracings should conform 12.10, 12.11 and 12.12, respectively.

(5) 11.13.1(4) should be applied.

12.14 Design and detailing rules for structural wall systems made of reinforced concrete
shear walls composite with structural steel elements in DC2 and DC3
12.14.1 Design criteria

(1) The provisions in 12.14.1 should be applied to composite structural wall systems defined in 12.4.1g.

(2) Type 1 and Type 2 composite structural systems should be designed to behave as shear walls and
dissipate energy in the vertical steel sections and in the vertical reinforcement. The vertical fully encased or
partially encased structural steel cross sections should act as boundary elements of the reinforced concrete

194
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

wall or the reinforced concrete infill panels. The infills should be tied to the boundary elements to prevent
separation and to contribute to the lateral resistance of the shear wall.

(3) The design action effects in walls should conform to 10.8.2.

(4) In Type 1 composite structural wall systems, the storey shear forces should be carried by horizontal
shear in the wall and in the interface between the wall and beams.

(5) Type 3 composite structural wall systems should be designed to dissipate energy in the shear walls
and in the coupling beams.

12.14.2 Analysis

(1) Concrete wall cross section properties should conform to 10 and 12.5.

(2) In Type 1 and 2 composite structural systems, the analysis should be made by assuming that the
seismic action effects are represented by axial forces only in the vertical boundary elements of the composite
structural system. The axial forces should be calculated by assuming that the shear forces are carried by the
reinforced concrete wall acting composedly with the steel profiles. The entire gravity and overturning forces
should be carried by the shear wall acting composedly with the vertical boundary elements.

(3) In Type 3 composite structural systems, if composite coupling beams are used, 12.9.2(2) and
12.9.2(3) should be applied.

12.14.3 Detailing rules for composite walls in DC2

(1) The reinforced concrete infill panels in Type 1 and the reinforced concrete walls in Types 2 and 3
should conform to the provisions of 10.8 for ductile walls.

(2) The ductility class of partially encased structural steel cross sections used as boundary elements in
reinforced concrete panels should comply with Table 12.4, based on the assumed behaviour factor.

(3) Fully encased structural steel cross sections used as boundary elements in reinforced concrete panels
should be designed in accordance with 12.8.7.1 and 12.8.7.2.

(4) Partially encased structural steel cross sections used as boundary elements of reinforced concrete
panels should be designed in accordance with 12.8.7.1 and 12.8.7.3.

(5) Headed shear connectors or tie reinforcement (welded to the steel members or anchored through
holes in the steel members or anchored around the steel member) should be provided to transfer vertical and
horizontal shear forces between the structural steel of the boundary elements and the reinforced concrete.

12.14.4 Detailing rules for coupling beams in DC2

(1) Coupling beams should have an embedment length into the reinforced concrete wall sufficient to
resist the most adverse combination of moment and shear generated by the bending and shear resistance of
the coupling beam. The embedment length le should begin inside the first layer of the confining reinforcement
in the wall boundary member (see Figure 12.5). The embedment length le should not be smaller than 1,5 times
the depth of the coupling beam.

(2) The design of beam to wall connections should conform to 12.8.8.

(3) The vertical wall reinforcement, defined in Annex G (see G.4.8), with design axial resistance equal
to the shear resistance of the coupling beam, should be placed over the embedment length of the coupling

195
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

beam with two-thirds of the steel located over the first half of the embedment length. This wall reinforcement
should extend to a distance of at least one anchorage length above and below the flanges of the coupling beam.
Vertical reinforcement placed for other purposes, such as for vertical boundary elements, may be part of the
required vertical reinforcement.

(4) Transverse reinforcement should conform to 12.8.6.3 and 12.8.7.2 and 12.8.7.3.

Key
A Additional wall reinforcement at embedment of steel beam;
B Steel coupling beam;
C Face bearing plate
Figure 12.5 — Details for coupling beam framing into a wall in DC2 or DC3

12.14.5 Additional detailing rules for DC3

(1) Transverse reinforcement should confine the concrete of composite boundary elements, either
partially or fully encased. It should extend to a distance of 2h into the concrete walls where h is the depth of
the boundary element in the plane of the wall as shown in Figure 12.6.

(2) The transverse reinforcement should be placed over a height hcr of the wall as given in 10.8.

(3) The transverse reinforcement should comply with 12.8.7.1. For fully encased steel cross sections
12.8.7.2 should be applied. For partially encased steel cross sections 12.8.7.3 should be applied.

(4) The coupling beam design should comply with 12.11.3, 12.11.5 and 12.11.6, for links in composite
frames with eccentric bracings.

(a) Partially encased composite (b) Fully encased composite

Key
A Bars welded to column;
B Transverse reinforcement;

196
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

C Shear connectors;
D Cross tie
Figure 12.6 — Transverse reinforcement details for partially and fully encased composite boundary
elements in DC3

12.15 Composite diaphragms, chords and collectors

12.15.1 General

(1) The design of floor diaphragms, chords and collectors should conform to 6.2.8.

(2) 11.17 should be applied.

12.16 Transfer level: Design for DC2 and DC3

(1) 11.18 should be applied.

(2) Composite floor and roof slab diaphragms should meet a) and b):

Load transfer should be provided through proper structural details between the diaphragm and boundary
members, collector elements, and elements of the horizontal system.

The in-plane shear strength of composite diaphragms and concrete slab on steel deck diaphragms should
be taken as the nominal shear strength of the concrete above the top of the steel deck ribs. The diaphragm
nominal shear strength may also be determined by in-plane shear tests of concrete-filled diaphragms.

12.17 Checking of design and construction

(1) 11.19 should be applied.

197
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

13 SPECIFIC RULES FOR TIMBER BUILDINGS

13.1 Scope

13 should be applied to the design and the verification of timber buildings, in seismic regions.

13 should be applied as a complement to EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014.

13.2 Basis of design

13.2.1 Design concepts

(1) Earthquake-resistant timber buildings should be designed in accordance with EN 1998-1-1:2019,

4.4.2(3) aiming at either a) or b):

Low-dissipative structural behaviour (DC1);

High (DC3)- or Moderate (DC2)-dissipative structural behaviour.

(2) In concept a) of (1), when using the reduced spectrum defined in EN 1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.1, the
behaviour factor components qD and qR should be taken equal to 1,0. The behaviour factor component qS
should be taken equal to 1,5.

(3) In concept a) of (1), (9), 13.2.2(2), 13.3.2(1), 13.3.2(2), 13.4.1, 13.4.4, 13.5, 13.6, 13.15 and 13.17
should be applied. In addition, also the General Rules and Detailing Rules for each structural type described in
13.7 to 13.14 should be applied.

(4) In concept b) of (1), when using the reduced spectrum defined in EN 1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.1, for a
force-based analysis, the behaviour factor components qD and qR may be taken greater than 1,0. The values of
qD and qR should depend on the ductility class and the structural type (see 13.4).

(5) In concept b) of (1), dissipative zones should be located in joints and connections or outside the joints
and connections in purposely developed energy dissipation systems.

(6) If dissipative zones are located in joints and connections, the energy dissipation should take place by
flexural yielding of metal fasteners, whereas the timber members themselves should be designed to remain
elastic.

(7) In DC2 and DC3, a) and b) should be applied:

Timber or wood-based elements, glued joints and connections with axially-loaded fasteners according to
13.4.2(14) should be designed as non-dissipative;

Carpentry connections as defined in 3.1.5 should be designed as non-dissipative unless they comply with
13.4.3(5) and provide sufficient energy dissipation capacity, according to 13.3.1(5).

(8) If dissipative zones are located in energy dissipation systems, both the timber members and the
connections should be regarded as behaving elastically and should be capacity designed according to EN 1998-
1-1:2019, 4.4.2(2), in relation to the resistance of the energy dissipation systems. The design should be carried
out according to EN 1998-1-1:2019, 6.8, and EN 1998-1-2:2019, 9 and Annex D, rather than to 13.4.

(9) Horizontal diaphragms should be connected to the underlying primary and secondary (see 3.1.27)
members to restrain them in- and out-of-plane and transfer the seismic action.

198
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

13.2.2 Safety verifications

(1) For verifications of DC2 and DC3 design at SD Limit State, the design strength of dissipative zones
should be calculated by Formula (13.1).

𝐹 , =𝑘 𝑘 ,
with the limitation 𝑘 ≤1 (13.1)

where:

FRd,d is the design value of the strength of the dissipative zones;

kdeg is the strength reduction factor due to degradation under cyclic loading, given in 13.3.1(2);

kmod is the modification factor for duration of load and moisture content according to EN 1995-1-1:2004,
3.1.3, and A2:2014;

FRk,d is the characteristic value of the strength of the dissipative zones, according to EN 1995-1-1 and
A2:2014;

γM is the material partial factor.

(2) The design strength of the non-dissipative components of DC2 and DC3 design and of all members of
DC1 design should be calculated as given by Formula (13.2).

𝐹 , =𝑘 ,
(13.2)

where:

FRd,b is the design value of the strength of the non-dissipative components;

FRk,b is the characteristic value of the strength of the non-dissipative components, according to EN 1995-1-
1:2004 and A2:2014;

γM is the material partial factor.

NOTE The values of M are:

 For DC1, those given in EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014 for transient design situations,
 For DC2 and DC3, those given in EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014 for accidental design situations,
unless the National Annex gives different values for use in a Country.

13.3 Materials
13.3.1 Mechanical properties of dissipative zones

(1) The mechanical properties of dissipative zones for use in seismic design should be determined by
tests either on a single timber connection (e.g. a set of one or more fasteners connecting at least two timber
and/or metal elements), a 2D- or 3D-nailing plate (e.g. a hold-down, foundation tie-down, angle bracket, shear
plate, tie-down, or a 2D shear plate connecting a timber member with one or more members), a timber joint
(e.g. the junction of two or more members involving one or more timber connections and/or 2D- or 3D-nailing
plates), or on a part of a structure (a subassembly, e.g. a shear wall or a portal frame) in accordance with EN
12512, assuming a limit value of the strength impairment factor φimp defined in (3) not greater than 0,3 and a

199
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

limit value of the strength reduction factor due to degradation under cyclic loading kdeg defined in (4) not
smaller than 0,8. Testing should be representative of the design intent (e.g. loading, restraints, etc.).

(2) The strength reduction factor due to degradation under cyclic loading kdeg should be taken equal to
0,80. Greater values of kdeg may be used only if derived, as defined in (4), from tests performed according to
EN 12512 and EN 26891, with the strength at the first load cycle calculated at the ultimate deformation δu
corresponding to the value of the ductility μ (see 3.1.10) from Table 13.3, and a limit value of φimp defined in
(3) not greater than 0,3.

(3) The strength impairment factor φimp in a cyclic test performed in accordance with EN 12512 should
be determined as the ratio of the force reduction ΔF1-3=F1-F3 from the first to the third cycle of the same
deformation amplitude δ (impairment of strength), and the force at the first cycle F1.

(4) The strength reduction factor due to degradation under cyclic loading kdeg should be determined in
accordance with EN 12512 by applying a loading protocol with three reversed cyclic loads at the same target
deformation, and by increasing the target deformation. The value of kdeg should then be calculated as the ratio
of the strength at the first load cycle at the ultimate deformation δu determined according to EN 12512 and
the maximum load obtained from monotonic tests performed according to EN 26891.

(5) The energy dissipation of a carpentry connection may be considered as sufficient if a displacement
ductility μ of 2 as defined in EN 12512 is attained in cyclic tests performed according to EN 12512 with a limit
value of kdeg defined in (4) not lower than 0,8 and a limit value of φimp defined in (3) not greater than 0,3.

13.3.2 Material properties

(1) The thickness of cross laminated timber and glue-laminated timber (glulam) panels should be not
smaller than 60 mm.

(2) Glulam, Solid Wood Panels (SWP) and LVL panels may be used in shear walls, floor and roof
diaphragms providing that measures are taken in order to limit in-plane shrinkage in the direction
perpendicular to face grain. In floor and roof diaphragms the designer should consider the different stiffness
of glulam, SWP and LVL in both in-plane directions.

(3) Sheathing material in the dissipative zones should provide appropriate low-cycle fatigue behaviour.

(4) The minimum requirements of sheathing material to achieve (3) are the following:

Particleboard-sheathing should comply with EN 312, be at least 12 mm thick and have a characteristic
density of at least 550 kg/m3;

Plywood-sheathing should comply with EN 636, be at least 9 mm thick, have at least 5 layers and have a
characteristic density of at least 450 kg/m3;

Fibreboard-sheathing should comply with EN 622, be at least 12 mm thick and have a characteristic
density of at least 550 kg/m3;

Oriented Strand Board (OSB) sheathing should comply with EN 300, be at least 12 mm thick and have a
characteristic density of at least 550 kg/m3;

Gypsum Fibre board (GF) sheathing should comply with EN 15283-2, be at least 12 mm thick and have a
characteristic density of at least 1000 kg/m3;

Densified Veneer Wood sheathing should comply with EN 61061-3-1 and have a characteristic density of
at least 1200 kg/m3;

200
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Solid wood panel (SWP) sheathing should comply with EN 13353, have at least 3 layers and have a
characteristic density of at least 400 kg/m3;

For LVL sheathing panels, only LVL-C complying with EN 14279 and EN 14374 with a characteristic
density of at least 450 kg/m3 should be used.

(5) Steel material for connections in dissipative zones should conform to a) to d):

Steel plate elements should comply with EN 1993-1-1, 3, and be designed to remain elastic according to
EN 1993-1-1, 6, and EN 1993-1-8, 3.10;

Fasteners should belong to low cycle ductility classes S2 and S3 according to EN 14592, 5.5, for Ductility
Classes DC2 and DC3 structures, respectively;

Screws and annular ringed shank nails used in steel-to-timber connections should be checked by the
manufacturer to ensure that the fastener head does not shear off during cyclic tests performed according
to EN 12512 for the ductility ratios in Table 13.3;

The ratio between the mean value of the mechanical properties defined according to EN 14592 and the
values declared by the manufacturer should not exceed 1,2 for all metal fasteners.

13.4 Structural types, behaviour factors, capacity design rules and limits of seismic action
13.4.1 Structural types

(1) Buildings with a primary timber structure should be classified into one of the structural types defined
in Table 13.1.

Table 13.1 — Timber structural types and and examples of structures

Examples of structural types* Timber structural types

a) Cross laminated timber structures**

Cross laminated timber structures are those where the primary

structure (see 3.1.23) is composed of shear walls made of cross
laminated timber panels which follow the provision of 13.3.2(1). Cross
laminated timber structures should be designed according to 13.7.

b) Light-frame structures

Light-frame structures are those where the primary structure is

composed of shear walls made of timber frames to which a wood-based
panel (e.g. plywood or OSB) or other type of sheathing material is
connected. Light-frame structures should be designed according to 13.8.
b1) With fully anchored walls.
b2) With partially anchored walls.

201
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

c) Log structures

Log structures are those where the primary structure is composed by the
superposition of rectangular or round solid or glulam timber elements
(‘logs’), prefabricated with carpentry connections at their ends and with
upper and lower grooves.
Log structures should be designed according to 13.9.

d) Moment-resisting frame structures

Moment-resisting frame structures are those where the primay

structure is composed of frames made by timber elements with semi-
rigid (as defined in 3.1.28) moment-transmitting joints between the
members, achieved with mechanical fasteners. Moment-resisting frames
structures should be designed according to 13.10.

e) Braced frame structures with dowel-type connections

Braced frame structures with dowel-type connections are those

consisting of timber columns and beams, where the primary structure is
composed of timber diagonal bracings, with all pin-jointed dowel-type
connections (as defined in 3.1.9). Braced frame structures with dowel-
type connections should be designed according to 13.11.

f) Vertical cantilever structures**

Vertical cantilever structures are those where the primary structure is

composed of vertically continuous cantilever glulam, LVL or cross
laminated timber walls or columns without any horizontal joints.
Vertical cantilever structures should be designed according to 13.12.

g) Braced frame structures with carpentry connections and

masonry infill

Braced frame structures with carpentry connections are those consisting

of timber columns and beams, where the primary structure is composed
of vertical timber bracing with compression-only carpentry connections
and masonry infill. Braced frame structures with carpentry connections
and masonry infill should be designed according to 13.13.

h) Braced frame structures with carpentry connections

Braced frame structures with carpentry connections are those consisting

of timber columns and beams, where the primary structure is composed
of vertical timber bracing with compression-only carpentry connections.
Braced frame structures with carpentry connections should be designed
according to 13.14 as non-dissipative systems.

202
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

i) Two-pin and three-pin arches, three-pin frames and dome

structures.

Structures composed by two-pin and three-pin timber arches, three-pin

timber frames and timber dome structures should be designed as non-
dissipative systems.

j) Large span timber truss portal frame structures.

Large span truss portal frame structures are those consisting of timber
trusses with semi-rigid moment-transmitting joints between the chords
and the columns, forming a moment frame. Large span truss portal frame
structures should be designed as non-dissipative systems.

*The drawings in Table 13.1 depict a part of a structure. Different number of storeys and structural layout may be used.
**Cross laminated timber structures can fall into either category a) or f) depending on whether the shear walls have
heights equal to one inter-storey height (platform frame construction – see 3.1.20) or more (balloon frame construction
– see 3.1.2).

(2) The primary structure (see 3.1.23) should be made of shear walls, cantilever walls, moment-resisting
frames or braced frames, which should be structurally continuous from the base of the timber part of the
building to the roof (Figure 13.1 A) or an intermediate level (Figure 13.1 B). If they are interrupted below an
intermediate level (Figure 13.1 C), 6.2.11 and 13.16 should be applied for design to DC2 and DC3.

(3) Partitions as defined in 3.1.18 and secondary members should be detailed not to attract lateral load,
following 5.1.3(1) and complying with rules for ancillary elements in 7.

Key
A Primary structure with all shear walls structurally continuous from the foundation to the roof.
B Primary structure with part of the shear walls structurally continuous from the foundation to the roof and part of the shear
walls interrupted at the top storey.
C Primary structure with part of the shear walls interrupted below the second and third storey.
1 Structural wall
2 Lintel
3 Opening
4 Parapet

Figure 13.1 — Example of primary structure with shear walls

203
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(4) Buildings with a primary timber structure other than those listed in (1) may be used, provided that
either they are designed in DC1, or, for a design as high- (DC3) or moderate- (DC2) dissipative behaviour, the
properties of both dissipative zones (timber connections, 2D- or 3D-nailing plates, or timber joints) and
subassemblies (e.g. shear walls, portal frames, etc.) are determined by cyclic tests in accordance with EN
12512 and 13.3.1(1), and with EN 1990, Annex D.

13.4.2 Behaviour factors

(1) For timber buildings, which are regular in elevation in accordance with 4.4.4.2 and are assigned to
DC2 or DC3, the default values of the component qD of the behaviour factor q should be taken from Table 13.2
provided that either (4), (7), (12) or (13) is satisfied, and provided that the capacity design rules defined in
13.4.3 for all structural types and in 13.7 to 13.13 for each structural type are also satisfied. The values of q
are obtained according to EN 1998-1-1, 6.4.1(1) as the product of the values of qD, qR and qS, with qS = 1,5.

(2) The default values of qR listed in Table 13.2 for design to DC2 and DC3 should be applied to buildings
regular in elevation with a minimum of three independent primary bracings (shear walls, cantilever walls,
moment-resisting frames or braced frames) as defined in 3.1.24 in each principal direction. If this condition
is not met, qR should be taken equal to 1,0 unless the primary bracings are moment-resisting frames
(structural type d) and these are at least in number of two in each principal direction.

Table 13.2 — Default values of the behaviour factors q for buildings regular in elevation with
maximum values of the seismic action index Sδ for design in DC1
Maximum Ductility class
Sδ for
Structural type design in DC1 DC2 DC3
DC1
[m/s2] q qD qR q qD qR q
a) Cross laminated timber structures 4,0 1,5 1,1 1,21 2,0 1,55 1,3 3,0
b) Light-frame structures
b1) With fully anchored walls 5,0 1,5 1,5 1,1 2,5 2,4 1,1 4,0
b2) With partially anchored walls 3,0 1,5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Log structures 4,0 1,5 1,2 1,1 2,0 N/A N/A N/A
Moment-resisting frames structures
d1) Single-storey 4,0 1,5 1,3 1,1 2,1 2,0 1,1 3,3
d2) Multi-storey, one-bay 4,0 1,5 1,3 1,2 2,3 2,0 1,2 3,6
d3) Multi-storey, multi-bay 4,0 1,5 1,3 1,3 2,5 2,0 1,3 3,9
Braced frame structures with dowel-
4,0 1,5 1,3 1,0 2,0 N/A N/A N/A
type connections
Vertical cantilever structures 4,0 1,5 1,1 1,1 2,0 N/A N/A N/A
Braced frame structures with carpentry
4,0 1,5 1,2 1,1 2,0 N/A N/A N/A
connections and masonry infill
h) Braced frame structures with carpentry
3,0 1,5* N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
connections
i) Two-pin and three-pin timber arches,
three-pin timber frames and timber 3,0 1,5* N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
dome structures
j) Large span timber truss portal frame
3,0 1,5* N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
structures.
N/A: Not Applicable
*for these systems, according to EN1998-1-1, 4.1(7), with values of the seismic action index Sδ greater than the limits in
Table 13.2, a behaviour factor q = 1 may be used.

204
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) The behaviour factor component qR evaluated through an explicit calculation according to 5.3.2(6)
should not exceed the default values in Table 13.2 by more than 10%.

(4) The dissipative zones, specified for each structural type designed in DC2 and DC3, should attain a
ductility not smaller than the values in Table 13.3 in cyclic tests performed according to EN 12512, with a
value of kdeg not smaller than 0,8 and of φimp not greater than 0,3.

(5) For each structural type designed in DC2 and DC3, (4) should be fulfilled by at least one type of
dissipative sub-assembly/joint/2D- or 3D-nailing plate/connection in Table 13.3.

(6) In buildings with a primary timber structure listed in 13.4.1(1) where the energy dissipation does
not take place by flexural yielding of metal fasteners but occurs in the dissipative zones listed in 13.7 to 13.14
made with alternative systems, the default values of the behaviour factors listed in Table 13.2 for design to
DC2 and DC3 may be used provided that (4) applies. In this case, (7), (12) and (13) shall not be used.

(7) For each structural type designed in DC2 and DC3, the default values of the behaviour factor q may
be taken from Table 13.2 in all of the following cases a) to e), provided that (8) to (11) are also satisfied:

In the dissipative zones of all DC2 structural types.

In the dissipative zones of DC3 cross laminated timber systems with segmented walls according to 13.7.3.

In the sheathing-to-framing staple connection of DC2 light-frame shear walls according to 13.8.2, when a
ductile mechanism with at least one flexural plastic hinge in the mechanical fasteners is attained in the
seismic design situation.

In the nailed connections between the sheathing material and timber frame in DC3 light-frame shear walls
according to 13.8.3, when a ductile mechanism with at least one flexural plastic hinge in the nail (or
screw) is attained in the seismic design situation.

In the dissipative zones of all other DC3 structural types, when a ductile mechanism with at least two
flexural plastic hinges in the mechanical fasteners is attained in the seismic design situation.

(8) For timber-to-timber and panel-to-timber connections, failure modes (a), (b) and (c) for fasteners in
single shear as given in EN 1995-1-1:2004, 8.2.2(1), and A2:2014, and failure modes (g) and (h) for fasteners
in double shear, should be avoided by satisfying Formula (13.5).

(9) For steel-to-timber connections, failure modes (a), (c) for fasteners in single shear as given in EN
1995-1-1:2004, 8.2.3(3), and A2:2014, and failure modes (f), (j) and (l) for fasteners in double shear, should
be avoided by satisfying Formula (13.5).

(10) Brittle failure modes like splitting, shear plug, tear out and tensile fracture of wood in the connection
regions should be avoided by satisfying condition given by Formula (13.4).

(11) Connections with multiple fasteners in dissipative zones should be reinforced to avoid the brittle
failure mechanisms in (10).

(12) As an alternative to (7), for each structural type designed in DC3, the default values of the behaviour
factor q may be taken from Table 13.2, if the following conditions a) to d) are all satisfied:

a) The characteristic ultimate tensile strength of the metal fastener fu,k is not greater than 450 MPa for bolts
and dowels in DC2 and DC3, 800 MPa for nails and screws in DC2 and DC3, 1000 MPa for staples in DC2.

205
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

b) In doweled, bolted and nailed timber-to-timber and steel-to-timber connections, the thickness of the
timber connected members is not smaller than 10dfa and the fastener diameter dfa not greater than 12
mm.

c) In shear walls of light-frame structure, the sheathing material is wood-based with a thickness not smaller
than 4dfa, and the nail diameter dfa not greater than 3,1 mm.

d) (10) and (11) are satisfied.

(13) In cases where b) and c) in (12) are not met, the dissipative zones of all structural types may be
considered as belonging to DC2 and the default values of the behaviour factor q may be taken from Table 13.2,
provided a) and d) in (12) is satisfied and the member thickness is not smaller than 8d and 3d for cases b) and
c) respectively. This provision may also be applied to light-frame walls with gypsum fibre boards with stapled
connections and particle boards with stapled connections.

Table 13.3 — Minimum required ductility μ as defined in EN 12512 of dissipative zones tested
accordingly
Structural type Dissipative sub-assembly/joint/2D- Type of μ μ
or 3D-nailing plate/connection ductility
DC2 DC3
a) Cross laminated timber structures Shear wall* Displacement 1,8 2,7
Hold-downs, tie-downs, foundation Displacement 1,8 1,8
tie-downs, angle brackets, shear plate
Screwed wall panel-to-panel joints Displacement - 3,5
b) Light-frame structures Shear wall* Displacement 2,2 3,5
Connection (nail/screw/staple) Displacement 3,5 5,5
c) Log structures Shear wall* Displacement 1,4 -
d) Moment-resisting frames Portal Frame* Displacement 2,0 3,0
Beam-column joint Rotational 4,0 7,0
e) Braced frame structures with dowel- Braced Frame* Displacement 1,4 -
type connections
f) Vertical cantilever structures Shear wall* Displacement 2,0 -
g) Braced frame structures with Shear wall* Displacement 1,4 -
carpentry connections and masonry infill

*The values provided refer to the system ductility of the sub-assembly, taking into account the ductility of all the
individual connections and components.
(14) Connections made of dowel-type fasteners transferring load mainly via axial resistance (Figure 13.2
A and B) should not be considered as dissipative.

(15) Dowel-type fasteners in dissipative zones should be perpendicular to the shear force in the
connection (Fig. 13.2 C).

(16) The behaviour factor component qD of a hybrid building where the primary structure is made with a
combination of cross laminated timber and fully anchored light-frame walls at the same level may be
calculated by Formula (13.3) instead of 5.3.2(4).

𝑞 , = 𝑞 , −𝑞 , (1 − 𝑘 )+𝑞 , (13.3)

206
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

where:

qD,Hyb is the value of component qD of the behaviour factor q for the hybrid primary structure;

qD,LTF is the default value for the Ductility Class of component qD for the light-Frame primary
structure;

qD,CL is the default value for the Ductility Class of component qD for the cross laminated timber
primary structure;

kstif = min kstif,I for i = 1,...,Ns is the minimum value of the ratio between the horizontal stiffness of the cross
laminated timber walls and the total horizontal stiffness of the hybrid primary structure in
each main direction at the ith storey;

Ns is the number of storeys of the building.

Key
A and B Connection with fasteners inserted inclined with respect to the direction of the shear force, transferring most of the
load via axial resistance, which should not be considered as dissipative.
C Connection with fasteners inserted perpendicular with respect to the direction of the shear force, transferring most of
the load via shear resistance, which may be considered dissipative.
1 Direction of the shear force being transferred
2 Fasteners inclined with respect to the direction of the shear force being transferred
3 Fasteners perpendicular to the direction of the shear force being transferred

Figure 13.2 — Examples of non-dissipative and dissipative connections

13.4.3 Capacity design rules common to all dissipative structural types

(1)P To ensure yielding of the dissipative zones, all non-dissipative members and connections in DC2 or
DC3 structures shall be capacity designed according to (2) and either (4) or (5).

207
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) For DC2 and DC3 design of the structural types in Table 13.2, the design strength FRd,b of the brittle
components should satisfy Formula (13.4).

𝐹 , ≤𝐹 , with the limitation 𝑘 ≤1 (13.4)

where:

Rd is the overstrength factor, given in Table 13.4;

kdeg is the strength reduction factor defined in 13.3.1(4), for which the value in 13.3.1(2) should
be used;

FRd,d is the design strength of the ductile component, calculated according to 13.2.2(1);

FRd,b is the design strength of the brittle component, calculated according to 13.2.2(2).

(3) In DC2, the design forces in the non-dissipative connections, elements and anchorages to the
foundation calculated with Formula (13.4) need not be taken as greater than the values from an analysis made
considering a behaviour factor 𝑞 equal to 1.

(4) If less ductile failure modes may occur according to EN 1995-1-1:2004, 8.2, and A2:2014 in the
dowel-type metal fasteners of the dissipative zones, the less ductile failure modes should be designed with a
safety margin with respect to the selected ductile failure mode providing energy dissipation according to
Formula (13.5).

𝛾 𝐹 , , ≤𝐹 , , (13.5)

where:

SM is the safety margin coefficient, assumed equal to 1,2;

Fv,Rk,d is the characteristic strength of the selected ductile failure mode providing energy dissipation,
according to EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014;

Fv,Rk,nd is the characteristic strength of the less ductile failure mode, according to EN 1995-1-1:2004 and
A2:2014.

NOTE An example of a dissipative zone with dowel-type metal fasteners with more possible failure modes is a
timber-to-timber connection with failure mechanisms characterised by only timber embedment (less ductile and less
dissipative) (modes (a), (b) and (c) in EN 1995-1-1:2004, 8.2.2(1), and A2:2014) or by one or two flexural plastic hinges
in the dowel (more ductile and more dissipative) (modes (d), (e) and (f)).

(5) Formula (13.5) may be applied also to dissipative carpentry connections designed to DC2 to ensure
non-ductile failure modes (e.g. longitudinal shear and tension perpendicular to grain) have sufficient
overstrength with respect to the selected ductile one (compression). In this case, SM should be assumed equal
to 1,3.

(6) Additional capacity design rules are given in 13.7 to 13.14 for the different structural types.

13.4.4 Limits of seismic action for design to DC1

(1) For each structural type listed in 13.4.1(1), design to DC1 should not be made above levels of the
seismicity index Sδ given in Table 13.2.

208
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) For structural types alternative to those listed in 13.4.1(1) in accordance with 13.4.1(4), design to
DC1 should not be made above level of the seismicity index Sδ of 3,0 [m/s2].

(3) As an exception to (1), structural types h), i) and j) may be designed to DC1 for values of the seismic
action index Sδ greater than the limits in Table 13.2, according to EN1998-1-1, 4.1(7), using a value of the
behaviour factor q = 1.

Table 13.4 — Values of the overstrength factors Rd to be used in capacity design
Capacity Brittle/non-dissipative failure mode Overstrength Formula
design at factor Rd No.
Failure of the timber cross-section by shear, fracture in
tension, etc. (EN 1995-1-1:2004, 6, and A2:2014), failure by
1,6* (13.4)
Connection block shear (EN 1995-1-1:2004, Annex A, and A2:2014),
and 2D- or failure by plug shear, failure by splitting
3D- nailing Tensile (1993-1-1:2005, 6.2.3) and shear (1993-1-1:2005,
plate level 6.2.6) failure of the steel plates (angle brackets, hold-
1,6* (13.4)
downs, tie-downs, etc.), tensile (1993-1-8:2005, 3.6) and
pull-through failure of anchor bolts or screws
(13.7)
Failure of the non-dissipative components at the wall and
Wall and (13.10)
building level for each dissipative structural type,
building 1,6* (13.11)
formation of a soft-storey mechanism as opposed to a
level (13.15)
global failure mechanism
(13.16)

*For high ductility moment-resisting frames with expanded tube fasteners and Densified Veneer Wood
(according to 13.10.3(2)P) and log structures, the value of Rd may be reduced to 1,3.

13.5 Structural analysis

(1) The stiffness of the semi-rigid joints (as defined in 3.1.28) should be taken into account in the analysis.

(2) The value of slip modulus Kser,c of the connections measured in cyclic tests according to EN 12512
should be used. If experimental values of Kser,c are not available, the slip modulus Kser at serviceability limit
state, calculated according to EN 1995-1-1:2004, 7.1, and A2:2014 may be used.

(3) Two different axial stiffnesses, in compression and tension, should be used for uplift-restraining 2D-
and 3D-nailing plates (hold-downs, tie-downs, foundation tie-downs, shear plates). If experimental values are
not available, these nailing plates may be considered as rigid in compression to represent the direct bearing
of the wall on the support.

(4) Timber floor and roof diaphragms designed according to EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014, and EN
1998-1-2 and supported by a primary timber structure may be modelled as rigidin plane if conditions a) and
either b), c) or d) are satisfied:

Their openings do not markedly affect the overall in-plane rigidity of the floor: in a floor with a compact
shape, namely a convex shape where the ratio between the maximum dimensions in the two principal
directions as defined in 3.1.21 does not exceed 2,0, compact openings of less than 10% of the floor area
which are not located along the perimeter may be assumed not to markedly affect the overall in-plane
rigidity.

For all structural types in DC1, the diaphragm and its connections should be designed to transfer the in-
plane seismic shear to the primary structure according to 6.2.8 using an ovestrength factors d of 1,5
instead of the values provided in Table 6.1.

209
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

For all structural types other than cross laminated timber and light-frame structures in DC2 and DC3, the
diaphragm and its connections should be designed to transfer the in-plane seismic shear to the primary
structure according to 6.2.8 using an ovestrength factors d of 2,0 instead of the values provided in Table
6.1.

For cross laminated timber and light-frame structures in DC2 and DC3, the diaphragm and its connections
should be designed to transfer the in-plane seismic shear to the primary structure according to Formula
(13.7).

(5) Timber-concrete composite floor and roof diaphragms designed according to TC 250 WI SC5.T2, EN
1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014, and EN 1998-1-2 may be considered as in-plane rigid if both conditions a) to b)
are met:

Their openings do not significantly affect the overall in-plane rigidity of the floors: in a floor with a
compact shape according to (4), compact openings of less than 20% of the floor area may be assumed not
to markedly affect the overall in-plane rigidity.

The concrete topping should be at least 50 mm thick and should be connected to all primary members as
defined in 3.1.22.

(6) As a simplification of 5.3.3(3), for cross laminated timber and light-frame buildings, the fundamental
period of vibration of the building in a principal direction, T1,est, may be calculated by Formula (13.6).

𝑇, ≤ 0,05 × 𝐻 (13.6)

where Hb is the height of the building, in [m], measured from the foundation or from the top of a rigid
basement.

(7) The fundamental period T1 calculated via numerical and analytical modelling in accordance with
5.3.3(3) should not be taken longer than 2T1,est, where T1,est is the estimate from Formula (13.6).

(8) Non-linear behaviour of timber components may be considered in the analysis only if it has been
demonstrated by experimental tests performed in accordance with EN 12512.

(9) In non-linear static analysis performed according to EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.5 and EN1998-1-2:2019,
Annex L, timber components and mechanical connections or devices characterised by a brittle failure should
be modelled as elastic elements, and ductile components and connections as non-linear elements with mean
values of mechanical properties.

(10) The values of the ultimate deformation δu and yield deformation δy of connections, 2D- and 3D-nailing
plates, joints and subassemblies for non-linear static analysis should be obtained from Annex L by the trilinear
curve determined from tests carried out according to EN 12512. If experimental results are not available, the
trilinear curve may be determined by Formulas (L.4) to (L.9).

(11) In non-linear static analysis, the design deformations δNC and δSD for Near Collapse and Significant
Damage Limit States should be obtained from Annex L – Formula (L.3) and (L.2) respectively.

13.6 Verification of limit states

13.6.1 General

(1) The strength values of the timber material and of the connections should be determined taking into
account the kmod-values for instantaneous loading in accordance with EN 1995-1-1:2004, 3.1.3 and A2:2014.

210
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

13.6.2 Limitation of interstorey drift at Significant Damage limit state

(1) For all ductility classes, the interstorey drift at SD limit state should be limited to:

a) dr,SD ≤ 0,025 hs for log structures;

b) dr,SD ≤ 0,020 hs for moment-resisting frames;

c) dr,SD ≤ 0,015 hs for all other structural types;

where:

dr,SD is as given in 6.2.5;

hs is the inter-storey height.

13.6.3 Non-linear static analysis

(1) In non-linear static analysis, brittle components modelled as elastic should be verified at Significant
Damage by comparing the generalised stresses corresponding to the target displacement d*t of the equivalent
SDOF model in EN 1998-1-1:2019, 6.5.4 with the design resistance defined in 13.2.2(2), Formula (13.2).
Ductile components, modelled as non-linear, should be verified by comparing the deformation (displacement
or rotation) obtained by the analysis at the target displacement d*t with the design deformation dd obtained
at Significant Damage in accordance with 13.5(10) and 13.5(11).

13.7 Rules for cross laminated timber structures

13.7.1 General rules

(1) The primary structure should be made of cross laminated timber panels according to 13.3.2(1).
Alternatively, other types of solid wood panels as defined in 13.3.2(2) may be used, provided that 13.4.1(4)
is satisfied.

(2) The secondary structure should be made of either cross laminated timber panels, or other types of
solid wood panels as defined in 13.3.2(2). Post-and-beam members may also be used.

(3) The joint of the walls to the foundation should comply with conditions a) to e):

It should be made by means of 2D- or 3D-nailing plates (e.g. hold-downs, foundation tie-downs, angle
brackets, shear plates) and metal fasteners (e.g. anchoring bolts, nails and screws, etc.).

It should prevent uplift and sliding of the walls.

Connections preventing uplift (hold-downs or foundation tie-downs) should be placed at wall ends,
adjacent to door openings in wall panels, and at opening ends either: when the wall is made by separate
panel elements (i.e. wall segments connected with lintels and parapets), or when the ratio between the
area of the window opening and the area of the wall panel exceeds 0,50.

Shear connection (shear plates, angle brackets, anchoring bolts, nails and screws, etc.) should be
distributed uniformly along the wall width (Figure 13.3).

Hold-downs, foundation tie-down, shear plates and angle brackets should be connected to the cross
laminated timber panels using metal fasteners such as nails and screws, and to the foundation using
anchor bolts.

211
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

The upper walls should bear on the floor panels (platform frame construction – see 3.1.20) and be
connected to the lower walls with 2D- and 3D-nailing plates among those in (3). Tie-down connections nailed
or screwed to the cross laminated timber walls may be used to restrain the external walls against uplift (Figure
13.3).

Wall panels should have heights at least equal to the inter-storey height, h. Along their width, they
should be either made of a single element (‘monolithic wall’, Figure 13.3(a)) or composed of more than one
panel (‘segmented wall’, Figure 13.3(b)). Each segment should measure in width not less than 0,25h and
should be connected to the other segments by means of vertical joints made with metal fasteners such as
screws or nails.

Individual wall-panels with width less than 0,25h should be neglected for earthquake resistance.

Key
A Horizontal joint between cross laminated timber floor panels.
B Cross laminated timber floor panel.
C Single piece cross laminated timber wall panel.
D Tie-down.
E Hold-down.
F Foundation tie-down.
G Angle bracket.
H Vertical cross laminated timber panel-to-cross laminated timber panel joint.
I Cross laminated timber wall panel.
J Shear plate.
K Concrete base beam connected to the foundation and waterproof layer.

Figure 13.3 — Exterior, monolithic (a) and interior, segmented (b) walls and floors in cross
laminated timber structures

212
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(7) The joints between orthogonal walls should be made with metal fasteners (usually screws).

(8) Floor and roof diaphragms should be made of cross laminated timber according to 13.15.2.

(9) Other types of floor and roof diaphragms than the one in (8) may be used, provided that their in-
plane resistance and stiffness is ensured (e.g. 13.15.3 or 13.15.4).

13.7.2 Design rules for DC2

(1) In cross laminated timber structures, each wall panel at every floor may be composed either of only
one monolithic cross laminated timber panel or of multiple panels connected to each other with rigid (as
defined in 3.1.25) vertical joints.

(2) The dissipative connections should be of type a) and b):

the shear connections between walls and the floor underneath, and between walls and foundation
(usually the nailed or screwed connections between the angle brackets and the cross laminated timber
wall panels, Figure 13.3(a) or the nailed or the screwed connections between the shear plates the cross
laminated timber wall panel, Figure 13.3(b));

the anchoring connections against uplift placed at wall ends and at wall openings (usually the nailed or
screwed connections between hold-down anchors and cross laminated timber wall panel, Figure 13.3(a)
or between tie-downs and cross laminated timber wall panel, Fig. 13.3(b)).

Key
A Joint between adjacent floor panels.
B Floor panel.
C Joint between floors and walls underneath.
D Joint between perpendicular walls.
E Wall panel

213
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Figure 13.4 — Connections and members to be designed with overstrength in order to fulfil the
capacity design criteria in cross laminated timber structures in DC2

(3) 13.4.2(14) and (15) apply.

(4) Structural members and joints listed in a) to d) (see Figure 13.4) should be capacity designed using
Formula (13.7):

all cross laminated timber wall and floor panels;

joints between adjacent floor panels or joints of other types of sheathing material like in 13.7.1(9);

joints between floors and supporting walls underneath;

joints between orthogonal walls, including the ones at the building corners;

𝐹 , ≥ 𝛺 𝐹 , +𝐹 , with the limitation kdeg ≤ 1 (13.7)

where:

FRd,b is the design strength of the non-dissipative joint or structural element from Formula (13.2);

Rd is the overstrength factor, from Table 13.4;

kdeg is the strength reduction factor defined in 13.3.1(4), for which the value in 13.3.1(2) should be used;

FEd,E is the action effect in the non-dissipative joint or member due to the design seismic action;

FEd,G is the action effect in the non-dissipative joint or member due to the non-seismic actions in the design
seismic situation;

Ωd is the minimum value of all overstrength ratios Ωd.i, calculated at each ith storey by Formula (13.8):

𝛺 = min 𝛺 , (13.8)

Ωd.i is the overstrength ratio at the ith storey given by Formula (13.9):

∑ , ,, ∑ , ,,
𝛺 , = min ; (13.9)
∑ , ,, ∑ , ,,

where:

VRd,a,i,j is the design lateral strength related to shear connections of the jth shear-wall at the ith storey;

MRd,rock,i,j is the design rocking strength of the jth shear-wall at the ith storey including the stabilizing effect of
the vertical load;

VEd,E,i,j is the design global shear of the jth shear-wall at the ith storey due to the seismic action;

MEd,E,i,j is the design rocking moment of the jth shear-wall at the ith storey due to the seismic action;

Ni is the number of shear-walls parallel to the seismic action at the ith storey.

214
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(5) The ductility of the dissipative connections defined in (2) should be achieved by satisfying either
13.4.2(7) or 13.4.2(13).

(6) Brittle failures in the dissipative connections listed in (2), such as splitting, shear plug, tear-out and
tensile fracture of wood in accordance with EN 1995-1-1:2004, 6, 8 and Annex A, and A2:2014, should be
avoided by satisfying Formula (13.4) with consideration of the overstrength factors in Table 13.4.

(7) The overstrength factors in Table 13.4 should be used to satisfy Formula (13.4) such that brittle
failure mechanisms of 2D- and 3D-nailing plates, listed in a) to f), do not occur:

withdrawal failure of anchor bolts or screws connecting the hold-down to the floor or the foundation,

shear failure of anchor bolts, screws or nails connecting the tie-down with the wall underneath or the
foundation,

shear failure of screws or anchor bolts connecting the angle bracket or the shear plate with the floor or
foundation underneath,

shear, tensile and pull-through failure of anchor bolts or screws,

steel plate tensile fracture in the weakest section of hold-down and tie-downs,

shear failure in the weakest section of angle brackets and shear plates.

13.7.3 Design rules for DC3

(1) In cross laminated timber structures designed for DC3, the primary shear walls should all be
segmented walls in each principal direction.

(2) Segmented walls (Figure 13.3(b)) should be composed of more than one cross laminated timber
panel, each with a length not smaller than 0,25h and not greater than h, where h is the inter-storey height.

(3) In a segmented wall, the cross laminated timber panels should be connected with vertical joints made
with metal fasteners (screws or nails) inserted perpendicular to the shear plane. Sheathing material according
to 13.3.2(4) may be used in the joint.

(4) In addition to 13.7.2(2), vertical screwed or nailed joints between adjacent parallel wall panels
within the segmented shear walls should be considered and designed for dissipative behaviour.

(5) 13.7.2(4) should be applied.

(6) If the sum of the vertical stiffness of the shear resistant 2D- or 3D-nailing plates (angle brackets, shear
plates) in a single panel of the segmented wall is smaller than one-fourth of the vertical stiffness of the
anchoring 2D- or 3D-nailing plates resisting uplift (hold-dows, tie-downs, foundation tie-downs), and the
latter ones are located at the corners of the wall (see Figure 13.5), 13.4.3(1)P may be considered satisfied at
wall and building level if (7), (8) and (9) are verified.

(7) For each segmented wall, conditions given by Formulas (13.10) should be satisfied.

𝐹 , ≥𝛾 𝐹 ,
,
if 𝐾 , ≥𝑛∙𝐾 ,
,

(13.10)

215
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝐹 , ≥ max 𝛾 𝐹 ,
,
;𝛾 𝑛 𝐹 , −𝑤𝑏 if 𝐾 , <𝑛∙𝐾 ,
,

where:

FRd,h is the design strength of the anchoring 2D- or 3D-nailing plate against uplift from Formula
(13.1);

Rd is the overstrength factor, given in Table 13.4;

FRd,c is the design strength of the single timber-to-timber connection used in the vertical joint from
Formula (13.1);

Kser,anc is the elastic stiffness of the anchoring 2D- or 3D-nailing plate against uplift;

Kser,con is the elastic stiffness of the single timber-to-timber connection used in the vertical joint;

nvj is the number of fasteners used in the vertical joint;

bCL is the length of each single panel;

w is the gravity load per unit length applied on the segmented wall in the seismic design situation.

(8) The maximum storey overstrength ratio max(Ωd,i) and the minimum storey overstrength ratio d,
with d given by Formula (13.8), should comply with Formula (13.11).

,
≤ 1,25 (13.11)

Key
A Anchoring 2D- or 3D-nailing plate against uplift (hold-down, tie-down, foundation tie-down).
B Single fastener connection in vertical joint.
C 2D- or 3D-nailing plate resisting shear (angle-bracket, shear plate).

Figure 13.5 — Segmented cross laminated timber wall

216
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(9) In segmented walls with panels of the same length bCL and vertical joints with the same type of
fastener at the same spacing, when the wall is anchored against uplift at the corners and the shear connection
do not affect rocking behaviour, the design rocking strength 𝑀 , should be calculated by Formula (13.12).

𝑀 , =𝑏 𝐹 , +𝐹 , 𝑚 −1 𝑛 + (13.12)

where:

MRd,rock is the design rocking strength;

FRd,h is the design strength of the anchoring 2D- or 3D-nailing plate against uplift calculated from
Formula (13.1);

FRd,c is the design strength of the single timber-to-timber connection used in the vertical joint from
Formula (13.1);

mlp is the number of cross laminated timber panels in a segmented wall (e.g. m=3 in Figure 13.5);

nvj is the number of fasteners used in the vertical joint;

bCL is the length of each single panel;

w is the gravity load per unit length applied on the segmented wall in the seismic design situation.

(10) The ductility of the dissipative connections defined in (4) and in 13.7.2(2) should be achieved by
satisfying either 13.4.2(7) or 13.4.2(12).

(11) 13.7.2(6) should be applied to the dissipative connections defined in (4) and in 13.7.2(2).

(12) 13.7.2(7) should be applied to 2D- and 3D-nailing plates defined in 13.7.2(2).

13.7.4 Detailing rules

(1) In the case of tension perpendicular to the grain, additional design measures should be taken to avoid
splitting (e.g. by reinforcing with screws, glued-in rebars, nailed metal plates or plywood plates).

(2) Wall-to-wall and floor-to-wall connection screws should be inserted inclined (as per Figure 13.6(C))
unless a correct insertion of cross layer screws within layers with grain direction perpendicular to the screw
axis can be ensured (Figure 13.6(B)).

Key

217
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

A Wrong - screws inserted in layers with grain direction parallel to the screw axis.
B Right but difficult to achieve - screws inserted in layers with grain direction perpendicular to the screw axis.
C Right - screws inserted inclined.

Figure 13.6 — Wall-to-wall connection

13.8 Rules for light-frame structures

13.8.1 General rules

(1) The primary system should be made of shear walls composed by timber frames with a sheathing
material (Figure 13.7). The upper walls should bear on the floor (platform frame construction – see 3.1.20).

(2) In shear walls, the frames (Figure 13.7 F) should be composed by equally spaced vertical studs
(Figure 13.7 G), a bottom plate (Figure 13.7 H) and a top plate.

(3) The sheathing material should be connected to the frame on one or both sides by means of screws,
nails or staples (Figure 13.7 C).

(4) Floor and roof diaphragms should be made according to 13.15.3.

Key
A Nailed, screwed or stapled sheathing-to-framing floor connection.
B Floor-to-wall connection.
C Nailed, screwed or stapled sheathing-to-framing wall connection.
D Base and inter-storey uplift-restrain connection.
E Base and inter-storey shear-restrain connection.
F Framing member.
G Vertical stud.
H Plate.

218
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

I Perpendicular wall-to-wall connection.

J Joist.
K Blocking.
L Perimeter edge beam.

Figure 13.7 — Example of light-frame structure with typical connections

(5) Other types of floor and roof diaphragms than the one in (4) may be used, provided that their in-
plane resistance is ensured (e.g. 13.15.2 or 13.15.4).

(6) The joint of the walls to the foundation or to the walls underneath should be made by means of 2D-
or 3D-nailing plates (e.g. hold-downs (Figure 13.7 D), angle brackets, tie-downs) and/or shear connections
(e.g. anchor bolts (Figure 13.7 E), nails and screws) and should restrain the wall against overturning and
sliding.

(7) In fully anchored walls, specific 2D- or 3D-nailing plates against overturning (hold-downs and tie-
downs, Figure 13.7 D) should be placed at wall ends and at opening ends.

NOTE If a vertical action applied directly either on top or onto the framing member at wall ends and at opening ends
in accordance with EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014 is used as an alternative to specific 2D- or 3D-nailing plates against
overturning, the walls cannot be regarded as fully anchored. They can be designed for earthquake actions by following
the provisions for partially anchored walls according to (9).

(8) Connections against sliding (Figure 13.7 E) should be distributed uniformly along the wall length.

(9) In partially anchored walls, as an alternative to (7), walls may be restrained against overturning,
according to EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014, by uniformly distributed vertical anchorage along the bottom
plate of the wall, alone or in combination with vertical stabilising action imposed along the wall length or
directly on top or onto the framing member at wall ends and at opening ends.

(10) Wall height at each level of the building should be the same as the inter-storey height.

(11) Perpendicular walls should be connected by joining together two vertical studs with mechanical
fasteners (nails, screws or bolts, Figure 13.7 I).

13.8.2 Design rules for DC2

(1) Shear walls may be sheathed with all the types of sheathing material defined in 13.3.2(4), connected
to the wall framing by means of nails, screws or staples according to EN 14592, Annex F.

(2) Light-frame structures designed to DC2 should be made only of fully anchored walls.

(3) Connections with dissipative behaviour should be those given in a) to c):

screwed, nailed or stapled connections between sheathing material and timber frame in shear walls;

shear connections between upper and lower walls, and between walls and foundation;

2D- and 3D-nailing plates against uplift placed at wall ends and at wall openings.

(4) Structural elements, connections and joints listed in a) to e) (see Figure 13.7) should be capacity
designed using Formula (13.7), with Ωd given by Formula (13.8) and Ωd,i given by Formula (13.13).

sheathing panels under in-plane shear induced by seismic actions;

219
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

timber framing members (studs, plates, and joists) under axial forces induced by seismic actions;

nailed, screwed or stapled shear connections between sheathing and timber joists/beams at each floor;

joints between floors and walls underneath;

joints between orthogonal walls, particularly at the building corners.

∑ , ,, ∑ , ,, ∑ , ,,
𝛺 , = min ; ; (13.13)
∑ , ,, ∑ , ,, ∑ , ,,

where:
VRd,sh,i,j is the design lateral strength related to connections between sheathing material and timber
frame of the jth shear wall at the ith storey calculated according to Formula (**) of EN 1995-1-
1:2004 and A2:2014;

VRd,a,i,j is the design lateral strength related to shear connections of the jth shear wall at the ith storey;

MRd,rock,i,j is the design rocking strength of the jth shear wall at the ith storey;

VEd,E,i,j is the design global shear of the jth shear wall at the ith storey due to the seismic action;

MEd,E,i,j is the design rocking moment of the jth shear wall at the ith storey due to the seismic action;

Ni is the number of shear-walls parallel to the seismic action at the ith storey.

(5) 13.7.2(5) should be applied for the ductility of the dissipative connections defined in (3).

(6) 13.7.2(6) should be applied to the dissipative connections defined in (3).

(7) 13.7.2(7) should be applied.

13.8.3 Design rules for DC3

(1) In light-frame structures designed for DC3, only plywood or OSB panels as defined in 13.3.2(4)
should be used as sheathing material. The sheathing material should be connected to the wall framing only by
means of nails according to EN 14592, Annex F. Stapled and screw connections should not be used for the
sheathing-to-frame connection. For smooth nails, the pointside penetration length tpen should be increased by
25% compared to the minimum pointside penetration length according to EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014.

(2) 13.8.2(2) should be applied.

(3) Connections with dissipative behaviour should be only the nailed connections between sheathing
material and timber frame in the shear walls.

(4) Capacity designed structural elements should be (Figure 13.7) all elements, 2D- and 3D-nailing
plates, and connections except nails in dissipative zones, listed in a) to c):

all those given in a) to e) in 13.8.2(4);

shear connections between upper and lower walls, and between walls and foundation;

2D- and 3D-nailing plates against uplift placed at wall ends and at wall openings.

220
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(5) The non-dissipative structural elements, nailing plates and connections listed from a) to c) in (4)
should satisfy Formula (13.7) with Ωd given by Formula (13.8) and Ωd,i given by Formula (13.14).

∑ , ,,
𝛺 , = (13.14)
∑ , ,,

where:

VRd,sh,i,j is the design lateral strength related to connections between sheathing material and timber frame of
the jth shear-wall at the ith storey calculated according to Formula (9.20) of EN 1995-1-1:2004 and
A2:2014;

VEd,E,i,j is the design global shear of the jth shear-wall at the ith storey due to seismic action;

Ni is the number of shear walls parallel to the seismic action at the ith storey.

(6) 13.7.3(8) should be applied.

(7) 13.7.3(10) should be applied for the ductility of the dissipative connections defined in (3).

(8) 13.7.2(6) should be applied to the dissipative connections defined in (3).

13.8.4 Detailing rules

(1) 13.7.4(1) should be applied.

13.9 Rules for log structures

13.9.1 General Rules

(1) The primary structure should be made by the superposition of rectangular or round solid or glulam
elements (‘logs’), prefabricated with upper and lower grooves.

(2) The joint between orthogonal walls should be made by means of carpentry connections obtained by
notching the logs of the two walls or by means of screws, dowels or bolts (Figure 13.8).

(3) Floor and roof diaphragms may be detailed according to 13.15.2 to 4.

(4) 13.8.1(6) to (8) and 13.8.1(10) should be applied (Figure 13.8).

221
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Key
A Possible steel rods as uplift restraint for timber logs.

Figure 13.8 — Typical corner joint and connection details in log structures

(5) Uplift of the logs due to overturning moment should be prevented by either a) or b):

By verifying that the stabilising moment due to gravity loads is greater than or equal to the overturning
moment due to seismic action multiplied by the overstrength factor Rd according to Formula (13.15).

𝛾 𝑀 , , ≤𝑀 , , (13.15)

where:

Rd is the overstrength factor, given in Table 13.4;

Mdst,d,E is the overturning moment due to the design seismic action;

Mstb,d,G is the stabilising moment due to gravity loads in the seismic design situation.

If Formula (13.15) is not satisfied, uplift is resisted by using steel tie-rods or screws (Figure 13.8).

222
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Key
A Perpendicular to the grain verification area.
B Longitudinal shear verification area.
Figure 13.9 — Perpendicular to the grain and longitudinal shear verification of a typical carpentry
connection between logs – (a): plan view of a log, (b) cross-section of a log, (c) side view of a log, (d)
side view of a joint with dashed compression perpendicular to the grain verification area, (e) 3D
view of a connection with dashed compression perpendicular to the grain verification area, (f) 3D
view of a log with dashed longitudinal shear verification area
13.9.2 Design rules for DC2

(1) Log structures should be designed to behave as box-type structures.

(2) Energy dissipation should take place by friction at the interface between superimposed logs, and
compression perpendicular to the grain in the carpentry connections between orthogonal walls.

(3) Timber diaphragms, timber logs and their connections to the foundation or between any massive
sub-element should be capacity designed by complying with Formula (13.4).

(4) Carpentry connections should be capacity designed against shear failure by complying with Formula
(13.5) in accordance with 13.4.3(5).

13.9.3 Detailing rules

(1) 13.7.4(1) should be applied.

223
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) Compression members and their connections (e.g. carpentry connections) should be designed to
prevent separation of elements.

(3) The shear resistance of shear walls should be provided by the perpendicular to the grain and
longitudinal shear resistance of carpentry connections obtained by notching the logs of the two walls like in
Figure 13.9.

(4) Alternative solutions by means of screws, dowels or bolts like in Figure 13.10 may be used but in
such case the design shear resistance should be entirely due to the mechanical connection without any
possible contribution from the carpentry connections.

Key
A Connection between timber logs by means of self-tapping screws.
B Bolted connection to foundation (right: side view; left: cross-section).

Figure 13.10 — Connection between timber logs by means of self-tapping screws

13.10 Rules for moment-resisting frames
13.10.1 General rules

(1) Moment-resisting frames should be made of timber elements connected with semi-rigid joints made
of dowel-type metal fasteners. The column-foundation connections may be pinned or semi-rigid.

(2) 13.9.1(3) should be applied.

13.10.2 Rules for DC2

(1) In order to ensure yielding of the fasteners in the dissipative joints, the timber members and metal
plates used in joints should be capacity designed according to Formula (13.4), where the timber members and
metal plates are the brittle components and the semi-rigid joints the ductile ones.

(2) 13.7.2(5) should be applied for the ductility of the dissipative joints.

224
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) 13.7.2(6) should be applied to the dissipative connections.

(4) The columns should be designed to the magnified axial force NEd given by Formula (13.16):

𝑁 =𝑁 , "+"𝛺𝑁 , (13.16)

where:

NEd,G is the axial force in the column due to the non-seismic actions in the seismic design situation;

NEd,E is the axial force in the column due to the design seismic action;

 is the seismic action magnification factor;

"+" means combined with + or – sign;

(5) The seismic action magnification factor  should be assumed equal to:

— 1,6 for single-storey MRFs;

— 1,8 for multi-storey, one-bay MRFs; and

— 2,0 for multi-storey, multi-bay MRFs.

13.10.3 Rules for DC3

(1) 13.10.2(1) should be applied.

(2)P High-ductility joints shall be used, namely joints with a rotational ductility μ defined in accordance
with EN 12512 not less than 7 determined accordingly, with a value of kdeg defined in 13.3.1(4) not less than
0,8 and a value of φimp defined in 13.3.1(3) not greater than 0,3.

NOTE Joints with expanded tube fasteners reinforced with densified veneer wood designed and constructed in
accordance with EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014 can be considered as high ductility joints according to (2)P.

(3) 13.7.3(8) should be applied.

(4) 13.7.3(10) should be applied for the ductility of the high ductility joints.

(5) 13.7.2(6) should be applied to the dissipative connections.

(6) 13.10.2(4) and (5) should be applied.

13.10.4 Detailing rules

(1) 13.7.4(1) should be applied.

(2) Dowels, smooth nails and staples should be used with measures against withdrawal (e.g., some
fasteners with withdrawal resistance, see Fig. 13.11) to avoid member separation due to possible out-of-plane
loads. Such measures may be omitted in secondary members.

(3) Splitting of wood due to secondary tensile stresses induced by the bending moment should be
avoided by reinforcing the connection region with screws or glued-in rods (Fig. 13.11). Reinforcing elements

225
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

should be designed according to EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014 to resist a tensile force Ft,90.Ed given by
Formula (13.17):

𝐹, , = 𝑛 𝐹 , (13.17)

where:

Ft,90,Ed is the design tensile force in the reinforcement;

FM,Ed is the design shear force in a fastener in the outer circle due to the bending moment transmitted
by the joint;

ne is the number of fasteners in the outer circle.

Key
A Self-tapping screws or glued-in rods reinforcement.
B Dowels.
C Bolts.
Figure 13.11 — Possible detail to avoid splitting of wood and member separation in the joint region
(4) In high ductility joints with expanded tube fasteners according to EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014
the connection area should be reinforced with glued densified veneer wood in accordance with f) of 13.3.2(4)
or any equivalent type of reinforcing panels in order to allow yielding of the metal tube.

13.11 Rules for braced frame structures with dowel-type connections

13.11.1 General rules

(1) The primary structure should be composed of timber trusses with dowel-type connections as defined
in 3.1.9. The secondary structure should be made of timber columns and beams pin-jointed with dowel-type
connections.

226
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) Primary reinforced concrete walls and cores, designed according to 10, may be used as an alternative
to primary timber bracings. In such a case the behaviour factors in Table 10.1 should be used.

(3) Primary steel bracings with the frame and the diagonals made of steel, designed according to 11, may
be used as an alternative to primary timber bracings. In such a case the behaviour factors in Table 11.3 should
be used.

(4) Primary structure with a timber frame and steel diagonals pinned connected to the timber frame may
be used as an alternative to primary timber bracings. In such a case the steel diagonals should be designed
according to 11, and the behaviour factors listed in Table 11.3 should be used.

(5) Light-frame or cross laminated timber shear walls may be used as an alternative to primary timber
bracings. They should be designed for DC2 according to 13.8 or to 13.7 respectively. In such a case the relevant
behaviour factor for light-frame and cross laminated timber structures in Table 13.2 for DC2 should be used.

(6) 13.9.1(3) should be applied.

13.11.2 Rules for DC2

(1) In order to ensure yielding of the fasteners, the timber members, metal plates in the joint, and floor
diaphragms should be capacity designed according to Formula (13.4), where the timber members, metal
plates in the joint, and floor diaphragms are the brittle components and the metal fasteners the ductile ones.

(2) 13.7.2(5) should be applied for the ductility of the dissipative connections.

(3) 13.7.2(6) should be applied to the dissipative connections.

(4) When reinforced concrete walls, steel bracings, light-frame shear walls or cross laminated timber
walls are used as primary structure according to 13.11.1(2), 13.11.1(3) and 13.11.1(5) as an alternative to
timber trusses with dowel-type connections, the beam-to-column pinned joints should be capacity designed
according to Formula (13.4). The timber members and floor diaphragms should be also capacity designed.

(5) When a timber frame with steel diagonals is used as primary structure according to 13.11.1(4) as an
alternative to primary timber trusses with dowel-type connections, the timber frame and the diagonal-to-
frame pinned connections should be capacity designed using Formula (13.4). Timber members and floor
diaphragms should be also capacity designed.

13.11.3 Detailing rules

(1) 13.7.4(1) should be applied.

(2) Mechanical joints with dowel-type fasteners between beams and columns should be always regarded
as pinned. Only glued joints (e.g. with glued-in rods) may be regarded as rigid as defined in 3.1.25.

(3) Brittle failures of dowel-type connections due to splitting of wood caused by shrinkage perpendicular
to the grain in the connection area should be prevented by using (i) ovalized holes in the timber and metal
plates, for the free movement of wood, (ii) as few fasteners as possible, near to each other in a way not to
restrain shrinkage of wood perpendicular to the grain, or (iii) reinforcement in the connection region to resist
the tension perpendicular to the grain due to the restrained shrinkage of wood.

(4) Reinforcement may be used in post-to-beam connections against brittle failure due to load reversal.

227
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

13.12 Rules for vertical cantilever structures

13.12.1 General rules

(1) Vertical cantilever structures should be composed of either walls or columns made of cross laminated
timber, glulam or LVL according to 13.3.2(1) and (2) connected to the foundation and floors by means of
mechanical devices (usually, metal plates connected with dowel-type fasteners to the wall or column, see
Figure 13.12).

(2) The walls or columns should be structurally continuous across the floors (balloon frame construction
– see 3.1.2).

(3) 13.9.1(3) should be applied.

Figure 13.12 — Vertical cantilever wall with metal plates and dowel-type fasteners

13.12.2 Design rules for DC2

(1) In order to ensure yielding of the fasteners at the wall-foundation or column-foundation joint, the
timber elements, the metal plates, the floor diaphragms and the other possible wall or column spliced joints
should be capacity designed according to Formula (13.4), where the ductile components are the connections
with dowel-type fasteners.

(2) 13.11.2(2) and 13.11.2(3) should be applied.

(3) 13.7.2(7) should be applied to the metal plates linked to the dissipative connections.

13.12.3 Detailing rules

(1) 13.7.4 should be applied.

228
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) The intermediate floor-to-wall or floor-to-column joint (see Figure 13.13) should be capacity
designed using Formula (13.4).

Key
A Possible intermediate floor-to-wall joint.

Figure 13.13 — Joint between intermediate floor and shear walls

13.13 Rules for braced frame structures with carpentry connections and masonry infill
13.13.1 General rules

The primary structure should be made by timber frames with carpentry connections between posts
and beams, and a masonry infill inside.

Bracings such as diagonal timber members with carpentry connections may be added in the timber
frames.

(3) Finishings, such as a plaster layers, should be detailed so that the increase in lateral stiffness of the
wall is negligible.

(4) The lateral stiffness of the infill should be considered in design.

(5) The joint of orthogonal walls should be made by means of carpentry connections, connections with
dowel-type fasteners or steel plates to promote a box-type structural behaviour.

(6) The joint between the walls and the timber diaphragm should prevent uplifting of the posts and out-
of-plane overturning mechanisms of the walls.

(7) When external masonry walls are used, either a timber or a steel skeleton should be embedded into
these walls and connected to the inner timber frame walls with carpentry connections and masonry infills to
ensure a box-type behaviour. Carpentry connections, connections with dowel-type fasteners, steel plates or
injected anchors should be used to connect the skeleton of the external masonry walls to the inner timber
frame walls.

229
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(8) 13.9.1(3) should be applied.

(9) The joints of the walls to the foundation should be made by means of 2D- or 3D-nailing plates (hold-
downs, angle-brackets), tie rods, anchor bolts, nails and screws, etc.

(10) If timber frame walls with carpentry connections and masonry infills are used above the masonry
walls of a lower floor, the timber frames should be connected (e.g. using 2D- or 3D-nailing plates) to a
perimeter edge beam linked to the masonry walls.

13.13.2 Design rules for DC2

(1) Buildings with timber frame walls with carpentry connections and masonry infill should be designed
to behave as box-type structures.

(2) Local failures which may compromise the box-type behaviour should be prevented.

(3) Energy dissipation due to friction should take place in the walls at the interface between posts, beams
and bracing elements, and the infill.

(4) Floor diaphragms and the joints with the walls should be capacity designed using Formula (13.4).

(5) Carpentry connections should be capacity designed to prevent brittle shear failure using Formula
(13.5) in accordance with 13.4.3(5).

13.13.3 Detailing rules

(1) 13.7.4(1) and 13.9.3(2) should be applied.

(2) Joints between bracing elements (e.g. diagonal timber members) and the timber frame (posts and
beams) should allow movement (e.g., by using nails or screws in timber-to-timber joints).

13.14 Rules for braced frame structures with carpentry connections

13.14.1 General rules

(1) Braced frame structures with carpentry connections should be composed of timber columns and
beams pinned connected with mechanical joints and of eccentric timber diagonals connected to beams with
carpentry connections (Figure 13.14). They should not be used in buildings of more than two-storeys, with an
interstorey height not exceeding 4,5 m.

(2) Since carpentry connections work in compression, a bracing wall should have two symmetrical
diagonals which should not cross each other.

(3) The pinned connection between columns and beams should be made either of dowel-type fasteners
or 3D-nailing plates like hold-downs.

(4) 13.9.1(3) should be applied.

230
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Figure 13.14 — Examples of braced frame structures with carpentry connections

13.14.2 Detailing rules

(1) 13.7.4(1) should be applied.

(2) 13.9.3(2) should be applied.

13.15 Floor and roof diaphragms

13.15.1 General rules

(1) Floor and roof diaphragms should be made according to 13.15.2, 13.15.3 or 13.15.4. Other types of
floors such as those made of solid wood panels listed in 13.3.2(2) may be used provided that they are capable
of transferring in-plane horizontal actions to the primary structure.

13.15.2 Cross laminated timber floor and roof diaphragms

Cross laminated timber floor and roof diaphragms should be made of cross laminated timber panels
according to 13.3.2(1) connected together and to the supporting walls or beams using metal fasteners (screws
and nails).

(2) Holes for stairs in horizontal diaphragms should be supported by walls or beams along the whole
perimeter to which the cross laminated timber panels should be connected (see Figure 13.15(A and B)).

231
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Key
A Hole for staircase supported by walls/beams along the whole perimeter.
B Framing beam around the hole for staircase.
C Hole for installation across two cross laminated timber panels.
D Hole for installation with longer side bCL perpendicular to the panel width and shorter side aCL<0.25lCL (correct).
E Hole for installation with longer side bCL parallel to the panel width and bCL>0.25lCL (incorrect).

Figure 13.15 — Holes in cross laminated timber horizontal diaphragms

Key
A Joints between horizontal panels staggered with respect to joints between vertical panels.
B Joints between horizontal panels corresponding to joints between vertical panels.
C Steel strap to connect the cross laminated timber floor panels and transfer the tension forces due to the horizontal seismic
actions.

Figure 13.16 — Correspondence between horizontal joints in cross laminated timber diaphragms
and vertical joints in cross laminated timber walls

232
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) Holes for installations placed across two cross laminated timber panels like in Figure 13.15(C) should
be checked to ensure the transmission of horizontal seismic forces in the panel-to-panel reduced length of
joint.

(4) Holes pre-cut inside cross laminated timber panels for installations should have the longer side bCL
perpendicular to the cross laminated timber panel width lCL like in Figure 13.15(D), with aCL < 0,25lCL and
bCL < 4 aCL, and not like in Figure 13.15(E).

(5) Joints between horizontal panels in cross laminated timber diaphragms should be staggered with
respect to joints between vertical panels in cross laminated timber walls like in Figure 13.16(A). If they are
not staggered like in Figure 13.16(B), additional measures (such as continuous beams or steel straps like in
Figure 13.16(C)) should be taken to connect the floor panels above the wall and across the joint in order to
transfer the tension forces due to the in-plane bending moment.

13.15.3 Light-frame floor and roof diaphragms

Light-frame floor and roof diaphragms should be composed of equally spaced beams or joists (Figure
13.7 J) and timber blocking (Figure 13.7 K) in between and sheathing panels.

The sheathing panels should be placed on top of the beams, joists and blockings, and connected by
means of screws, nails or staples along the whole perimeter of the sheathing panel (Figure 13.7 A).

At each floor, a perimeter edge beam (Figure 13.7 L) should be provided to resist the tensile and
compressive forces arising from the diaphragm action when the floor is loaded by horizontal forces acting in
its plane.

Sheathing edges not meeting on framing members should be supported on and connected to the
transverse blocking placed between the wooden joists.

Blocking should be provided in the horizontal diaphragms above the primary vertical elements (e.g.
walls).

Alternative systems to (4) and (5) like steel straps, wooden boards or plywood straps running along
the unsupported edge of the sheathing panel may replace the timber blocking. In that case, such a system
should be designed to transfer the in-plane shear forces between adjacent sheathing panels.

The structural continuity of the beams and joists along the perimeter of the floor diaphragm should
be verified; such beams and joists should be designed to resist the tension and compression forces due to the
in-plane seismic forces and transfer them to the primary structure.

Structurally continuous trimmer joists should be placed around holes in the diaphragms and designed
to resist the tension and compression forces due the in-plane seismic forces.

If intermediate transverse blocking is not present in the floor diaphragm over the full depth of the
beams and joists, the depth-to-width ratio (h/b) of the beams and joists should not be greater than 4.

If Sδ > 2 m/s2, the spacing of fasteners in areas of discontinuity calculated according to EN 1995-1-
1:2004 and A2:2014, should be reduced by 25%, but not to less than the minimum spacing specified in EN
1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014.

EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014 should be applied with the modifications given in a) to c):

the amplification factor 1,2 for resistance of fasteners at sheet edges should not be used;

233
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

when the sheets are staggered, the increasing factor of 1,5 for the nail spacing along the discontinuous
panel edges should not be used;

the distribution of the shear forces in the diaphragms should be evaluated by taking into account the
position in plan of the primary vertical member.

13.15.4 Timber-concrete composite floor and roof diaphragms

(1) Timber-concrete composite floor and roof diaphragms according to the TC 250 WI SC5.T2:2019 (E)
should be jointed to the lower and upper walls by means of connections with metal fasteners.

(2) The concrete topping should be connected to the vertical primary members to ensure the in-plane
shear due to the diaphragm action is transferred to the walls underneath and down to the foundations.

13.16 Transfer level. Design for DC2 and DC3

(1) Diaphragms in transfer zones as defined in 3.1.32 should be designed according to 6.2.11 and 13.15.

(2) 6.2.11 should be applied only for buildings up to 4 storeys. Above 4 storeys at least 80% of the
primary structure should be structurally continuous, in each main direction, from the base of the timber part
of the building up to the roof (Figure 13.1 A).

(3) d in 6.2.11(9) should be taken equal to the value given in Table 13.4 for capacity design at wall and
building level.

(4) The flexibility of the timber floor diaphragm should be taken into account.

(5) The resistance of the diaphragm to in-plane forces, calculated according to (1), should be checked.

13.17 Checking of design and construction

(1) The structural elements in a) to h) should be identified on the design drawings and specifications for
their control during construction should be provided:

details and plan of the uplift and sliding restraint connections of all the primary vertical members to
foundation and inter-storey floor elements;

details of joints between horizontal diaphragms and primary vertical members underneath;

details of joints between perpendicular or intersecting primary vertical members;

details of connections between sheathing panels and timber framing in horizontal and vertical
diaphragms;

details of joints between cross laminated timber panels in horizontal diaphragms and vertical walls;

details of connections in diagonal tension and compression timber trusses used for bracing;

details and sizes of any carpentry connection;

details of any tension or perpendicular to the grain reinforcement in timber elements or connection area.

(2)P The control during construction as defined in EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014 shall refer to the
material properties and the accuracy of execution.

234
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

14 SPECIFIC RULES FOR MASONRY BUILDINGS

14.1 Scope

(1) 14 should be applied to the design and the verification of masonry buildings, in seismic regions.

(2) 14 should be applied as a complement to EN 1996-1-1:2019.

NOTE Masonry infilled frames are covered in 7.4.

(3) 14 should be applied to unreinforced masonry, confined masonry and reinforced masonry as defined
in EN 1996-1-1:2019 with the complementary rules defined herein.

14.2 Basis of design

14.2.1 Design concepts

P Masonry buildings shall be designed to achieve a box behaviour of the building.

Note In a box behaviour, the horizontal components of the seismic action and the consequent inertia forces are
transferred to the foundation prevailingly through in-plane forces in walls and diaphragms; the out-of-plane stability of
walls is improved because the restraint reactions on their boundaries can be transferred to the foundation or
equilibrated by in-plane action in other walls and/or diaphragms.

Masonry buildings should be designed to either DC1 or DC2.

For Sδ greater than 3 m/s2, unreinforced masonry buildings should be designed to DC2.

14.2.2 Rules applicable to structures designed to DC1 or DC2

(1) Masonry buildings should be composed of floors and walls.

(2) There should be walls in two principal directions; they should be connected to each other at
intersections and to the floors above and below.

(3) Floors should be designed to act as diaphragms; to this end, a) to f) should be satisfied:

a) There should be diaphragms, ring ties or ring beams at each floor level, at a vertical spacing not exceeding
4 m;

b) Diaphragms should restrain wall displacements in the direction perpendicular to wall planes;

c) Diaphragms should possess in-plane shear stiffness;

d) Ring ties or ring beams may be part of the diaphragms;

e) Ring beams, ring ties, diaphragms and walls should be connected together;

f) The ring beams, ring ties, diaphragms, the joints internal and peripheral to diaphragms should be
designed to resist design action effects and satisfy 6.2.8.

NOTE For ring beams and ring ties, rules are given in EN 1996-1:2019, 10.5.1.4 and additional rules for DC2 buildings
in 14.7.2 to 14.7.4. Other information on ring beams and ring ties can be found in the National Annex.

Unreinforced masonry buildings with flexible diaphragms should be designed to DC1.

235
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Unreinforced masonry buildings with stiff or rigid diaphragms may be designed to DC1 or DC2.

NOTE A great in-plane shear stiffness of the diaphragms is necessary to activate the redundancy against horizontal
actions which characterizes DC2.

14.3 Materials

(1) The normalised compressive strength fb of masonry units determined in accordance with EN 772-1
should satisfy a) or b):

a) for Sδ ≤ 3 m/s2 . Normal to bed face fb = fbv ≥ 3 MPa

Parallel to bed face in the plane of the wall: fb = fbh ≥ max{0,1 fbv; 1,5 MPa}
b) for Sδ > 3 m/s2. Normal to bed face fb = fbv ≥ 4 MPa for Group 1
fb = fbv ≥ 5 MPa for groups 2 to 4
Parallel to bed face in the plane of the wall: fb = fbh ≥ max{0,1 fbv; 2,0 MPa}
(2) For unreinforced masonry and confined masonry, the strength of general purpose mortar should not
be smaller than:

a) for Sδ ≤ 3 m/s2 , fm,min = 2,5 MPa

b) for Sδ > 3 m/s2 fm,min = 5 MPa

(3) For reinforced masonry with reinforcement embedded in general purpose mortar, the strength of
mortar should not be smaller than fm,min = 10 MPa.

(4) Values of fb smaller than in (1) may be used if the resulting characteristic compressive strength of
masonry fk, according to EN 1996-1-1:2019, 5.7.1, is not smaller than given in a) or b):

a) for Sδ ≤ 3 m/s2

Normal to the bed face fk= fkv ≥ 1,8 MPa for unreinforced and confined masonry;

fk= fkv ≥ 2,8 MPa for reinforced masonry;

Parallel to the bed face fk= fkh ≥ 0,15 fkv for unreinforced, confined and reinforced masonry

b) for Sδ > 3 m/s2

Normal to the bed face fk= fkv ≥ 2,4 MPa for unreinforced and confined masonry;

fk= fkv ≥ 3,5 MPa for reinforced masonry;

Parallel to the bed face fk= fkh ≥ 0,15 fkv for unreinforced, confined and reinforced masonry

14.4 Behaviour factors

14.4.1 Behaviour factors for in-plane analysis

(1) In DC1, a behaviour factor q up to 1,5 may be used, regardless of the structural type, the masonry type,
the diaphragm stiffness and the regularity.

236
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) The default values of the behaviour factor components qR and qD and of the behaviour factor q for the
design in DC2 of buildings regular in elevation and not torsionally flexible are given in Table 14.1; values of qD
in Table 14.1 require that Formula (14.1) be satisfied:

νG,k ≤ 0,2 (14.1)

where

G,k is the pier axial load ratio due to non-seismic actions calculated as G,k =NEd,G/(Afk);

NEd,G is the axial force due to non-seismic actions in the seismic design situation;

A is the pier section area;

fk is the characteristic compressive strength of the masonry pier.

Table 14.1 — Structural lay-out, masonry types and default values of the behaviour factor q in DC2

Structural lay-out in
the earthquake qR Masonry type qD q
direction
1,4 URM (general) 1,2 2,6
At least 6 piers of 1,4 Calcium silicate (hollow and solid) 1,0 2,2
various lengths and a 1,4 AAC Gr 1 and 1s 1,4 2,8
significant coupling 1,4 URM Gr 1 and 1s clay 1,6 2,8
effect
1,4 Confined masonry (general) 1,65 3,4
1,4 Reinforced masonry (general) 1,8 3,8
1,2 URM (general) 1,2 2,1
At least 6 piers of 1,2 Calcium silicate (hollow and solid) 1,0 1,8
various lengths, or at
1,2 AAC Gr 1 and 1s 1,4 2,5
least 4 walls and a
significant coupling 1,2 URM Gr 1 and 1s clay 1,6 2,8
effect 1,2 Confined masonry (general) 1,65 2,9
1,2 Reinforced masonry (general) 1,8 3,2
1,0 URM (general) 1,2 1,8
Less than 6 piers of 1,0 Calcium silicate (hollow and solid) 1,0 1,5
various lengths, and no 1,0 AAC Gr 1 and 1s 1,4 2,1
significant coupling 1,0 URM Gr 1 and 1s clay 1,6 2,4
effect;
1,0 Confined masonry (general) 1,65 2,5
1,0 Reinforced masonry (general) 1,8 2,7
1,0 Confined masonry 1,35 2,0
Buildings with flexible
diaphragms 1,0 Reinforced masonry 1,6 2,4
1,0 Unreinforced masonry 1,0 1,5

(3) In Table 1, walls in one direction should be considered to have various length if they fulfil the following
criteria: the longest length of each of 75% of the walls, or each of the percentage just below 75%, should be
smaller than 0,8 times the length of the longest of all walls in that direction.

(4) In Table 1, a coupling effect by floors, ring beams and/or reinforced or confined spandrels may be
considered significant if a) and b) are satisfied:

237
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

a) the building is more than one storey high;

b) the stiffness of the building is at least 1,5 times greater when the coupling is considered than when it is
not considered.

(5) The axial load ratio should not be greater than 0,4 in any primary pier and the average axial load ratio
of primary piers in each horizontal direction of any storey should not be greater than 0,2.

NOTE The average axial load ratio of all primary piers of any storey in one horizontal direction is
G,k,av = NEd,G,i/(Aifki), where i refers to a primary pier i in that direction, NEd,G,i is the axial load in this pier due to non-
seismic actions in the seismic situation, Ai its area and fki its characteristic compressive strength.

(6) If, in a given direction of a storey in which inelastic deformations are expected, the pier axial load ratio
νG,k is greater than 0,2 in more than 25% of the total area of piers, the behaviour factor component qD should
be reduced by 20%, but not taken smaller than 1,0. It should also be checked that the axial loads carried by
the primary piers with νG,k >0,2 may be redistributed to other piers according to 14.5.3.

(7) For masonry units which are not covered appropriately by the limitations on geometrical properties
given in EN 1996-1-1 for Group 1, 2, 3 and 4, qD should be established by tests.

14.4.2 Behaviour factors for out-of-plane analysis

NOTE The analysis for out-of-plane behaviour of ancillary elements given in 7.2 is applied here with specific behaviour
factors qoop.

(1) For unreinforced and confined masonry piers, the behaviour factor qoop for out-of-plane bending
should be taken equal to 1,25.

(2) For reinforced masonry piers, the behaviour factor qoop for out-of-plane bending should be taken equal
to 1,5.

14.5 Structural analysis

14.5.1 Model for linear global structural analysis

14.5.1.1 Piers

(1) The stiffness of the piers should be evaluated taking into account their flexural, shear and axial
deformations.

(2) Piers of all types of masonry that are expected to crack under seismic loading should be assigned a
reduced stiffness values which may be taken equal to the secant stiffness at 70% of the pier’s ultimate strength.

(3) For all types of masonry, the elastic flexural and shear stiffness of cracked piers may be taken equal
to respectively 50% and 35% of the flexural and shear stiffness of the uncracked pier.

14.5.1.2 Spandrels and ring beams

(1) Masonry spandrels may be considered as coupling beams between two piers if they are regularly
bonded to the adjacent members.

(2) Reinforced concrete ring beams may be considered as coupling beams between two piers.

238
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) Ring beams and masonry spandrels may be modelled as beams connected to the piers by means of
stiff beams over the distance from the edge of the pier to the axis of the pier in order to form an equivalent
frame model.

(4) In equivalent frame models, unless more detailed information is available, it may be assumed that
the joints are rigid and have dimensions similar to those of the adjacent piers and spandrels.

(5) The flexural stiffness of cracked ring beams may be taken as 50% of that of the uncracked beams. The
shear deformation of ring beams may be neglected.

(6) The elastic modulus and shear modulus of a horizontal masonry member such as a spandrel may be
calculated as given in EN1996-1-1, 5.8.2 and 5.8.3, taking into account fk of the units in the relevant horizontal
direction.

(7) Unless a more accurate analysis of the cracked members is performed, the elastic flexural and shear
stiffness properties of the cracked spandrel may be taken as given in a) or b):

a) Unreinforced masonry spandrel: 25% of the stiffness of uncracked member;

b) Reinforced and confined masonry spandrel: 50% of the stiffness of uncracked member.

(8) A composite spandrel consisting of a masonry spandrel and a reinforced concrete beam or slab strip
may be modelled as two parallel entities, neglecting the interaction between them.

(9) In the case of force-based verification, any stiffness of horizontal members that increases the
coupling effect may be set to zero if the first period of the building is less than TC.

14.5.1.3 Diaphragms and slabs

(1) The model should represent the actual stiffness of the diaphragm, unless the diaphragm is rigid
according to (3), (4) or (5). If the diaphragm is rigid, the stiffness may be set to a value greater than the actual
stiffness.

(2) In the absence of a more detailed analysis, diaphragms may be considered as uncracked.

(3) A diaphragm may be considered rigid in tension, compression and shear if the period Ti of each mode
i that contributes significantly to the global response does not change by more than max(0,1Ti, 0,05s) between
a model of the system with the actual diaphragm stiffness and a model with rigid diaphragms.

(4) A reinforced concrete slab may be considered as rigid in tension, compression and shear, if it
complies with 10.12.1(1) or 10.12.1(2).

NOTE Other information on diaphragms related to local practices may be found in the National Annex.

(5) Diaphragms with a finite stiffness may be modelled using either shell members or strut-and-tie
models.

(6) The global structural model may consider the coupling effect provided by the slab.

NOTE This applies if the floor slab is supported by piers in such a way that horizontal loading of the structure induces
bending of the slab. See also note to (7)c).

(7) In buildings where several walls lie in the same vertical plane and are continuous over the height, the
coupling effect provided by the slabs may be modelled by means of horizontal beams between the walls in the

239
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

vertical plane of the walls. The horizontal beams may be modelled as rigid from the centreline to the end of
each wall and deformable over the free span between two walls. Their effective width may be taken equal to
the values in a), b) or c):

In buildings with flat slabs, for all types of masonry, 0,1l0 at the edge of the slab and 0,2l0 in the interior
of the slab, where l0 is the distance between the centrelines of the two walls.

In unreinforced masonry buildings with flat slabs, respectively 25% of the values in a) for the top floor
and 50% of the values in a) for the floor below the top floor.

In buildings with slabs casted monolithically with beams, the effective width of beam may be determined
according to EN 1992-1-1:2018, 7.3.2.1(4) and assumed constant along the beam length.

NOTE In unreinforced masonry buildings subjected to horizontal loads, slabs can experience uplift from the masonry
walls. The wall length over which the uplift takes place depends on the axial force in the piers above and below the slab.

(8) In buildings where walls do not lie in few vertical planes, the out-of-plane stiffness of slabs may be
modelled with shell elements.

(9) The uplift of the slab from unreinforced masonry walls may be modelled by reducing the wall length
over which the slab is connected to the wall or, if the walls are modelled as beams, by reducing the length of
the rigid links.

14.5.1.4 Secondary seismic elements

(1) Piers should be considered as secondary if they do not fulfil the limits of lmp/hop of Table 14.2.

(2) Spandrels may be classified as primary or secondary spandrels.

NOTE In force-based verification, if the first period of the building is less than TC, neglecting the coupling effect of
spandrels is safe sided because the lateral load capacity of the system is underestimated.

(3) If secondary piers and spandrels are included in the model, they should be modelled such that they
do not transfer shear and bending forces due to seismic action.

14.5.2 Model for non-linear global structural analysis

14.5.2.1 General

(1) 14.5.2 should be applied to the global non-linear analysis of unreinforced, confined and reinforced
masonry structures, in addition to 14.5.1.

(2) For non-linear response-history analyses, appropriate hysteretic laws should be assigned to
individual elements.

(3) For non-linear static analyses, simplified constitutive laws may be applied.

14.5.2.2 Piers

(1) A bilinear force-displacement relationship with zero post-yield stiffness may be used in which the
elastic stiffness should correspond to cracked section properties and the plateau should extend up to NC.
Beyond NC, the horizontal strength of the pier should drop to a residual strength.

240
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) Unless more detailed information is available, it should be assumed that the residual horizontal
strength is equal to zero.

(3) More refined shear force-drift relationships may be used.

(4) It may be assumed that piers maintain their axial load bearing capacity beyond NC.

NOTE The deformation capacity of piers is given in Table 14.4.

(5) The force-displacement models for piers should take into account the interaction between the shear
resistance and axial forces, and between the moment resistance and axial force.

14.5.2.3 Spandrels and ring beams

(1) The shear force–chord rotation relationship of an unreinforced masonry spandrel that is not
supported by a reinforced concrete beam or a steel beam or a slab strip may be assumed elastic up to the peak
shear strength VR,peak calculated by Formula (14.2).

𝑉 , = 𝑓 ≤𝑉 , (14.2)
where:

𝑉 , = 𝑓 (14.3)
fvk0 is the characteristic initial shear strength of masonry, under zero compressive stress.

dsp is the spandrel depth;

tsp is the spandrel thickness;

hsp is the spandrel length;

bsp is a correction coefficient related to the shear stress distribution in the middle section of the
panel and to the aspect ratio hsp/dsp of the panel, however not smaller than 1,0 and not greater
than 1,5;

fvlt is the upper limit to the characteristic shear strength as per EN 1996-1-1 5.7.2.1.

(2) More refined modelling than in (1) may be used if the axial force in the spandrel can be reliably
estimated.

(3) If the model used for an unreinforced masonry spandrel does not capture the elongation due to non-
linear flexural deformations, its shear force-chord relationship may be assumed as elastic-perfectly plastic.

(4) If an unreinforced masonry spandrel model can capture the elongation due to non-linear flexural
deformations, the shear force-chord rotation relationship of the spandrel may be modelled as trilinear: (i)
linear elastic up to the yield chord rotation y=Vd/Keff where VR,peak is given by Formula (14.2), (ii) a drop to a
residual strength at y, (iii) a branch representing the residual strength which may be assumed as a function
of the axial force in the spandrel only. The shear force may be calculated assuming flexural rocking in the two
end sections of the spandrel for a zero tensile strength. The residual strength should not be taken greater than
VR,peak.

241
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(5) The flexural and shear capacity of reinforced and confined masonry spandrels and reinforced concrete
ring beams may be calculated assuming zero axial force. The shear force-chord relationship may be assumed
as elastic-perfectly plastic.

(6) Spandrels and ring beams may be modelled as elastic-perfectly plastic in compression with an
unlimited deformation capacity. In tension, unreinforced masonry spandrels may be modelled as elastic-
perfectly brittle; reinforced and confined masonry spandrels and ring beams may be modelled as elastic-
perfectly plastic with an unlimited deformation capacity.

NOTE The deformation capacity of spandrels is given in 14.9(5). The deformation capacity of reinforced concrete
beams is given in EN1998-1-1, 7.2.

14.5.2.4 Diaphragms and slabs

(1) If the diaphragm stiffness does not satisfy the condition of rigidity in 14.6.1.3(3), its actual stiffness
should be reflected in the model.

(2) Slabs and diaphragms may be modelled with a linear behaviour.

14.5.3 Global structural linear analysis

The control of second order effects according to 6.2.4. is not required.

The shear force and bending moments in piers obtained by linear analysis may be redistributed among
the piers if (3) to (9) are satisfied.

Whenever redistribution is carried out, global equilibrium should be satisfied.

NOTE This is realised if the total storey shear and the position of the resultant force are the same.

(4) If qR is taken greater than 1,0, the reduction or increase V of the absolute value of the shear force in
pier i in any type of masonry resulting from a redistribution of forces should not be greater than Vmax,i given
by Formula (14.4):

∆𝑉 , = min 𝑉 ; 0,05𝑉 (14.4)

where:

Vi is the shear force in pier i

Vstorey is the storey shear force in the direction of the pier

Vmax,I is the maximum value of the reduction or increase V of the absolute value of the shear force
in a pier resulting from a redistribution of forces

(5) If the behaviour factor component qR is set to 1,0, the redistribution of the shear forces in piers in
any type of masonry building with rigid diaphragms may be carried out according to (6) and (7).

(6) If qR=1,0, the maximum reduction or increase Vmax,i of the absolute value of the shear force in pier i is
defined in a) if the storey in the direction of the shear force that is redistributed is torsionally restrained or in
b) if it is unrestrained. The storey j may be considered as torsionally restrained in the horizontal direction x
(or y, respectively), if Formula (14.5) is satisfied.

𝑟 , ≥𝑙 , (respectively, 𝑟 , ≥ 𝑙 , ) (14.5)

242
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

where ry,j, rx,j and ls,j are defined in 4.4.3.

a) If storey j is torsionally restrained in the direction x (or y), redistribution may be carried out so that the
increase of shear in any pier along that direction is not greater than that given by Formula (14.6). There
is no limitation to the decrease of shear in a pier.
𝑢 ,
∆𝑉 , =𝑉 −1 (14.6)
𝜃 ℎ

where:

Vi is the shear force along direction x (or y) obtained from linear analysis in the pier i where the
shear force is increased;

i is the largest chord rotation in pier i calculated from the linear analysis;

hi is the free height of the pier over which the shear force is incremented;

𝑢 , is the interstorey displacement along direction x (or y) at the pier where the shear force is
incremented, corresponding to the attainment of the ultimate rotation in any pier of the storey
along direction x (or y); uult may be taken as given by Formula (14.7).

𝜃
𝑢 , =𝜃 ℎ 𝜃 ℎ (14.7)
𝜃∗

SD is the chord rotation capacity of a pier failing in shear given by Formula (14.17);

hmin is the free height of the shortest pier (i.e. with the lowest hi) in storey j, along the considered
direction;

 is the largest chord rotation in the shortest pier (i.e. with the lowest hi) in the storey j, along
the considered direction, calculated from the linear analysis.

If storey j is not torsionally restrained in the direction x (or y), redistribution of shears in direction x (or
y) may be carried out so that the absolute value of the increase or decrease of shear in any pier is not
greater than the limit given by Formula (14.8)

∆𝑉 , = max 0,2𝑉 ; 0,1 𝑉 (14.8)

where:

Vi is the shear force obtained by the linear analysis in the pier where the shear force is increased
or decreased;

Vstorey is the corresponding total storey shear force in the same direction.

(7) Shear force redistribution should not be carried out when the qR factor has been obtained by a non-
linear static analysis.

(8) The effects of shear force redistribution for the diaphragms, ring beams and drag ties should be taken
into account.

243
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(9) If diaphragms are flexible, shear forces may be redistributed among piers in the same vertical plane
according to (6) provided that piers are connected at each floor level by beams designed to resist and transmit
the effects of shear force redistribution.

NOTE In such case, the criteria associated to Formula (14.4), (14.6), (14.7) and (14.8) are applicable assuming that the
system of piers in the same vertical plane is a stand-alone planar structure (e.g. Vstorey is the sum of the shears in the piers
at the same storey, belonging to the same vertical plane).

(10) The redistribution of moments in beams of reinforced masonry buildings should satisfy EN 1996-
1:2019, 7.5.3.5

14.5.4 Linear structural analysis for determining the out-of-plane bending moment demand
on piers

(1) If Ed,E is calculated with a first order analysis, second order effects should be controlled according to
6.2.4.

(2) The seismic action effects Ed,E may be determined from floor acceleration response spectra.

(3) The acceleration floor response spectrum should account for the effect of the building period and the
non-linearity of the expected system behaviour.

(4) The floor acceleration response spectrum may be determined according to 7.2.1 and Annex C. The
height zj may be assumed as the height at the centre of the pier. The damping ratio ξa may be taken equal to
5%. Factor qD in Formula (7.2), Formula (C.1) and Formula (C.3) may be taken as given in a) or b):

a) for the SD verification of systems designed for DC1: 1,0;

b) for the SD verification of systems designed for DC2: qD according to 14.4.1;

(5) The boundary conditions of out-of-plane loaded piers should be determined according to EN 1996-
1:2019, 7.5.1. Restraint at a vertical edge may be considered or, as a simplification, neglected. Piers may be
modelled as 1D elements spanning between two floors or standing as a cantilever on one floor.

(6) For piers modelled as 1D elements, the first period T0 of the out-of-plane mechanism may be calculated
by Formula (14.9):

𝑇 =𝛽ℎ (14.9)

where:
 is a coefficient to account for the boundary conditions which may be taken equal to 1,8, 0,6 and
0,45 for n = 2,0, n = 1,0 and n = 0,75, respectively;

NOTE n is a factor related to the effective height as in EN 1996-1:2019, 7.5.1.3(10).

hpier is the clear height of the pier as in EN 1996-1:2019, 7.5.1.3(9);

Mpier is the mass of the pier, mass of non-loadbearing leave included, if any;
Esec is the short term secant modulus of elasticity of masonry;
Ioop is the moment of inertia of the pier with regard to out-of-plane bending.

(7) If a structure is not torsionally flexible and regular in elevation and if it complies with 5.3.3(1) for the
considered horizontal direction, a pier may be assumed as rigid in its out-of-plane direction if T0/T1 < 0,2
where T1 is the period of the first mode in the considered horizontal direction. If n modes are used, a pier may

244
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

be assumed as rigid in its out-of-plane direction for that mode if T0/Tn < 0,2 where Tn is the period of the nth
mode of the structure in the considered horizontal direction.

(8) The resultant horizontal force Foop acting on the out-of-plane loaded pier may be calculated according
to Formula (14.10). If the pier is rigid in its out-of-plane direction, Formula (14.11) may be used.

, ( , , )
𝐹 =𝑀 (14.10)

,
𝐹 =𝑀 (14.11)

where qoop is the behaviour factor for out-of-plane bending defined in 14.4.2.

(9) The design bending moment Moop,Ed due to out of plane action in a pier may be calculated with the
boundary conditions as in (6) and Foop as in (8). Foop may be distributed over the out-of-plane loaded pier in
proportion to the distribution of mass in the pier.

14.6 Verification of limit states

In unreinforced and confined masonry buildings, the in-plane and the out-of-plane resistances of
members should satisfy 6.2.3.

In reinforced masonry buildings, the in-plane and the out-of-plane resistances of members should
satisfy 6.2.3, but the out-of-plane resistance of walls spanning between rigid floor or roof diaphragms need
not be verified if the free storey height is smaller than 4 m.

14.6.1 Verification for in-plane actions

14.6.1.1 General

(1) The SD limit state may be verified through the force-based approach in EN 1998-1-1:2019, 6.4, or
through the displacement-based approach in EN 1998-1-1:2019, 6.5.

(2) The resistance in terms of generalised forces of each masonry member may be calculated in
accordance with EN 1996-1:2019.

NOTE The resistance of cyclically loaded masonry members in terms of generalised forces is similar to the resistance
of monotonically loaded masonry members.

(3) Diaphragms and bracings in horizontal planes and sub-horizontal planes (roofs) should satisfy 6.2.8.

(4) Force-based verifications of in-plane loaded primary members should be carried out in terms of axial
force, shear force and bending moment.

(5) Displacement-based verification should be carried out in terms of displacements at the control nodes.

(6) The shear and flexural resistance of in-plane loaded piers should be calculated taking into account
the axial force of the seismic design situation.

(7) The shear and flexural resistance of reinforced and confined masonry spandrels and of reinforced
concrete ring beams may be calculated assuming a zero axial force.

245
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(8) The flexural resistance of unreinforced masonry spandrels needs not to be checked when ties or ring
beams or stiff diaphragms are present in the proximity of the spandrel.

14.6.1.2 Verification of the SD limit state by the force-based approach

(1) The seismic action effects Ed should be calculated according to EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.

(2) For the calculation of the design resistance Rd of the members, partial factors M,SD for masonry
properties not smaller than 1,5 and s,SD for reinforcing steel should be used.

NOTE The value for s,SD is defined in 10.3.4(1). The values for M,SD is 2/3 of the value specified for M in EN 1996-
1:2019, Table 4.1 unless the National Annex or relevant Authorities give different values of M,SD for use in a country.

(3) Horizontal members should not govern the global force capacity check. If a horizontal masonry
member reach first its resistance, its effective stiffness may be reduced until a pier is governing the global
behaviour.

(4) Formula (6.30) of EN1998-1-1:2019 should be satisfied for all primary members.

14.6.1.3 Verification of the SD limit state through the displacement-based

approach

(1) The target displacement dt* may be calculated according to EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.5.4, without
considering the upper limit of 3det* for T*<TC.

(2) The resistance dSD at the SD limit state in terms of displacement at the control node of the masonry
building should be taken as given in Formula (14.12)

𝑑 = 𝑑 , (14.12)
,

where:

RdSD is the partial safety factor on resistance in terms of generalised displacements at SD;

dSD, is the displacement of the control node at which a primary pier first reaches its resistance in
terms of generalised in-plane deformations, that is the member drift ratio. The resistances in
terms of member drift ratio are given in 14.9.

NOTE 1 The value of RdSD is 1,75 unless the National Annex or relevant Authorities give different values of RdSD for
use in a country. The National Annex can specify different values of RdSD for unreinforced masonry, confined masonry
and reinforced masonry buildings.

NOTE 2 This definition replaces the one in EN 1998-1-1, 6.7.2(2).

(3) The structure should satisfy Formula (14.13)

𝑑∗ ≤ max 𝑑∗ , 𝑑∗ (14.13)

where:

𝑑∗ is the displacement of the control node at which a primary pier first reaches its resistance in
terms of generalised in-plane forces. 𝑑∗ should be calculated from dy according to EN 1998-1-
1:2019, Formula (6.24);

246
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

dSD* should be calculated from dSD according to EN 1998-1-1:2019, Formula (6.24).

14.6.1.4 Verification of the NC limit state

(1) In case the NC limit state is used, the seismic action effects Ed may be determined according to EN
1998-1-1:2019, 6.5.

(2) 14.6.1.3(1) applies.

(3) The resistance dNC of the masonry building should be taken as given in Formula (14.14).

𝑑 = max (𝑑 , 𝑑 , ) (14.14)
,

where

RdNC is the partial safety factor on resistance in terms of generalised displacements at NC;

dy is the displacement of the control node for which the first primary pier reaches its resistance
in terms of generalised in-plane forces

dNC,θ is the displacement of the control node for which the total base shear of the system has dropped
below 80% of the peak resistance or the displacement at which the first primary element
reaches an element drift ratio of 1,2 times its resistance at the NC limit state, whichever occurs
first. The resistances in terms of element drift ratio are given in 14.9

NOTE 1 The value of γRd,NC is 1,75 unless the National Annex or relevant Authorities give different values of γRd,NC for
use in a country. The National Annex can specify different values of γRd,NC for unreinforced masonry, confined masonry
and reinforced masonry buildings.

NOTE 2 (14.4) replaces Formula (6.32) in EN 1998-1-1, 6.7.3(2).

(4) The structure should satisfy Formula (14.15)

𝑑∗ ≤ 𝑑∗ (14.15)

where dNC* should be calculated from dNC according to EN 1998-1-1:2019, Formula (6.24).

14.6.2 Verification for out-of-plane actions at SD limit state

(1) For out-of-plane action effects, primary and secondary seismic piers, including parapets and gables
walls, should satisfy in all critical sections Formula (14.16), unless they comply with 14.7.1(3).

𝑀 , ≤𝑀 , (14.16)

where

Moop,Ed is the design bending moment due to out of plane action

Moop,Rd is the design bending resistance against out of plane action effect

(2) The design resistance Moop,Rd may be calculated according to EN 1996-1:2019, 8.5.4, assuming a
rectangular stress distribution on the cross section of the wall.

247
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

NOTE Second order effects are accounted for on the resistance side by referring to the provisions given in EN 1996-1-
1:2019 Annex F for unreinforced masonry, EN 1996-1-1:2019, 8.7.4 for reinforced masonry and EN 1996-1-1:2019,
8.10.4 for confined masonry.

(3) Moop,Rd may be calculated assuming an axial load on the pier NEd,G of the non-seismic actions in the
seismic design situation.

(4) For the calculation of Moop,Rd, partial factors M,SD for masonry properties, not smaller than 1,5, should
be used.

NOTE The values for M,SD is 2/3 of the value specified in EN 1996-1-1:2019, unless the National Annex or relevant
Authorities give different values of M,SD for use in a country.

(5) The demand Moop,d at the SD limit state may be calculated according to 14.5.4.

NOTE As alternative method to check the out-of-plane stability at the SD limit state is the displacement-based
approach in EN1998-3.

14.7 Design rules for members

14.7.1 Limitations of piers and walls dimensions in DC1 and DC2

For primary piers, the ratio of their length lmp to the greater clear height hop of the adjacent openings
should not be smaller than (lmp/hop)min given in Table 14.2.

The out-of-plane failures of piers, of secondary walls and of ancillary walls should be prevented.

NOTE The conditions for a member to be secondary are given in 4.4.2.

For Sδ smaller than 6,25 m/s2, (2) may be considered satisfied if the ratio hef/tef of the effective pier
or wall height to its effective thickness does not exceed (hef/tef)max given in Table 14.2.

NOTE The effective height hef and the effective thickness tef are defined in EN 1996-1-1:2019, 7.5.1.3 and 7.5.1.4.

(4) If the limitations of Sδ and hef/tef in (3) are not satisfied, the out-of-plane capacity of piers, of secondary
walls and of ancillary walls should satisfy 14.6.2.

(5) For ancillary walls less than 3,0 m high, (2) may be considered satisfied without condition if Sδ is
smaller than 3,0 m/s2.

(6) Wall ties of non-loadbearing leaves of cavity walls and of veneer walls are should be such that (2) and
7.6 are satisfied.

248
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Table 14.2 — Geometric limits for piers and walls

(hef /tef)max (hef /tef)max

Masonry type S (m/s2) (lmp/hop)min
Config. 1 Config. 2

5,0 < S ≤ 6,25 7 5 0,50

Unreinforced
3,0 < S < 5,0 12 7 0,45
Group 1 and 1S
S < 3,0 20 10 0,35

5,0 < S ≤ 6,25 10 5 0,40

Unreinforced
3,0 < S < 5,0 15 7 0,40
Other Groups
S < 3,0 20 10 0,35

Confined masonry S ≤ 6,25 20 20 0,30

Reinforced masonry S ≤ 6,25 20 20 No limit

Note: The table differentiates between two pier or walls configurations:

a) Configuration 1 comprises piers or walls spanning between two floors.
b) Configuration 2 comprises parapets, cantilever piers or walls and chimneys.

14.7.2 Design rules for unreinforced masonry in DC2

(1) The action effects in the ring ties or ring beams should be determined as for other structural
members and satisfy design conditions in 10, 11, 12, 13 or 15. The axial resistance of ring ties and ring beams
should not be smaller than 150 kN.

(2) Reinforced concrete ring beams should satisfy a), b), c), d) and e):

a) their depth hRB should not be smaller than 150 mm or the slab thickness, whichever is greater;
b) their width tRB should be such that the beam extends over the entire wall thickness tw minus a set-back;
the set-back should not be greater than max(60 mm, 0,3 tw) if tw ≤ 300 mm and 0,3tw if tw > 300 mm.
c) the area of longitudinal reinforcement should not be smaller than Asl = 450 mm2
d) the shear reinforcement should be closed stirrups with an area not smaller than Asw = 225 mm2/m;

NOTE Further information for ring beams can be found in the National Annex.

14.7.3 Design rules for confined masonry in DC2

(1) The horizontal and vertical confining members should be bonded together, anchored to the members
of the main structural system and to the foundation. Longitudinal reinforcement from vertical confining
members should be anchored at the bottom of the foundation.

(2) The concrete of the confining members should be cast after the masonry is constructed. Effective bond
should be ensured either by toothing at the wall-to-vertical confining member interface or by providing
horizontal dowel bars at regular spacing over the wall height. Horizontal dowel reinforcement should be

249
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

placed either in the form of a single reinforcing bar of 6 mm diameter and 400 mm length at maximum 600 mm
vertical spacing, or in the form of ladder-shaped wire reinforcement at maximum 400 mm vertical spacing.

(3) The cross-sectional dimensions of both horizontal and vertical confining members should not be
smaller than 150 mm.

(4) In double-leaf walls in which both leaves are structural walls, each confining member should confine
the two leaves simultaneously.

(5) Vertical confining members should be placed:

a) at the free edges of each structural wall

b) at both sides of any wall opening of area greater than 1,5 m2
c) with a spacing not exceeding 4 m if Sδ is greater 3m/s2 and 5 m if Sδ is smaller than 3m/s2
d) at all structural wall intersections.

(6) Vertical confining members complying with (4) but which are distant of less than 1m from the
confining member present at a wall intersection may be omitted.

(7) Vertical confining members at wall intersections should not be omitted.

(8) The horizontal confining members should be placed in the plane of the wall at every floor level with a
vertical spacing not greater than 4 m.

(9) The longitudinal reinforcement ratio in confining members should not be smaller than 0,8% or four
diameter 10mm whichever the greater. In building more than one storey high, if Sδ > 6,25 m/s2, the minimum
longitudinal bars are four diameter 12mm.

(10) The diameter of stirrups should not be smaller than 5 mm and their spacing not greater than 150 mm.
If Sδ > 6,25 m/s2, the spacing of stirrups in vertical confining members should not be greater than 100 mm
within 0,6 m of the member ends at each storey level.

(11) If Sδ > 6,25 m/s2, longitudinal reinforcement should be Class B or C; stirrups may be of Class B. If Sδ ≤
6,25 m/s2, longitudinal reinforcement may be Class B and stirrups Class A.

(12) Lap splices should not be shorter than 60 times the diameter of the bars being spliced.

14.7.4 Design rules for reinforced masonry in DC2

(1) Horizontal reinforcement should be placed either in the bed joints or in grooves in the units, with a
vertical spacing not exceeding 600 mm.

(2) Masonry units with recesses should accommodate the reinforcement needed in lintels and parapets.
Prefabricated lintels with suitable capacity and reinforcement may also be used.

(3) Parapets and lintels should be regularly bonded to the masonry of the adjoining walls and connected
by means of continuous longitudinal reinforcement.

(4) The diameter of horizontal reinforcing bars should not be less than 5 mm; they should be anchored by
bends or hooks or loops around the vertical bars at the edges of the wall.

(5) The percentage of horizontal reinforcement in the wall, normalised with respect to the gross area of
the section, should not be smaller than 0,05%.

250
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(6) The amount of horizontal reinforcement should not lead to a failure of compression struts prior to the
yielding of the horizontal steel reinforcement.

NOTE Compression strut failure can be checked according to EN 1996-1:2019, 8.8.2(4).

(7) The amount of horizontal reinforcement should not lead to a failure of compression struts prior to the
yielding of the horizontal steel reinforcement.

(8) The total amount of vertical reinforcement in a wall should not be smaller than 0,05% of the gross
area of its horizontal section.

(9) Vertical reinforcement should be placed in pockets, cavities or holes in the units.

(10) Vertical reinforcement with a cross-sectional area not smaller than 200 mm2 should be placed as given
in a) to d):

a) at both free end of a wall;

b) at each wall intersection;

c) within the wall, not exceeding a horizontal spacing of 5 m between such reinforcing bars;

d) at both sides of any wall opening of area greater than 1,5 m2.

(11) The amount of horizontal reinforcement should not lead to a failure of compression struts prior to the
yielding of the horizontal steel reinforcement.

(12) If Sδ > 3m/s2, longitudinal reinforcement should be Class C while shear reinforcement may be of Class
B. If Sδ ≤ 3m/s2, longitudinal reinforcement may be Class B and shear reinforcement Class A.

(13) Lap splices should not be shorter than 60 times the diameter of the bars being spliced.

14.8 Rules for simple masonry buildings

14.8.1 General

(1) Buildings conforming to 14.8.2 and 14.8.3 are classified “simple masonry buildings”.

(2) For simple masonry buildings, the verifications in 14.6 may be replaced by those in 14.8.3.

14.8.2 Design criteria for simple masonry buildings

The plan configuration of buildings should fulfil conditions a), a) and b):

a) the plan should be approximately rectangular;

b) the ratio between the length of the small side and the length of the long side in plan should not be smaller
than 0,25;
c) the area of projections of recesses from the rectangular shape should be not greater than 15% of the total
floor area above the level considered.

Buildings should be regular in elevation and comply with 4.4.4.2(1) a) and b).

The roof and slab diaphragms should comply with 14.2.2.

251
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(4) The shear walls of simple masonry buildings should satisfy conditions a) to i):

a) The primary walls should be placed almost symmetrically in plan in two orthogonal directions.

b) The primary walls should be placed far from the centre of mass so that the building is not classified as
torsionally flexible.

c) The primary walls should be continuous from the foundation to the top of the building.

d) The primary and secondary walls should satisfy the limitations to hef/tef in Table 14.2; primary walls
should also satisfy the limitations to lmp/hop in Table 14.2.

e) For Sδ > 3 m/s2, primary walls in unreinforced masonry should satisfy 14.7.2, primary walls in confined
masonry should satisfy 14.7.3 and primary walls in reinforced masonry should satisfy 14.7.4.

f) In unreinforced masonry buildings, at least 75% of the vertical loads should be supported by primary
walls and should be distributed almost equally to primary walls in both directions.

g) In unreinforced masonry buildings, if Sδ > 3 m/s2, there should be at least two primary shear walls in each
direction which should have a length lmp not less than that corresponding to twice the minimum value of
lmp/hop in Table 14.2. In each horizontal direction, the spacing of these two primary walls should not be
smaller than 60% of the building dimension orthogonal to the wall plane. If Sδ ≤ 3 m/s2, the alternative g)
may be satisfied.

h) In unreinforced masonry buildings, if Sδ ≤ 3 m/s2, there should be at least two primary shear walls in one
principal direction with a spacing of these walls not smaller than 75% of the building dimension
orthogonal to the wall plane; in the other direction, there should be at least one primary shear wall of
length l not smaller than that corresponding to twice the minimum value of lmp/hop in Table 14.2.

i) For reinforced or confined masonry buildings, the average primary wall length should not be smaller than
1,5 m if Sδ ≤ 4 m/s2. For buildings with 3 or 4 storeys and Sδ > 4 m/s2, this minimum average wall length
should be 2,5 m.

(5) In unreinforced masonry buildings, walls in one direction should be connected with walls in the
orthogonal direction at a maximum spacing of 7 m. The connection may be achieved through interlocking of
units or details that have similar effects.

(6) The number Ns of storeys should not be greater than Nmax .

NOTE 1 The number Ns of storeys includes the ground storey and does not include the underground storeys and the
roof space above full storeys.

NOTE 2 The value Nmax is 4, unless the National Annex or relevant Authorities give other values for use in a country,
which can be different for unreinforced, confined and reinforced masonry buildings.

14.8.3 Design rules for simple masonry buildings

(1) The ratio of the total cross-sectional area Amp,tot of walls in each direction to the total floor area per
storey should be greater than a ratio pA related to the intended number N of storeys of the building and the
seismic action index Sδ.

(2) For unreinforced masonry construction, the minimum ratio pA of the area of walls in one direction to
the total floor area may be calculated by Formula (14.17):

252
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑝 =𝑝 , 𝑐 𝛾 ≥𝑝 , (14.17)

where:

pA,ref is the reference ratio of the area of walls in one direction as given in Table 4.3;

γSB is a partial safety factor;

,
cf is a factor to account for the masonry typology defined as 𝑐 = max ( , 0,8);

fk is the characteristic compressive strength of the masonry of the walls;

pA,min is the absolute minimum ratio of the area of walls in one direction as a percentage of the floor
area.

NOTE 1 The value for SB is 1,0, unless the National Annex or relevant Authorities give different values of SB for use in
a country, which may be different for unreinforced, confined and reinforced masonry.

NOTE 2 The value for pA,min is 0,020 for unreinforced masonry buildings and 0,015 for reinforced and confined masonry
buildings, unless the National Annex or relevant Authorities give different values for use in a country.

(3) For reinforced and confined masonry, the ratio pA of the total floor area per storey may be calculated
with Formula (14.17) , where cf may be taken equal to 1,0.

(4) Intermediate pA,ref values may be derived by linear interpolation.

(5) If piers of masonry typologies with different characteristic compressive strengths fk are used in the
same storey, the minimum fk should be used to calculate the required wall areas.

(6) For unreinforced, reinforced and confined simple masonry buildings, the axial load ratio of piers
should fulfil condition a) or b):

a) The axial load ratio Gk of any pier and at any storey under gravity loads of the seismic design situation
alone should not be greater than 0,20.

NOTE νGk is defined in 14.4.1(2)

b) The average axial load ratio Ptot /(Amp,i min(fki)) in any storey should not be greater than 0,15

where:

Ptot is the total gravity load at and above the storey in the seismic design situation,

Amp,i is the area of the primary pier i of this storey in both directions

min(fki) is the minimum characteristic compressive strength of any of all piers.

253
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Table 4.3 — Values of parameter pA,ref characterising the minimum area of shear walls for simple
masonry buildings

Seismic action index Sδ < 0,3 < 0,6 < 1,2 < 2,4 < 3,6 < 4,8 < 6,0
m/s2 m/s2 m/s2 m/s2 m/s2 m/s2 m/s2

Number N Values of pA,ref as function of the total floor area per storey
Type of masonry of storeys

1 0,020 0,025 0,030 0,035 0,040 0,045 0,055

Unreinforced 2 0,020 0,025 0,030 0,035 0,045 0,050 0,060
masonry 3 0,030 0,035 0,040 0,045 0,055 0,060 NA* NA*
4 0,040 0,045 0,050 0,055 0,065 NA*

1 0,015 0,015 0,015 0,020 0,025 0,030 0,035

Reinforced and 2 0,015 0,015 0,020 0,025 0,030 0,035 0,040
confined masonry 3 0,020 0,025 0,025 0,030 0,035 0,040 0,045
4 0,030 0,030 0,030 0,035 0,045 0,050 0,055
NOTE 1 NA* means “Not Acceptable”.

NOTE 2 If the axial load at the top of a pier acts at with an eccentricity to the central plane of the pier, the deformation
capacity of the pier is reduced and qD may be reduced according to Annex J.

14.9 Ultimate deformations

14.9.1 General

(1) The drift ratio or chord rotation e of a masonry member should be calculated as given by Formula
(14.18):

𝜃 = max 𝜃 , 𝜃 (14.18)

where

i (resp. j) is the angle between the member axis at end section i (respectively j) and the chord line that
joins the centroids of the two end sections.

14.9.2 Unreinforced masonry members

(1) u2,SD of piers failing in shear should be taken as a) or b):

a) the value given in Table 14.4, for axial load ratios Ek ≤ 0,3,

b) the value given in Table 14.4 divided by 3 or the deformation capacity at the elastic limit, whichever is
greater, for axial load ratios Ek > 0,3.

where:

E,k is the pier axial load ratio calculated as E,k =NEd/(Afk);

NEd is the axial force in the seismic design situation;

A is the pier section area;

254
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

fk is the characteristic compressive strength of the masonry pier.

(2) If νG,k ≤ 0,2, (2)a) may be applied.

(3) The drift capacity of piers failing in flexure may be taken equal to twice the capacity of a pier failing
in shear.

(4) The deformation capacity in terms of member drift ratio of the pier at 20% drop in strength may be
taken as 1,5 times θSD

(5) The deformation capacity of unreinforced masonry spandrels in terms of chord rotation may be
taken equal to four times the drift capacity of unreinforced masonry piers.

(6) The deformation capacity of a composite spandrel in terms of chord rotation may be calculated from
the rotational capacity of the beam.

14.9.3 Reinforced masonry members

(1) Unless drift capacity estimates are available from tests on reinforced masonry members, the drift
capacity of reinforced masonry members may be assumed as 1,5 times those of unreinforced masonry ones.

14.9.4 Confined masonry members

(1) Unless drift capacity estimates are available from tests on confined masonry members, the drift
capacity of confined masonry members may be assumed as 1,25 times those of unreinforced masonry ones.

Table 14.4— Unreinforced masonry: deformation capacities for piers failing in shear. Applicable for
axial load ratios Ek ≤ 0,3

Masonry type qSD

Clay units, Gr 2 0.30%

Clay units, Gr 1s 0.675%
Calcium silicate (hollow and solid) 0.275%
AAC Gr 1 and 1s 0.375%
Light-weight concrete units, Gr 1 0.30%

255
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

15 SPECIFIC RULES FOR ALUMINIUM BUILDINGS

15.1 Scope

15 should be applied to the design and the verification of aluminium buildings, in seismic regions.

15 should be applied as a complement to EN 1999-1-1:2019.

15.2 Basis of Design

15.2.1 Design concepts

(1) Earthquake resistant aluminium buildings should be designed in one of the following Ductility
Classes (see Table 15.1):

— DC1: Low-dissipative structural behaviour;

— DC2: Dissipative structural behaviour.

Table 15.1 — Structural ductility classes and upper limit reference values of the behaviour factors

Structural ductility Range of the reference values of

class the behaviour factor q

DC1 1,5

only limited by the values of

DC2
Table 15.3

(2) In DC1, the action effects may be calculated on the basis of an elastic global analysis without taking
into account the non-linear material behaviour.

(3) In DC1, the resistance of the members and of the connections should be evaluated in accordance with
EN 1999 without any additional provisions.

(4) In DC2, the capability of parts of the structure (dissipative zones) to resist earthquake actions
through inelastic behaviour may be taken into account with upper limit values of qD and qR depending on the
Ductility Class and the structural type (see 15.4). 15.3 to 15.6 and 15.8 to 15.14 should be applied.

(5) In order for DC2 class to provide an increased ability of the structure to dissipate energy in plastic
mechanisms, specific provisionsin one or more of the following aspects should be met: plastic deformation
capacity of structural elements and connections, ability to form global plastic mechanisms.

15.2.2 Safety verifications

(1) In the capacity design verifications specified in 15.8 to 15.14, the possibility that the actual strength
of aluminium is higher than the nominal one should be taken into account by a factor γrm , which is the ratio
of the expected (i.e. average) value of the conventional elastic limit 𝑓 to its design value from EN 1999-1-1.

NOTE The value of γrm is 1,45, unless the National Annex gives a different value for use in a country.

(2) The partial factors γM,i given by EN1999-1-1 should be used for both non-dissipative and dissipative
members

256
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

15.3 Materials

(1) Structural aluminium should conform to standards referred to in EN 1999. For the dissipative
elements of DC2, Table 15.2 should be followed. The alloys to be used for DC1 structures and DC2 non-
dissipative elements should conform to EN1999-1-1.

(2) Alloys different from those specified in Table 15.2 may be used, provided that the ratio fu/f0 is not
smaller than 1,10 and the elongation at failure is not smaller than 10%, where fu is the ultimate tensile strength
and f0 is the conventional elastic strength.

(3) In bolted connections high strength pre-loaded galvanised steel bolts grade 8.8 or 10.9 or stainless
steel bolts should be used.

(4) The checking of material properties should be in accordance with ISO 6892-1.

Table 15.2 — Aluminium alloys for dissipative parts of DC2 seismic resisting frames
Structural element Product form alloy temper thickness
H12 |
5052 ≤40
H22/H32
5049 O / H111 ≤100
5083 O/H111 ≤80
O/H111 ≤120
Sheet, strip and plate _ 5383
H116/H321 ≤80
5454 O/H111 ≤80
5754 O/H111 ≤100
6061 T4 / T451 ≤12,5
6082 T4 / T451 ≤12,5
O/H111
ET,EP,ER/B 5083 ≤200
F/H112
O/H111
ET,EP,ER/B 5454 ≤25
F/H112
O/H111
Extruded profiles, extruded ET,EP,ER/B 5754 ≤25
F/H112
tube, extruded rod/bar and DT T6 ≤20
drawn tube 6060
EP,ET,ER/B T64 ≤15
EP,ET,ER/B T4 ≤25
6061
DT T4 ≤20
EP,ET,ER/B 6082 T4 ≤25
Legend:
EP- Extruded profiles ET- Extruded tube
ER/B- Extruded rod and bar DT- Drawn tube

15.4 Structural types, behaviour factors and limits of seismic action

15.4.1 Structural types

(1) Aluminium buildings may be assigned to one of the structural types in a) to d) according to the
behaviour of their primary resisting structure under seismic actions (see Figures 11.1 to 11.4 and 11.17):

Moment resisting frames, in which horizontal forces are mainly resisted by members acting in an
essentially flexural manner.

257
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Frames with concentric bracings, in which horizontal forces are mainly resisted by members subjected to
axial forces.

Dual frames, in which at least 25% of the lateral force resistance is provided by moment resisting frames
that are combined with frames with concentric bracings, which provide the rest of the lateral force
resistance.

Inverted pendulum structures, in which 50% or more of the mass is in the upper third of the height of the
structure, or in which the dissipation of energy takes place mainly at the base of a single building element
or at the bases of columns.

(2) 11.4.1(2) to (5) and (7) apply to aluminium buildings as well.

15.4.2 Behaviour factors

(1) The behaviour factor q, complying with EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.1, should account for the deformation
capacity, the energy dissipation capacity of the structure and the relevant sources of overstrength. For regular
structural systems, where softening effects of Heat Affected Zones (HAZ) are not detrimental for their
performance, the behaviour factor components qD and qR may be taken with default values given in Table 15.3,
provided that the rules in 15.8 to 15.14 are met.

Table 15.3 — Default values of behaviour factors for aluminium building regular in elevation
Ductility Class
STRUCTURAL TYPE DC2
qD qR q
Moment resisting frames (MRFs)
Single-storey MRFs 1,5 1,1 2,5
Multi-storey MRFs 1,5 1,3 3,0
Frames with concentric bracings
Diagonal bracings
1,5 1,0 2,3
V-bracings
X-bracings on either single or two-storey
Dual frames (MRFs with concentric bracing) 1,7 1,2 3,0
Inverted pendulum 1,3 1,0 2,0
(2) 11.4.2(2) applies to aluminium buildings.

15.4.3 Limits of seismic action for design to DC1 and DC2

(1) For each structural type, design to a given Ductility Class should not be made above levels of seismic
action index Sδ (see EN 1998-1-1:2019, 4.1(4)) given in Table 15.4.

Table 15.4 — Limits of seismic action index Sδ for design of aluminium buildings to DC1 and DC2
Structural type Limits of seismicity index Sδ (m/s2)
DC1 DC2
Moment frames 5,0 no limits
Frames with concentric bracings 5,0 no limits
Dual frames (Moment frames with concentric bracing) 5,0 no limits
Inverted pendulum 2,5 5,0

258
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) If a behaviour factor q=1,0 is used in design, the upper limits of seismic action index Sδ in Table 15.4 may
be waived for all structural systems.

15.5 Structural analysis

(1) Except where otherwise specified in 15 (e.g. frames with tension-only concentric bracings, see
15.10.2(2)), the analysis of the structure may be made assuming that all primary members are active.

15.6 Verification to Limit States

15.6.1 General

(1) The verification of structural elements to limit states should comply with 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3.

15.6.2 Resistance conditions at Significant Damage limit state

(1) The resistance of structural members and connections at SD should be verified using EN 1999.

(2) The second-order effects should be verified in accordance with 6.2.4.

15.6.3 Limitation of interstorey drift at Significant Damage limit state

(1) The interstorey drift at SD limit state should be limited as given in a) or b):

dr,SD ≤ 0,020 hs for moment frames;

dr,SD ≤ 0,015 hs for frames with concentric bracings, for dual frames and inverted pendulum structures;

where:

dr,SD is as given in 6.2.4;

hs is the interstorey height.

15.7 Design rules for low-dissipative (DC1) structural behaviour common to all structural
types
15.7.1 General

(1) 5.7.2 should be applied to the primary members of structures designed for low-dissipative behaviour.

15.7.2 Design rules for low-dissipative structures

(1) Structural members and connections should have adequate stiffness, resistance and stability, which
should be verified in accordance with EN 1999-1-1.

15.8 Design rules for dissipative (DC2) structural behaviour common to all structural types
15.8.1 General

(1) 15.8.2 to 15.8.5 should be applied to the members of the primary structures designed for dissipative
behaviour.

259
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

15.8.2 Design criteria for dissipative structures

(1) 11.8.2(1) and (2) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(2) Dissipative zones may be located in the structural members.

(3) The non-dissipative parts and the connections of the dissipative parts to the rest of the structure
should have sufficient overstrength to allow the development of cyclic yielding in the dissipative parts.

(4) The use of transversal welds in dissipative zones should be avoided.

15.8.3 Design rules for dissipative elements in compression or bending

(1) Members which dissipate energy in compression or bending should be limited to cross-sectional class
1 in EN 1999-1-1:2007.

15.8.4 Design rules for dissipative parts of elements in tension

(1) For tension members or parts of members in tension, the ductility requirement of EN 1999-1-1:2007
should be met.

15.8.5 Design rules for non-dissipative members

(1) The strength and stability of non-dissipative members in DC2 should be verified considering the most
unfavourable combination of the axial force NEd, bending moments MEd and shear force VEd, calculated
according to Formulae (15.1).

𝑁 =𝑁 , "+" 𝛺 ∙ 𝑁 ,

𝑀 =𝑀 , "+"𝛺∙𝑀 , (15.1)

𝑉 =𝑉 , "+"𝛺∙𝑉 ,

where:

NEd,G , MEd,G and VEd,G are the axial force, the bending moment and shear force in the non-dissipative member
due to the non-seismic actions included in the combination of actions for the seismic design situation;

NEd,E , MEd,E and VEd,E are the axial force, the bending moment and shear force in the non-dissipative member
to the design seismic action;

 is the action magnification factor given in (2).

(2) The action magnification factor Ω should be taken to depend on the type of plastic behaviour of the
dissipative zone and on the structural system according to Table 15.5.

.Table 15.5 — Members to which (1) apply. Values of seismic action magnification factor Ω in DC2
STRUCTURAL TYPE Ω Members to which (1) apply
Moment resisting frames (MRFs)
Single-storey MRFs 1,8
columns
Multi-storey MRFs 2,0
Frames with concentric bracings
1,5
Diagonal bracings beams and columns

260
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

V-bracings
X-bracings on either single or two-storey
beams and columns of the
Dual frames (MRFs with concentric bracing) 2,0 concentric bracing; columns of
the MRF
Inverted pendulum 1,5 columns

15.8.6 Design rules for connections in dissipative zones

(1) The resistance of non-dissipative connections of dissipative members made by means of welds shall
be evaluated by accounting for the deteriorated contribution of the heat affected zone in order to satisfy
Formula (15.2).

(2) Non-dissipative connections should be designed for the relevant forces/moments at the location of
the connection in accordance with 15.8.5. For fillet welded or bolted non-dissipative connections at the
location the dissipative zones, the condition given by Formula (15.2) should be satisfied.

𝑅 ≥𝛾 𝛾 𝑅 (15.2)

where:

Rd is the design resistance of the connection in accordance with EN 1999-1-1;

Rfo is the plastic resistance of the connected dissipative member evaluated in the expected
position of the plastic hinge and based on the nominal conventional elastic strength of the
material as defined in EN 1999-1-1;

rm is the material overstrength factor in the dissipative zones (see 15.2.2);

sh is the hardening factor in the dissipative zones (see 15.8.6(4)).

(3) Factor sh should be taken to depend on the type of plastic behaviour of the dissipative zone and on
the structural system. Unless estimated with a refined analytical method, experimental validation or finite
element simulation, γsh should be taken as:

a) For elements in plastic bending: as 1,3 or the value calculated in accordance with Annex L of EN1999-
1-1, whichever is greater;

b) For elements in plastic tension: as 1,5 or the ratio , whichever is greater.

(4) Category C bolted joints in shear and category E bolted joints in tension in accordance with EN 1999-
1-1 should be used for DC2.

15.8.7 Design rules for column-to-column splices

(1) 11.8.7(1), (2) and (4) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(2) The resistance of the welded splice should be evaluated accounting for the influence of the heat
affected zone.

261
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

15.9 Design rules for moment resisting frames

15.9.1 Design criteria

(1) 11.9.1(1) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(2) Depending on the location of the dissipative zones, either 15.8.2(4) or 15.8.2(5) should be applied.

(3) The target hinge formation pattern should be achieved by conforming to 15.9.2, 15.9.3 and 15.9.4.

15.9.2 Beams

(1) Beams should be verified to have sufficient resistance against lateral and lateral torsional buckling in
accordance with EN 1999-1-1 assuming the formation of a plastic hinge at one end of the beam. The most
stressed beam end in the seismic design situation should be considered for the verification.

(2) 11.9.2(5) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

15.9.3 Columns

(1) Formula (6.4) in 6.2.7(9) should be verified. The strength and stability of columns should be also
verified in compression, bending and shear considering the most unfavourable combination of NEd, MEd and
VEd from 15.8.5(1).

(2) The resistance verifications of columns should be made in accordance with EN 1999-1-1:20XX.

(3) If a plastic hinge is expected in the column its shear force VEd from the analysis should satisfy Formula
(15.3).

𝑉 ≤ 0,5 𝑉 (15.3)

(4) 11.9.3(6) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(5) 11.9.3(7) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

15.9.4 Beam to column joints

(1) The connections of the beams to the columns and the column web panels should be designed for
overstrength as given by Formula (15.2) for both single- and double-sided joints.

(2) 11.9.4(5) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(3) 11.9.4(6) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

15.9.5 Column base joints

(1) The resistance of rigid full strength non-dissipative base connections Mc,j,Rd should comply with
Formula (15.4).

𝑀 ,, ≥𝛾 𝛾 𝑀 (𝑁 ) (15.4)

where:

MRd(NEd) is the design moment resistance of the column taking into account the axial load NEd, in the
seismic design situation;

262
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

rm is the material overstrength factor given in 15.2.2.

sh is the hardening factor of the plastic hinge (see 15.8.6(4)).

15.10 Design rules for frames with concentric bracings

15.10.1 Design criteria for DC2

(1)P 11.10.1(1) shall be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(2) 11.10.1(2) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(3) 11.10.1(3) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

15.10.2 Analysis for DC2

(1) 11.10.2(1) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(2) The diagonals should be taken into account using an elastic analysis of the structure for the seismic
action, according to a) and b):

The “tension-only” model may be only used for frames with X diagonal bracings or split X diagonal
bracings;

In frames with V bracings, both the tension and compression diagonals should be taken into account;

(3) 11.10.2(3) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(4) 11.10.2(4) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

15.10.3 Diagonal members

(1) The cross section of diagonal bracings should be of class 1 according to EN1999-1-1:2007.

(2) 11.10.3(2) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(3) 11.10.3(3) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(4) 11.10.3(4) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(5) 11.10.3(5) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(6) 11.10.3(6) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(7) 11.10.3(7) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(8) The connections of the diagonals to any member should satisfy the rules of 15.8.6 with γsh given in
15.8.6(4).

15.10.4 Beams and columns

(1) The strength and stability of both beams and columns should be verified in compression, bending and
shear considering the most unfavourable combination of the axial force NEd, bending moments MEd and shear
force VEd calculated in accordance with Formula (15.1).

263
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) 11.10.4(4) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(3) 11.10.4(8) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

15.10.5 Beam to column connections

(1) 11.10.5(1) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(2) 10.5(2) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well with the material variability factor rm as in
15.2.2 and sh, the hardening factor, as in 15.8.6(4).

15.10.6 Brace connections

(1) 11.10.6(1) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(2) 11.10.6(2) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well, with rm and sh as in 15.10.5(2).

(3) 11.10.6(3) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(4) 11.10.6(4) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

15.10.7 Column base joints

(1) 11.10.7(1) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well, with rm and sh as in 15.10.5(2).

(2) 11.10.7(2) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well,

(3) 11.10.7(3) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well,

15.11 Design rules for dual frames - moment resisting frames combined with concentric
bracings
15.11.1 Design criteria

(1) 11.13.1(1) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(2) 11.13.1(2) should be applied in aluminium buildings as well.

(3) The moment resisting frames and the braced frames should conform to 15.9. and 15.10, respectively.

15.12 Design rules for inverted pendulum structures

(1) 11.15(1) to (4) apply to inverted pendulum aluminium structures (defined in 15.4.1(d)).

15.13 Aluminium diaphragms

(1) The design of floor diaphragms, chord and collector beams should conform to 6.2.8 and 11.17.

15.14 Transfer level. Design for DC2

(1) Diaphragms in transfer levels should be designed to 6.2.9(7) and 11.17.

15.15 Checking of design, supply of material and execution

(1)P The checking of the design should ensure that the real structure corresponds to the one designed.

264
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) The type of aluminium alloy and the relevant maximum yield stress f0 in the dissipative zones, the
grade and the tightening force of bolts and the quality of the welds should be indicated in the drawings for
fabrication.

(3) The technical drawings and reports should clearly specify that aluminium alloys with resistance
greater than specified should not be supplied for the dissipative zones.

(4) Execution Class 3 should be considered for all consequence classes and ductility classes, with the
exception of Consequence Class 1 where Execution Class 2 may be adopted.

265
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(informative)

CHARACTERISTICS OF EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT BUILDINGS AND IN PLAN

REGULARITY

A.1 Scope and general

(1) This annex gives good practice rules governing earthquake resistant design relative to:
structural simplicity; uniformity, symmetry and redundancy; bi-directional resistance and stiffness; torsional
resistance and stiffness; diaphragmatic behaviour at storey level; equate foundation; structural regularity in
plan. These good practice rules are further elaborated hereunder.

(2) Good practice rules should not be considered as mandatory, as they cannot in practice be all satisfied.

NOTE Satisfying good practice rules allows for more economical design.

A.2 Structural simplicity

(1) Structural simplicity, characterised by the existence of clear and direct paths for the transmission of
the seismic actions, should be pursued, since the modelling, analysis, dimensioning, detailing and construction
of simple structures are subject to much less uncertainty and thus the prediction of its seismic behaviour is
much more reliable.

A.3 Uniformity, symmetry and redundancy

(1) Uniformity, symmetry and redundancy should be pursued by means appropriate to the considered
structure.

NOTE 1 Uniformity in plan is characterised by an even distribution of the structural elements which allows short and
direct transmission of the inertia forces created in the distributed masses of the building.

NOTE 2 Uniformity can be realised by subdividing the entire building by seismic joints into dynamically independent
units, if these joints are designed against pounding of the individual units in accordance with 6.2.8.

NOTE 3 Uniformity in the development of the structure along the height of the building tends to eliminate the
occurrence of sensitive zones where concentrations of stress or large ductility demands might prematurely cause
collapse.

NOTE 4 A close relationship between the distribution of masses and the distribution of resistance and stiffness
eliminates large eccentricities between mass and stiffness.

NOTE 5 If the building configuration is symmetric or quasi-symmetric, a symmetric layout of well-distributed in-plan
structural elements is appropriate for the achievement of uniformity.

NOTE 6 The use of evenly distributed structural elements increases redundancy and allows a more favourable
redistribution of action effects and widespread energy dissipation across the entire structure.

A.4 Bi-directional resistance and stiffness

(1) To satisfy 4.4.1(1), the structural elements should be arranged in an orthogonal in-plan structural

266
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

pattern, ensuring similar resistance and stiffness characteristics in both main directions.

(2) The choice of the stiffness characteristics of the structure, while attempting to minimise the effects
of the seismic action (considering its specific features at the site) should also limit the development of
excessive displacements that might lead to either instabilities due to second order effects or excessive
damages.

A.5 Torsional resistance and stiffness

(1) Besides lateral resistance and stiffness, building structures should possess adequate torsional
resistance and stiffness to limit the development of torsional motions which tend to stress the different
structural elements in a non-uniform way. In this respect, arrangements in which the main elements resisting
the seismic action are distributed close to the periphery of the building should be preferred.

A.6 Diaphragmatic behaviour at storey level

(1) Floor systems and the roof should be provided with in-plane stiffness and resistance and with
effective connection to the vertical structural systems. Particular care should be taken in cases of non-compact
or very elongated in-plan shapes and in cases of large floor openings, especially if the latter are in the vicinity
of the main vertical structural elements, thus hindering such effective connection between the vertical and
horizontal structure.

NOTE In buildings, floors (including the roof) play a very important role in the overall seismic behaviour of the
structure. They act as horizontal diaphragms that collect and transmit the seismic actions to the vertical structural
systems and ensure that those systems act together in resisting the horizontal seismic action. The action of floors as
diaphragms is especially relevant in cases of complex and non-uniform layouts of the vertical structural systems, or
where systems with different horizontal deformability characteristics are used together (e.g. in dual or mixed systems).

(2) Diaphragms should have sufficient in-plane stiffness for the distribution of horizontal inertia forces
to the vertical structural systems in accordance with the assumptions of the analysis (e.g. rigidity of the
diaphragm), particularly when there are significant changes in stiffness or offsets of vertical elements above
and below the diaphragm.

A.7 Adequate foundation

(1) The design and construction of the foundations and of the connection to the superstructure should
ensure that the whole building is subjected to a uniform seismic excitation.

A.8 Regularity in plan

(1) Implementing good practices given in a) to e) may contribute to obtain favourable in-plan regularity
and to minimise undesirable torsional effects about the vertical axis:

With respect to the lateral stiffness and mass distribution, the building structure is approximately
symmetric in plan with respect to two orthogonal axes.

The plan configuration is compact, i.e., each floor is delimited by a polygonal convex line. If in plan set-
backs (re-entrant corners or edge recesses) exist, they do not affect the floor in-plan stiffness. For each
set-back, the area between the outline of the floor and a convex polygonal line enveloping the floor does
not exceed 15 % of the floor area.

267
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

The in-plan stiffness of the floors is sufficiently large in comparison with the lateral stiffness of the vertical
structural elements, so that the deformation of the floor has a small effect on the distribution of the forces
among the vertical structural elements. In this respect, L, C, H, I, and X plan shapes should be carefully
examined concerning the stiffness of the lateral branches, which should be comparable to that of the
central part, to satisfy the rigid diaphragm condition. The application of this paragraph should be
considered for the global behaviour of the building.

The slenderness  = Lmax/Lmin of the building in plan is not higher than 4, where Lmax and Lmin are
respectively the larger and smaller in plan dimension of the building, measured in orthogonal directions.
However, this rule does not pertain where the number of lines of primary seismic structures
perpendicular to the long side of a building is greater than 0,5 λ.

At each level i and for each direction of analysis x or y, the structural eccentricity eo and the torsional
radius r satisfy the two conditions given by Formulas (A.1) and (A.2), expressed for the direction of
analysis y.

𝑒 , ≤ 0,30 𝑟 , (A.1)

𝑟, ≥𝑙 , (A.2)
where:
eox,i is the x component of the natural eccentricity, normal to the direction of analysis y considered;

rx,i is the x component of the torsional radius;

NOTE Annex B gives procedures for calculating the natural eccentricity and the torsional radius.

ls,i is the radius of gyration of floor i defined in 4.4.3(2).

NOTE Formulas similar to (A.1) and (A.2) apply for the direction of analysis x.

268
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(informative)

NATURAL ECCENTRICITY AND TORSIONAL RADIUS

B.1 General
(1) The natural eccentricity e0,i of floor i of a building should be defined as the horizontal vector CiGi
joining the two points defined in a) and b):

The centre of masses Gi of floor i, including the mass of the vertical elements in the mid height of the
storeys below and above the floor, the mass being calculated according to 5.1.2(1).

The projection Ci on floor i of the stiffness centre of the storey below the floor, including all vertical
structures taken into account in the model for seismic analysis.

(2) The two components e0x,i and e0y,i of e0,i in orthogonal horizontal axes may be obtained as the
difference of coordinates of Gi and Ci in the same axes.

NOTE The two components e0x,i and e0y,i of e0,i in orthogonal horizontal axes are used in 5.2(2).

(3) The x component of the torsional radius, rx,i, of the i-th floor should be defined as the square root of
the ratio of the torsional stiffness with respect to the stiffness centre Ci to the floor lateral stiffness in the y
direction.

NOTE Similar definition applies to the y component ry,i,

B.2 Uniform type of lateral load resisting system

(1) When the primary structure is composed of the same type of primary bracings continuous from the
basement to the level under consideration, the coordinates of the natural eccentricity may be calculated as
given by Formula (B.1), see Figure B1.

∑ , ∑ ,
𝑥 = ∑
;𝑦 = ∑
(B.1)
, ,

where:
xCi and yCi are the coordinates of the stiffness centre in orthogonal horizontal axis x and y;

xj and yj are the coordinates of bracing element j of the floor under consideration;

Kx,ij is the lateral stiffness in the x direction of primary bracing j in the storey below floor i, as given
in (2);

Kx,ij is defined similarly to Kx,ij, but in the y direction.

269
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Figure B1 — Buildings with a uniform type of lateral load resisting system (a) with columns, (b) with
walls and box walls

(2) For a primary structure composed of columns (Figure B1(a)), the lateral stiffness Kx,ij in the x
direction may be taken as given by Formula (B.2).

,
𝐾 , = (B.2)
where:
𝐸𝐼 , is the flexural stiffness of the column j in the storey below floor i in the direction x;

ℎ is the free height of the column j in the storey below floor i.

(3) For a primary structure composed of walls and box walls (Figure B2(b)), the lateral stiffness Kx,ij in
the x direction may be taken as given by Formula (B.3). For box walls, stiffnesses may be calculated considering
the tubular inertia and area.

, ,
𝐾 , = + (B.3)
where:
𝐸𝐼 , is the flexural stiffness of the wall j in the storey below floor i in the direction x;

𝐴 , is the gross area of the section of the wall.

(4) For a primary structure composed of frames with bracings, the lateral stiffness Kx,ij in the x direction
may be taken as given by Formula (B.4).

,
𝐾 , = cos 𝛼 (B.4)
where:
 is the angle of the bracing element to the horizontal;

𝐸𝐴 , is the axial stiffnesses of the bracing element considered.

NOTE (2) to (4) apply similarly to Ky ,ij.

(5) The x component of the torsional radius, rx,i, of the i-th floor may be taken as given by Formula (B.5).

270
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

∑ , ∑ , ( )
𝑟, = ∑
(B.5)
,

where 𝐾 , and 𝐾 , may be taken as in (2) to (4), as appropriate.

NOTE A Formula similar to (B.5) applies to 𝑟 , .

B.3 Calculation by a 3D model

(1) The components of the natural eccentricity e0,i in two orthogonal horizontal axes x and y may be
calculated at all floors of a building using a 3D model and the procedure in (2) to (4), with the condition that
the floors may be considered as rigid in their planes.

(2) A profile of forces should be defined in applying at each floor i a unit acceleration to the mass defined
in B1(1)a).

NOTE This simple profile allows for an approximate value of the natural eccentricity at each floor considered
sufficient for its use in this Standard.

(3) Three load cases should be applied separately to the structure, as given in a) to c):

Case 1: the profile of forces defined in (2) applied in the x direction.

Case 2: the profile of forces defined in (2) applied in the y direction.

Case 3: a profile of moments about the vertical axis applied at the centres of masses of the floors. The
values of the moments should be equal to the values of the forces in the profile in (2).

(4) The components e0x,i and e0y,i of the natural eccentricity should be taken as given by Formula (B.6).

, ,
𝑒 , = ;𝑒 , = (B.6)
, ,

where:
Δ𝜃 , is the difference of rotations about the vertical axis between floor i - 1 and floor i in Case 1;

Δ𝜃 , is the difference of rotations about the vertical axis between floor i - 1 and floor i in Case 2;

Δ𝜃 , is the difference of rotations about the vertical axis between floor i - 1 and floor i in Case 3.
These rotations may be calculated from the displacements at opposite sides of the floors.

(5) The torsional radius rx,i in the x direction should be taken as given in Formula (B.7).

,
𝑟, = (B.7)
where Δ𝑑 , is the difference of displacements of the centre of mass in the y direction between floor i - 1 and
floor i in Case 2.
NOTE A Formula similar to (B.6) applies to 𝑟 , .

271
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(normative)

FLOOR ACCELERATIONS FOR ANCILLARY ELEMENTS

(1) The floor acceleration San introduced in 7.2.1 may be calculated by the procedure presented in this
annex.

(2) The value of San should be calculated as a combination of values for all modes of vibration
contributing significantly to the global response.

(3) For mode i and floor j, the value of the San component in the direction under consideration may be
determined by Formulas (C.1) to (C.4).

𝛤𝜙 𝑆 , 𝑇
𝑆 , = + 𝑆 (C.1)
𝑇 𝑞 𝑇 ,
−1
𝑇 ,

𝑆 , ≤ 𝐴𝑀𝑃 × 𝑃𝐹𝐴 (C.2)

𝑆 , (C.3)
𝑃𝐹𝐴 ≤ 𝛤 𝜙
𝑞

(C.4)
⎧ 2,5 10/(5 + 𝜉 ) 𝑇 , /𝑇 = 0
⎪ 𝑇, 𝑇,
linear between 𝐴𝑀𝑃 = 0 and 𝐴𝑀𝑃 = 0,2 0 ≤ 𝑇 , /𝑇 ≤ 0,2
𝐴𝑀𝑃 = 𝑇 𝑇
⎨ 10
⎪ 𝑇 , /𝑇 ≥ 0,2
⎩ 𝜉

where:

indices "p" and "an" correspond to the primary structure and the ancillary element, respectively;

and, in addition to symbols introduced in 7.2.1:

Sep,i = Se(Tp,i, ξp,i) applies to the ith mode of the primary structure;

Tp,i is the natural period of the ith mode of the structure;

ϕij is the ith mode shape value at the jth floor, considering also (3) and (4);

Γi is the modal participation factor for the ith mode. In a planar model with concentrated masses,
Γi is defined by Formula (C.5), where mj is the mass at the jth floor.

∑𝑚 𝜙 (C.5)
𝛤 =
∑𝑚 𝜙

ξp,i is the critical damping ratio (in %) of the primary structure for buildings equal to 5 %.

272
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

ξan is the damping ratio (in %) of the ancillary element, the value of which should not be higher
than the corresponding value given in Table C1.

Table C.1 — Maximum values of ξan for ancillary elements (in % of critical damping)
Type of ancillary element ξan
Elements not able or not allowed to dissipate energy by inelastic deformation:
Cantilevering parapets or ornamentations
Signs and billboards 2
Chimneys, masts and tanks on legs acting as unbraced cantilevers along more than
one half of their total height
Elements dissipating energy by inelastic deformation:
Exterior and interior walls
Partitions and façades, claddings
Chimneys, masts and tanks on legs acting as unbraced cantilevers along less than one 10
half of their total height, or braced or guyed to the structure at or above their centre
of mass
Anchorage elements for permanent cabinets and book stacks supported by the floor
Anchorage elements for false (suspended) ceilings and light fixtures

(4) In the case of lateral force analysis, the displacement shape used for the determination of lateral
forces given in 5.3.3 may be used.

(5) In the case of pushover analysis, the inelastic deformation shape (corresponding to the design
seismic action at the limit state under consideration) should be used instead of the fundamental mode shape
{1}.

(6) At every floor, j, the San,ij components calculated for individual modes should be combined in order to
determine the resulting floor acceleration Sa,j, using a) and b). The resulting San,j should not be smaller than
Se(TA).
In the range of periods of the equipment from Tan = 0 up to and including the end of the plateau of the
resonance region of the fundamental mode (Tan = Tp,1), the direct floor spectra obtained for individual
modes should be combined by using the standard modal combination rules (EN1998-1-1:2019, 6.4.2.2).

In the post-resonance region of the fundamental mode (the rest of the period range), the algebraic sum
should be used, in which the relevant signs of individual modes are taken into account. The upper limit of
the resulting floor spectrum calculated from the algebraic sum is represented by the plateau obtained for
the resonance region of the fundamental mode.

273
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(normative)

BUILDINGS WITH ENERGY DISSIPATION SYSTEMS

D.1 Displacement ductility ratio

(1) The definition of the displacement ductility ratio should be as given in 9.3.2.1(5).

(2) The displacement ductility ratio f for structures with displacement-dependent energy dissipation
devices should be defined as the maximum displacement relative to the ground at roof level divided by droof y
calculated by Formula (D.1).

, ,
𝑑 = (D.1)

where:

Vpy,1 and Vdy,1 are defined in 9.3.3.2(1);

meff 1 is the first mode effective mass of the structure with energy dissipation system in elastic
conditions.

(3) The displacement ductility ratio f for structures with velocity-dependent energy dissipation devices
should be defined as the maximum displacement relative to the ground at roof level divided by droof y calculated
by Formula (D.2).

,
𝑑 = (D.2)

where:

Vpy,1 is as in (1);

Tp1 is the first mode vibration period of the primary seismic elements in elastic conditions,
exclusive of energy dissipation system;

p1 is the first mode participation factor of the primary seismic elements in elastic conditions,
exclusive of energy dissipation system;

mp,eff 1 is the first mode effective mass of the primary seismic elements in elastic conditions, exclusive
of energy dissipation system.

D.2 Complementary rules for structures with velocity dependent energy dissipation
devices
D.2.1 Effective period

(1) The first mode effective period Teff 1 for structures with velocity-dependent energy dissipation
devices should be calculated with Formula (D.3).

274
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑇 =𝑇 ( )( ⁄ )
(D.3)

where:

V1 is the component of the effective damping of the structure in the direction of interest due to
viscous dissipation of energy by velocity-dependent energy dissipation devices, at or just
below the yield displacement of the main structural system, calculated with Formula (D.5).

D.2.2 Effective damping

(1) The first mode effective damping eff 1 for structures with velocity dependent energy dissipation
devices should be calculated with Formula (D.4).
,

𝜉 =𝜉 +𝜉 +𝜉 (D.4)
( )
( )

where:
V1 as in D2.1(1);

I is the component of effective damping of the structure due to inherent dissipation of energy by
the main structural system and ancillary components, exclusive of energy dissipation system,
at or just below its yield displacement; I is given in (3);

H is the component of effective damping of the structure in the direction of interest due to post-
yield hysteretic behaviour of the primary seismic elements of the main structural system at the
ductility ratio f; H is calculated with Formula (D.6).

(2) For structures with velocity dependent energy dissipation devices V1 should be calculated with
Formula (D.5).

∑( ) , , ,
𝜉 = ∑
(D.5)

where:
summation over i extends over all masses and summation over j extends over all velocity-dependent energy
dissipating devices;

rj1 is the difference between the first modal ordinates (horizontal displacements) associated with
degrees of freedom corresponding to the ends of the energy dissipating device j;

NOTE If the ends of the energy dissipating device j are connected to degrees of freedom i and (i-1) then rj1 = i1 - (i-
1)1 where i1 and (i-1)1 are the components of the first modal vector 1 associated with the degrees of freedom i and (i-1).

j is the angle of inclination of energy dissipation device j to the horizontal;

Cj is the damping coefficient of the velocity-dependent energy dissipation device j, provided by

the producer of the device;

a is the velocity exponent of the velocity-dependent energy dissipation devices, provided by the
producer of the device.

275
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) I should be based on the material type, configuration, and behaviour of the main structural system
and ancillary components responding dynamically at or just below yielding of the primary seismic elements
of the main structural system. Unless analysis or test data supports other values, inherent damping should not
be taken greater than 5% of critical damping for all modes of vibration.

(4) For structures with velocity dependent energy dissipation devices H should be calculated with
Formula (D.6).

𝜉 = ( )( ⁄ )
− (D.6)

where:

FH is the hysteresis loop adjustment factor; it may be taken as 0,67TC/Tp1; it should not be taken
greater than 1 and may be taken greater than 0,5.

D.3 Complementary rules for structures with displacement-dependent energy-

dissipation devices
D.3.1 Calculation of Ee

(1) The amount of energy Ee that can be absorbed by a structure with displacement-dependent energy
dissipation devices while the primary seismic elements of the main structural system remain in the elastic
domain should be calculated by Formula (D.7).

𝐸 =∑ (𝐸 , +𝐸 , +𝐸 , ) (D.7)

where:
the summation over k extends to all stories;

Epes,k is the elastic strain energy stored by the primary seismic elements of the main structural
system at the k-th storey while these elements remain in the elastic domain; Epes,k is given in
(2);

Edes,k is the elastic strain energy stored by the energy dissipation devices at k-th storey while the
primary seismic elements of the main structural system at the k-th story remain in the elastic
domain; Edes,k is given in (3);

EdH,k is the energy dissipated in form of plastic strain by the energy dissipation devices at the k-th
storey while the primary seismic elements of the main structural system at the k-th story
remain in the elastic domain; EdH,k is given in (4).

(2) Epes,k should be calculated using Formula (D.8).

𝐸 , =𝑉 , 𝑑 , /2 (D.8)

where:
VpD,k is the maximum shear for which the primary seismic elements of the main structural system at
the k-th storey remains in the elastic domain;

dD,k is the maximum interstorey drift for which the primary seismic elements of the main structural
system at the k-th storey remains within the elastic range.

276
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

NOTE Epes,k is represented by the area of triangle o-c-d in Figure 9.1.

(3) Edes,k should be calculated using Formula (D.9).

𝐸 , =𝑉 , 𝑑 , /2 (D.9)

where:
Vdy,k is defined in 9.3.3.2(1);

ddy,k is the k-th storey drift at yielding of the energy dissipation devices of this storey.

NOTE Edes,k is represented by the area of triangle o-a-e in Figure 9.1.

(4) EdH,k should be calculated using Formula (D.10).

𝐸 , = 4𝑉 , (𝑑 , −𝑑 , (D.10)

NOTE EdH,k is taken as equivalent to the energy dissipated by the dampers in one cycle of displacement at amplitude
dD,k, that is, four times the area of rectangle a-b-d-e in Figure 9.1.

D.3.2 Calculation of EH,k

(1) The required amount of energy dissipation in form of plastic strain at the k-th storey of the building
EH,k should be calculated with Formula (D.11).

𝐸 , = ,
𝑀 𝑆 (𝑇 , 5%) 𝜂(𝑇 , 𝜉 ) −∑ 𝛼 𝑚 𝑀𝑔𝑑 , ⁄2 (D.11)
∑ ,

where:
𝛼𝑖 = 𝑉py,𝑖 + 𝑉dy,𝑖 ⁄𝑚𝑖 𝑀𝑔

Ts1 is a period that gives the maximum value of [Ts1Se(Ts1, 5%)(Ts1,I)] between T1 and 1,4T1;

sk is a standard value representing the ratio of the required amount of dissipation at storey k to
the required amount of dissipation at the first storey; it should be calculated using
Formula (D.12);

, ( , , )
𝑠 = 𝑚 + 𝑚 −𝑚 (D.12)
, ( , , )

ps represents the deviation of the k-th storey seismic shear from an optimum value that would provide an
approximately even distribution of damage among storeys, calculated with Formula.
( , , )
𝑝 = (
𝑚 + 𝑚 −𝑚 (D.13)
, , )

pt,k is a coefficient that accounts for the increase in the required dissipation capacity in a storey k resulting
1,0 for (𝑒 /𝑟 )  0,15
from torsional effects, calculated using Formula (D.14).𝑝 , = 1,15 − for 0,15 < (𝑒 /𝑟 ) < 0,30
0,85 for (𝑒 /𝑟 )  0,30
(D.14)

eox is the distance between the centre of stiffness and the centre of mass, measured along the x
direction, which is normal to the direction of analysis y considered;

277
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

rx is the square root of the ratio of the torsional stiffness to the lateral stiffness in the y direction
(“torsional radius”), which may be calculated by Formula (A3) in Annex A;

n represents the extent to which the required amount of energy dissipation of the building is
distributed to each storey according to the stiffness and strength of each storey. It should be
taken as n = 4 if the main structural system satisfies the global and local ductility conditions of
6.2.4 and 6.2.5, as appropriate, and as n = 8 otherwise.

D.3.3 Calculation of EpH,k,max

(1) The maximum energy dissipation demand at the k-th storey on the primary seismic elements of the
main structural system EpH,k,max should be calculated with Formula (D.15).

, ( , , , )
𝐸 , , =𝐸 , (D.15)
, ( , , , ) , ( , , , )

where:
EH,k is as calculated in D3.2;

dpy,k, Vpy,k and Vdy,k are defined in 9.3.3.2(1);

dr,k,1 is defined in 9.3.3.2(1);

ddy,k as in D3.1(3).

NOTE In one cycle of displacement at maximum interstorey drift 𝑑 , , , the primary seismic elements of the main
system dissipate an amount of energy equal to 4𝑉 , (𝑑 , , − 𝑑 , ), and the energy dissipation system dissipate an
amount of energy equal to 4𝑉 , 𝑑 , , − 𝑑 , . The second member of Formula (D.15) distributes the energy to be
dissipated by the storey k, EH,k, between the primary seismic elements of the main system and the energy dissipation
system in the same proportion that is distributed in a single cycle of displacement.

D.3.4 Calculation of EdH,k,max

(1) The maximum energy dissipation demand at the k-th storey from the energy dissipation devices
EdH,k,max should be calculated with Formula (D.16).

, , , ,
𝐸 , , =𝐸 , + 40𝑉 , [𝑑 , −𝑑 , ] + 100𝑉 , [𝑑 , − (D.16)
, , , , , , , ,

where all notations are defined in D.3.3.

NOTE 1 The first term of the second member distributes the EH,k between the primary seismic elements of the main
system and the energy dissipation system as explained in the NOTE to D.6(1).

NOTE 2 Under the design earthquake, the dampers dissipate energy through plastic deformations before the primary seismic
elements of the main structural system reach the yield displacement dpy,k. The second term of the second member of Formula
(D.16) represents this energy that is taken as equivalent to ten cycles of amplitude dpy,k.
NOTE 3 The energy dissipation devices dissipate energy through plastic deformations under low intensity earthquakes, for
which the main system remains in the elastic domain. The third term of the second member represents this energy. It is assumed
that the structure can be subjected to five low intensity earthquakes, and in each one the energy to be dissipated by the energy
dissipation devices is equivalent to five cycles of amplitude dD,k.

278
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(normative)

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS FOR STEEL BUILDINGS

E.1.Scope

(1) This annex should be used for the design of beam-to-column joints of moment resisting and dual steel
frames and for the design of gusset connections in concentrically, eccentrically and buckling restrained
bracings. Provisions in Annex E should be applied for joints of primary DC3 structures in addition to the
provisions in 11 and in EN 1993-1-8.

(2) The provisions in Annex E may also be used for joints of primary DC2 and DC1 structures.

(3) The provisions in Annex E may be also applied to connections different from those specified in Annex
E, However, in those cases the validity and effectiveness of their performance should be demonstrated by
means of either experimental evidence, past experimental results available in the literature or refined finite
element simulations.

(4) The moment resisting beam-to-column joints covered by Annex E may be also used for beam-to-
column joints in the braced bay of bracing systems (i.e. concentrically, eccentrically and buckling restrained
bracings).

E.2.Pre-qualified moment resisting beam-to-column joints

E.2.1. General

NOTE A beam-to-column joint is defined as the zone where at least one beam and one column are interconnected. A
planar major-axis beam-to-column joint consists of a web panel and either one connection for external joints (or “single-
sided” joint) or two connections for internal joints (or “double-sided” joint).

(1) The joints specified in E.2 are conforming to 11.9.4 and may be considered as prequalified in the sense
that they may be used in DC3 and DC2 moment resisting frames and moment resisting sub-system of dual
frames without any request for further qualifying cyclic tests.

NOTE 1 Pre-qualified joints are such that their rotation capacity is not smaller than the limit specified in 11.9.4(9).

NOTE 2 The beam-to-column connections specified in E.2 may be also used in the braced bay of concentrically,
eccentrically and buckling restrained bracings. The partial strength joints in E.2 guarantee the rotation capacity required
in 11.10.5(2)a. Full strength joints should also comply with 11.10.5(2)b, 11.11.5(2) and 11.12.6(1), respectively.

(2) The beams should be torsionally restrained with bracings spaced by the length Lstcalculated as given
by Formula (11.6).

(3) If a concrete or composite slab is used and if the structure is calculated as a steel structure, the
composite action between the beam and the slab should be prevented by detailing the slab-to-beam zone as
specified in 11.9.4(1) and 12.8.6.2.3 and with the detailing given in a) to c):

no shear connectors should be used on the beams belonging to the column (i.e. both the primary beams
and the transverse beams) within a length equal to 1,5 times the depth of the primary beam from any
protruding parts of the connection;

279
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

a gap not less than 25 mm should be kept between the concrete slab and any protruding parts of the
connection and all around the column; it should be either void or filled with compressible material.

steel rebars and steel mesh in the concrete slab should not cross the joint in the gap defined in (c).

E.2.2.Classification of pre-qualified moment resisting beam-to-column joints

E.2.2.1. Classification by rotational stiffness

(1) Stiffness classification of the connection should be as defined in EN 1993-1-8:2020.

E.2.2.2. Classification by moment resistance

(1)P Unlike in the resistance classification of connections in EN 1993-1-8:2020, the type and the
localization of plastic mechanism shall be explicitly considered. Therefore, the random material variability
(through rm , see 11.2.2) and strain hardening (through sh, see Table 11.7) of the dissipative zone (i.e. either
beam or connection) shall be accounted for.

NOTE When Annex E is used for DC2 connections, sh may be considered equal to 1,1.

(D) (A)

(B)

(C)
sh,c Lh sh,c

Figure E.1 — Definition of design moment: position of plastic hinges in stiffened joints: (A) idealized
position of the plastic hinge; (B) beam; (C) column; (D) rib or haunch stiffener (if adopted)

(2) The categories of the connections should be classified on the basis of the localisation of the dissipative
mechanism in the joint in accordance with Formula (E.1):

a) Full strength or “non-yielding” connections, where the plastic deformations are localised in the beam,
should be designed for the expected strength of the plastic hinge in its location by accounting for the effects
of material over-strength and strain hardening as given in Formula (E.1).

𝑀 , ≥𝛾 𝛾 𝑀 , , +𝑠 , 𝑉 , +𝑠 , 𝑉 , (E.1)
where:

𝑀 , is the design resistance of the connection;

Mb,pl,k is the nominal plastic moment of the beam framing the joint, i.e. evaluated considering the
partial factor for material equal to 1,0;

sh,c is the distance between the centre of the expected plastic hinge and the connection (i.e. the
column face), see Figure E.1;

and the other variables as defined in 11.9.3(2).

280
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

b) Equal strength or “balance yielding” connections, where the plastic deformations occur in both the beam
and the connection, should be designed for the nominal strength of the plastic hinge in its location as given
in Formula (E.2). Both the members and the connections should be ductile.

𝑀 , ≥ 𝑀 , , +𝑠 , 𝑉 , +𝑠 , 𝑉 , (E.2)
NOTE Due to variability of material characteristics and strain hardening in the connection and in other parts of the
structure, plastic deformations may occur in the connection and/or the column web panel.

c) Partial strength or “yielding” connections, where the plastic deformations are localised in the connection,
should be designed for the action effects in the seismic design situation as given in Formula (E.3).

𝑀 , , +𝑠 , 𝑉 , +𝑠 , 𝑉 , ≤𝑀 , < 𝑀 , , +𝑠 , 𝑉 , +𝑠 , 𝑉 , (E.3)

where rm is the material overstrength factor of the beam (see 11.2.2), but should be taken not smaller
than 0,74.

d) Pinned connections should comply with in EN 1993-1-8.

(3) Members with partial-strength connections should be designed for the ultimate expected resistance
developed in the connection, including the effects of material overstrength and strain hardening in accordance
with Formula E.4.

𝑀 , ≥𝛾 𝛾 𝑀 , (E.4)
where:

Mpl,Rd is the design moment resistance of the member framing the connection;

rm is the material overstrength factor of the yielding components of the connection (see 11.2.2);

sh is the hardening factor of the yielding components of the connection (see Table 11.7).

(4) The column web panel should be designed according to categories a) to c) in terms of their
contribution to the plastic mechanism:

a) strong web panel, where most of the plastic demand is not in the column web panel (e.g. concentrated in
the connection and/or in the beam): it should be designed using Formula (11.14) in which the shear
resistance Vwp,Rd of the web panel is taken equal to the web panel's “elastic” resistance without the
additional resistance of continuity plates (if present);

b) balanced web panel, where the plastic demand is balanced between the column web panel and the
connection and/or the beam; it should be designed using Formula (11.14) in which Vwp,Rd is taken equal to
the web panel's plastic resistance, namely accounting for the additional resistance of continuity plates (if
present) and the shear force Vwp,Ed in the web panel is taken equal to the minimum moment resistance
between the beam and connection;

c) weak web panel, where all the plastic demand is concentrated in the column web panel: it should be
designed using Formula (11.14) in which the shear force Vwp,Ed is taken equal to the design moments in the
seismic situation.

(5) For full strength connections in the primary structure of moment resisting and dual frames, strong
column web panel should be used.

281
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(6) For equal strength connections in the primary structure of moment resisting and dual frames, any
types of column web panel may be used.

(7) For partial strength connections in the primary structure of moment resisting and dual frames,
balanced or weak column web panel should be used.

E.2.3.Types of pre-qualified joints and technological requirements

E.2.3.1. General

(1) Moment-resisting beam-to-column joints should have either welded or bolted configurations (see
Figure E.2) and be designed in order to ensure the required resistance and ductility in the seismic design
situation.

(2) Unstiffened connections in FigureE.2 a) and e) may be also designed with reduced beam section in the
zone where plastic hinge is expected to form.

(3) To fulfil the resistance and stiffness requirements, full and equal strength connections with welded or
bolted configuration may be strengthened through stiffeners (e.g. haunches, rib stiffeners, cover plates, etc.,
see Figures E.2 (b) to (d) and (f) to (h) and the column web panel may be reinforced through supplementary
welded web plates.

(4) The beams should have I cross section (e.g. IPE profiles). The weak beam-strong column hierarchy
(see 11.9.3(2)) should be satisfied. The beam may be either hot-rolled or welded built-up sections. Hot-rolled
profiles should comply with EN 10034. The web and flanges of built-up beams should be connected using full
penetration groove welds with a pair of reinforcing fillet welds within a zone extending from the beam end to
a distance not less than one beam depth beyond the plastic hinge location Sh, (see Figure E.1). The throat
thickness of each reinforcing fillet weld should be the smaller than of 8 mm and of the thickness of the beam
web.

(5) For both full strength and equal strength connections, the beam web and flange in compression or in
tension components should be ignored in the calculation of the resistance.

(6) The column may be either hot-rolled, built-up, cruciform or cold-formed hollow section.

(7) Depending on the type of cross section, the columns should be manufactured in accordance with a) to
d):

a) hot-rolled profiles with H shape (e.g. HE sections) should comply with EN 10034;

b) either H or box built-up columns may be used. The column web should be connected to the flanges using
full penetration groove welds with a pair of reinforcing fillet welds, within a zone extending from 300 mm
above the upper beam flange to 300 mm below the lower beam flange and the minimum throat thickness
of the reinforcing fillet welds should be the lower of 8 mm and of the thickness of the column web;

c) the elements of flanged cruciform columns should be fabricated from rolled shapes or built up from plates
and should comply with EN1993-1-1. The web-to-web welds if rolled shapes are used or all welds
constituting the cross section if built-up solution is adopted should comply with (b);

d) cold-formed hollow profiles should be class 1 and comply with EN1993-1-1.

(8) For both full strength and equal strength connections, if supplementary plates are added onto the
column web and detailed as specified in E.2.3.2 and Figures E.5 a, b, the column web in transverse tension and
compression components may be ignored in the calculation of the resistance.

282
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(9) In welded connections and in bolted connections conforming with (5) and (7) and having a single bolt
row between the beam tension flange and the axis of the beam, the resistances of the connection and the
column web panel should be calculated indentently as two separate macro-components.

(10) If (9) is applied, the shear resistance of the column web panel should be separately calculated in
accordance with EN1993-1-8 and compared to the minimum resistance of either the connection or the beam
for panel zone classification; for the application of the local hierarchy of resistances, see E.2.2.2(4).

(11) In bolted connections, if more than one bolt row is between the beam tension flange and the beam
axis, the connection and column web panel should not be considered as separate macro-components and their
interaction should be considered in the calculation of the joint in accordance with EN1993-1-8.

Figure E.2 — The types of welded and bolted joints covered by Annex E: unstiffened (a, e), stiffened
wth ribs (b, d, f, h), stiffened with haunches (c, g)

E.2.3.2. Detailing of column web panel

(1) Supplementary web plates may be used to satisfy Formula 11.14. If these plates are placed either onto
the column web panel with longitudinal groove welds, the gap g between the column web and the plate should
be not greater than 1 mm (see Figure E.5a). If fillet longitudinal welds are used, the gap g between the column
web and the plate should be equal to 0 mm (see Figure E.5b) and plug welds should be used as detailed in
Figure E.5c for every thickness of the plate. If supplementary web plates are spaced away from the column
web, the distance ef of the spaced plates from the edge of the column flange should be not smaller than 25 mm
(see Figure E.5) and each spaced plate should satisfy Formula (11.16) in order to be considered as active
strengthening plate.

(2) The resisting shear area Av should be calculated as the sum of the column shear area Av,c and the gross
area of the additional web plates Av,p.

(3) The width-to-thickness ratio bs/tswp of a supplementary web plate should be not smaller than 40ε,
where 𝜀 = 235⁄𝑓 . Plates with bs/tswp greater than 40ε may be used only if placed onto the column web,
provided that plug welds are used to prevent plate buckling (see Figure E.5 c).

283
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(4) The depth of the supplementary web plates in welded or bolted connections should be such that
theyextend throughout the effective width of the column web in tension and compression. In bolted extended
end-plate joints (either stiffened by rib plates or haunch) the depth of the supplementary web plates should
not be less than that of the end plate.

(5) Continuity plates are transverse stiffeners (see Fig E.7) and should be used to strengthen the column
flange and the column web panel. Their thickness should not be smaller than the thickness of the beam flange
or of the haunch flange. Continuity plates should not extend beyond the edge of the column flange (see Fig
E.7b,c).

(6) Along the web of an H shape column, the corner clip cc of the continuity plate (see Figure E.7 a) should
be detailed to avoid interference with the fillet radius of hot-rolled columns (see Figure E.7 b) or the
longitudinal welds of built-up columns (see Figure E.7 c). To this end, the corner clip should be not smaller
than the fillet radius + 1 mm in hot rolled column or 15mm + the side of the weld in built-up column.

E.2.3.3. Detailing of welds

(1)P The joint details adopted shall make use of the most appropriate type of weld for the component to be
connected and the plastic engagement of the joint.

(2) Four types of weld details may be adopted: full penetration groove welds (FPGW), fillet welds (FW)
and plug welds (PW).

(3) FPGW should be detailed with single of double bevel using V and K shape for plates and I or H members
and using J or U shapes for cold-formed hollow profiles. The slope of the bevels should not be smaller than 45°
and not greater than 60°. FPGW should be adopted in the details a) to e):

a) to connect the beam flange to the end-plate or to the column flange (see Figure E.3);

b) to connect the rib stiffener (see Figure E.4 and Figure E.9 b) and the flange of a haunch (see Figure E.9 a) to
the beam flange and to either the end plate or column flange;

c) to connect supplementary plates onto the column web panel in the flange corner fillet radius (see Figure
E.5 a) and for supplementary plates spaced from the column web (see Figure E.5 d);

d) to connect continuity plates to the column flanges if the shear resistance Vwp,Rd of the column web panel is
calculated accounting for their additional resistance (see Figure E.6 a);

e) to connect diaphragms to columns made of hollow profiles.

(4) FW width should not be smaller than 50 mm and their throat not smaller than 0,8 times the thickness
of the connected element; they should be adopted in a) to d):

a) to connect the beam web to either the end plate or the column flange;

b) to strengthen with internal fillet welds the beam flange-to-end-plate groove welds (see Figure E.3);

c) to connect the continuity plates to the column flanges (if the shear resistance Vwp,Rd of the column web panel
is calculated without their contribution) and web (see Figure E.6 b);

d) to connect the outermost edges of supplementary plates to the column web (see Figure E.5 c).

(5) PW should be not less than four (see Figure E.5 c) and should be adopted if bs/tswp ≥ 40ε (see
E.2.3.2(3)).

284
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(6) For full welded unstiffened beam-to-column joints, weld access holes should be made in the web of
the beam close to the beam flange-to-column flange connection. The geometrical features and details of weld
access holes should comply with Figure E.8. The access holes should be made by means of initial drilled holes,
see detail (C) in Figure E.8, with diameter between 18 mm and 20 mm, and finished with either oxy cutting,
plasma cutting or laser cutting. Flame cutting should be avoided. Backing plates, see detail (E) in Figure E.8,
should be removed after the welding.

(7) For bolted end plate connections with or without stiffeners (i.e. rib – see Figure E2 (b) or (d)- or
haunch- see Figure E2 (c) and welded stiffened joints, weld access holes should not be made. The geometrical
features and details of the weld of beam flange-to-column flange connection should comply with Figure E.3.

(8) In both welded or bolted connections with either rib or haunch stiffeners, the stiffener plates should
be terminated at the beam flange and at the end of the end plate or column flange with landings equal to the
maximum between the thickness of the beam flange tfb and 25 mm (see Figure E.9(5)).

(9) In both welded and bolted connections with rib stiffeners, the groove full penetration welds should be
parallel to the rib depth hr and length lr and should not wrap around the tip of the stiffener, see Figure E.9b.

(3)
(4)

(2a) tfb
(2b) tfb

(4)
(1) (1) (3)

(a) (b)

Figure E.3 — Recommended details of beam flange-to-end-plate connection: (a) upper beam flange;
(b) lower beam flange; (1) end-plate; (2a) upper beam flange; (2b) lower beam flange; (3) full
penetration groove weld; (4) reinforcing fillet weld

(1)
(3)

(2)

Figure E.4 — Recommended details of the rib stiffeners welds to either beam flange, or column flange
or end-plate: (1) web of the rib stiffener; (2) beam flange or column flange or end-plate; (3) full
penetration groove weld with V bevel and reinforcing fillet weld

285
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

g ≤ 1mm tswp g = 0mm tswp

(3) (3)

(1) (1)

(4) (5)

(2)

(a) (b)
ef ≥ 25mm
(5)
(4) (4)

(3)

bs (4)

(4)

(5) (6)
(c) (d)

Figure E.5 — Recommended details of welds of supplementary plates to column web: (a) tolerances
of supplementary plate onto column web; (b) details of welds of supplementary plate onto column
web; (c) supplementary plate spaced from column web; (1) column web; (2) column flange; (3)
supplementary plate; (4) full penetration groove weld; (5) reinforcing fillet weld; (6) plug welds
connecting slender supplementary plates to column web (see G.2.3.3(5))

(4)
(2) (2)

(1) (1)

(3) (4)

(a) (b)

Figure E.6 — Recommended details of welds between continuity plates and column flange: (a) detail
for the case compliant with G.2.3.3(2)d; (b) detail for the case compliant with G.2.3.3(3)c; (1)
continuity plate; (2) column flange; (3) full penetration groove weld with V bevel; (4) fillet weld

286
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) (3)
cc
cc

(1) (1) (1) (1) (1)

cc
(2)
cc
(2)
(a) (b) (c)

Figure E.7 — Recommended details of corner clip for continuity plates: (a) corner clip cc; (b) details
of corner clip of continuity plates onto hot-rolled H column; (c) details of corner clip of continuity
plates onto built-up H column; (1) continuity plate; (2) column; (3) corner clip

(B) (D)

3 tfb

0.75 ∙(13 mm + tfb mm) (C)

0.75 tfb
50°-60°

(A) tfb

max (tfb ; 13 mm)

(E)

Figure E.8 — Recommended details of weld access hole for welded beam-to-column joints: (A) beam
flange; (B) column flange; (C) diameter of drilled hole in the range [18mm-20mm]; (D) beam web; (E)
backing plate (to be removed after welding).

max(t fb ; 25 mm)

(3)
(1)
(4) (2)

max(t fb ; 25 mm)
(8) (7)

(6a)
(5) (6b)
(8)

(7)
a)

287
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(7)

hr (6)
(5)
(6)

max(tfb ; 25 mm)
(7) (7)
(3)

(2) (1) / (2)

(1)
(4) lr

max(tfb ; 25 mm)
b)
Figure E.9 — Recommended details of the stiffener landings at the beam flange and at the end of
plate/column flange: (a) detail for haunch stiffener; (b) detail for rib stiffener; (1) end-plate or
column flange; (2) beam flange; (3) full penetration groove weld; (4) reinforcing fillet weld; (5)
access landings; (6) rib stiffener; (6a) web of the haunch; (6b) flange of the haunch; (7) full
penetration groove weld with reinforcing fillet; (8) fillet weld

E.2.3.4. Joints with haunched stiffeners

(1) Haunched beam-to-column joints may be reinforced using a haunch below the bottom flange of the
beam to provide a full-strength and rigid connection, with strong or balanced column web panel. Either fully
welded or bolted connection may be used, see Figure E.10.

(2) The bolted connection should include an extended end plate with not less than six rows of high-
strength pre-loadable bolts with two bolts per row (see Figures E.10 c, d). Three bolt rows should be used to
resist the tensile force of sagging moment (see Figures E.10 c) and the other three rows the tensile force of the
hogging moment (see Figures E.10 d).

(3) Both welded and bolted haunched joints may be used for DC3 structures.

(4) The action effect at the connection should be calculated with Formula E.1.The design resistance of the
connection should be calculated with EN1993-1-8:2020 taking into account the additional assumptions in (5).

(5) In the case of bolted connection, the resistance of the connection should be calculated considering a)
to c):

the active bolt rows in tension are those above the axis of the beam under hogging moment and those
below the axis under sagging moment;

the centre of compression is located at the centroid of the upper beam flange under sagging moment (see
Figure E.10 c) and at 0,5 times the depth of the stiffener hh under hogging moment (see Figure E.10 d);

conditions given in E.2.3.1(5) and E.2.3.1(8) should be satisfied.

(6) The clear span-to-depth ratio (i.e. the distance between the assumed location of plastic hinges divided
by the beam depth) should be not less than 7 for MRFs and 5 for dual frames.

(7) E.2.3.1(4) should be satisfied for beams. Steel grade from S235 or S355 should be used for the beams
and the beam cross sections should be class 1 according to EN 1993-1-1 in DC3. In DC2 the beam cross sections

288
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

may be class 1 or 2 according to EN 1993-1-1. For all DC, the beam depth should be in the range of 240 mm to
770 mm.

(8) E.2.3.1(6) should be satisfied for columns. Steel grade from S235 to S690 should be used for the
columns and their cross sections should be class 1 according to EN 1993-1-1. In DC2 the column cross sections
may be class 1 or 2 according to EN 1993-1-1. For all DC, the column depth should be in the range of 200 mm
to 716 mm.

(9) The thickness of stiffeners transverse to columns and of beam stiffeners should not be smaller than
the thickness of the connected beam flange, as shown in Figure E.10. These stiffeners may be considered as
secondary and they may be connected with fillet welds along their perimeter. The thickness of these welds
should comply with E.2.3.3(4).

(10) If supplementary web plates are necessary, they should satisfy E.2.3.2.

(11) Continuity plates should comply with E.2.3.2(5) and E.2.3.2(6). Inner continuity plates, like (F) in
Figure E.10 b, may be used in bolted joints to increase the bending resistance of the column flange at the inner
bolt-rows.

(12) The haunch angle measured between the bottom flange of the beam and the flange of the haunch
should be not smaller than 30° and not greater than 40°.

(13) The thickness of the web of the haunch should satisfy Formula (E.5):

,
𝑡 , ≥𝑡 , (E.5)
,

where:

tw,h is the thickness of the haunch web;

tw,b is the thickness of the beam web;

fy,h is the yield strength of the haunch web;

fy,b is the yield strength of the beam.

(14) The types of welds to be used for haunched beam-to-column joints should comply with those specified
in E.2.3.3 and Figure E.9 a. The resistance of all welds should not be smaller than the resistance of the welded
parts. The web of the haunch should be welded with two fillet welds (one on each side of the web) with a
throat depth not smaller than 0,8 times the plate thickness. Critical welds, i.e. the welds of the top beam flange,
of the haunch flange, of the supplementary web plate to column flange and the welds connecting the beam
flange to the end-plate, should be full-penetration groove welds. In DC3 the top beam flange and haunch flange
groove welds should be reinforced with additional fillet welds as specified in Figure E.3. The reinforcing fillet
welds at the top beam flange and haunch flange may be omitted for joints in DC2.

289
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(1)
(C) (C) (E)
(D) (D)
MEd MEd

(B) (B)

0.5hh
hh (F) hh
0.5hh
(2)
sh,c=lh lh
(A) sh,c (A)

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Figure E.10 — Configurations of joints with haunch stiffener: (a) welded joint; (b) bolted end-plate
joint; (c) bolted joint under sagging moment; (d) bolted joint under hogging moment; (A) haunch; (B)
beam; (C) column; (D) vertical beam stiffener at the section of the haunch tip; (E) end-plate; (F) inner
continuity plate; (1) centre of compression under sagging moment; (2) centre of compression under
hogging moment

(15) Weld access holes may not be made at the beam flange to end-plate or column flange connections –
see E.2.3.3(6).

(16) The end plate thickness should be in the range of 16 mm to 40 mm. The steel grade of the end plates
should be S235 or S355. The width of the end plate should not be smaller than the width of the beam flange +
30 mm and not greater than the width of column flange.

(17) The Z grade of the steel in the end plate in bolted connections and the column flange in welded
connections should comply with EN 1993-1-10, but it should not be smaller than Z15.

(18) High strength preloadedboltsaccording to EN 14399-3 (system HR) and EN 14399-4 (system HV)
should be used. Bolts should be fully preloaded according to EN 1090-2. The nominal bolt diameter should be
in the range of 14 mm to 40 mm.

(19) The bolt holes should comply with EN1993-1-8. They should be made by drilling or sub-punching and
reaming. Bolt holes should not be oversized.

(20) Finger shims may be interposed between the end plate and the column flange at both ends of the beam
to adjust the constructional tolerances. Each shim thickness should not be greater than 2 mm and the total
thickness of the stacked shims should not be greater than 8 mm at each end of the beam.

(21) In linear elastic analysis, frames equipped with haunched joints may be modelled by means of a centre-
line structural model. The deformability of the column web panel and of the connection may be ignored.

(22) In non-linear analyses the column web panel and the connection should be distinctly modelled as
given in a) to d):

the column web panel should be simulated with alternative models accounting for its stiffness and
resistance if designed as specified in E.2.2.2(4)b) and c);

the column web panel should be simulated using rigid segments per its axis with length equal to half
dimension of the column web panel if designed as specified in E.2.2.2(4)a);

290
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

the connection should be simulated as rigid;

the monotonic and cyclic behaviour of the beam should be modelled.

E.2.3.5. Joints with rib stiffeners

(1) Beam-to-column joints reinforced using rib stiffener above the upper flange of the beam and below its
bottom flange may be either welded (see Figure E.11) or bolted (see Figure E.12). Bolted stiffened end-plate
joints may be either full strength or equal strength, with strong or balanced column web panel.

(2) The bolted connection should use an extended end plate with different configurations of bolt rows
(see Figure E.12) depending on the target design performance of the connection and the beam depth, as
specified in a) to e):

four bolt row configurations (see Figure E.12 b) for equal strength connection with depth of I beams from
230 mm to 500 mm;

four bolt row configurations (see Figure E.12 b) for full strength connection with depth of I beams from
230 mm to 360 mm;

six bolt row configurations (see Figure E.12 c) for full strength connection with depth of I beams from 360
mm to 600 mm;

six bolt row configurations (see Figure E.12 c) for equal strength connection with depth of I beams from
500 mm to 910 mm.

eight bolt row configurations (see Figure E.12 d) for full strength connection withdepth of I beams from
600 mm to 910 mm;

(3) Full (both welded and bolted) and equal (bolted) strength connections should be used for DC3
structures.

(4) The design action effects in full-strength connections (both welded and bolted) should be calculated
with Formula E.1.Their design resistance should be calculated with EN1993-1-8 and should comply with the
additional assumptions for bolted connections in (6).

(5) The design action effects in equal strength bolted connection should be calculated with Formula E.2.
Their design resistance should be calculated with EN1993-1-8 and should comply with the additional
assumptions in (6).

(6) The resistance of bolted connections should be calculated considering the additional assumptions in
a) to d):

The active bolt rows in tension are those above the axis of the beam under hogging moment and below
under sagging moment;

The centre of compression is located at the centroid of the beam flange and rib web (see Figure E.13);

the conditions given in E.2.3.1(5) and (8) apply;

the conditions given in E.2.3.1(8) and (9) apply but only in the case of four or six bolt rows configurations.

(7) E.2.3.4(6) should be applied. The clear span-to-depth ratio (i.e. the distance between the assumed
location of plastic hinges divided by the beam depth) should not be less than 7 for MRFs and 5 for dual frames.

291
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(8) E.2.3.4(7) should be applied, but with a beam depth range from 230 mm to 910 mm.

(9) E.2.3.4(8) should be applied, but with a column depth range from 200 mm to 1000 mm.

(10) E.2.3.4(10) should be applied.

(11) Continuity plates should comply with E.2.3.2(5) and E.2.3.2(6).

(12) The rib angle measured between the flange of the beam and the line intersecting the edge of tip of the
rib and the corresponding tip on the end plate or the column flange (see Figure E.14) should be between 30°
and 40°. The stiffener should be clipped where it meets the beam flange and the end plate or the column flange
to provide clearance between the stiffener and the weld (see Figure E.14).

(13) The thickness of the rib should comply with Formula (E.6).

,
𝑡 , ≥𝑡 , (E.6)
,

where:

tw,r is the thickness of the rib web;

tw,b is the thickness of the beam web;

fy,r is the yield strength of the rib web;

fy,b is the yield strength of the beam.

(14) In full strength connection, the depth-to-thickness ratio of ribs should comply with Formula (E.7).

≤ 0,56 (E.7)
, ,

where hr is the depth of the rib web and E is the elastic modulus of the steel.

NOTE This is required to prevent buckling of the rib stiffener.

(15) The depth of the rib web hr should be between 100 mm and 250 mm.

(16) The types of welds to be used for rib stiffened beam-to-column joints should should comply with those
in E.2.3.3, and in Figure E.9 b. The resistance of all welds should not be smaller than the resistance of the
welded parts. The web of the rib should be welded with grove full penetration welds and reinforcing fillet
welds. The rib-to-beam and the rib-to-end-plate welds should comply with E.2.3.3(9). The beam web should
be connected to either the column flange or the end-plate with fillet welds with a minimum side of 0,8 times
the beam web thickness. Critical welds (beam flange and supplementary web plate to column flange and beam
flange to end-plate) should be full-penetration groove welds. In DC3, beam flange groove welds should be
reinforced with additional fillet welds as in Figure E.3. In DC2, the reinforcing fillet welds at beam flanges may
be omitted for full strength connections but should be added for equal strength connections.

292
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(A)
(1) (2)

(B)

(C) hr

sh,c=lr
(A)

(a) (b) (c)

Figure E.11 — Configurations of welded joints with rib stiffeners: (a) the assembly; (b) connection
with single rib per beam flange; (c) connection with double rib per beam flange; (A) rib; (B) beam;
(C) column; (1) single rib; (2) double rib

(A)

(D)

(B)

(C) hr
lr
sh,c
(A)

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Figure E.12 — Configurations of bolted end-plate joints with rib stiffener: a) the assembly; (b)
connection with four bolt rows; (c) connection with six bolt rows; (d) connection with eight bolt
rows; (A) rib; (B) beam; (C) column; (D) end-plate

293
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) (1)
(3) (3)

(2)
MEd

(a) (b) (c)

Figure E.13 — Location of centre f compression in connections with rib stiffener: a) welded
connection; (b) bolted connection; (c) T-area made of beam flange and rib web; (1) rib web; (2) beam
flange; (3) centre of compression in the centroid of T-area

25 mm

hr

30° - 40° 25 mm

lr

Figure E.14 — Slope and corner clips of rib stiffener

(17) End-plate thickness should be in the range of 12 mm to 60 mm. Steel grade S235 or S355 should be
used for the end plate. The width of the end plate should be between the width of the beam flange + 30 mm
and the width of the column flange.

(18) For equal strength bolted connections, the end-plate thickness tp should comply with Formula E.8.

𝑡 < 0,30 𝑑 ,
(E.8)
,

where d is the nominal diameter of the bolt; fu,b is the ultimate tensile strength of the bolt; fy,p is the tensile
yield strength of the material of the end plate.

(19) E.2.3.4(17) should be applied.

(20) E.2.3.4(18) should be applied.

(21) E.2.3.4(19) should be applied.

294
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(22) The horizontal distance between bolts per row should be between 80mm and 160mm.

(23) E.2.3.4(20) should be applied.

(24) In linear elastic analysis, frames equipped with full strength rib stiffened joints may be modelled with
centre-line models where the deformability of both column web panel and connection is neglected. The
deformability of equal strength bolted connection should be modelled.

(25) In non-linear analyses the column web panel and the connection should be distinctly modelled as
given in a) to e):

the column web panel should be modelled with alternative models accounting for its stiffness and
resistance if designed as specified in E.2.2.2(4)b);

the column web panel should be modelled using rigid segments per its axis with length equal to half
dimension of the column web panel if designed as specified in E.2.2.2(4)a);

the connection should be modelled as rigid for full strength joints;

the stiffness and resistance of the connection should be modelled for equal strength joints;

the monotonic and cyclic behaviour of the beam should be modelled.

E.2.3.6. Unstiffened Joints

(1) Unstiffened beam-to-column joints may be either welded (see Figure E.15a) or bolted (see Figure
E.15b). Bolted unstiffened end-plate joints may be either full, equal or partial strength, with strong or balanced
or weak column web panel.

(2) Bolted connections should make use of extended end plates.

(3) The configurations of bolt rows (see Figure E.15) should depend on the target design performance of
the connection and on the beam depth, as specified in a) to f):

four bolt row configurations (see Figure E.15 c) for full strength connection withdepth of I beams
between230 mm to 300 mm;

four bolt row configurations (see Figure E.15 c) for equal strength connection with depth of I beams
between230 mm to 500 mm;

four bolt row configurations (see Figure E.15 c) for partial strength connection withdepth of I beams
should range within 230 mm to 910 mm;

six bolt row configurations (see Figure E.15 d) for full strength connection withdepth of I beams between
300 mm to 450 mm;

six bolt row configurations (see Figure E.15 d) for equal strength connection withdepth of I beams
between 500 mm to 910 mm;

six bolt row configurations (see Figure E.15 d) for partial strength connection withdepth of I beams
between 230 mm to 910 mm.

295
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(C)

(D)

(A) (A)

(B) (B)

(a)
(b) (c) (d)

Figure E.15 — Configurations of unstiffened joints: a) welded connection; (b) bolted connection; (b)
bolted connection with four bolt rows; (d) bolted connection with six bolt rows; (A) beam; (B)
column; (C) beam flange-to-column flange weld access hole; (D) end-plate

(4) Full (both welded and bolted) or equal (bolted) strength connections should be used for DC3 and DC2
moment and dual frames. For DC3 and DC2 dual frames, partial strength bolted connections with either
balanced or weak column web panel may be used.

Note the condition (4) may also be applied to DC1 structures.

(5) E.2.3.5(4) should be applied for full strength connections.

(6) E.2.3.5(5) should be applied for equal strength connections.

(7) The design action effect in a partial strength bolted connection should be evaluated in accordance with
Formula E.3 and the design resistance should be calculated in accordance with EN1993-1-8 and assumptions
specified in (8).

(8) The resistance of bolted connection should be calculated considering the additional assumptions a) to
c):

The active bolt rows in tension are those above the central axis of the beam under hogging moment and
below the axis of the beam under sagging moment;

the conditions given in E.2.3.1(5) and E.2.3.1(7);

for four bolt row configurations, the conditions given in E.2.3.1(8) and E.2.3.1(9)

(9) E.2.3.5(7) should be applied.

(10) E.2.3.5(8) should be applied.

(11) E.2.3.5(9) should be applied.

(12) E.2.3.4(10) should be applied.

(13) Continuity plates should comply with E.2.3.2(5) and E.2.3.2(6).

296
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(14) The types of welds to be used for unstiffened beam-to-column joints should be as in E.2.3.3. The beam
web should be connected with fillet welds with a minimum side of 0,8 times the beam web thickness. Critical
welds (beam flange and supplementary web plate to column flange and beam flange to end-plate) should be
full-penetration groove welds. In DC3, beam flange groove welds should be reinforced with additional fillet
welds as in Figure E.3. In DC2, the reinforcing fillet welds at beam flanges may be omitted for full strength
connections but should be added for equal and partial strength connections.

(15) Access holes at the beam flange to column flange weld should be as detailed in E.2.3.3(6) and Figure
E.8.

(16) There should not be access holes in the web of the beams in accordance with E.2.3.3(7).

(17) End-plate thickness should be in the range of 10 mm to 60 mm. The steel grade of end plate should be
S235 or S355. The width of the end plate should not be smaller than the width of the beam flange + 30 mm
and not greater than the width of column flange.

(18) For equal and partial strength bolted connections, the end-plate thickness tp should comply with
Formula E.8.

(19) E.2.3.4(17) should be applied.

(20) E.2.3.4(18) should be applied.

(21) E.2.3.4(19) should be applied.

(22) The horizontal distance between bolts per row should not be smaller than 80mm and not greater than
170mm.

(23) E.2.3.4(20) should be applied.

(24) In linear elastic analysis, frames with welded unstiffened joints may be modelled with centre-line
models in which the deformability of both column web panel ismodeled. The deformability of both equal and
partial strength bolted connection should be modelled.

(25) In non-linear analyses the column web panel and the connection should be distinctly modelled as
given in a) to e):

the column web panel should be modelled with alternative models accounting for its stiffness and
resistance if designed as specified in E.2.2.2(b) or in E.2.2.2(c);

the column web panel should be modelled using rigid segments per its axis with length equal to half
dimension of the column web panel if designed as specified in E.2.2.2(a);

the stiffness of the connection should be modelled for full strength bolted joints;

the stiffness and resistance of the connection should be modelled for equal and partial strength bolted
joints;

the monotonic and cyclic behaviour of beams should be modelled.

297
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

E.2.3.7. Joints with reduced beam section

(1) Joints with reduced beam section (RBS or “dog-bone joints”) should be designed to avoid plastic
deformations in non-yielding connections and to form a plastic hinge in the portion of the beam with reduced
section. Both welded and bolted end plate connections may be used (see Figure E.16).

(2) The flanges of the beam should be cut as given in a) to d):

The distance “a” between the column face and the beginning of the RBS should satisfyFormula E.9.

𝑎 = 0,60 𝑏 (E.9)

where bf is the width of the beam flange.

The length “b” over which the flange should be reduced should satisfy Formula E.10.

𝑏 = 0,75 𝑑 (E.10)

where db is the beam depth.

The depth of the flange cut “c” on each side should be not greater than 0,25 bf. The value given by Formula
E.11 may be used.

𝑐 = 0,20 𝑏 (E.11)

The radius of the flange cut “r” should be taken as given by Formula E.12.

𝑟= (E.12)

(3) A grinding of the cut surface of the beam reduced section should be specified. to remove

r r r r

c c

c c
a b a b

(C) (C)

(A) (A)

(B) sh,c (B) sh,c

(D) (D)

(a) (b)

Figure E.16 — Configurations of joints with reduced beam section: a) welded connection; (b) bolted
connection; (b) bolted connection; (A) beam; (B) column; (C) reduced beam flange; (D) protected
zone

298
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(4) The plastic modulus (Wpl,RBS) and the plastic moment (Mpl,Rd,RBS) of the plastic hinge section at the
centre of the RBS should be calculated from Formulae (E.13) and (E.14).

𝑊 , =𝑊 , − 2 𝑐 𝑡 (𝑑 − 𝑡 ) (E.13)

𝑀 , , =𝑊 , 𝑓 , ⁄𝛾 (E.14)

where Wpl,b is the plastic modulus of the beam; fy,b is the yield strength of the steel in the beam; tf is the
thickness of the beam flange.

(5) The distance sh,c between the column face and the intended plastic hinge section at the centre of the
RBS should be taken as given by Formulas (E.15) and (E.16).

𝑠 , = (𝑎 + 0,5𝑏) for welded connections (E.15)

𝑠 , = 𝑎 + 0,5𝑏 + 𝑡 for bolted connections (E.16)

where tp is the thickness of the end plate in bolted connections

(6) Welded and bolted connections with RBS should be designed as full strength in accordance with
Formula E.1; their resistance should be calculated in accordance with EN1993-1-8 and the assumptions in
E.2.3.6(7).

(7) Both welded and bolted connections with RBS may be used for DC3 structures.

(8) E.2.3.4(6) should be applied.

(9) Beams should comply with E.2.3.6(10).

(10) Lateral bracings should be used to restrain the beam section close to the dog-bone zone against lateral
torsional buckling. The stable length Lst should be taken equal to the length of the protected zone (see Figure
E.16), as given by Formula (E.17).

𝐿 = (2𝑎 + 𝑏) (E.17)

NOTE For joints with RBS, Formula (11.6) is not valid

(11) Columns should comply with E.2.3.5(9).

(12) If supplementary web plates are necessary, they should comply with E.2.3.2.

(13) Continuity plates should comply with E.2.3.2(5) and E.2.3.2(6).

(14) The types of welds to be used should comply with E.2.3.6(14).

(15) E.2.3.4(15) should be applied.

(16) The end-plate thickness should comply with E.2.3.6(17).

(17) E.2.3.4(17) should be applied.

(18) E.2.3.4(18) should be applied.

(19) E.2.3.4(19) should be applied.

299
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(20) E.2.3.5(22) should be applied for bolted connections.

(21) E.2.3.4(20) should be applied.

(22) Centre-line structural model of frames equipped with reduced beam sectionsmay be used in linear
elastic analysis. The deformability of both column web panels and connections may be ignored.

(23) In non-linear analyses the column web panel and the connection should be distinctly modelled as
given in a) to d):

the column web panel should be modelled with alternative models accounting for its stiffness and
resistance if designed as specified in E.2.2.2(4)b or in E.2.2.2(4)c;

the column web panel should be modelled using rigid segments per its axis with length equal to half
dimension of the column web panel if designed as specified in E.2.2.2(4)a;

the stiffness of the connection should be modelled for full strength bolted joints;

the monotonic and cyclic behaviour of RBS should be modelled.

E.2.3.8. Other types of joints

(1) Beam-to-column joints other than those specified from E.2.3.4 to E.2.3.7 may be used provided that
the conditions in a) and b) are satisfied:

prequalification tests are performed in accordance with 11.9.4(10);

local details comply with E.2.3.1, E.2.3.2 and E.2.3.3.

(2) The condition b) in (1) may be waived if experimental evidence proves the ductility and capacity of
the joints for the full range of designed beam-column profiles.

(3) Prequalified connections may be used in DC2 and DC3 design, within the applicability limits of
prequalification and without any request for further qualifying cyclic tests.

NOTE CEN Doc. XXE gives a loading protocol and acceptance criteria for tests for prequalification.

E.3.Beam-to-column connections allowing rotations in braced frames

E.3.1. General

(1) Beam-to-column connections allowing rotation in accordance with 11.10.5(2)a should have a splice
in the beam outside the gusset plate, see Figure E.17.

NOTE The beam-to-beam splice relieves the gusset plate of in-plane moments and guarantees the required rotation
capacity.

(2) The beam-to-beam splice should be detailed with either bolted double plates (see Figure E.17 a) or
bolted flush end plates (see Figure E.17 b) and spaced from the edge of the gusset not less than the width bf of
the beam.

(3) The beam-to-column connections should be detailed as specified in E.2.

300
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(4) The gusset plate connections should be detailed as specified in E.4, E.5 and E.6 for concentrically,
eccentrically and buckling restrained bracings, respectively.

(5) The shear resistance of bolts of flush end-plate beam-to-beam splice should not be smaller than 1,2
times the design bearing resistance of the weaker connected plates.

(6) The thickness of flush end-plate beam-to-beam splice should comply with Formula E.8.

(7) The welds of flush end-plate splice should comply with E.2.3.6(13).

(8) E.2.3.4(18) should be applied

(9) E.2.3.4(19) should be applied

bf bf

(a) (b)

Figure E.17 — Beam-to-column connections allowing rotations in braced frames: a) beam-to-beam

splice with bolted double plates; (b) beam-to-beam splice with bolted flush end plates

E.4.Gusset plate connections in concentric bracings

E.4.1. General

(1) Gusset plate connections should be designed to accommodate brace buckling under repeated cyclic
loading in accordance with 11.10.6(3) and 11.10.6(4).

(2) Buckling of the gusset plates should be prevented and restraint-free plastic out-of-plane rotations
allowed about either a yield line (either linear or elliptical) in the gusset plate or in a short yielding segment
in the axis of the brace.

E.4.2. Gussets with linear clearance

(1) Yield lines at each end of the brace should be perpendicular to the brace axis. A 2tgp to 4tgp clearance
(where tgp is the gusset plate’s thickness) should be detailed between the end of the brace and the assumed
geometric line of the gusset restraints that is drawn from the point on the gusset plate nearest to the brace
end that is constrained from out-of-plane rotation (in Figure E.18 the gusset-plate hinge-zone is denoted as
E).

301
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) If the offset of the yield line is within the thickness of a concrete slab, the gusset plate should be isolated
from the slab by means of compressible material (e.g. polystyrene, fire caulking, etc.), see Figure E.19 a.
Alternatively, the gusset may be detailed to shift the offset of the yield line out of the slab thickness , see Figure
E.19 b.

(E) (E)
(C) (C)
30° 30°

30° 30°
(D)
(D) [2tgp÷4tgp] [2tgp÷4tgp]

(A) (A)

(B) (B)

(a) (b)

Figure E.18 — Configurations of gusset plate connections for out-of-plane buckling: a) welded
connection; (b) bolted connection; (b) bolted connection; (A) beam; (B) column; (C) diagonal brace;
(D) gusset plate; (E) linear clearance

(1)

(3)
(1)
(2)

(a) (b)

Figure E.19 — slab-to-gusset details: a) isolated from the slab; (b) restrained by the slab; (1) linear
clearance; (2) compressible material; (3) edge stiffener

(3) If the free edge of the gusset plate is larger than 4tgp beyond the theoretical yield line, an edge stiffener
should stabilise the gusset plate and restrain the yield line, see Figure E.19 b. The edge stiffener should
terminate outside the gusset-plate hinge.

(4) There should be an offset not smaller than 25 mm from each side of the brace to the free edge of the
gusset plate, see Figure E.18.

(5) The angle betweenthe edge of the gusset plate and the brace axis should be 30 degrees, see Figure
E.18.

(6) The brace lap length of a welded gusset plate should be 25 mm longer than the specified weld length
Lw , see Figure E.20 b.

302
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(7) To calculate the tension and buckling resistance of the gusset plate against forces transferred by the
connected brace, the resisting area of the gusset plate should be calculated with Formula (E.18).

𝐴 =𝑡 𝑊 (E.18)

where tgp is the thickness of the gusset plate; Wd is the effective width of the gusset plate see (8).

(8) The effective width Wd of the gusset plate at the hinge zone, defined between two 30° lines drawn from
either the tips of the welds in welded connection or the first bolts on the gusset that intersect the centreline
axis of the last bolt (see Figure E.20) should be calculated from Formula (E.19).

𝑏 + 2√3 𝐿 for welded connections

𝑊 = (E.19)
𝑔 + 2√3 𝐿 for bolted connections

where:

Lw is the length of the weld connecting the bracing member to the gusset plate;

Lb is the length of the bolted connection of the bracing member to the gusset plate;

b is the distance between the weld lines;

g is the distance between the bolt lines.

30° 30°

30°
30°

(a) (b)

Figure E.20 — Effective width of gusset plate: a) welded brace; (b) bolted brace

(9) The buckling resistance of the gusset plate should be calculated from the buckling length 𝐿 , from
Formula (E.20).

𝐿 , = (E.20)

where L1, L2 and L3 are the projections of the effective widths to the edges of the gusset plate, see Figure E.20.

(10) The welds of welded gusset plate should be either full penetration groove welds or fillet welds with
throat depth not smaller than the thickness of the gusset plate.

303
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

E.4.3. Gussets with elliptical clearance

(1) An elliptical clearance is the plastic hinge zone of the gusset around which the brace rotates when out-
of-plane buckling occurs. An elliptical clearance is shaped as an elliptical band with a clear 8tgp width, see
Figure E.21 where the gusset-plate hinge-zone is indicated as (D).

(2) The dimensions “a” and “b” of a gusset with elliptical clearance should be selected so that the
imaginary corner of the gusset intersects the centroidal axis of the brace (see Figure E.21) for welded or bolted
gussets. The radii a’ and b’ of the ellipse should be calculated from Formula (E.21).

𝑎 = 𝑎 − 8𝑡 and 𝑏 = 𝑏 − 8𝑡 (E.21)

(3) The welds of welded gusset plates should comply with E.4.2(10).

(4) The resistance of the gusset plate should be assumed as in E.4.2(7) and E.4.2(8).

(5) The buckling length of the gusset plate should be assumed as in E.4.2(9).

α
c
α c
c
c
(D)
(D)
(C) (C)

y*
y*
b
b

8tgp
8tgp
x* x*
a a

(A) (A)

(B) (B)

(a) (b)

Figure E.21 — Elliptical clearance of gusset plate: a) welded brace; (b) bolted brace; (A) beam; (B)
column); (C) diagonal brace; (D) elliptical clearance

E.4.4. Gussets detailed for in-plane rotations

(1) In a gusset plates detailed with knife plate, see (E) in Figure E.22, to allow in-plane inelastic rotations
in the yielding segment between the gusset plate and the diagonal brace. around whichthe brace rotates when
in-plane buckling occurs, the length of the yielding clearance should be equal to 3tgp , see Figure E.22.

304
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Figure E.22 — Elliptical clearance of gusset plate: a) welded brace; (b) bolted brace; (A) beam; (B)
column); (C) diagonal brace; (D) gusset plate; (E) knife plate

(2) The knife plate may be welded or bolted to the gusset plate.

(3) The resistance of the connection between the knife plate and the gusset plates should be greater than
the ultimate axial resistance of the brace calculated from Formula 11.23.

(4) The resisting area of the gusset plate should be calculated as in E.4.2(7).

(5) The buckling length of the gusset plate should be calculated as in E.4.2(9).

(6) The resistance and stability of the gusset should be verified against the expected forces transmitted
by the brace in accordance with 11.10.6(2).

E.5.Partial strength connections in concentrical bracings

E.5.1. General

(1) Partial strength connections may be used in concentric bracings only if energy dissipation takes place
entirely in these connections while there is no buckling and yielding of braces and other components.

(2) Dissipative partial strength connections in bracings should comply with 11.10.3(11).

E.5.2. INERD-PIN connection

(1) INERD-PIN connections may be placed at one or both ends of the diagonals and may be connected to
both strong and weak axis of the column.

NOTE In INERD-PIN connection, a pin crosses two external plates connected to the frame columns/beams, and one
or two internal plates connected to the brace (see Figure E.23).

(2) Dissipative pin connections should be designed in such a way that yielding of the pins in bending will
take place before buckling or yielding of the braces and of the adjacent members and parts.

(3) The length of the pin should comply with Formula E.22.

𝑎>ℎ (E.22)

305
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

where h is the height of the pin (see Figure E.24); a is the clear distance between the internal and external
plates (see Figure E.24).

a) b)
Figure E.23 — INERD-PIN connections: a) single plate; (b) double plate

Figure E.24 — Geometrical features of INERD-PIN connections: a) single plate; (b) double plate

(4) The thickness of the external plates text should not be smaller than 0,5tint in single plate configuration
and equal or greater than tint in double plate configurations, where tint is the thickness of the internal plate, see
Figure E.24.

(5) The resistance Rd of welds or bolts of the dissipative pin connection should satisfy Formula (11.4).

(6) In the analysis of frames with dissipative pin connections both the tension and compression diagonals
should be taken into account. The pin connection should be modelled as an axial spring, whose elastic stiffness
should be calculated from Formula (E.23).

for single internal plate

𝐾 = (E.23)
∙ ∙ ∙( )
for double internal plate

where ΕΙ is the bending stiffness of the pin; c is the distance of the external plates; α is the ratio a/c.

(7) The design resistance of the pin connection should be greater than NEd = NEd,G “+” NEd,E.

(8) The resistance of the pin connection Rj,Rd should be the minimum of those due to bending and shear of
the pin calculated from Formulae (E.24) and (E.25).

306
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

,
𝑅, , = for bending (E.24)

𝑅, , =𝑉 , for shear (E.25)

where 𝑀 , is the plastic moment of the section of the pin; 𝑉 , is the plastic shear force of the section of
the pin.

(9) The design overstrength of the pin connection d,M yielding in bending is the minimum value of the
ratio Rj,M,Rd / NEd,j where NEd,j is the axial force in the connection.

(10) The design overstrength of the pin connection d,V yielding in shear is the minimum value of the ratio
Rj,V,Rd / NEd,j where NEd,j is the axial force in the connection.

(11) In order to achieve a global behaviour of the structure, it should be checked that the maximum design
overstrength ratio over the entire structure does not differ from the minimum value of d,V and d,M by more
than 25%.

(12) The tensile and buckling resistance of diagonal members should be greater than the ultimate
resistance of the pins, which should be taken equal to 𝛾 𝛾 𝑅 , , where 𝛾 is the material overstrength
factor and 𝛾 is given in Table 11.7.

(13) Beams and columns connected to braces with INERD-PIN connections should be verified considering
the most unfavourable combination of NEd, MEd and VEd, calculated according to Formula (11.3) for DC3
connections and according to Formula (11.2) for DC2 connections.

(14) For DC3 connections, when applying Formula (11.3), d is obtained as the minimal value of d,M and
d,V and 𝛾 is obtained as follows:

a) 𝛾 in obtained in Table 11.7 for dissipative connections in bending when d =d,M ;

b) 𝛾 in obtained in Table 11.7 for dissipative connections in shear when d =d,V .

(15) For the application of (5), (12) and (13), rm should be obtained according to Table 11.2. When the
actual yield strength fy,ac,pin of the pin is known, rm may be assumed equal to 1,0, provided that fy,ac,pin is used
for the application of Formulae (E.24) and (E.25).

E.6.Brace connections in eccentric bracings

E.6.1. General

(1) Brace connections should be designed to resist the design action effects in the braces in accordance
with 11.11.3(3).

(2) The brace connections may be designed as fully rigid or pinned. In the first case, the braces should be
welded with full penetration groove welds to the beam containing the link (see Figure E.25) in accordance
with E.2.3.3(6) and Figure E.8. In the pinned case the connections should comply with E.6.2.

E.6.2. Gusset plate connections

(1) Gusset plate connections may be either welded (see Figure E.26 a) or bolted (see Figure E.26 b). Both
types of connections should be designed to restrain buckling of the braces. To this end, the clearance between
the beamand the brace should be the minimum compatible with the geometry of the assembly.

307
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) The joint should be as compact as possible. To this end, the free portions of the gussets should be the
minimum as possible.

(3) The free edges of the gusset plates should be stiffened as shown in Figure E26. The thickness and the
width of the stiffeners of the gusset plates should be not smaller than the those of the connected beam flange.

(4) The stiffener-to-gusset welds may be either full penetration groove welds or fillet welds with throat
depth not smaller than 0,8 times the thickness of the gusset plate.
e

(A) (A)

Figure E.25 — Welded brace connections of EBF: (A) full penetration groove welds in accordance
with E.2.3.3(6)

25mm

(B)
a)

25mm 25mm
(C)

(B)
b)

Figure E.26 — Gusset plate connections of diagonal braces of EBF: (B) stiffeners of the free edge of
the gusset; (C) end-plate connection in bolted gusset plates

308
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

E.7.Gusset plate connections in buckling restrained bracings

(1) Gusset plate connections should be designed to resist the ultimate resistance of the buckling
restrained braces in accordance with 11.12.7.

(2) Gusset plate connections may be either welded or bolted (see E.6.2). The free clearance between the
gusset and the brace should be the minimum compatible with the geometry of the assembly.

(3) The brace end connections may be designed as fixed or pinned. In both cases prequalification tests of
the assembly should be performed to verify the effectiveness of the details.

NOTE CEN Doc. XXE gives a loading protocol and acceptance criteria for such tests.

309
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(normative)

STEEL LIGHT WEIGHT STRUCTURES

F.1. Scope and description

F.1.1. Scope

(1) This annex should be used for the design of steel light weight structures made of cold-formed steel
frames braced by steel strap braces (i.e. strap braced walls) or by sheathing panels (i.e. shear walls) connected
by means of screws to the steel frame. Provisions in Annex F should be applied in addition to the provisions
in 11.14 and in EN 1993-1-3.

(2) The provisions in Annex F may be also applied to steel light weight structures made of cold-formed
steel frames different from those specified in Annex F, However, in those cases the validity and effectiveness
of their performance should be demonstrated by means of either experimental evidence, past experimental
results available in the literature or refined finite element simulations.

F.1.2. Description

(1) In lightweight cold-formed steel systems the primary resisting structures under seismic actions
should be lightweight cold-formed steel walls designed to resist in-plane lateral forces made of studs, i.e.
vertical load bearing equally spaced members screwed at each end to tracks, i.e. horizontal members
consisting of only a web and two flanges that restrain the studs at their ends.

(2) Each lightweight cold-formed steel wall should be provided at each end of chord studs and hold-downs
and tension anchorages or other vertical boundary elements, which should resist wall overturning forces, and
shear anchorages, which should resist in-plane shear forces.

(3) Horizontal forces should be mainly resisted by light weight members made of Class 4 sections laterally
braced by steel strap braces ( "strap braced walls"), or steel sheets (shear walls with steel sheet sheathing), or
wood sheathing panels (shear walls with wood sheathing) connected by means of screws.

(4) Shear walls with steel sheet sheathing and shear walls with wood sheathing should be full-height
sheathed, the studs should have a lipped channel section having at least a flange width of 40 mm, a web depth
of 90 mm and an edge stiffener of 10 mm, whereas tracks should have an unlipped channel section having at
least a flange width of 30 mm and a web depth of 90 mm.

F.2. Strap braced walls

F.2.1. Description

(1) Strap braced walls should be designed to resist in-plane lateral forces mainly with tension-only steel
straps applied diagonally, i.e. flat or coiled sheet steel material typically used for transferring loads by tension,
to form a vertical truss which forms part of the lateral force-resisting system (see Fig. F.1)..

310
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

1. stud; 2. chord stud; 3. track; 4. hold-down; 5. shear anchorage; 6. steel strap brace; 7. connection
of strap brace; 8: tension anchorage; ss: stud spacing.
Figure F.1 - Strap braced walls.

F.2.2. Overstrength requirements

(1) The components in a) to f) of the strap braced wall should be designed with the overstrength given by
Formula (11.4), with γsh equal to 1,1:

connections of strap brace;

chord studs or other compressed vertical boundary elements at the ends of the wall;

tracks;

hold-downs and tension anchorages and their connections or other tensioned vertical boundary
elements at the ends of wall;

shear anchorages;

all other components and connections in the wall.

F.3. Shear walls with steel sheet sheathing

F.3.1. Description

(1) See 11.14.5(1) and Figure F.2.

311
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

1. stud; 2. chord stud; 3. track; 4. hold-down; 5. shear anchorage; 6. steel sheet sheathing; 7. screw at panel
edge; 8: screw in the panel field; 9. sheathing joint; 10. tension anchorage; ss: stud spacing; sf: screw spacing
in the panel field; s: screw spacing at panel edge.
Figure F.2 — Shear walls with steel sheet sheathing

F.3.2. Geometrical and mechanical provisions for the components and parts

(1) a) to k) should be satisfied:

thickness of steel sheet sheathing should be in the range from 0,4 mm to 0,9 mm;

yield stress of steel sheet sheathing should not be greater than 350 MPa;

thickness of steel frame elements should be greater than 0,9 mm;

studs and tracks should have nominal yield strength fy of 220 MPa for members with thickness smaller
than 1,4 mm, and of 350 MPa for members with thickness at least 1,4 mm;

the thickness of steel sheet sheathing should not be greater than the thickness of steel frame elements;

screw spacing at panel edges should be from 50 mm to 150 mm and between the edges at most 300 mm;;

sheathing screw diameter should be in the range from 4,2 mm to 4,8 mm;

the end distance from the centre of the screw to the steel sheet sheathing edges should be at least 13 mm;

steel sheet panels less than 300 mm wide should not be used;

maximum stud spacing should be 600 mm on centres;

all sheathing panel edges should be attached to joists or tracks, sheathing panels should be connected
without horizontal joints, and where shear walls need multiple vertical sheathing panels, a single stud
should be used at the sheathing joint, unless the connection between the coupled studs is designed for the
shear transfer between sheathing panels.

F.3.3. Overstrength provisions

(1) Components in a) to d) of the shear wall should be designed with overstrength from Formula (F1):

312
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

chord studs or other compressed vertical boundary elements at the ends of the wall;

tracks;

hold-downs and tension anchorage and their connections or other tensioned vertical boundary elements
at the ends of wall;

all other components and connections in the wall.

Rd ≥ FEd,G + γrm Rc,Rd (F.1)

where:

Rd is the resistance of the component;

FEd,G is the action in the component or connections in the wall due to the non-seismic actions included in
the combination of actions for the seismic design situation;
Rc,Rd is the in-plane lateral resistance of the shear wall;

γrm is the material overstrength factor equal to 1,40.

F.3.4. Effective strip method

The effective strip method may be used in the range of geometrical and mechanical parameters in a)
to c):

walls should comply with F.3.2;

thickness of steel frame elements should be not greater than 1,4 mm;

the height-to-length ratio (aspect ratio) should be not smaller than 1,0 and not greater than 2,0.

(2) The shear strength of the shear wall should be controlled by the strength of the member-to-sheathing
connection, which should not exceed the yielding resistance of the effective sheathing strip (see Figure F.3).

Figure F.3 — Effective strip method

313
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

The effective strip width weff may be calculated using Formula (F.2):

𝑤 = 𝑤 , 𝑖𝑓 𝜆 ≤ 0,0819 or 𝑤 = 𝜌𝑤 , 𝑖𝑓𝜆 > 0,0819 (F.2)

where:
𝑤 = 𝑤/sin(arctan(ℎ/𝑤)) (F.3)

, ( , ) ,
𝜌= , (F.4)

𝜆 = 1,736 ( / )
(F.5)

𝛼 = 𝑓 /310,3 (F.6)

𝛼 = 𝑓 , /310,3 (F.7)

𝛽 = 𝑡/0,457 (F.8)

𝛽 = 𝑡 /0,457 (F.9)

𝛽 = 𝑠/152,4 (F.10)

h is the wall height;

w is the wall length;

fu is the ultimate tensile strength of steel sheathing (expressed in MPa);

𝑓 is the minimum of the ultimate tensile strength of stud or track (expressed in MPa);

t is the thickness of steel sheathing (expressed in mm);

𝑡 is the minimum of the thickness of stud or track (expressed in mm);

s is the screw spacing at panel edges (expressed in mm).

(3) The in-plane lateral resistance of wall Rc,Rd corresponding to the strength of the member-to-sheathing
connection may be obtained using Formula (F.11), but should not be greater than Ry,Rd, the design yielding
resistance of the effective sheathing which may be obtained using Formula (F.15).

Rc,Rd = 1,33 n Fb,Rd cos(arctan(h/w)) (F.11)

where:
n is the number of screws within the effective width

Fb,Rd is the design bearing resistance of the member-to-sheathing connection from Formulae (F.12) and
(F.13) and should be smaller than Fv,Rd/1,2, with Fv,Rd the design shear resistance of screws from
Formula (F.14).
,
, , ; , ; , ,
If ≤ 1,0, 𝐹 , = (F.12)
, ; ,
If ≥ 2,5, 𝐹 , = ,
(F.13)
If 1,0< < 2,5, 𝐹 , should be calculated by linear interpolation between Formulae (F.12) and (F.13).
fu,1 is the ultimate tensile strength of stud or track;

314
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

t1 is the thickness of stud or track;

d is the nominal diameter of screws;

γM2 is equal to 1,25.

(4) The shear resistance of the screws should be obtained fromFormula (F.14).

𝐹 , = 𝐹 , /𝛾 (F.14)
where Fv,k is the characteristic strength of the fastener according to EN 1993-1-3.

(5) The design yielding resistance of the effective sheathing strip should be calculated from Formula (F.15).

Ry,Rd = 1,33 weff t fy cos(arctan(h/w)) / γM0 (F.15)

where:
fy is the yielding strength of steel sheathing;

γM0 is in accordance with EN 1993-1-1.

F.4. Shear walls with wood sheathing

F.4.1. Description

(1) See 11.14.6(1) and Figure F.4.

1. stud; 2. chord stud; 3. track; 4. hold-down; 5. shear anchorage; 6. wood sheathing panel; 7. Screw spacing
at panel edge; 8: screw spacing in the panel field; 9. sheathing joint; 10. tension anchorage; ss: stud spacing;
sf: screw in the panel field; s: screw at panel edge.
Figure F.4 — Shear walls with wood sheathing

F.4.2. Geometrical and mechanical provisions for the components and parts

(1) a) to i) should be satisfied:

315
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

wood structural panel sheathing should be either Oriented Strand Board (OSB (see EN 300)) with a
thickness from 9 mm to 11 mm or Plywood (EN 636) with a thickness from 9,5 mm to 12,5 mm;

the thickness of steel frame elements should be greater than 1,1 mm;

studs and tracks should have nominal yield strength fy of 220 MPa for members with thickness smaller
than 1,4 mm and of 350 MPa for those with thickness at least 1,4 mm;

screw spacing at panel edges should be from 50 mm to 150 mm and between the edges at most 300 mm;

for members with thickness smaller than 1,4 mm, sheathing screws should have nominal diameter of
4,2 mm and minimum head diameter of 7,2 mm; for those with thickness not smaller than 1,4 mm
sheathing screws should have nominal diameter of 4,8 mm and minimum head diameter of 8,5 mm;

the distance from the centre of the screw to the wood sheet sheathing edges should be at least 13 mm;

wood panels smaller than 300 mm wide should not be used;

maximum stud spacing should be 600 mm on centres;

all sheathing panel edges should be attached to joists or tracks, sheathing panels should be connected
without horizontal joints, and where shear walls require multiple vertical sheathing panels, a single stud
should be used at the sheathing joint, unless the connection between the coupled studs is designed for the
shear transfer between sheathing panels.

F.4.3. Overstrength provisions

(1) The components in a) to e) of the shear wall should be designed with overstrength with Formula
(F.16):

the wood sheathing;

chord studs or other compressed vertical boundary elements at the ends of the wall;

tracks;

hold-downs and tension anchorages and their connections or other tensioned vertical boundary elements
at the ends of wall;

all other components and connections in the wall.

Rd ≥ FEd,G + γrm Rc,k (F.16)

where:
Rd is the resistance of the component;

FEd,G is the action in the component or connections in the wall due to the non-seismic actions
included in the combination of actions for the seismic design situation;

Rc,k is t he in-plane lateral characteristic resistance of the shear wall;

rm is the material overstrength factor equal to 1,50.

316
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

F.5 Shear walls with gypsum sheathing

F.5.1 Description

(1) See 11.14.7(1) and Figure F.5.

1. stud; 2. chord stud; 3. track; 4. hold-down; 5. shear anchorage; 6. gypsum sheathing panel; 7. Screw
spacing at panel edge; 8: screw spacing in the panel field; 9. sheathing joint; 10. tension anchorage; ss: stud
spacing; sf: screw in the panel field; s: screw at panel edge.

Figure F.5 — Shear walls with gypsum sheathing

F.5.2 Geometrical and mechanical provisions for the components and parts

(1) a) to i) should be satisfied:

a) gypsum panel sheathing (EN 520) should have a thickness of 12,5 mm;

b) the thickness of steel frame elements should be greater than 0,9 mm;

c) studs and tracks should have nominal yield strength fy of 220 MPa for members with thickness less than
1,4 mm, and of 350 MPa for those with thickness equal or greater than 1,4 mm;

d) screw spacing at panel edges should be in the range from 50 mm to 150 mm;

e) screw spacing in the panel field should be not more than 300 mm;

sheathing screws should have nominal diameter of 4,2 mm and minimum head diameter of 7,2 mm;

the end distance from the centre of the screw to the gypsum sheet sheathing edges should be not less than
12,5 mm;

Gypsum panels less than 300 mm wide may not be used;

maximum stud spacing should be 600 mm on centre;

317
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

all sheathing panel edges should be attached to joists or tracks, sheathing panels should be connected
without horizontal joints, and where shear walls require multiple vertical sheathing panels, a single stud
should be used at the sheathing joint, unless the connection between the coupled studs is designed for the
shear transfer between sheathing panels.

F.5.3 Overstrength requirements for DC3

(1) The components in a) to e) of the shear wall should be designed with overstrength with Formula (F.17):

the gypsum sheathing;

chord studs or other compressed vertical boundary elements at the ends of the wall;

tracks;

hold-downs and tension anchorages and their connections or other tensioned vertical boundary elements
at the ends of wall;

all other components and connections in the wall.

Rd ≥ FEd,G +γrm Rc,k (F.17)

where
Rd is the resistance of the component;

FEd,G is the action in the component or connections in the wall due to the non-seismic actions
included in the combination of actions for the seismic design situation;

Rc,k is the in-plane lateral characteristic resistance of the Shear wall;

rm is the material overstrength factor equal to 1,50.

318
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(normative)

DESIGN OF COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS IN DISSIPATIVE COMPOSITE STEEL-

CONCRETE MOMENT RESISTING FRAMES

G.1. Scope

(1) This annex should be used for the design, fabrication and quality criteria of full-strength composite
connections of dissipative composite steel or steel beams to composite or concrete columns in composite steel
- concrete moment resisting frames designed to DC2 and DC3 with the provisions of 11 and 12.

G.2. Materials

(1) All bolts should be of 10.9 class according to EN1993-1-8, 3.1.1.

G.3. Design provisions

G.3.1. General

(1) The distance of the plastic hinge location from the face of the column, 𝑠 , should be taken in
accordance with the provisions for the individual connection according to Annex E.2.2.2.

(2) For the moment resistance of full-strength composite connections Annex E.2.2.2 should be applied.

(3) Full-strength composite connections should be designed for the design bending resistance 𝑀 , as
defined in Annex E.2.2.2. In composite steel beams the nominal bending resistance under positive moment
should be calculated according to EN1994-1-1 and 12.8.6.2.

G.4. Joints between steel beams and reinforced concrete or composite Columns

G.4.1. General

(1) The joint aspect ratio ℎ /ℎ should satisfy: 0,5 ≤ ℎ /ℎ ≤ 1,5,

where:

ℎ is the depth of the concrete or composite column in the plane of the beam (see Figure G.1);

ℎ is the depth of the steel beam (see Figure G.1).

(2) Width-to-thickness ratios of the flanges and web of the beam should satisfy the requirements of
section classification and structure ductility class in Table 11.5 in 11.8.3.

(3) Lateral bracing of beams should be provided according to 12.8.6 and 12.9.

(4) The protected zone should consist of the portion of the composite steel or steel beam between the
face of the column and 1,5ℎ from it.

(5) Beam-to-column panel zone joints should conform to 12.9.6.

319
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(6) Face bearing plates as shown in Figure G.1, should be used on all beams that frame into columns and
transfer moment demands through the joint.

(7) Face bearing plates should be within the beam depth, with a minimum depth, ℎ ≥ ℎ − 𝑡 (see Figure
G.1); they should be designed according to G.4.9.

(8) Joint deformations should be considered in 12.5.

Key
A Face bearing plates;
B Column;
C Steel or composite beam;
D Wide face bearing plate;
E Vertical reinforcement bars;
F Extended face bearing plates;
G Structural steel profile;

Figure G.1 — Joint configurations between steel beams and reinforced concrete or composite
columns

G.4.2. Joint forces

(1) A composite joint should be designed for the interaction of bending, shear and axial forces
transferred to it (Figure G.2a) by adjacent members due to the gravity and seismic action. The forces shown
in Figure G.2b and Figure G.2c may be used for interior and exterior joints, respectively.

320
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) In bi-directional composite moment resisting frames, the joint resistance may be checked by
independently applying the provisions of G.4 for the maximum joint force demands in each of the two
orthogonal directions.

(3) In joints with reinforced concrete columns in bi-directional composite-steel concrete moment
resisting frames, the confinement by steel beams framing into four sides of the column should be neglected.

Figure G.2 — Member forces acting on the joint and design forces for interior and exterior joint
configurations

G.4.3. Joint failure modes

(1) The joint resistance should be verified for shear failure of the web panel of the steel profile column
(see Figure G.3a) according to G.4.6 and vertical bearing failure (see Figure G.3b) according to G.4.5.
(2) Vertical reinforcement, as shown in Figure G.3b, should be provided to prevent the bearing failure
at locations of high compressive stresses; it should be calculated according to G.4.8.

Key
A Panel shear yielding;
B Concrete crushing;
C Gap;
D Vertical reinforcement.

Figure G.3 — Joint failure modes: (a) web panel shear and (b) vertical bearing

321
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

G.4.4. Effective joint width

(1) The effective width, 𝑏 of the joint within the column should be calculated from Formula (G.1).

𝑏 =𝑏 +𝑏 (G.1)

where:

𝑏 is the width of the inner panel width as shown in Figure G.4b and Figure G.4c, calculated from
Formula (G.2):

𝑏 = max {𝑏 , 𝑏 } (G.2)

𝑏 is the width of the face bearing plate (see Figure G.1);

𝑏 is the width of the steel flange of the beam;

𝑏 is the width of the outer panel width (Figures G.4b and G.4c), calculated from Formulae (G.3):
𝑥 𝑦
𝑏 = (𝑏 − 𝑏 ) ≤ 2ℎ , where 𝑏 = (𝑏 + 𝑏 )⁄2 < 𝑏 + ℎ < 1,75𝑏 (G.3)
ℎ 𝑏

𝑦 is the greater of the steel column or extended face bearing plate width;

𝑥 is equal to the column depth, ℎ where extended face bearing plates are present or 𝑥 = ℎ /2 +
ℎ /2 (ℎ = steel column depth) when only the steel column is present;

𝑏 is the width of the concrete column (see Figure G.2);

(2) When a steel column is present, ℎ should be taken as min{0,25ℎ , ℎ }. Otherwise, ℎ should be taken
as 0,25hb (see Figure G.1 for the definitions of h0, hb and hp).

Figure G.4 — Joint design forces and internal force resultants

322
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

G.4.5. Vertical bearing

(1) The joint should be verified for vertical bearing under the moment and shear forces, 𝛴𝑀 , and Δ𝑉
applied on it as shown in Figure G.3b.

(2) Vertical joint reinforcement (reinforcing bars, rods, steel angles or other elements attached to the
steel beam to transfer forces into the concrete column) should be used to prevent vertical bearing failure of
composite joints.

(3) The bending resistance against vertical bearing should satisfy Formula (G.4):

[0,7ℎ 𝐶 + ℎ (𝑇 +𝐶 ) ≥ 𝛴𝑀 , + 0,35ℎ Δ𝑉 (G.4)

where:

𝐶 is the design concrete bearing resistance (see Figure G.4) from Formula (G.8) in G.4.6(2);

𝑇 is the design tensile resistance of the tension vertical joint reinforcement attached directly to the
steel beam (see Figure G.4);

𝐶 is the design compressive resistance of the compression vertical joint reinforcement attached
directly to the steel beam (see Figure G.4);

ℎ is the distance between the tension and compression vertical joint reinforcement (see Figure G.4);

Δ𝑉 is the difference in the shear demand between the two beams intersecting the column joint (see
Figure G.4).

(4) The vertical reinforcement should be fully anchored to concrete or connected to the steel beam.

(5) The contribution of the vertical reinforcement should satisfy Formula (G.5):

𝑇 +𝐶 ≤ 0,5𝐶 (G.5)

G.4.6. Joint shear resistance

(1) The design shear resistance of a composite joint should be calculated as the sum of the design shear
resistance of the steel panel, 𝑉 , defined in (3), the inner concrete compression strut, 𝑉 , defined in (4), and
bearing against face bearing plates within the beam depth, and the outer concrete compressive field, 𝑉
defined in (5) and forming in the outer panel width as shown in Figure G.4b.

NOTE: the three shear resisting mechanisms are shown in Figure G.5.

(2) The design shear resistance of a composite joint should satisfy the condition given by Formula (G.6).

[𝑉 ℎ + 0,75𝑉 ℎ + 𝑉 (ℎ + ℎ )] ≥ Σ𝑀 , −𝑗 𝑉 (G.6)

where:

ℎ is the centre-to-centre distance between the beam flanges (see Figure G.5a);

ℎ is the depth of the steel web of the beam (see Figure G.5b);

323
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

ℎ is defined in G.4.4;

𝑗 is calculated from Formula (G.7) and it is shown in defined Figure G.5;

Σ𝑀 ,
𝑗 = ≥ 0,7ℎ (G.7)
(𝑇 + 𝐶 + 𝐶 ) − ∆𝑉 /2

NOTE As the joint shear resistance increases while 𝑗 increases, assuming that 𝑗 = 0,7ℎ for simplicity is safe sided.

𝐶 is the vertical bearing force acting on a bearing zone 𝑎 (see Figure G.4a) and should be calculated
from Formula (G.8):

𝐶 = 2𝑓 𝑏 𝑎 (G.8)

𝑓 is the design compressive strength of concrete according to EN 1992-1-1;

ac from Formula (G.9):

ℎ ℎ (G.9)
𝑎 = − − 𝐾 ≤ 0,3ℎ
2 4

𝐾 is given by Formula (G.10):

1 ∆𝑉 ℎ
𝐾= Σ𝑀 + − (𝑇 +𝐶 )ℎ (G.10)
2𝑓 𝑏 2

Figure G.5 — Joint shear mechanisms; (a) steel web panel; (b) concrete compression strut; and (c)
concrete compression field

(3) The shear resistance, 𝑉 , of the steel panel shown in Figure G.5a should be calculated from Formula
(G.11).

𝑉 = 𝑓 𝑡 𝑗 /𝛾 (G.11)

where:

𝑓 is the nominal yield strength of the steel material of the steel panel;

𝑡 is thickness of the steel panel;

324
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑗 is defined according to Formula G.7;

𝛾 is the material partial factor according to EN 1993-1-1.

(4) The design shear resistance, 𝑉 , of the concrete compressive strut (see Figure G.5b), should be
calculated from Formulae (G.12).

ℎ
𝑉 = 0,5𝑓 𝑏 ℎ (G.12)
ℎ +ℎ

where:

𝑏 is effective face bearing plate width (see Figure G.1) and should satisfy Formula (G.13).

𝑏 ≤ 𝑏 + 5𝑡 ≤ 1,5𝑏 (G.13)

(5) The design shear resistance, 𝑉 , of the concrete compressive field (see Figure G.5c), should be
calculated from Formula (G.14).

ℎ
𝑉 = 𝑉 ≤ 0,5𝑓 𝑏 ℎ (G.14)
ℎ +ℎ

where:

𝑉 is the design shear resistance due to horizontal column ties within the beam depth calculated
according to EN 1992-1-1, from Formula (G.15);

𝑉 =𝑓 𝐴 ℎ /𝑠 (G.15)

𝑓 is the design yield strength of the reinforcement bars, according to EN 1992-1-1;

𝐴 is the cross section area of reinforcing bars in each layer of ties spaced at 𝑠 (see Figure G.6) through
the web depth, ℎ , and should not be smaller than 0,004𝑏𝑠 ;

𝑏 is the effective face bearing plate width (see Figure G.1) and should satisfy Formula (G.13).

Key
A Holes in the web;
B 3 layers minimum (4 leg closed hoops);

Figure G.6 — Joint shear reinforcement

325
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

G.4.7. Column horizontal reinforcing bar tie requirement

(1) Horizontal ties should be provided in the column within the beam depth and above and below the
beam to carry tensile forces developed in the joint. They should be calculated according to G.4.6.(5).

(2) Perimeter and cross ties should have 135o hooks and may be lap spliced, according to 10.

(3) At least three layers of closed rectangular ties (see Figure G.6) should be provided in all joints above
and below the beam, as given in a) to c):

a) For a column width, 𝑏 ≤ 500 mm, four 10 mm rebars.

b) For a column width, 500 mm < 𝑏 ≤ 750 mm, four 12 mm rebars.

c) For a column width, 𝑏 > 750 mm, four 16 mm rebars.

(4) The layers in (3) should be placed within a distance of 0,4ℎ above and below the beam.

(5) Where the outer compressive field is mobilised to resist the joint shear, the minimum total cross
sectional area, 𝐴 , of the tie reinforcement located within the vertical distance of 0,4ℎ above and below the
beam should be at least equal to 𝑉 /𝑓 , where 𝑉 may be calculated by Formula (G.14).

G.4.8. Column vertical reinforcing bars

(1) The diameter of vertical column bars passing through the joint should satisfy Formula (G.16).

𝑑 < (ℎ + 2ℎ )/20 (G.16)

NOTE For bundled bars 𝑑 corresponds to the diameter of a bar of equivalent area to the bundle.

G.4.9. Face bearing plate provisions

(1) The face bearing plate within the beam depth should resist the horizontal shear force in the concrete
strut (𝑉 < 𝑉 ).

(2) The required thickness, 𝑡 , of the face bearing plate should satisfy Formula (G.17).

√3 √3𝑉 𝑉 𝑏 𝑏 𝑏 −𝑏
𝑡 ≥ max 𝑉 −𝑏𝑡 𝑓 ; ; 0,2 ; ; (G.17)
𝑏𝑓 𝑏𝑓 𝑓 ℎ 22 5

where:

𝑓 is the design yield strength of the bearing plate;

𝑓 is the design ultimate strength of the bearing plate;

𝑓 is the design yield strength of the web panel;

𝑉 may be calculated from Formula (G.6) by assuming 𝑉 = 0.

326
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

G.4.10. Steel beam flanges

(1) The beam flange thickness, 𝑡 should be such that the steel beam resists the vertical bearing force due
to joint shear in the steel panel and should satisfy Formula (G.18).

𝑏𝑡 ℎ 𝑓
𝑡 ≥ 0,30 (G.18)
ℎ 𝑓

where:

𝑓 is the design yield strength of the steel web panel;

𝑓 is the design yield strength of the beam flanges;

𝑡 is the thickness of the steel web panel.

(2) Additional vertical stiffeners or horizontal bearing plates welded to the flanges may be used to
reinforce the beam flanges to increase its transverse bending resistance if Formula (G.18) is not satisfied.

G.4.11. Extended face bearing plates and steel columns

(1) Extended face bearing plates and/or steel columns may be used and should be designed to resist a
force equal to the joint shear carried by the outer compressive field.

(2) The average concrete bearing strength against extended face bearing plates and/or columns should
not be greater than 2𝑓 and should act over a height above the beam flange not greater than 𝑑 .

(3) The extended face bearing plates or the steel column flanges may be assumed capable of resisting
transverse bending if their thicknesses, 𝑡 satisfies Formula (G.19):

𝑉 𝑏
𝑡 ≥ max 𝑡 , 0,12 (G.19)
𝑑 𝑓

where:

𝑓 is the design yield strength of the face bearing plate;

𝑏′p is the flange width of the extended face bearing plate or the steel column;

𝑡 is the flange thickness of the steel beam.

G.5. Composite joints using diaphragm plates

G.5.1. General

(1) Composite joints using diaphragm plates in composite moment resisting frames designed to DC2 and
DC3 should be designed according to G.5. Figure G.7 shows the main components of a composite joint with a
diaphragm plate.

(2) Composite joints using diaphragm plates should be designed as full strength, with all plastic
deformations localized in the composite or steel beam.

327
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) One of three types of diaphragm plates should be used: internal (see Figure G.7a), external (see Figure
G.7b) or through diaphragm (see Figure G.7c).

(4) The diaphragm plates should be welded around the full perimeter of the column cross-section using
either fillet welds or full penetration groove welds. In DC3, full penetration groove welds should be used.

(5) The thickness of the diaphragm steel plates should be equal to the beam flange thickness and should
be made of the same steel grade as that of the steel beam.

(6) For connections with internal diaphragm plates, the beam flanges should be directly welded to the
steel tube walls. A shear tab steel plate should be used to attach the steel beam web to the steel tub through
structural bolts.

(7) For connections with external (see Figure G.7b or through diaphragm plates (see Figure G.7c), the
beam flanges should be directly welded to the diaphragm plates with full penetration groove welds. A shear
tab plate should be used to attach the steel beam web to the steel tab through structural bolts.

(8) Internal or through diaphragm plates should have 25mm holes for concrete pouring.

G.5.2. Joint forces

(1) A full-strength composite joint with diaphragm plates should be designed for the plastic flexural
resistance of the composite or steel beam at the face of the column.

G.5.3. Joint shear resistance

(1) The design shear resistance of a joint should be calculated as the sum of the design shear resistance
of the steel tube walls 𝑉 , and the design shear resistance of the inner concrete compression strut, 𝑉 ,
according to Formula (G.20).

ℎ ℎ
𝑉 =𝑉 +𝑉 = 0,6𝑓 𝐴 /𝛾 + 0.5𝑓 𝐴 (G.20)
ℎ +ℎ

where

𝑓 is the design yield strength of the steel tube walls;

𝐴 is the cross-section area portion of the tube walls;

𝛾 is the material partial factor according to EN 1993-1-1;

𝐴 is the cross section area of the concrete infill.

(2) The shear resistance of the joint may be calculated by ignoring the axial load effects.

G.5.4. Detailing of welds

(1) Full penetration groove welds between I- or H-shape steel beams and diaphragm plates should be
detailed according to E.2.3.3(2).

G.5.5. Shear tab steel plates

(1) Shear tab steel plates should be designed for the design shear force in the composite steel or steel
beam due to the seismic design situation.

328
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Key
A Internal diaphragm plate;
B Concrete-filled tube;
C I-shape beam;
D External diaphragm plate;
E Through diaphragm plate.

Figure G.7 Composite joints with (a) internal-; (b) external-; and (c) through-diaphragm plates

329
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

G.6. Full-strength composite joints with double-split tee connections in concrete

filled tube columns
G.6.1. General

(1) Full-strength composite joints with double-split tee connections (see Figure G.8) should consist of
concrete-filled tube columns, I- or H-shape steel beams, tapered tee stubs and structural bolts of 10.9 class.

Key
A Tee-stub;
B Concrete-filled tube;
C Steel beam;
D Web panel joint;
E Structural bolt;
F Compressive length of tee-stub;
G Fillet weld of tee-stub to the steel beam flange.

Figure G.8 Composite joint with double-split tee connections in filled composite columns

(2) The tee stub flange should be attached to the concrete filled tube column using slip-critical through
structural bolts.

(3) The tee stub stem should be either bolted or fillet welded to the beam flanges.

G.6.2. Joint forces

(1) A full-strength composite joint with diaphragm plates should be designed for the expected plastic
bending resistance of the composite or steel beam at the face of the column according to E.2.2.2(2).

330
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) The shear force demands should be calculated based on the absolute sum of the shear force derived
from the beam bending resistance in (1) and the shear due to the non-seismic actions in the seismic design
situation.

G.6.3. Joint shear resistance

(1) G.5.3 should be applied.

G.6.4. Length and size of welds required to resist the beam flange forces in the joint

(1) Welds in a tee-stem welded to the beam flanges should be calculated for the flange forces due to the
plastic bending resistance of the connected composite or steel beam.

(2) The weld length, 𝑙 , for the tee-stem should be calculated for a given weld thickness, 𝑡
according to Formula (G.21).

𝑀 ,
𝑙 = (G.21)
2ℎ 𝑓 𝑡

where

𝑀 , is the design plastic bending resistance of the joint, which is calculated according to G.6.2(1);

ℎ is the depth of the steel beam (see Figure G.8);

𝑓 is the nominal yield strength of the fillet weld.

G.6.5. Design of T-stem

(1) The tee-stem of tee-stubs should be designed to resist the flange force, 𝑁 , in the tee-stub due to the
moment at the face of the column and should be verified against gross section yielding, net section fracture
and compression due to flexural yielding.

(2) The flange force, 𝑁 , should be calculated according to Formula (G.22).

𝑀 ,
𝑁 = (G.22)
1,05ℎ

(3) The minimum stem thickness to resist gross section yielding should be calculated according to
Formula (G.23).

𝑁
𝑡 = (G.23)
𝑤 𝑓

(4) The minimum stem thickness to resist net section fracture of the tee-stem should be calculated
according to Formula (G.24).

𝑁
𝑡 = (G.24)
𝑤 𝑓

(5) The minimum stem thickness to resist buckling of the tee-stem should be calculated according to
Formula (G.25).

331
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑆 −𝑡
𝑡 = (G.25)
10
where

𝑤 is the width of the tee-stem (see Figure G.8);

𝑓 is the design yield strength of the steel material of the tee-stub;

𝑓 is the design ultimate tensile strength of the steel material of the tee-stub;

𝑆 is the distance from the face of the column to the first row of shear bolts (see Figure G.8);

𝑡 is the thickness of the flange of the tee-stub (see Figure G.8).

G.6.6. Required number and size of structural bolts connecting the Tee-stub to the column

(1) The minimum diameter of bolts in the tee-stub should be calculated according to Formula (G.26).

4𝑁
𝑑 = (G.26)
𝑛 𝜋𝑓 ,

where

𝑛 number of structural bolts under tensile loading;

𝑓, is the design ultimate tensile strength of the structural bolt.

G.6.7. Tee-flange thickness to resist prying forces

(1) The distance, 𝑔 , between the tension bolts on either side of the tee-stub stem should be chosen (see
Figure G.8b) in order to calculate the geometric parameters of the tee-stub flange to resist prying forces.

(2) The minimum thickness, 𝑡 , of the tee-stub flange to resist prying forces should be calculated
according to Formula (G.27).

𝑇 . ∙ (𝑎 + 𝑏 ) − 𝐹 , ∙ 𝑎′
𝑡 ≥2 (G.27)
𝑓 ∙𝑝

where

𝑇 . is the force demand of a single tension bolt and should be calculated as, 𝑇 . = 𝑁 /𝑛 ;

𝑝 is the effective width of each tension bolt and should be calculated as, 𝑝 = 2𝑤 /𝑛 ;

𝑎′ is the distance from the edge of the tee-stub flange to the edge of the bolt;

𝑏′ is the distance from the face of the tee-stub stem to the edge of the bolt;

𝐹 , is the design tensile resistance of a tension bolt (N/bolt).

332
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) The critical thickness of the tee-stub flange to eliminate prying action is calculated according to
Formula (G.28).

4 ∙ 𝐹 , ∙ 𝑏′
𝑡 , = (G.28)
𝑓 ∙𝑝

G.6.8. Connection classification

(1) The designed connection should be verified if it is within the parameters of a fully-strength or partial
strength connection according to EN 1993-1-8 to be used in composite steel moment resisting frames in DC2
or DC3. The connection classification should be done according to the geometric properties of the tee-stub and
of the structural bolts (symbol E in Figure G.8).

G.6.9. Additional verifications

(1) The maximum force 𝑁 in the tee-stub should be recalculated based on the actual tee-stub dimensions
according to Formula (G.29).

𝑀 ,
𝑁 = (G.29)
ℎ +𝑡

(2) For tee-stubs welded or bolted to the steel beam flanges, the welds or bolts should be verified against
the maximum force, 𝑁 from (1).

(3) The tee-stem resistance according to G.6.5 should be verified against the maximum force, 𝑁 from
(1).

(4) The flange resistance of the tee-stub should be verified against the maximum beam flange force. It
should resist the plastic flange mechanism, mixed-mode failure, and tension bolt fracture with no prying action
according to EN 1993-1-8.

(5) The shear resistance, 𝑉 , of the panel zone joint calculated according to G.6.3 should be verified
against the panel zone shear demand on the column from the bending demand at the face of the column
according to Formula (G.30).

2𝑀 ,
𝑉 ≥ −𝑉 (G.30)
ℎ −𝑡

Where

𝑉 is the shear force in the concrete filled column;

𝑡 is the flange thickness of the I- or H-shape steel beam.

333
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(informative)

SEISMIC DESIGN OF EXPOSED AND EMBEDDED COLUMN BASE CONNECTIONS

H.1. Scope

(1) This annex should be used for the design of column base connections retaining moment in steel
and/or composite steel - concrete buildings. It does not deal with free to rotate column bases.

(2) Column bases retaining moments during a seismic action may either be exposed or embedded type
connections to a concrete foundation.

(3) Column base connections should be designed as non-dissipative elements for NEd, VEd and MEd,
including the effects of the action magnification factor, 𝛺, in 11.8.5(1) or 12.8.5(1) for DC2 and the effects of
the action magnification factor rm sh Ωd in 11.8.5(2), or 12.8.5(2) and 12.8.5(3) for DC3, depending on the
structural type.

(4) Dissipative column base connections may be permitted in steel and composite steel – concrete
moment resisting frames, if their hysteretic behaviour is validated by cyclic testing according to CEN doc.XXE.

H.2. Materials

(1) Steel base plates should be made of structural steels according to 11, Table 11.2.

(2) Anchors should be made according to EN ISO 898-1, EN20898-2, EN ISO 3506-1 and EN ISO 3506-2.

(3) Grout layers should have a design compressive strength of at least twice the design compressive
strength of the foundation concrete. If columns are set on the top of a footing, a 40 mm to 50 mm thick grout
layer may be used.

H.3. Exposed column base connections

H.3.1. General

(1) Exposed column bases should consist of a column, a steel base plate and an anchoring assembly
(Figure H.1). Levelling nuts (Figure H.1c) may be used for positioning the column base connection.

(2) Exposed column bases may be designed with unstiffened base plates. If necessary, stiffened base
plates may be used where the connection transfers a high moment demand due to the seismic action.

(3) The base plate dimensions should be large enough for the installation of at least four anchors as
shown in Figure H.1a and Figure H.1b.

(4) A uniform distribution of the resultant compressive bearing resistance per unit length 𝑁 , , may be
assumed for column base design calculations (see Figure H.1c).

H.3.2. Base plate eccentricity and critical eccentricity

(1) The base plate eccentricity should be calculated from Formula (H.1).

334
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑒 = 𝑀 /𝑁 (H.1)

(2) The critical eccentricity of an exposed column base should be calculated from Formula (H.2).

𝐿 𝑁
𝑒 = − (H.2)
2 2𝑁 , ,

where:

LBP is the base plate length in the plane of the seismic action (see Figure H.1);

NRd,b,max is the maximum bearing resistance per unit length, which should be calculated as given in Formula
(H.3);

𝑁 , =𝑓( )𝐵 (H.3)

BBP is the base plate dimension perpendicular to the plane of the seismic action (Figures H.1a, b);

𝑓 ( ) is the bearing strength of the concrete footing calculated from Formula (H.4);

𝐴
𝑓 ( ) = 0,65𝑓 = 1,30𝑓 (H.4)
𝐴

𝐴 is the bearing area of the base plate;

𝐴 is the effective concrete area, which is defined as the maximum area of the portion of the supporting
surface that is geometrically similar to and concentric with the loaded area.

NOTE For a column base plate bearing on a concrete footing far from edges or openings, =2,0.

(3) If 𝑒 < 𝑒 , the force combination should be considered with a small moment and the bearing stress
𝑓 between the concrete and the base plate should be calculated using Formula (H.5).

𝑁
𝑓 = (H.5)
𝐵 (𝐿 − 2𝑒)

(4) If 𝑒 > 𝑒 , anchors should be used for the moment to be transferred.

H.3.3. Base plate with a small moment

(1) When 𝑒 < 𝑒 , the length, Y, of the bearing area should be calculated as given by Formula (H.6).

𝑌=𝐿 − 2𝑒 (H.6)

(2) The design bearing resistance per unit length, 𝑁 , should be calculated as given by Formula (H.7).

𝑁 𝑁
𝑁 , = ; from which, 𝑓 = (H.7)
𝑌 𝐵 𝑌

(3) The design moment resistance per unit width of the base plate at the bearing interface should be
calculated from Formula (H.8).

335
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

⎧𝑓 𝑚
⎪ , for 𝑌 ≥ 𝑚
2
𝑀 = (H.8)
⎨ 𝑌
⎪𝑓 ( )𝑌 𝑚 − , for 𝑌 < 𝑚
⎩ 2

(4) The required base plate thickness, 𝑡 ( ) , should be calculated as given by Formulae (H.9).

⎧ 𝑓
1,83𝑚 , for 𝑌 ≥ 𝑚
⎪
⎪ 𝑓,
𝑡 ( ) = (H.9)
⎨ 𝑌
𝑓 𝑌 𝑚−2
⎪
⎪2,58 , for 𝑌 < 𝑚
𝑓,
⎩

where:

𝑓, is the nominal value of the yield strength of structural steel of the base plate;

𝑚 is the distance shown in Figure H.1a and should be calculated Formula (H.10).

𝑚 = (𝐿 − 0,95𝑑 )/2 (H.10)

H.3.4. Base plate with a large moment

(1) When 𝑒 > 𝑒 , the inequality in Formula (H.11) should be satisfied.

𝐿 2𝑁 (𝑒 + 𝑙)
𝑙+ ≥ (H.11)
2 𝑁 , ,

where l is the distance of the anchor centreline to the base plate centreline (Figure H.1c).

H.3.4.1. Base plate bearing length

(1) H.3.4(1) should be satisfied.

(2) The base plate bearing length Y should be calculated as given by Formula (H.12).

𝐿 𝐿 2𝑁 (𝑒 + 𝑙)
𝑌= 𝑙+ − 𝑙+ − (H.12)
2 2 𝑁 , ,

H.3.4.2. Anchor tensile resistance

(1) To account for the ratio of the effective tension area of the threaded portion of the anchor to the area
of the shank of the anchor, the required anchor yield resistance, 𝑁 , , to be considered for the design of the
anchor group on one side of the base plate should be calculated as given by Formula (H.13).

𝑁 , =𝑁 , , 𝑌−𝑁 =𝑓, 𝐵 𝑌−𝑁 (H.13)

336
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) The anchor tensile strength, 𝑓 , should be calculated from Formula (H.14).

𝑓 , = 0,75𝑓 , (H.14)

where 𝑓 , is the specified ultimate tensile strength of the anchor.

(3) The design yield resistance of a single anchor should be calculated as given by Formula (H.15).

𝑁 , = 0,75𝑓 , 𝐴 (H.15)

where 𝐴 is the unthreaded body area of the anchor.

Key
A Anchor rods;
B Column;
C Base plate;
D Grout layer;
E Shear lug;
F Levelling nuts;
G Concrete footing;
H Anchoring point.

Figure H.1 — Schematic representation of exposed column base connection

337
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

H.3.4.3. Required base plate thickness

(1) The base plate thickness of exposed column base connections should be calculated to limit potential
flexural yielding at the bearing and tensile interface of the base plate to the concrete footing under the seismic
action.

(2) H.3.3(3) and (4) should be applied, with 𝑓 replaced by 𝑓 , in Formulae (H.8) and (H.9).

(3) To prevent flexural yielding at the bearing interface with the concrete footing, the required base plate
thickness, 𝑡 ( ), should be calculated from Formulae (H.16).

⎧ 3𝑓 ( )
𝑚 , for 𝑌 ≥ 𝑚
⎪ 𝑓,
𝑡 ( ) ≥ (H.16)
⎨ 6𝑓 ( ) 𝑌(𝑚 − 𝑌/2)
⎪ , for 𝑌 < 𝑚
⎩ 𝑓,

(4) To prevent yielding at the tension interface, the required base plate thickness, 𝑡p(req) , should be
calculated from Formula (H.17).

6𝑁 , 𝑥
𝑡 ( ) ≥ (H.17)
𝐵 𝑓,

Where

𝑁 , should be calculated from Formula (H.13);

𝑥 is the distance shown in Figure H.1c and should be calculated from Formula (H.18):

𝑥 = 𝑙 − 𝑑 /2 + 𝑡 /2 (H.18)

H.3.4.4. Concrete anchorage resistance and required anchor embedment depth

The column base concrete elements should be verified against concrete pull out due to the tensile
axial load per anchor and concrete crushing due to bearing of the anchor head to the concrete footing as shown
in Figure H.2.

(6) The concrete should be assumed cracked unless if it can be demonstrated otherwise.

H.3.4.5. Development by lapping with concrete reinforcement

(1) The tensile resistance of the anchors should be fully anchored in the concrete.

(2) In case that (1) is not satisfied, steel reinforcement in the concrete footing should be provided to
carry the tensile force from the column to the concrete base.

H.3.5. Design for shear

(1) Exposed column base connections should transfer shear from column bases into concrete.

338
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(2) The shear transfer in anchors may be achieved through friction, bearing and shear or their
combination.

(3) The most unfavourable design compressive loads, NEd, consistent with the lateral force VEd, should be
considered.

(4) The shear resistance due to friction should be calculated according to EN 1992-1-1.

(5) Shear forces may be transferred through bearing by shear lugs as shown in Figures H.1c and H.1d.
Partial embedment of the column in the concrete foundation may also be used.

(6) Multiple shear lugs may be used to resist large shear force demands.

(7) Shear lugs may be fillet welded to the base plate and may be designed as a cantilever fixed to the steel
base plate.

(8) When shear lugs are used, grout pockets should be of sufficient size for ease of grout placement.
Nonshrink grout of flowable consistency should be used.

(a) (b)

Key
A Tensile strength in concrete along the surface of stress cone

Figure H.2 — Concrete Breakout cone; (a) single anchor; (b) group of anchors

H.4. Embedded column base connections

H.4.1. General

(1) Embedded column base connections (Figure H.3) should provide bending resistance by bearing
between the column flanges and the surrounding concrete.

(2) Embedded column base connections may be treated as a structural steel coupling beam embedded
in a composite reinforced concrete shear wall.

(3) For I- or H-shape steel columns, embedded column base connections may develop their full bending
resistance with respect to the weak axis provided that the concrete bearing resistance is adequate.

339
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Key
A Column;
B Horizontal reinforcement;
C Line of horizontal reinforcement;
D Face bearing plates;
E Concrete footing;
F Steel base plate.

Figure H.3 — Typical embedded column base connection detail

H.4.2. Required shear resistance at the embedded column base

(1) The required shear resistance of the column base should be calculated from Formulae (H.19).

2𝑀
𝑉 = max 𝑉 , (H.19)
𝐻
where:

𝑉 is the shear force for the design of foundation elements according to EN 1998-5;

𝑀 is the bending resistance of the column unreduced by the effects of the axial load, at both ends;

𝐻 is the column clear storey height above the concrete foundation.

H.4.3. Required column embedment depth

(1) The embedment length, 𝐿 , (Figure H.4) should be calculated based on the required shear resistance
of the embedded column base connection as given by Formula (H.20) (units are N, mm).

,
𝑏 4,04
0,004 𝑓 × 0,85 × 𝑏 × 𝐿 × ≥𝑉 (H.20)
𝑏 𝐻
0,88 + 2𝐿

where:

340
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝑏 is the column flange width under bearing;

𝑏 is the width of the concrete foundation.

(2) The embedment length, Le, should not be smaller than 2,0𝑑 to guarantee a fixed boundary condition.
,
NOTE The term is intended to reflect the effect of confinement, such that a high ratio between the widths of
the concrete foundation 𝑏 to the width of the bearing flange 𝑏 results in a large bearing strength.

H.4.4. Required horizontal foundation reinforcement

(1) Horizontal reinforcement should be placed in the concrete foundation and over the embedment
length, Le, with cross-sectional area sufficient to resist in tension the horizontal force(s) given from Formula
(H.20).

(2) Two-thirds of the horizontal reinforcement should be placed in the top concrete layer.

H.4.5. Minimum face bearing plate thickness

(1) Face bearing plates (Figure H.3) should be placed on both sides of the column at the face of the
foundation and near the end of the embedded region. At a minimum, their thickness should
comply with 11.11.2(14).

H.4.6. Yielding in the face bearing plates

(1) The column axial load should be distributed from the column to the face bearing plates and then to
the foundation in direct bearing. The critical dimension l of the face plate cantilever should be taken from
Formula (H.21).

𝐿 − 0,95𝑑 𝐵 − 0,8𝑏 𝑑 𝑏
𝑙 = max , , (H.21)
2 2 4

H.4.7. Required transfer reinforcement

(1) Transfer reinforcement should be provided at right angles to each embedded flange. The area of
transfer reinforcement should be calculated from Formula (H.22).

𝐴 ≥ 0,03𝑓 𝐿 𝑏 /𝑓 (H.22)

Where 𝑓 is the design value of the yield strength of the transfer steel reinforcement .

(2) The sum of the areas of the transfer reinforcement and of the horizontal one according to H.4.4
should not exceed 0,08𝐿 𝑏 .

H.4.8. Steel base plate

(1) In embedded column base connections, column axial load should be transferred to the foundation
through a steel base plate.

(2) The steel base plate of the embedded column base connection should be designed to remain elastic
under bending effects.

341
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(3) The steel base plate axial resistance at yielding, 𝑁 , should be calculated from Formula (H.23).

𝑁 , = max {𝑓 𝐴 𝑛 , 𝑓 𝐴 , } ≥𝑁 (H.23)

where:

𝑓 is the design value of the yield strength of the anchors;

𝑛 is the total number of the anchors;

𝐴 is the area of the anchor;

𝐴 , is the bearing area of the base plate to the concrete footing.

(4) The steel base plate width should sustain the maximum bearing resistance of the concrete by
assuming a uniform stress distribution from the embedded column flange to the steel base plate edge.

342
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(normative)

DESIGN OF THE SLAB OF STEEL-CONCRETE COMPOSITE BEAMS AT BEAM-

COLUMN JOINTS IN MOMENT RESISTING FRAMES

I.1. General

(1) This annex should be used for the design of the slab and of its connection to composite steel - concrete
moment resisting frames and rigid full-strength beam-to-column connections in DC2 and DC3.

I.2. Design of joints at exterior columns under negative moment

(1) When there is no façade steel beam and no concrete cantilever edge strip, the moment resistance of
exterior joints (Figure I.1a) should be taken as the plastic moment resistance of the steel beam alone (Figure
I.1b).

(2) When there is a concrete cantilever edge strip but no façade steel beam, EN1994-1-1:2004 should be
applied for the calculation of the moment resistance of the joint (Figure I.1c). The reinforcing bars should be
adequately anchored in the cantilever edge strip.

(3) When there is a façade steel beam rigidly connected to the column, but no concrete cantilever edge
strip, the moment resistance of the joint may include the contribution of the slab reinforcements, provided
that (4) to (7) are satisfied (Figure I.1d).

(4) Reinforcing bars of the slab should be anchored to the shear connectors of the façade steel beam.

(5) The cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel should be such that yielding of the reinforcing steel takes
place before failure of the connectors and of the façade beams.

(6) The cross sectional area of reinforcing steel and the connectors should be placed over a width equal
to the effective width defined in 12.8.6.2.2 and Table 12.7.

(7) The connectors should be such that the condition given by Formula (I.1) should be satisfied.

𝑛𝑃 ≥ 1,1𝐹 (I.1)

where:

n is the number of connectors in the effective width in negative bending;

𝑃 is the design resistance of a single connector;

𝐹 is the design resistance of the longitudinal bars in the effective width: 𝐹 = 𝐴 𝑓 ;

𝑓 is the design yield stress of the slab reinforcement.

(8) The façade steel beam should be verified in bending, shear and torsion under the horizontal force
𝐹 applied at the connectors.

343
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Key
(a) Composite joint elevation:
A main beam;
B slab;
C exterior column;
D façade steel beam;
E concrete cantilever edge strip;
(b) no concrete cantilever edge strip – no façade steel beam;
(c) concrete cantilever edge strip – no façade steel beam;
(d) no concrete cantilever edge strip – façade steel beam;
(e) concrete cantilever edge strip – façade steel beam

Figure I.1 — Exterior beam-to-column joints under negative moment

(9) When there is both a façade steel beam and a concrete cantilever edge strip, the flexural resistance
of the joint should include the contributions defined in (2) and (3) (Figure I.1e).

(10) The cantilever edge strip should be designed as a reinforced concrete beam supporting horizontal
action effects of tension in the slab reinforcement under positive moment and horizontal action effects of
compression in the slab under negative moment.

344
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

NOTE The reinforcement defined in the following paragraphs for the cantilever edge strip is specific to the edge strip
to column joint zone; it is additional to longitudinal and transverse reinforcement designed for the resistance of the
cantilever edge strip in shear and bending under horizontal forces defined in (10).

I.3. Design of joints at exterior columns under positive moment

(1) The flexural resistance of exterior joints (Figure I.2a) should not be taken greater than the moment
for which reaction forces to the compression in the slab are provided.

(2) Three reaction forces 𝐹 should be considered to resist the slab compression forces at beam end,
as given in a) to c):

𝐹 on the interior face of the column (Figure I.2b), which should be calculated from Formula (I.2).

𝐹 =𝑏 𝑑 𝑓 (I.2)

𝐹 by compression struts on the column sides (Figure I.2c), which should be calculated from Formula
(I.3).

𝐹 = 2𝑣ℎ 𝑑 𝑓 sin(𝜃) cos (𝜃) (I.3)

𝐹 = 0,6ℎ 𝑑 𝑓 (I.4)

𝐹 by shear connectors of a façade steel beams rigidly connected to the column (Figure I.2d), which
should be calculated as given by Formula (I.5).

𝐹 = 𝑛𝑃 (I.5)

where:

𝑑 is the overall depth of the slab, in case of solid slabs, or the thickness of the slab above the ribs of the
profiled sheeting for composite slabs; for partially composite beams, 𝑑 should be multiplied by the
degree of composite action 𝜂

𝑏 is the bearing width of the concrete of the slab on the column (see Figure I.2c);

ℎ is the depth of the column steel cross section;

fcd is the design value of the concrete compressive strength;

𝜃 angle of inclination of the compressive struts (Figure I.2c);

𝑣 strut resistance factor according to EN 1992-1-1;

n number of shear connectors within the effective width in positive bending.

NOTE In Formula (I.4), 𝐹 is calculated by assuming 𝜃 = 45o and 𝑣 = 0,5.

(3) For 𝐹 , the concrete close to the column flange should be confined and the area of confining
reinforcement should satisfy Formula (I.6).

0,15𝑙 − 𝑏 𝑓
𝐴 ≥ 0,25𝑑 𝑏 (I.6)
0,15𝑙 𝑓 ,

where:

345
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

l is the beam span, as defined in EN1992-1-1;

𝑓 , is the design yield stress of the transverse reinforcement in the slab.

(4) The reinforcement in (3) should be uniformly distributed over a length of the beam equal to 𝑏 and
the distance of the first bar to the column flange should not exceed 30 mm. 𝐴 may be partly or totally provided
by reinforcing bars placed for other purposes.

(5) For calculating 𝐹 , the area 𝐴 of tension-ties (see Figure I.2c) should satisfy Formula (I.7).

𝐹
𝐴 ≥ 0,5 tan (𝜃) (I.7)
𝑓 ,

𝐹 (I.8)
𝐴 ≥ 0,5
𝑓 ,

Key
(a) Composite joint elevation:
A main beam;
B slab;
C exterior column;
D façade steel beam;
E concrete cantilever edge strip;
F additional device fixed to the column for bearing;
(b) mechanism 1– slab bearing on column flange (G) or additional device (H);
(c) mechanism 2 – slab extending up to the column outside face or beyond as a concrete cantilever edge is required;
(d) mechanism 3 – façade steel beam rigidly connected to the column is required

Figure I.2 — Exterior beam-to-column joints under positive moment and possible
transfer of slab forces

346
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(6) The area 𝐴 in (5) should be distributed over a length of beam equal to ℎ and the bars should be
fully anchored. The length L of the ties should satisfy Formula (I.9).

𝐿 ≥ 𝑏 + 4ℎ tan(𝜃) + 2𝑙 (I.9)

𝐿 ≥ 𝑏 + 4ℎ + 2𝑙 (I.10)

where 𝑙 is the anchorage length of these bars in accordance with EN 1992-1-1.

NOTE 𝐴 and L defined in Formulae I.8 of (5) and Formula I.10 of (6) are calculated by assuming a strut angle of
inclination,  = 45o in Figure I.2c.

(7) The flexural resistance of the joint should be derived from the sum 𝛴𝐹 of the reaction forces 𝐹
effectively available at the node.

(8) To develop the full plastic moment of resistance of a composite beam, Formula (I.11) should be
satisfied.

𝛴𝐹 > 1,1𝑏 𝑑 𝑓 (I.11)

where 𝑏 is the effective width in positive bending as defined in 12.8.6.2.2 and Table 12.7.

I.4. Interior columns

The action effect in the slab due to the bending on opposite sides of interior columns (Figure I.3a)
should be calculated as the sum of the tension force 𝐹 in the reinforcing rebars on the negative moment side
and of the compression force 𝐹 in the concrete on the positive moment side from Formula (I.12).

𝐹 +𝐹 =𝐴 𝑓 +𝑏 𝑑 𝑓 (I.12)

where:

𝐴 is the area of bars in the effective width;

𝑏 is the effective width in positive bending specified in 12.8.6.2.2 and Table 12.7.

The reaction forces FRd1, FRd2 and FRd3 defined in I.3(2) may be used to provide resistance to the slab
compression forces on the positive moment side and to the tension force of the slab reinforcement on the
negative moment side.

The number of connectors, n, for calculating FRd3 should be taken as the number within the effective
width for negative or positive bending, whichever is greater.

The area AT of tension-ties (see Figure I.3c) should comply with I.3(5) and I.3(6).

To develop the plastic moment resistance of a composite beam, Formula (I.13) should be verified.

Σ𝐹 > 1,1 𝑏 𝑑 𝑓 + 𝐴 𝑓 (I.13)

where 𝑏 is the effective width in positive bending specified in 12.8.6.2.2 and Table 12.7.

(6) Formula (I.14) should be verified.

347
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

𝛼𝐹 + 𝛽𝐹 + 𝛾𝐹 ≤𝐴 𝑓 (I.14)

NOTE 𝛼, 𝛽 and 𝛾 in Formula (I.14) and Figures I.3b, I.3c, I.3d represent the ratio of the force in the
longitudinal rebars to that of the corresponding mechanism (mechanisms 1, 2 and 3, respectively).

Key
(a) Interior joint elevation
A main beam;
B slab;
C interior column;
D transverse beam;
E additional device fixed to the column for bearing;
(b) mechanism 1 - slab bearing on column flange (F) or additional device (G);
F additional device fixed to the column for bearing;
(c) mechanism 2;
(d) mechanism 3.
Figure I.3 — Possible transfer of slab forces at an interior beam-to-column joint under negative
moment on one side and positive moment on the other side

348
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

(informative)

DRIFT LIMITS FOR ECCENTRICALLY LOADED UNREINFORCED MASONRY PIERS

J.1 Scope and general

This informative annex may be applied only to unreinforced masonry piers and should not be used
for reinforced or confined masonry piers.

NOTE This informative annex contains a preliminary approach, to be used until more detailed information is
available on how axial loads that act with an eccentricity to the central plane of the pier affect the in-plane deformation
capacity of the pier.

(2) The bearing length tB should not be smaller than half the thickness of the pier or 100 mm, whichever
is smaller.

NOTE The bearing length of slabs or roofs on masonry piers is sometimes less than the pier thickness tp. EN 1996-
1:2019 gives information on the effect of such reduced bearing lengths on the strength of masonry elements.
Experimental results indicate that not only the strength but also the deformation capacity of unreinforced masonry piers
depends on the bearing length of floors or roofs resting on the pier. This informative annex gives guidelines on how this
effect can be considered in design.

J.2 Verification for in-plane actions

If a displacement-based verification procedure is applied and if tB is smaller than 0,75 times the
thickness t of the pier, the effect of the bearing length on the deformation capacity may be considered. The
reduced deformation capacity u2,red may be calculated as given by Formula (N.1).

𝑡
𝜃 , = max (𝜃 , 𝜃 ) (J.1)
𝑡
where y is the deformation capacity of the pier at the elastic limit.

(3) If a force-based verification is applied and if all piers with tB < 0,75 t contribute together 50% or more
to the storey shear resistance, the adjustments in a) and b) may be applied:

a) The qD factor may be reduced by 25%.

b) If the simple masonry buildings rules in 14.8 are applied, the factor 𝑘 as defined in (1)Erreur ! Source
du renvoi introuvable. for the use in Erreur ! Source du renvoi introuvable. may be calculated with qD
from a).

349
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Annex K
(informative)
SIMPLIFIED EVALUATION OF DRIFT DEMANDS ON INFILLED FRAMES

K.1 Scope and general

(1) This procedure is applicable to regular RC structures with interacting unreinforced masonry infills
regularly distributed in elevation.

NOTE The displacements of an infilled frame are smaller than those of a bare frame; the difference between these
two displacements increases with the ratio of infill stiffness to bare frame stiffness.

(2) The procedure aims at the calculation of drift demand in an infilled frame based on the drift calculated
on the bare frame.

(3) The procedure should be applied for the two principal seismic resistant directions.

K.2 Analysis

(1) The stiffness KInf,i,j of a masonry infill in bay i of storey j may be taken as given by Formula (K.1):

Vp,Rd,i, j
K Inf,i, j  (K.1)
 p,i, j h j
where
Vp,Rd,i,j is the shear strength of the masonry infill from Formula (7.10) in 7.4.3.7.

θp,i,j is the drift limit at DL of the masonry infill taken from Table 7.2

hj is the height of storey j

NOTE The drift limit at DL corresponds to the peak strength of the masonry infill

(2) In (1), for masonry infill panels made of other materials than those of Table 7.2 and for masonry panels
with openings, respectively 7.4.3.1(6) and 7.4.3.1 (7) should be applied.

(3) If different types of infills and if infills with openings are present in storey j, an equivalent drift capacity
θm,j for the whole set of bays may be calculated with Formula (K.2) and the stiffness KInf,i,j of a masonry infill in
bay i of storey j may be taken as given by Formula (K.3):

nb , j

 Vp,Rd,i, j
 m,j = i 1
nb , j
Vp,Rd,i, j
 (K.2)
i 1  p,i,j
where

350
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

nb,j is the number of bays in storey j.

Vp,Rd,i, j
K Inf,i, j  (K.3)
 m, j h j
(4) The stiffness KInf,j due to all infills in storey j may be taken from Formula (K.4):

,
𝐾 , =∑ 𝐾 ,, (K.4)

(5) The stiffness KFr ,j of storey j of the bare frame may be calculated with Formula (K.5)

Vtot , j
KFr,j  (K.5)
de,r , j
where
de,r,j is the inter-storey average elastic drift, calculated as the difference of the average lateral elastic
displacements de,j+1 and de,j at the top and bottom of storey j

Vtot,j is the total storey shear at storey j in the seismic design situation

(6) The stiffness parameter Cj which characterises the relative stiffness due to the infills and due to the
bare frame at the j-th storey may calculated with Formula (K.6):

Cj = KInf,j / KFr,j (K.6)

(7) The drift at the ground storey of the infilled structures should be taken as equal to the one of the bare
structure and C1 taken equal to zero.

(8) The inter-storey drift demand θEd,j at storey j of the infilled frame may be calculated with Formula (K.7)
or with Figure K.1 for the case of θmj = 0,003 :

, ,
𝜃 , = if 𝜃 , ≤𝜃 , +𝜃 , 𝐶
, ,

𝜃 , =𝜃 , −𝜃 , 𝐶 if 𝜃 , >𝜃 , +𝜃 , 𝐶 (K.7)
where:
θe, j is the elastic drift of the j-th storey of the bare frame calculated with Formula (K.8)

θm, j is the equivalent drift capacity calculated with Formula (K.2)

θC, j is equal to 0,4 θm, j

, ,
𝜃 , = (K.8)

351
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

θEd,j (%)

1,5
CJ
0,0

1,0

1,0 2,0

3,0

4,0

0,5

θm,J

θe,J (%)
0,0
0,0 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0

Figure K.1 – Definition of the bi-linear curve for different values of Cj

352
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

Annex L
(normative)

LOAD-DEFORMATION RELATIONSHIPS OF DISSIPATIVE TIMBER COMPONENTS

FOR NON-LINEAR ANALYSES

(1) This Annex provides rules for the determination of the force-deformation relationships of dissipative
timber components for use in non-linear analysis in accordance with EN 1998-1-1:2019, 6.7.2 and 6.7.3.

(2) Reference to the experimental data provided by the producers should be made for the dissipative
zones (connections, 2D- or 3D-nailing plates, joints or subassemblies) of timber structures.

Key
Y Yielding point.
SD Significant Damage point.
M Maximum load point.
NC Near Collapse point.
U Ultimate load point

Figure L.1 — Derivation of the trilinear (a) and bilinear (b) load-deformation mean curve of
dissipative zones in timber structures from the experimental curves according to EN 12512

(3) A trilinear load-deformation mean curve may be used as an approximation to model the behaviour
of dissipative zones in timber structures. It may be obtained from the 1st cycle envelope load-deformation
curve derived from the cyclic test carried out according to EN 12512 (Figure L.1(a)) as described in a) to f):

The first branch should be obtained by connecting the origin with the yield point Y (𝑘 ∙ 𝐹 ; δy). The
yield deformation δy and the yield load Fy should be determined according to EN 12512. The slip modulus
Kser,c should be calculated as:

353
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

∙
𝐾 , = (L.1)

where:

kmod is the modification factor for duration of load and moisture content according to EN 1995-1-1:2004,
3.1.3, and A2:2014.

The second branch should be obtained by connecting the yield load point Y with the maximum load point
M (𝑘 ∙ 𝐹 ; δFmax), where 𝐹 is the maximum load attained on the 1st cycle envelope load-
deformation curve during the test, and δFmax is the deformation attained at the maximum load 𝐹 .

The third branch should be obtained by connecting the maximum load point M with the ultimate load
point U (𝑘 ∙ 𝐹 ; δu). The ultimate load Fu is the load attained on the 1st cycle envelope load-deformation
curve corresponding to the ultimate deformation δu, which is determined according to EN 12512
assuming a limit value of the strength impairment factor φimp not greater than 0,30 and a limit value of the
strength reduction factor due to degradation under cyclic loading kdeg not lower than 0,80.

When the ultimate deformation δu is smaller than the deformation related to the maximum load δFmax, a
bilinear curve should be used (Figure L.1(b)). The first branch should be defined according to a). The
second branch should be obtained by connecting the yield load point Y with the ultimate load point U,
which is defined according to c).

The SD point should be obtained on the trilinear (or bilinear) curve at the deformation value SD given by
Formula (L.2).
,
𝛿 =𝛿 + ∙ (𝛿 − 𝛿 ) (L.2)
,

where:

SD is the deformation at SD limit state;

γRd,SD is the partial factor on resistance at SD limit state.

NOTE The recommended values of γRd,SD is the one given in EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014 for accidental design
situations, unless the National Annex gives different values for use in a Country.

The NC point should be obtained on the trilinear (or bilinear) curve at the deformation δNC given by
Formula (L.3).

𝛿 =𝛿 + 𝛿 −𝛿 (L.3)
,

where:

NC is the deformation at NC limit state;

γRd,NC is the partial factors on resistance at NC limit state.

NOTE The recommended values of γRd,NC is the one given in EN 1995-1-1:2004 and A2:2014 for accidental design
situations, unless the National Annex gives different values for use in a Country.

(4) If experimental results are not available for the dissipative zones, the trilinear load-deformation
mean curve may be determined following a) to h) (Figure L.2):

354
 prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

The mean yield strength (Point Y in Figure L.2) of the dissipative connection under seismic loading 𝐹 , ,
may be calculated as given by Formula (L.4).

𝐹 , , =𝑘 ∙𝑘 ∙𝑘 ∙𝐹 , (L.4)

where:

kmean is the ratio between the mean and the characteristic strength in static conditions, from Table L.1;

ky is the ratio between the yield strength and the maximum strength, from Table L.1;

FRk,d is the characteristic value of the strength of the dissipative connection in static conditions, according
to EN 1995-1-1:2004, 8, and A2:2014.

In order to avoid any brittle failure mechanism, non-dissipative components should be capacity designed in
DC2 or DC3 according to 13.4.3(2).

The yield deformation (Point Y in Figure L.2) of the dissipative connection under seismic loading y may
be calculated as given by Formula (L.5).

𝛿 = , ,
(L.5)

where:

Kser is the slip modulus of the dissipative connection under service load, according to EN 1995-1-1:2004,
7.1, and A2:2014.

The ultimate strength at the end of the softening branch (Point U in Figure L.2) of the dissipative
connection under seismic loading FRm,d,U may be calculated from Formula (L.6).

𝐹 , , =𝑘 ∙𝑘 ∙𝑘 ∙𝐹 , (L.6)

where:

kdeg is the strength reduction factor due to degradation under cyclic loading defined in 13.3.1(4), for which
the value in 13.3.1(2) should be used.

The deformation at the end of the softening branch (Point U in Figure L.2) of the dissipative connection
under seismic loading δu may be calculated as given by Formula (L.7).

𝛿 =∙𝛿 (L.7)

where:

µ is the ductility of the dissipative connection under seismic action, which may be taken from Table 13.3
when capacity designed in DC2 or DC3.

The maximum strength (Point M in Figure L.2) of the dissipative connection under seismic loading 𝐹 , ,
may be calculated from Formula (L.8).

𝐹 , , =𝑘 ∙𝑘 ∙𝐹 , (L.8)

355
prEN 1998-1-2:2020 (E)

The deformation at the maximum load (Point M in Figure L.2) of the dissipative connection under seismic
loading δFmax may be calculated from Formula (L.9).

𝛿 = 𝛿 + 0.5 ∙ 𝛿 − 𝛿 (L.9)

The NC point may be obtained on the trilinear curve at the deformation δNC given by Formula (L.3).

The SD point may be obtained on the trilinear curve at the deformation value SD given by Formula (L.2).

Key
Y Yielding point.
SD Significant Damage point.
M Maximum load point.
NC Near Collapse point.
U Ultimate load point

Figure L.2 — Trilinear load-deformation mean curve of dissipative zones in timber structures using
analytical Formulas
Table L.1 — Values of the ratio kmean between the mean and the characteristic strength of dissipative
zones in static conditions, and of the ratio ky between the yield and the maximum strength of
dissipative zones
Type of dissipative connection/joint/subassembly kmean ky
High ductility semi-rigid beam-column joints with expanded tube fasteners and
1,20 0,90
Densified Veneer Wood, Carpentry connections in log structures
Dissipative connections in cross laminated timber structures, Dissipative
connections in light-frame structures, Shear walls in braced frame structures with
carpentry connections and masonry infills, Moderate ductility semi-rigid beam- 1,35 0,90
column joints, Dowel-type dissipative connections in braced frame structures, Base
connections of vertical cantilever structures

356